2017standard Tender Documents For Unit Price Contracts Vol2

Infrastructure Services Department
Standard Tender Documents

for Unit Price Contracts
Volume No. 2 of 3: Material Specifications

& Standard Detail Drawings
Fourteenth Edition, March 1, 2017

NOTICE TO MANUAL HOLDERS
___________________________________________________________________
Users are advised that this manual references Ontario Provincial Standards (OPS)
by their respective revision dates. This edition of the manual includes all applicable
revisions to the OPS’s up to and including Nov. 2016. The manual will come into
effect March 1, 2017 and remain in effect until further notice. Revisions will be
issued by the Infrastructure Services Department.
Users are cautioned that if versions of the referenced OPS published after
Nov. 2016 are used, they may conflict with the standard Special Provisions
contained in this manual. Implementation of later versions of the OPS’s shall wait
until the next revision and update of this manual as described above.
If, in the opinion of the Project Manager, it is deemed appropriate to use a more
current OPS, then the standard Special Provision for the tender item shall be
replaced with a non-standard (contract specific) Special Provision.
___________________________________________________________________
All inquiries regarding suggestions, request or comments should be directed to:
Jo-anne Moore, P. Eng.

Senior Engineer, Guidelines and Standards
City of Ottawa
Infrastructure Services
100 Constellation Drive
6th Floor
Ottawa, Ontario
K2G 6J8
613-580-2424 ext. 43975
For purchasing/revision inquiries please email standardssection@ottawa.ca
Introduction\Notice – March 1, 2017

INTRODUCTION
Mat Specifications\Introduction \Introduction – March 31, 2003

INTRODUCTION
In Volume No. 2 of the Standard Tender Documents for Unit Price Contract, the user will find
the Material Specifications and Standard Detail Drawings.
Material Specifications
The products listed within have been approved for construction of the infrastructure which the
City of Ottawa will own and operate.
Standard Detail Drawings
The purpose of Standard Detail Drawings is to illustrate the facilities to be constructed, the
required results of using a manufactured product, or the method to be followed when
constructing according to the applicable standard specification. Standard Detail Drawings
generally do not stand alone in providing direction to the Contractor.
All pertinent Standard Detail Drawings are to be added to the contract drawings. To this end,
copies of all relevant Standard Detail Drawings included in this Volume are available in
electronic format.
\Mat Specification\Introduction\Introduction – March 31, 2003 i

STANDARD TENDER DOCUMENTS
for Unit Price Contracts
Volume No. 2: Material Specification and Standard Detail Drawings
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
- Table of Content
- Watermain
- Sewer
- Traffic
- Electrical / Streetlighting
STANDARD DETAIL DRAWINGS
- Table of Content
- Sewer
- Water
- Road
- Sidewalks, Curbs and Pathway
- Traffic
- Landscaping
- Fence
- Electrical / Streetlighting
- Play Area
- Park Electrical
- Street/Park Furniture
- Signage
- Sports Field and Rink
\Mat Specification\Introduction\Table of Contents - Vol. 2 – March 31, 2014

CITY OF OTTAWA
MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS - TABLE OF CONTENTS
WATERMAIN
10 General
MW-10.1 Product Application Procedure

MW-10.2 Definitions and Abbreviations
13 Cement and Concrete
MW-13.1 Valve Boxes and Chambers
18 Pipes
MW-18.1 Watermain Pipe
19 Watermain Miscellaneous
MW-19.2 Tracing Wire

MW-19.3 Special Fittings, Couplings and Test Tees
MW-19.4 Fire Hydrants
MW-19.5 Valves
MW-19.6 Water Meters
MW-19.7 Tapping Sleeves and Repair Clamps
MW-19.8 Services
MW-19.9 Cathodic Protection
MW-19.15 Approved Water Distribution Products Listing
SEWER
13 Inground Structures
MS-13.1 Maintenance Holes and Catch Basins
14 Metal
MS-14.1 Miscellaneous Metals

MS-14.2 Frames and Covers
18 Pipes and Associated Drainage Items
MS-18.1 Sewer Pipe

MS-18.2 Backwater Valves
MS-18.3 Culvert Pipe
MS-18.4 Inlet Control Devices
\Mat. Specifications\Introduction\Table of Content for Mat. Spec – March 1, 2017

CITY OF OTTAWA
MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS - TABLE OF CONTENTS
22 Sewers Miscellaneous
MS-22.1 Adjustment Units/Rings

MS-22.2 Odour Control
MS-22.15 Approved Sewer and Miscellaneous Products
Listing
INFRASTRUCTURE MISCELLANEOUS
MS-23.1 Geotextiles
MS-23.2 Tactile Walking Surface Indicators (TWSI’s)
MS-23.3 Pothole Patching Materials
TRAFFIC
MT-24.1 Underground Traffic Control Plant

MT-24.2 Traffic Detector Loops
STREETLIGHTING/ELECTRICAL
LAS0001 Photoelectric Controllers

LBS0001 Brackets & Adapters
LCS0001 Cable
LGC0001 General Conditions
LGS0001 General Servicing - Existing System
LIS0001 Installation of Streetlight Equipment
LLS0001 HID Coach Style Luminaire
LLS0002 HID Shoebox Style Luminaire
LLS0003 HID Cobra Head Style Luminaire
LLS0005 HID Lamps & Ballasts
LLS0006 Cleaning & Relamping
LLS0007 Replacement of Luminaires
LPS0001 Concrete Poles
LPS0002 Aluminum Poles
LPS0003 Pole Nomenclature Tagging
\Mat. Specifications\Introduction\Table of Content for Mat. Spec – March 1, 2017

WATERMAIN
MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
\Mat Specifications\Watermain Mat Specifications\Title – Watermain.doc – March 1, 2002

CITY OF OTTAWA
WATERMAIN TABLE OF CONTENTS
10 GENERAL
MW-10.1 Product Application Procedure

MW-10.2 Definitions and Abbreviations
13 CEMENT AND CONCRETE
MW-13.1 Valve Boxes and Chambers
18 PIPES
MW-18.1 Watermain Pipe
19 WATERMAIN MISCELLANEOUS
MW-19.2 Tracing Wire

MW-19.3 Special Fittings, Couplings and Test
Tees
MW-19.4 Fire Hydrants
MW-19.5 Valves
MW-19.6 Water Meters
MW-19.7 Tapping Sleeves and Repair Clamps
MW-19.8 Services
MW-19.9 Cathodic Protection
MW-19.15 Approved Water Distribution Products
Listing
\Mat Specifications\Watermain Mat Specifications – Table of Content.docx –

March 1, 2017
M.S. No: MW-10.1
Date: March 2017

PRODUCT APPLICATION PROCEDURE
Page: 1 of 6
10.1.1 SCOPE
10.1.1.1 This specification includes general material requirements,

the product application process for infrastructure products
and definitions for terminology used in the material
specifications.
10.1.2 GENERAL
10.1.2.1 Materials/products incorporated into the proposed project

shall be new, and one of the products noted in the Approved
Water, Sewer or Miscellaneous Products Listings.
Material/products shall be supplied in accordance with the
latest revision of this specification and any subsequent
specification bulletins at the time of tender opening or in the
case of a Permit, the date of issue.
10.1.2.2 Substitution or alterations from the approved lists shall

constitute a deviation and to obtain approval one must refer
to Directive ISD-2011-02.
10.1.2.3 Upon request of the Contract Administrator, the Contractor

shall submit a complete listing of the materials to be used
including manufacturer’s and supplier’s names. All materials
used shall be consistent throughout the limits of the contract.
10.1.3 PRODUCT CERTIFICATION
10.1.3.1 If a product is required to be certified to a Canadian

Standard such as CSA, the certification shall be made by a
testing agency accredited for that purpose by the Standards
Council of Canada.
10.1.3.2 If a product is required to be certified to a foreign standards,

the certification shall be made by a testing agency
accredited for that purpose by that country or the Standards
Council of Canada.
10.1.3.3 Where certification of a product is required, certification

markings of the accredited testing agency must appear on
the product.
10.1.3.4 Accredited testing agencies offering free failure investigation

and testing services are preferred.
Mat Specification\Sewer Mat Specifications\MW-10.1.doc – March 1, 2017

M.S. No: MW-10.1
Date: March 2017

Page: 2 of 6
10.1.3.5 Manufacturers with ISO 9000 certification are preferred.
10.1.3.6 All chemicals and materials used in the alteration or

operation of the drinking water system that come into contact
with water within the system shall meet all applicable
standards set by both the American Water Works
Association (“AWWA”) and the American National Standards
Institute (“ANSI”) safety criteria standards NSF/60, NSF/61,
and NSF 372. In the event that these standards are updated,
the Contractor may request for the Contract Administrator to
obtain approval from Drinking Water Services to use any on
hand chemicals and materials that previously met the
applicable standards.
10.1.3.7 For a product approval to remain in place the firm certifying

the product must retain its accreditation. The product
representative must immediately notify the Standards
Engineer of any changes in certification firm or its
accreditation status.
10.1.4 PRODUCT APPLICATION PROCESS
10.1.4.1 Product representatives who wish to have their products

included in these specifications shall be required to submit a
written request for product approval in accordance with the
following requirements. The product evaluation process is
done on a case-by-case basis and may exceed a period of
one year from the date a complete request is received from
the applicant.
10.1.4.2 All products shall conform to the material specifications

contained herein. The City reserves the right to reject any
product if, in its opinion, it does not conform to the City’s
requirements.
10.1.4.3 Submission by the Applicant
A submission must be sent to the address below, with a

letter requesting that a product be approved for inclusion in
the City of Ottawa’s Approved Products Listing.
Program Manager
Quality Assurance and Standards Unit
Infrastructure Services

M.S. No: MW-10.1
Date: March 2017

Page: 3 of 6
City of Ottawa,
100 Constellation Crescent, 6th Floor,
Ottawa, Ontario
K2G 6J8
10.1.4.4 The submission shall include:
 Product name and reference number;

 Manufacturer/supplier/importer brochure or manual;
 Copies of all applicable specifications, e.g. CSA etc.;
 (Note: An affidavit/certification from the applicant, clearly
stating compliance with all provisions of the applicable
standards and this Standard will be requested prior to
recommending approval.);
 Any related test results (3rd party preferred), that have
been performed on the product(s);
 Name of municipalities and contact persons who
presently approved and use the product(s;
 Cost of product, F.O.B. Ottawa;
 Name of local supplier/distributor;
 Indicate the markings on the product that can be used by
inspection staff to identify the product in the field;
 To reduce delays, 2 copies of the complete submission to
be provided.
10.1.4.5 Documentation Review by Staff
 Each submission will be assigned an approval file

number to be used for tracking purposes.
 If the documentation review determines that the product

does not satisfy the City’s specifications, the Standards
Engineer will notify the applicant that the request for
approval has been rejected and that the application
process has been terminated.
 If the product passes the documentation review process

and appears promising, the Standards Engineer may
request samples for further investigation.
10.1.4.6 Product Testing
Sewer collection system samples shall be delivered at the

applicant’s expense to:

M.S. No: MW-10.1
Date: March 2017

Page: 4 of 6
Robert O. Pickard Environmental Centre

Wastewater & Drainage Services Division
800 Green Creek Dr.
Ottawa, Ontario
K1J 1A6
Water distribution system samples shall be delivered at the

applicant’s expense to:
City of Ottawa
Water Distribution Operations Unit
951 Clyde Avenue,
Ottawa, Ontario
K1Z 5A6
Packages shall be clearly marked “SAMPLE”.
10.1.4.6.1. The type of additional investigation will depend

upon:
 The newness of the product,

 Product specifications,
 Staff familiarity with the product.
10.1.4.6.2. The investigation may include any or all of the

following:
 In office demonstration of the product by a

product representative,
 In field application by City staff,
 Third Party laboratory testing ( at applicant’s
expense ),
 Or any other tests or demonstrations deemed
necessary by the City
10.1.4.6.3. Upon request, the applicant will be required to

arrange a demonstration at a mutually agreed
time and location, in order to inform staff of the
product and its proper installation procedures.
10.1.4.7 Notification of Approval/Rejection
 If the application is approved, the Manufacturer’s name

and product description will be added to the appropriate
M.S. No: MW-10.1
Date: March 2017

Page: 5 of 6
Approved Products Listing effective the next published

update. If the product will not be recommended for
approval the Standards Engineer will notify the
applicant.
10.1.4.8 For any rejected products, two years must elapse from the
date of rejection before a resubmission will be reviewed.
10.1.4.9 The Approved Sewer Products Listing MS-22.15 will always

take precedence over the rest of the Standard. Therefore all
products noted in the Approved Products Listings are
approved despite any possible inconsistencies between the
products and the requirements of the material specification.
10.1.5 QUALITY TESTING AFTER PRODUCT APPROVAL
10.1.5.1 Upon the request of the Contract Administrator, the

Contractor shall submit a complete listing of the products and
model numbers to be used. All products used shall be
consistent throughout the limits of the contract.
10.1.5.2 The City reserves the right to acquire random samples of any
approved products from local suppliers and/or Contractors
and have the product tested by an independent qualified
laboratory, chosen by the City.
10.1.5.3 The Standards Engineer shall have free and uninterrupted

access to work areas for the purpose of carrying out
inspection of the sewer work. The Contractor shall provide,
at no cost to the City, such labour and equipment as may be
required to enable the Standards Engineer to carry out
complete inspection and retrieval of all products. The City
will deliver any samples taken to the laboratory.
10.1.5.4 The Standards Engineer reserves the right to stop work,

order re-excavation and removal of any product used as part
of the construction work, which does not conform to these
Standards, at the Contractor’s expense.
10.1.5.5 The Standards Engineer shall have power to visit the

manufacturing facility/foundry etc for the purpose of

M.S. No: MW-10.1
Date: March 2017

Page: 6 of 6
examining manufacturing methods including materials,

quality control, labour practises and environmental protection
measures. The Standards Engineer reserves the right to
reject any products that do not meet the requirements of this
Standard and or any other applicable legislation or
international agreements. The Contractor shall give all the
assistance in his power and shall furnish any information as
may be required.
10.1.5.6 If the products meets the applicable requirements contained

within the standard and/or the original conditions of approval,
all the costs associated with testing the products will be paid
by the City.
10.1.5.7 If the product fails to meet the applicable requirements

contained within the standard and/or the original conditions
of approval, the costs associated with the testing and
subsequent corrective work shall be paid for by the
Supplier/Contractor. All rejected products shall be promptly
removed from the work site by the Contractor. The City
reserves the right to then withdraw the approval of the
product and request a resubmission for approval.
10.1.5.8 If the Manufacturer/supplier/importer makes any changes to

the design, materials or place of manufacture of an approved
product, the City reserves the right to withdraw the approval
of the product and request a resubmission for approval. The
resubmission may include some or all submission
requirements. All costs associated with any testing required
by the City to determine the acceptability of the product, will
be at the expense of the Manufacturer/Supplier/Importer.

M.S. No: MW-10.2
Date: March 2017

DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
Page: 1 of 7
10.2.1 DEFINITIONS
Definitions for terminology used in the infrastructure material

specifications are in accordance with the Modified OPS General
Conditions and as supplemented below:
Appurtenances (Associated Appurtenances)- means devices and

appliances other than the pipe, which are used in conjunction with the
pipe. This shall include fittings such as tees, crosses, bends, reducers,
caps, bedding, cathodic protection, tracer wire, thrust blocks and
retaining/restraining glands, etc.
Auxiliary valve - means the gate valve that is installed in the hydrant
lead. The auxiliary valve is used to isolate the hydrant.
Backfilling - means the operation of filling the trench with bedding,

cover and backfill material, or embedment and backfill material.
Back-up ring - see retainer ring.
Blank flange - means a flange that is not drilled but is otherwise

complete.
Blind flange - means a flange used to close the end of a pipe. It

produces a blind end which is also known as a dead end.
Bonnet - means a hydrant part that attaches to the top of the nozzle
section and encloses the support portions of the operating mechanism.
Also the detachable top half of a gate valve and a centrifugal pump.
Branch valve - see isolation valve.
Breakable flange - means a hydrant part that bolts to the mating flange
at a joint between the hydrant upper and lower barrels, which is located
immediately above the ground line. It is designed to break if stressed
severely, should a vehicle strike the hydrant.
Cast coupling - means a name given by some manufacturers to a

coupling with sleeves and end rings made of cast ductile iron. See
coupling.
Centre sleeve (centre ring, middle ring) - for couplings means a

cylinder of sufficient length to fully enclose both pipe ends.

M.S. No: MW-10.2
Date: March 2017

Page: 2 of 7
City Forces - means employees of the owner from the Operating

Divisions that are certified to perform “operator” functions with the City’s
systems as defined by the Ontario Certification Regulations.
Coupling - means an assembly consisting of a centre sleeve, gaskets,

and end rings connected with bolts and nuts or other types of threaded
fasteners. Tightening the fasteners transfers the load through the end
rings and compresses the gaskets into the space between the inside of
the centre sleeve and the outside surface of the pipe ends.
Coupling nut (tail piece) - means the nut associated with a

compression fitting.
Curb stop (curb valve) - means a valve installed in the water service
line and accessible for operation from the surface of the ground for
routinely interrupting flow through a service line.
Disinfection - means the process whereby disease causing organisms

are killed or inactivated.
Dry-barrel hydrant - means a type of hydrant which will automatically

drain the water from the barrel when the hydrant is not in use.
Drinking Water Services Branch - means a Branch of the

Environmental Services Department which operates and maintains the
water distribution system including the water purification plants, pumping
stations, reservoirs and communal well systems.
End ring (follower ring) - means a ring that provides a means of

compressing the coupling gasket(s).
Follower gland (standard gland) - means a ring used to hold the

sealing gasket into the bell end of a mechanical joint. It is different than a
retraining gland in that it does not grip the pipe.
Gasket - means an elastomeric ring that provides the pressure seal for
couplings, pipes and fittings etc.
Grey (gray) iron - means the cast ferrous material in which a major part
of the carbon content occurs as free carbon or graphite in the form of
flakes interspersed throughout the metal.
Hose bib - means the potable water valve normally located on the
exterior of a building with pipe threads for hose type connections.

M.S. No: MW-10.2
Date: March 2017

Page: 3 of 7
Hose outlet nozzle - means a hydrant outlet nozzle that has an opening
that is suitable for attachment of a fire hose.
Hydrant base - means a hydrant part that provides a lateral connection

to the hydrant lead and directs the flow vertically upward into the lower
barrel.
Hydrant lead - means the pipe that connects the hydrant to the
watermain.
In-Service (existing, live, commissioned watermain) - means any

water plant that has passed approved bacteriological testing and/or is
connected to the existing water system.
Inground structures - means a structure installed flush with the

surface such as a maintenance hole, catch basin or valve chamber.
Iron works - means all components made of cast iron type materials
such as valve boxes, chamber covers, chamber frames etc.
Isolation valves (line valves, branch valves, control valves) -

means valves installed in the system so that small sections of
forcemains may be shut off for maintenance or repair.
Line valves - see isolation valve.
Lower barrel - means a hydrant part that extends from the base to the
ground line, enclosing the stem. The lower barrel conducts water from
the base to the upper portion of the hydrant.
Main stop (corporation stop, corporation valve) - means a valve

attached to the watermain to start a service connection, which is used
to interrupt flow during installation or maintenance of the service line.
Main valve - means the valve located near the bottom of the hydrant in
the hydrant base. The main valve is forced against a seat to form a
watertight seal when the hydrant is closed.
Maintenance hole (manhole) - means a specially constructed

opening, typically in the top of a sewer, chamber or other
infrastructure, to enable access for maintenance or other purposes.
Mechanical joint - means a bolted pipe joint of the stuffing box type.
Each joint consists of the following:

M.S. No: MW-10.2
Date: March 2017

Page: 4 of 7
 A bell that is cast integrally with the pipe or fitting and

provided with an exterior flange having bolt holes or slots
and a socket with annular recesses for the sealing gasket
and the plain end of the pipe or fitting;
 Pipe or fitting plain end;
 Sealing gasket;
 Follower gland with bolt holes;
 Tee-head bolts and hexagonal nuts.
Nozzle - means a valve installed in a watermain for flushing purposes.
Nozzle section - means a hydrant part that extends upward from the
barrel and contains the outlet nozzles. It may be integral with the
upper barrel.
Outlet nozzle (male nozzle) - means a hydrant part, the outlet nozzle
is secured in the nozzle section and has an opening through which
water can be discharged. The outlet nozzle is threaded or otherwise
formed to permit attachment of a fire-hose connection.
Potable water - means water fit for human consumption.
Private sewer - means the installed sewer pipe from the street line
within the owner’s lands from which private services can be taken.
Private sewer service - means the installed sewer service pipe and
fittings that convey sewage from the building to a private sewer or the
property line.
Private watermain - means the installed water pipe from the street line
within the owner’s lands from which private services can be taken.
Private water service - means the installed water service pipe and
fittings that convey potable water from the property line or from a private
watermain to the building control valve.
Pumper outlet nozzle (pumper connection) - means a hydrant outlet

nozzle with an opening at least 89mm in diameter, suitable for the
attachment of a fire hose.
Push-on joint - means a single rubber gasket joint that is assembled by

positioning a continuous moulded rubber-ring gasket in an annular
recess in the pipe or fitting socket and forcing the plain end of the
entering pipe or fitting into the socket. means the plain end compresses
the gasket radially to form a positive seal. The gasket and the annular
M.S. No: MW-10.2
Date: March 2017

Page: 5 of 7
recess are designed and shaped so that the gasket is locked in place
against displacement.
Reducing coupling - means a coupling that uses end rings of different

sizes and a centre sleeve with ends of proper inside diameter to join
pipes of different outside diameters. The centre sleeve may be a single
piece or several pieces sized to accommodate the different pipe
diameters.
Regular frame – means a one-piece frame for an inground structure that

is not designed to follow the seasonal rise and fall of the road surface.
Restrained length - means the length of pipe that must be restrained on

each side of the focus of a thrust force.
Restraining ring - means a ring designed to grip the surface of a pipe by

various methods for the purpose of attachment to a corresponding
retainer ring or flange by threaded restraining rods or Tee-head bolts. It
is used to prevent the separation of pipe joints.
Restraining gland - similar to a restraining ring except that it also has a

gland ring built in to hold the sealing gasket. For simplicity restraining
ring and restraining gland are used synonymously in this document.
Retainer (Back-up) ring - means a ring designed to shoulder against

the bell of a pipe and be attached to a corresponding restrainer ring to
prevent the separation of a pipe joint.
Rubber gasketed insert - means a fitting that inserts into a non-

pressurized concrete sewer pipe to provide for the connection of a
service pipe.
Self-level frame – means a two-piece frame consisting of a frame and a

guide frame where the frame is designed to follow the seasonal rise and
fall of the road surface. The guide frame stays stationary on top of the
inground structure.
Service saddle - means a fitting that attaches around a pipe to provide

for attachment of a main stop.
Set screw retainer gland - means an older style restraining ring utilizing
set screws for ductile iron pipe with mechanical joints.
Sewer service - means a sewer service connections of any size, tapped

or teed from the sewer to the property line.
M.S. No: MW-10.2
Date: March 2017

Page: 6 of 7
Tapping valves - means valves that have been installed into an existing
watermain. These valves will normally function as isolation valves.
Temporary sewer service - means the installed sewer pipe from a

building to the property line on behalf of the owner, for a specified
temporary period of time.
Temporary water service - means the installed water pipe from a

watermain or fire hydrant lateral to the property line and from there to the
building on behalf of the owner, for a specified temporary period of time.
Transition coupling - means a coupling used to join pipe of the same

nominal size, but of differing outside diameters. Differences in pipe
outside diameters are accommodated by specially sized gaskets and
when necessary, specially sized end ring.
Wastewater & Drainage Services Division - means a Division of the

Public Works and Services Department which operates and maintains
the sewage collection and treatment systems.
Upper Barrel - means a hydrant part that extends from the lower barrel
at the ground line to the nozzle section, enclosing the stem.
Water Distribution Unit - means a Unit within the Drinking Water

Services Branch which operates and maintains the watermains, valves
and hydrants etc.
Watermain - means a water pipe of any size located in a public right-of-

way or easement to the benefit of the City.
Water plant - means watermains, services, hydrants, valves, valve

boxes, valve chambers, curb stops and associated appurtenances. It
does not refer to the water purification facilities.
Water service - means a water service connections of any size, tapped

or teed from the watermain to the property line.
10.2.2 ABREVIATIONS
The following abbreviations supplement those in the Modified OPS

General Conditions and will be used throughout these specifications:
ACI American Concrete Institute

ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
AWWA American Water Works Association
M.S. No: MW-10.2
Date: March 2017

Page: 7 of 7
CSPI Canadian Steel Pipe Institute

FM Factory Mutual Research Corporation
OCPA Ontario Concrete Pipe Association
OHBDC Ontario Highway Bridge Design Code
WEF Water Environment Federation

M.S. No: MW-13.1
Date: March 2017
Page: 1 of 4
VALVE BOXES AND CHAMBERS
13.1.1 SCOPE
13.1.1.1 This specification covers the product requirements for watermain valve
boxes and valve chambers.
13.1.2 DEFINITIONS
13.1.2.1 Definitions can be found in Material Specification MW-10.2.
13.1.3 VALVE BOXES

13.1.3.1 The valve boxes shall be 130mm screw type with standard dimensions
conforming to Ottawa drawings 1493-B, 1493-M2 and detail drawing
W24. Assembly components shall therefore be interchangeable
between approved manufacturers.
13.1.3.2 The valve boxes shall be of good quality grey iron.
13.1.3.3 The valve box castings shall have a tensile strength of not less than
138 MPa.
13.1.3.4 The valve boxes shall be solid with clean surfaces, free from scales,
bumps, flows, blow holes, or other defects.
13.1.3.5 After cleaning and inspection, the valve boxes shall be thoroughly
coated with an approved casting paint.
13.1.3.6 The valve box assembly shall consist of a No.6 base, bottom section,
extension, top section, road leveller and either a regular cap or a self
level cap.
13.1.3.7 The length of the valve box assembly from the top of the connecting
pipe to the ground line shall be 2.4 metres.
13.1.4 PRECAST CONCRETE VALVE CHAMBER COMPONENTS

13.1.4.1 OPSS 1351 shall apply except where superseded by these material
specifications.
13.1.4.2 Components of precast reinforced structures shall be designed and

constructed in accordance with OPSS 1351. Reinforcing bars and
mesh to have 25mm cover. Clearance around pipe at chamber wall to
be 25mm minimum.
13.1.4.3 Aluminium surfaces in contact with or cast into concrete shall have
polyethylene anchor insulating sleeves or be coated in conformance
with OPSD 404.020.
Mat Specifications\Watermain Mat Specifications\MW-13.1 – March 1, 2017

M.S. No: MW-13.1
Date: March 2017
Page: 2 of 4
13.1.4.4 Lifting hooks shall be removed and lifting holes shall be made
waterproof.
13.1.4.5 For chambers with concrete floors, all joints between chamber sections
shall be sealed as per MS-13.1 and with approved products as per
MS-22.15. No gaps shall be left at joints.
13.1.4.6 For chambers with bedding for the floor i.e. W2, W3 and W4, the
annular space between the chamber wall and pipe can be left
unsealed. All remaining joints between chamber sections shall be
sealed with approved sealant material see MS-13.1 and MS-22.15. No
gaps shall be left at joints.
13.1.4.7 For tapping valve connections to mains 600mm dia. and greater, base
sections shall be separate from the wall section.
13.1.4.8 Valve boxes and 100mm sleeves shall be installed above valve
operators.
13.1.4.9 Chambers with concrete floors shall have sumps. Sumps shall be a
minimum 300mm x 300mm x 100mm deep. Chamber floors to slope
to sump.
13.1.4.10 Top sections shall be insulated with 50mm of polystyrene board

cemented on the outside of the walls and roof. Refer to MW-19.15 for
approved products.
13.1.4.11 The sizes and dimensions of the required components of precast

reinforced structures shall be in accordance with the detail drawings as
specified herein. Large chambers may be supplied in more than two
sections.
13.1.4.12 Where high sulphate-resistant concrete is required by the contract,

type HS or HSb Portland cement/Blended hydraulic cement shall be
used.
13.1.4.13 Where 400mm flanged pipe access openings are specified on the top
of a pipe provide in the chamber roof centred above each such
opening a 750 nominal diameter concrete pipe bell joint cast into the
top of the chamber facing upwards c/w a matching gasketed
plug/cover installed. Plug/cover to come with a swift lift anchor
installed for future removal.

M.S. No: MW-13.1
Date: March 2017
Page: 3 of 4
13.1.4.14 Adjustment Sections Under 1320mm In Length:
13.1.4.14.1. Shall be the closest to the actual depth. (e.g. use

150mm section vs. 3 - 50mm sections.)
13.1.4.14.2. To ensure adjustment sections are interchangeable

with existing chambers, all dimensions and joint details
shall match W9, tolerance of + or - 5mm. Corresponding
adjustment section joint details and dimensions for the
precast valve chamber tops shall also match.
13.1.4.15 Adjustment Sections 1320mm Or Greater In Length:
13.1.4.15.1. For deep chambers where the adjustment section

would normally be 1320mm or greater use 1200mm taper
tops and riser sections in accordance with OPSD 701.030.
Our concrete suppliers are able to substitute 1200mm
openings in our standard chamber tops with normal 762mm
openings.
13.1.4.16 For the remaining chamber components the approved chambers may
have dimensions that vary from those shown on the drawings. The
space related dimensions shown on the drawings in general are
minimum dimensions. If the space related dimensions are greater than
those shown then the product is likely the same as the approved
design. If the chamber component has space related dimensions less
than those shown on the drawing then a problem likely exists.
13.1.4.17 Chambers to be designed for depth of cover ranging from surface to

4m cover for typical chambers and 4.01 to 6m cover for deep
chambers. Separate approvals are required for each range.
13.1.4.18 Chamber designs for approval shall require the submission of detailed
shop drawings, signed and sealed by a structural engineer, indicating
all dimensions and reinforcing details. Due to the significant time and
cost required to conduct a review, Contractors are strongly encouraged
to use pre-qualified products as noted in MW-19.15.
13.1.4.19 Branch valve chambers R3 and R4 being installed on an existing

watermain shall also be supplied with separate base, top and wall
sections to provide for continuous chamber walls around the pipe.
M.S. No: MW-13.1
Date: March 2017
Page: 4 of 4
Sections shall have cut outs provided to allow the wall section to be
installed over the existing pipe. See W11.1
13.1.5 VALVE CHAMBER FRAMES AND COVERS
13.1.5.1 See MS-14.2
13.1.6 STEPS
13.1.6.1 Steps shall be used for valve chambers. Tee handles are not required.
See MS-13.1
13.1.7 LANDINGS
13.1.7.1 Landings in accordance with MS-13.1 are required for depths greater
than 5m. In order to accommodate the landings the normal 762mm
openings in the chamber tops and associated 762mm W9 adjustment
sections will have to be replaced with 1200mm openings and OPSD
701.010 riser sections.
13.1.8 GEOTEXTILE MATERIAL
13.1.8.1 See 23.1
13.1.9 NON-SHRINK GROUT
13.1.9.1 See MS-13.1
13.1.10 ADJUSTMENT UNITS/RINGS
13.1.10.1 See MS-22.1
13.1.11 BACKFILL AROUND VALVE CHAMBERS
13.1.11.1 For backfill requirements for valve chambers see detail drawing R2.

M.S. No: MW-18.1
Date: March 2014
Page: 1 of 6
WATERMAIN PIPE
18.1.1 SCOPE
18.1.1.1 This specification covers the product requirements for

watermain pipe.
18.1.1.2 OPSS 701 shall apply except where superseded by these

special provisions.
18.1.2 DEFINITIONS
18.1.3 GENERAL
18.1.3.1 Nitrile Gaskets must be available for all gasketed watermain

pipe. Nitrile Gaskets should be permanently marked or colour
coded to enable easy identification in the field long after
installation.
18.1.3.2 Lubricants for gasketed joints shall be NSF 61 compliant and be

formulated to prevent turbidity, bacterial growth, taste, and/or
odour problems in new watermains.
18.1.3.3 All watermain products in contact with potable water shall be

NSF 61 compliant.
18.1.4 DUCTILE IRON PIPE
18.1.4.1 Ductile iron pipe shall be a minimum Special Thickness Class

52 (AWWA C-150) in sizes 100, 150, 200, 250, 300 and 400mm
and manufactured to AWWA C-151 supplied with standard
thickness cement lining (AWWA C-104). Ductile iron pipe shall
be supplied with push-on joints as per AWWA C-111, complete
with gaskets and bonding straps for maintaining electrical
continuity.
18.1.4.2 For conductivity purposes for cathodic protection, service line

thawing and pipe locator devices, the pipe shall be available
with bolted bonding straps. The tabs shall be connected with a
copper strap which shall be 180mm long and bolted to the tabs
with 8mm x 25mm silicon bronze bolts which are able to be
tightened to a minimum of 20 Nm torque.
Mat Specifications\Watermain Mat Specifications\MW-18.1 - March 31, 2014

M.S. No: MW-18.1
Date: March 2014
Page: 2 of 6
WATERMAIN PIPE
18.1.4.3 When it is not possible (due to tab damage or when repairing a

break) to use the above method, conductivity is to be achieved
using a thermite welded bonding cable or copper strips as
specified below:
18.1.4.3.1 Bonding cables and copper strips shall be thermite

welded across the pipe or fitting joint in accordance
with the method described in F-7020.
18.1.4.3.2 Bonding cables shall be AWG #1/0-19 strand copper

wire with TWU or RWU-90 black insulation having a
minimum length of 450 mm.
18.1.4.3.3 Copper bonding strips shall be capable of carrying

600 amps for an extended period without
overheating. Strips to be US Pipe Electro-Bond
Copper Strips or equivalent.
18.1.5 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE
18.1.5.1 PVC pipe in sizes 100, 150, 200, 250 and 300mm shall be
Pressure Class 150, DR 18, manufactured to AWWA C-900 and
CSA B137.3 standards and shall have the cast iron outside
diameter dimensions, blue in colour and supplied complete with
gaskets.
18.1.5.1 PVC pipe, sized 400mm, shall be a DR18, manufactured to

AWWA C-905 and CSA B137.3 standards, shall have the cast
iron outside diameter dimensions, be blue in colour and
supplied complete with gaskets.
18.1.6 CONCRETE PRESSURE PIPE
18.1.6.1 Concrete pressure pipe shall be manufactured in accordance

with AWWA C-301 for pre-stressed concrete cylinder pipe and
AWWA C-303 for pre-tensioned concrete cylinder pipe.
Concrete pressure pipe is permissible for all watermains 400mm
diameter.

M.S. No: MW-18.1
Date: March 2014
Page: 3 of 6
WATERMAIN PIPE
18.1.6.2 The concrete pressure pipe shall be rated for a minimum

working pressure of 1034 kPa and a minimum change in flow
velocity of 0.6 m/sec under maximum operating conditions.
18.1.6.3 Flanges shall be Class E manufactured in accordance with

ANSI/AWWA C-207 having a pressure rating of 1895 kPa.
18.1.6.4 All concrete watermains shall include bonding straps to provide

electrical continuity.
18.1.6.4.1 All pipe sections, including all bevel and bend fittings
shall have two (2) electrical bonding connections at
each joint of the pipe.
18.1.6.4.2 The connectors shall be comprised of factory

installed bolts and terminals. The bolts connectors
shall be bronze with lock washer and the terminal
shall be a copper plated threaded shaft welded to the
steel bell and spigot components of the pipe.
18.1.6.4.3 The bolt connectors shall be installed on the upper

portion of the pipe at the 10:30h (45 degree) and the
1:30h (45 degree) positions.
18.1.6.4.4 Two (2) connector wires shall be factory supplied for

each joint. The connector wire shall be TWU or
RWU #4 / 7 strand copper grounding wire with
copper compression connector at each end and of
sufficient length to connect to the bolt terminals. The
copper compression connectors shall be Thomas &
Bett F4-38 or equal.
18.1.6.5 All concrete pipe shall include three (3) probes or pipe coupons
which will be installed at specified corrosion monitoring test
stations.
18.1.6.6 Shop drawings of the pipe assembly shall be provided to the

contract administrator for review prior to manufacturing.

M.S. No: MW-18.1
Date: March 2014
Page: 4 of 6
WATERMAIN PIPE
18.1.7 HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE PIPE
18.1.7.1 HDPE pipe and fittings 100mm through 400mm for special
water distribution applications shall be minimum Pressure Class
160, DR 11, Ductile-Iron sized (DIOD), conforming to AWWA
C906, CSA B137.1, ASTM F-714, ASTM D-3350 and ASTM D-
3035.
The pipe shall have blue coloured striping identification in

accordance with AWWA C906.
18.1.8 END-COVERS FOR WATERMAINS
18.1.8.1 Approved pipe up to and including 600mm diameter is to arrive

on site with factory installed end-covers on both pipe ends and a
“tamper evident seal” on the bell end only.
18.1.8.2 Tamper evident seals will display the manufacturers name

and/or logo.
Seals will straddle the cap and/or tape and the pipe. Removal
of the cover should render the tamper evident seal unusable
either by breaking the seal or by leaving a message such as
“Void” on the pipe. An ink stamp of the corporate logo along the
edge of the tape will also be considered.
18.1.8.3 End-covers must be fastened sufficiently to withstand the

stresses caused by wind during shipment. End-covers shall
prevent small animals and debris from entering the pipe
however in order to compensate for heat and pressure build-up
due to sunlight and weather, an air or waterproof seal is not
required.
18.1.8.4 For pipe of diameters greater than 600mm, which can be

entered to clean, end-covers are optional.
18.1.8.5 End-covers shall be installed at the factory and will be one of

the following:
• White, clear or black plastic discs or coned shaped plugs

fastened by tape.
• Closed-cell polypropylene foam (Charna-Caps).

M.S. No: MW-18.1
Date: March 2014
Page: 5 of 6
WATERMAIN PIPE
• Polyethylene pipe plugs (Mfg by Taylor Made).

• Black poly bags fastened by tape.
• Non-reusable heat-shrink plastic or specifically designed
non-reusable foam plugs with punch-out centres.
18.1.8.6 Tamper evident seals are not required for non-reusable heat
shrink plastic covers or foam plugs with punch-out centres.
18.1.8.7 Re-use of covers by manufacturers is acceptable provided they

are clean.
18.1.8.8 Due to their short length and accessibility for field cleaning, end-
covers are not required for fittings and valves.
18.1.9 FIRE HOSE FOR TEMPORARY SERVICES
18.1.9.1 Hose lining must not transfer odour, taste or any substances to
the water which result in a condition that would exceed the
Ontario Drinking Water Quality Standards.
18.1.9.2 Hose to be 64mm in diameter, 15.2m in length and come

complete with aluminium couplings with threads meeting CSA
standards. Hose to be rated to withstand 1035 kPa.
18.1.9.3 Fire hose jacket to be abrasion resistant, either double jacket or

specially coated and be capable of being driven over by
vehicles periodically during the day without short term effects.
18.1.10 RIGID HOSE FOR TEMPORARY SERVICES
18.1.10.1 Pipe shall be made of class 12454-B PVC material in

accordance with ASTM D 1784. Material to have a minimum
hydrostatic design stress of 14 Mpa (2000 psi). PVC to be
formulated with impact modifiers, heat stabilizers and ultraviolet
inhibitors.
18.1.10.2 Pipe extrusion to meet or exceed all requirements of ASTM D

2241. Joints and couplings to conform with ASTM D 3139. O-
Rings shall meet ASTM F 477. O-Ring material to be
polyisoprene (IR).

M.S. No: MW-18.1
Date: March 2014
Page: 6 of 6
WATERMAIN PIPE
18.1.11 PAVEMENT INSULATION FOR WATERMAINS AND SEWERS
18.1.11.1 Insulation for use in roads over pipe trenches shall:
• be type Extruded Polystyrene Foam Insulation Boards

(XPS) in 600 x 2400 x 50mm size;
• meet the requirements of OPSS 1605;
• Grade A (275 kPa compressive strength shall meet ASTM
C578 Type VI;
• Grade B (400 kPa compressive strength shall meet ASTM
C578 Type VII.

M.S. No: MW-19.2
Date: March 2007
TRACING WIRE
Page: 1 of 1
19.2.1 SCOPE
19.2.1.1 This specification covers the product requirements for tracing wire system
components.
19.2.2 DEFINITIONS
19.2.3 TRACING WIRE
19.2.3.1 Tracing wire to be TWU or RWU, 10 gauge, 7 strands or more, copper, 60°C
or higher, 600V or approved equivalent.
19.2.4 C-TAPS
19.2.4.1 C-Tap to be approved by CSA and to be sized to connect together two

tracing wires as specified above.
19.2.5 VINYL MASTIC
19.2.5.1 Vinyl mastic to come in rolls or pads and to be made of self fusing, rubber-
based insulating compound, laminated to an all-weather grade vinyl (PVC)
backing. Product must be able to mold easily around difficult shapes and be
able to be applied in all-weather conditions. Mastic must protect against
water, salts and sewage and be suitable for direct burial applications.
19.2.6 ALL-WEATHER CORROSION PROTECTION TAPES
19.2.6.1 Tapes to be rugged, pressure-sensitive, PVC-based, minimum .25mm

thickness. Tapes must be able to be applied in all weather conditions. Tapes
must protect against water, salts and sewage and be suitable for direct burial
applications.
19.2.7 DIRECT BURY LUGS
19.2.7.1 Direct bury lugs to be one piece waterproof and corrosion proof for direct
bury applications and be suitable for tracing wire applications with wires
from #14 to 10 AWG and up to 50 volts. Design shall permit the
installation without cutting the main line. Housing to be high impact plastic
with user-friendly design to prevent cuts or handling discomfort.
19.2.7.2 Housing to be prefilled with Ultrasil 1015 grease or approved equivalent with
a minmum 100 year life expectancy. Grease is also to have an operating
temperature range of -45ºC to 204ºC. Grease is to remain grease-like and
pliable down to -45ºC and is to retain its grease like consistency up to 200ºC.

M.S. No: MW-19.3
DATE: March 2017
Page: 1 of 9
SPECIAL FITTINGS, COUPLINGS AND TEST TEES
19.3.1 SCOPE
19.3.1.1 This specification covers the product requirements for special
fittings and couplings for watermain pipe.
19.3.2 DEFINITIONS
19.3.3 GENERAL
19.3.3.1 All fittings and couplings utilizing mechanical joints or push-on
joints must have available nitrile gaskets for use in contaminated
soils.
19.3.4 MECHANICAL JOINTS (M.J.)

19.3.4.1 For all references within this specification to “Mechanical Joint”
or “MJ” the dimensions of the bell, socket, plain end, gland and
gasket shall conform to current AWWA C-111 standard.
19.3.4.2 The T-head bolts and hexagonal nuts for mechanical joint
pipe and fittings shall comply with the requirements of AWWA
C-111. They shall be manufactured from high strength, low
alloy steel per ASTM A325. The internal and external threads
shall conform to ANSI/ASME B1.2.
19.3.4.3 Gaskets supplied for mechanical joints shall be standard

mechanical joint type gaskets made of vulcanized synthetic
rubber. Gaskets of alternative designs that exceed AWWA C-
111 standards will be considered for approval.
19.3.4.4 Follower glands shall comply with the requirements of AWWA

C-111.
See S.P. F-7010 for restrictions on use.
19.3.5 FLANGED JOINTS

19.3.5.1 Unless stated otherwise all references within this specification to
“Flanges, Flanged”or “Flanged Ends” etc. the flanges shall
conform to AWWA C-110 standard.
19.3.5.2 Unless stated otherwise all bolts and nuts for flanged joints shall
be hexagon with heavy, 25mm nuts, all of low carbon steel
conforming to AWWA C-111 standards and with the chemical
and mechanical requirements of ASTM A307.

M.S. No: MW-19.3
DATE: March 2017
Page: 2 of 9
19.3.6 DUCTILE IRON FITTINGS

19.3.6.1 Ductile iron fittings shall have mechanical joint fittings and/or
push-on joint fittings.
19.3.6.2 Ductile iron fittings shall be “short body” per AWWA C-153
standard. The fittings shall be cement-lined per AWWA C-104
standard.
Testing and Certification
19.3.6.3 The manufacturer shall, upon request, furnish to the contract

administrator a notarized certification that the inspection and all
the specified tests have been made and that the results comply
with the requirements of AWWA C-153.
19.3.6.4 Upon request by the contract administrator, the manufacturer

shall furnish results of the transverse or tensile tests.
19.3.7 STRAIGHT COUPLINGS FOR NORMAL CONNECTIONS
Application
19.3.7.1 Couplings shall be used to connect a pipe of one nominal size
to a pipe of the same or different nominal size. Couplings are
available for cast iron, ductile iron, PVC or concrete pressure
pipe watermains. Note; the couplings do not provide restraint
against axial movement.
Construction
19.3.7.2 Bolted, sleeve-type couplings shall be supplied in accordance
with AWWA C-219.
19.3.7.3 The couplings shall be capable of withstanding a hydrostatic

test pressure of 1035 kPa.
19.3.7.4 The couplings shall consist of four main elements namely a

centre sleeve, gaskets and two end rings connected with bolts
and nuts. In the case of 150mm to 130mm cast reducing
couplings, three gaskets shall be provided.

M.S. No: MW-19.3
DATE: March 2017
Page: 3 of 9
Centre Sleeve
19.3.7.5 For steel couplings the centre sleeve shall be of carbon steel as
per ASTM A36/A53/A512 having a minimum yield strength of
207 MPa.
19.3.7.6 The ends shall have a smooth inside taper for uniform gasket
seating.
19.3.7.7 For straight couplings, the centre sleeve shall be of cast ductile
iron meeting the minimum requirements of ASTM A536, grade
65-45-12. The minimum length of the centre sleeve shall be as
follows:
TABLE MW19.3 - 1: TABLE OF MINIMUM SLEEVE

LENGTHS
Pipe Diameter Minimum Sleeve Length
For Straight Couplings
100 mm 178 mm
150 mm 178 mm
200 mm 178 mm
250 mm 274 mm
300 mm 274 mm
400 mm 274 mm
600 mm and larger 250 mm
End Rings
19.3.7.8 The end rings (follower rings) shall be ductile iron as per ASTM
A536 (300mm or smaller) or heavy rolled steel as per ANSI
C1020/1021 (400mm or larger).
Coupling Bolts and Nuts

19.3.7.9 The bolts and nuts shall be high strength, low alloy steel per
AWWA C111 and ASTM A325 with heavy, 25mm hexagon nuts
to comply with the dimensions and tolerances per ANSI/AWWA
C-111/A21.11.
Coupling Gasket
19.3.7.10 Grade 30 specially compounded rubber (SBR) recommended
for water, salt solution, mild acids and bases - temperature

M.S. No: MW-19.3
DATE: March 2017
Page: 4 of 9
range: - 40° C to + 65° C, Nitrile (NBR) shall be used in areas

contaminated with hydrocarbons.
Finish
19.3.7.11Shop finish enamelled or NSF-61 Fusion bonded epoxy coating.
Closures - Concrete Pressure Pipe

19.3.7.12 A split sleeve welded joint may be used in lieu of a coupling.
Field welding shall be completed in accordance with AWWA C-
206. Testing for leaks shall be made by hydrostatic testing of
the entire pipeline. Alternative non-destructive testing may be
requested by the contract administrator at his discretion.
Sizes
19.3.7.13 The couplings are required for the following nominal pipe sizes
and shall fit the following O.D. ranges:
75 to 100mm - Small Pipe End - 95mm

- Large Pipe End - 122mm
130 to 150mm - To be provided with 3 gaskets:
- Small pipe end - 147mm
- Small pipe end - 156mm
- Large Pipe end - 175mm
100mm - 122 to 130mm
150mm - 175 to 183mm
200mm - 230 to 240mm
250mm - 281 to 290mm
300mm - 335 to 343mm
400mm - 442 to 452mm
600mm or larger - per manufacturers specifications
380 to 400mm - Small Pipe End 417 to 427mm

Large Pipe End 442 to 452mm
NOTE: Lower range is to fit new cast iron, ductile iron or PVC
pipes while upper range is for old pit cast pipes

M.S. No: MW-19.3
DATE: March 2017
Page: 5 of 9
19.3.8 STRAIGHT COUPLINGS FOR FAST HIGH DEFLECTION

CONNECTIONS
Application
19.3.8.1 Couplings shall be used to connect a pipe of one nominal size
to a pipe of the same or different nominal sizes and with above
normal deflections.
Construction
19.3.8.2 Couplings shall meet or exceed AWWA C-219.
19.3.8.3 The couplings shall be capable of withstanding a hydrostatic

test pressure of 1035 kPa.
19.3.8.4 The couplings shall be of a design with a sufficient range and

construction so that no dismantling, altering or reassembly is
required. The coupling shall provide up to 4 of deflection per
end for a total of 8.
19.3.8.5 The couplings shall be capable of joining pipes with diameter

differences of 300mm or greater.
19.3.8.6 The body and follower rings shall be of carbon steel.
19.3.8.7 The coupling shall be able to handle pipe end gaps of up to 190
mm.
19.3.8.8 The coupling shall have built in joint restraint.
Coupling Nuts, Bolts and Spanner

19.3.8.9 The nuts, bolts and spanner shall be made 304 stainless steel.
Nuts and bolts to be supplied with anti galling compound.
Coupling Gasket
19.3.8.10 The gasket shall be the hydraulically assisted type. Gasket to
be NSF-61 registered chloramines resistant EPDM gasket
material.
Finish
19.3.8.11 NSF-61 approved Fusion bonded epoxy coating.

M.S. No: MW-19.3
DATE: March 2017
Page: 6 of 9
19.3.9 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) FITTINGS

19.3.9.1 PVC fittings, 100mm to 200mm shall conform to AWWA C-907
and be certified to CSA B137.2. NOTE: PVC cross fittings are
presently not available.
19.3.10 RESTRAINING AND RETAINING RINGS - GENERAL

19.3.10.1 The restraining devices shall have a working pressure rating to
the full rated pressure of the installed pipe 1035 kPa, with a
minimum 2:1 safety factor.
19.3.10.2 Rings suitable for use with both PVC and ductile iron are
preferred.
19.3.10.3 Restraining rings for mechanical joint fittings shall incorporate a

built-in gland ring.
19.3.10.4 Rings should utilize restraining bolts with heads that are
designed to break off at a predetermined torque during
installation.
19.3.10.5 Rings utilizing wedge action gripping mechanisms that increase

its resistance as the pressure increases are preferred.
19.3.10.6 The restraining mechanism shall not have any concentrated

pressure points that could crack the pipe or the lining.
19.3.10.7 To grip the pipe, the restraining ring shall utilize one of the
following methods:
 A series of serrations, formed by machining (not cast), on

the inside diameter of the restraint to lock onto the pipe
when the clamping bolts are tightened. Where the direction
of installation is not obvious, unidirectional gripping designs
must have the direction of installation clearly indicated.
 Thrust restraint wedges. A sufficient number of wedges

must be provided to prevent distortion of the pipe. Wedges
contoured to match the O.D. of the pipe are preferred over
flat wedges.
 Wedge action 360° grip-ring.

M.S. No: MW-19.3
DATE: March 2017
Page: 7 of 9
Material
19.3.10.8Restraining devices and break–away bolts shall be
manufactured from high quality ductile iron, per ASTM A536,
Grade 65-45-12.
19.3.10.9Connecting rods and nuts shall be of high strength low alloy

material meeting AWWA C-111.
19.3.11 RESTRAINING AND RETAINING RINGS - PVC

Application
19.3.11.1The rings shall be designed for use on AWWA C-900 standard
pressure Class 150, DR18 PVC pipe (100mm to 300mm sizes),
AWWA C-909 standard pressure class 150, CIOD PVC pipe
(100mm to 300mm sizes), AWWA C-905 standard pressure
Class 150, DR18 PVC pipe (400mm size) and on AWWA C-907
PVC pressure fittings (100mm to 200mm sizes).
19.3.11.2Restraining and retaining rings are used for the following PVC
pipe applications:
 Restraining glands for M.J. fittings;

 Split restraining glands for existing M.J. fittings;
 Split restraining and retaining rings for PVC AWWA C-907
fittings;
 Restraining and retaining rings for pipe bells;
 Split restraining rings for PVC to DI and CI coupling
connections.
Testing
19.3.11.3All PVC restraining devices shall meet or exceed the
requirements of UNI-B-13-92, Recommended Performance
Specifications for Restraint Devices on PVC Pipe, and shall be
UL listed and Factory Mutual approved.
PVC Gland Packs for City Supply Tenders

19.3.11.4Restraining glands for M.J. fittings - To come complete with
gland, gasket, nuts and bolts in a single sealed package.

M.S. No: MW-19.3
DATE: March 2017
Page: 8 of 9
19.3.11.5Split restraining rings for PVC to DI and CI coupling connections

- To come complete with gland, gasket, nuts and bolts (half long
and half short) in a single sealed package.
19.3.12 RESTRAINING AND RETAINING RINGS - DUCTILE IRON

Application
19.3.12.1Dimensions of the ring shall be such that it can be used with a
standardized mechanical joint bell and tee head bolts per
AWWA C-111 and AWWA C-153.
19.3.12.2Restraining and retaining rings are used for the following DI pipe
applications:
 Restraining glands for M.J. fittings;

 Set-screw restraining glands for M.J. fittings (Staff use only);
 Split restraining glands for existing M.J. fittings;
 Restraining and retaining rings for pipe bells.
Testing
19.3.12.3All DI restraining devices shall be UL listed and Factory Mutual
approved.
DI Gland Packs for City Supply Tenders

19.3.12.4Restraining glands for M.J. fittings - To come complete with
gland, plain tip gasket, nuts and T bolts in a single sealed
package.
19.3.13 TEST TEES

General
19.3.13.1The testing tee shall be of carbon steel as per ASTM A53 having
a minimum yield of 207 MPa and shall have a minimum wall
thickness of 8mm.

M.S. No: MW-19.3
DATE: March 2017
Page: 9 of 9
Dimensions
19.3.13.2Dimensions for the tees shall conform to the following:
ID X (Min) Y
75mm 150mm 230mm

100mm 200mm 300mm
150mm 300mm 450mm
Gaskets
19.3.13.3Flat, all rubber gaskets shall be supplied with each test tee.
Connections
19.3.13.4The main casing connections shall be flanges conforming to
ANSI B16.1. The 50mm testing tee shall have a national pipe
thread (NPT) complete with cap.
Coating
19.3.13.5The testing tee shall have protective coating.
Warranty
19.3.13.6The supplier will guarantee all testing tees for one year after date
of shipment.

M.S. No: MW-19.4
Date: March 2017
Page: 1 of 6
FIRE HYDRANTS
19.4.1 SCOPE
19.4.1.1 This specification covers the product requirements for special
fittings and couplings for watermain pipe.
19.4.2 DEFINITIONS
19.4.3 FIRE HYDRANTS

19.4.3.1 Application
19.4.3.1.1. All fire hydrants supplied shall be in accordance with
current ANSI/AWWA C-502 Standard for Dry-Barrel
Fire Hydrants except where these specifications
differ in which case these specifications shall apply.
19.4.3.2 Dimensions
19.4.3.2.1. The top of the operating nut shall be at least 635mm
above the face of the breakable flange. The centre
line of the lowest nozzle shall be in the range of 405
to 510mm above the face of the breakable flange.
19.4.3.3 Type
19.4.3.3.1. The hydrant shall be dry-barrel, compression, open
against pressure, dry top, three-way type with two
64mm hose outlet nozzles and one 127mm pumper
outlet nozzle.
19.4.3.4 Features:
The hydrant shall have the following features:
 Operating components shall be made of durable corrosion
proof materials that will not seize and prevent the
dependable operation of the hydrant. Materials such as
brass and stainless steel or approved equivalent will be
accepted. Plated steel components will not be accepted.
 The bonnet shall incorporate a weather shield.
 The upper and lower barrels shall be joined with a
breakable flange to allow removal of the upper barrel
without excavation.
 Upper and lower operating stems shall be made of 304
stainless steel.
 A frangible stem coupling shall hold the stems together by
means of holes drilled through the centre of the stem and
\Mat Specifications\Watermain Mat Specifications \MW-19.4 – March 1, 2017

M.S. No: MW-19.4
Date: March 2017
Page: 2 of 6
FIRE HYDRANTS
coupling sides. 304 Stainless steel bolts or clevis pins

shall fasten the pieces together.
19.4.3.5 Upper and Lower Barrels

19.4.3.5.1. The barrels shall be ductile or cast iron c/w breakable
flange and breakable bolts. The hydrant shall be
supplied with a drain valve such that the drain valve
shall close as the main valve starts to open.
19.4.3.6 Pressure Rating

19.4.3.6.1. The hydrant shall be designed for a test pressure of
1035 kPa minimum.
19.4.3.7 Main Valve

19.4.3.7.1. The nominal diameter of the valve opening shall be
not less than 127mm.
19.4.3.8 Inlet Connection

19.4.3.8.1. The hydrant base inlet connection shall be for
mechanical joint pipe. The bell at the hydrant base
shall be 152mm, with dimensions and tolerances per
AWWA C-111. The mechanical joint and hydrant
base configuration shall be manufactured to accept
the retaining/restraining devices for both AWWA C-
150, CL 52 ductile iron pipe and AWWA C-900,
DR18 PVC hydrant leads.
19.4.3.9 Bury Length

19.4.3.9.1. The bury length from the bottom of the hydrant lead
to ground level as per W19:
City Designation Length
Type "S" hydrants 1980mm

Type "A" hydrants 2130mm
Type "B" hydrants 2280mm
Type "C" hydrants 2440mm
Type "D" hydrants 2590mm
Type "E" hydrants 2700mm
Type "F" hydrants 2850mm

M.S. No: MW-19.4
Date: March 2017
Page: 3 of 6
FIRE HYDRANTS
Note: Only one 150mm extension is permitted to allow for

proper ground clearance.
19.4.3.10 Hose Outlet Nozzle

19.4.3.10.1. The two 64mm hose outlet nozzles must
conform to the ULC standard S-513, current edition.
19.4.3.11 Outlet Nozzles

19.4.3.11.1. Hose outlet nozzles to conform to the following
dimensions:
Item Dimension
Nominal inside diameter 64mm
Pitch 5.08mm
Major Dia. Max. 79.38mm
Major Dia. Min. 78.58mm
Pitch Dia. Max. 76.08mm
Pitch Dia. Min. 74.68mm
Minor Dia. Max. 72.78mm
Threads per cm 2
Depth of Threads 3.30mm
Inside diameter of hose outlet 60mm
nozzle
Outside diameter of hose 81mm
outlet nozzle
19.4.3.11.2. Pumper outlet nozzle to conform to the

following dimensions:
Item Dimension
Inside diameter 119mm
Outside diameter 144mm
Root of thread for outside 135mm
Number of threads per cm 1.5/cm
The pumper outlet nozzle is to be compatible with 65mm
nozzle.
19.4.3.12 Outlet-Nozzle Cap

M.S. No: MW-19.4
Date: March 2017
Page: 4 of 6
FIRE HYDRANTS
19.4.3.12.1. Outlet nozzle caps to conform to the following

dimensions:
Item Dimension
Pitch 5.08
Major Dia. Max. 79.77mm
Major Dia. Min. 76.87mm
Pitch Dia. Max. 76.47mm
Pitch Dia. Min. 73.96mm
Minor Dia. Max. 71.90mm
Threads per cm 2
Depth of Thread 3.3mm
Chains or cables are not to be installed on the outlet-nozzle
cap.
In the lug below the outlet nozzle provide a 10mm hole or
equivalent for attaching an identification tag.
19.4.3.13 Operating Nut

19.4.3.13.1. The operating nut shall be 32 x 32mm.
19.4.3.14 Direction of Operation

19.4.3.14.1. The direction of operating nut to open shall be
counter-clockwise (left hand opening).
19.4.3.15 Protective Coating
Protective coating systems will be pre-approved on a case-by-

case basis. In general systems of the following components will
be considered:
For the upper barrel, bonnet and the top 460mm of the lower
barrel below the breakable flange:
Option 1
Zinc Rich Primer Coat: ZNP-300, Wet Film

Build: 5.5 mils (1 coat), Dry Film Build: 3.2 mils
Corrosion Resistance Epoxy Primer: CRE-

321, WFB 6.5 mils (1 coat) DFB: 3.3 mils.

M.S. No: MW-19.4
Date: March 2017
Page: 5 of 6
FIRE HYDRANTS
Finish Coat: Polyurethane DTM, AUE-370

WFB: 7.5 mils (1 coat) DFB: 3.8 mils.
All the above coatings by PPG Commercial

Coatings
Option 2
Fusion Bonded Epoxy:
19.4.3.15.1. Colours: The upper barrel, bonnet and the top

460mm of the lower barrel below the
breakable shall be gloss yellow (Tint TBD) for
the finish and epoxy primer coats. Bonnets
shall be gloss Blue (Tint TBD) for the finish
and epoxy primer coats.
19.4.3.15.2. These coatings shall be factory applied in

strict conformity to the Manufacturer’s coating
specifications.
19.4.3.15.3. The exterior of the remaining lower barrel and

hydrant base shall be coated with a protective
bituminous or epoxy coating.
19.4.3.15.4. Hydrants on private property shall have a

factory finished coat painted in red with a
white bonnet.
19.4.3.16 Bushings
19.4.3.16.1. Needle bearings/throat bearings are being
eliminated from all hydrants in the system.
Delrin Rings or equivalent are the replacement
and all hydrants shall be so supplied or as a
minimum, conversion kits shall be supplied
with the hydrants for conversion in the field by
the contractor.
19.4.3.17 Markers
19.4.3.16.1. Hydrant markers shall be designed to mount
on the hose nozzle of the hydrant.

M.S. No: MW-19.4
Date: March 2017
Page: 6 of 6
FIRE HYDRANTS
19.4.3.16.2. Hydrant markers shall be yellow in colour and

1219 mm in length.
19.4.3.16.3. Hydrant markers shall be constructed of a

Polycarbonate material or approved equivalent.
This material shall be flexible in temperatures
down to -40°C.
19.4.3.16.4. Hydrant markers shall be fade resistant and

resistant to UV damage.
19.4.3.18 Accessories
19.4.3.18.1. All hydrant shall be supplied with one
“restraining gland pack” separately sealed in
its package. The gland pack shall consist of
one approved 150mm ductile iron restraining
gland ring, six high strength, low alloy steel
bolts and nuts and one all rubber gasket.
19.4.3.19 Service Warranty

19.4.3.19.1. The supplier will guarantee in writing that all
replacement parts will be available for 15
years following the award of this tender and
that a representative will be available to the
City to provide technical and factual data as
required.
19.4.3.20 Testing
19.4.3.20.1. Hydrants shall be tested in conformance with
all AWWA, ULC and FM standards.

M.S. No: MW-19.5
Date: March 2013
Page: 1 of 10
VALVES
19.5.1 SCOPE
19.5.1.1 This specification covers the product requirements for water
valves.
19.5.2 DEFINITIONS
19.5.3 VALVE ORIENTATION

19.5.3.1 All gate valves including tapping valves shall be installed in the
vertical position. Butterfly valves shall be installed in the
horizontal position.
19.5.4 OPERATING CONDITIONS

19.5.4.1 Valves shall be designed for operating conditions as per the
current AWWA C-500, C-504 and/or C-509 specifications.
19.5.5 DIRECTION OF OPERATION

19.5.5.1 The following applies to all gate and butterfly valves, including the
air and drain valves in the water distribution system. For all valves
with or without actuators, the direction of operation of the
operating nut shall be open right (clockwise to open).
19.5.6 OPERATING NUT

19.5.6.1 The operating nut shall be 51 mm x 51 mm as per current AWWA
C-500 and shall be secured by a pin or key.
19.5.6.2 A stem extension from the operating nut to the surface shall be
provided when the depth of cover is greater than 2.4 m. All stem
extensions shall be solid 32 mm square bar material.
19.5.6.3 Valves 400 mm and larger shall have a handwheel in addition to

the operating nut.
19.5.7 CORROSION RESISTANT COATINGS

1.7.1 All valves shall be supplied with either a two-part spray epoxy
coating or a fusion bonded epoxy coating, factory applied to both
the exterior and interior surfaces of the valve to inhibit corrosion,
suitable for continuous submerged service as per current AWWA
C-550. The thickness of the coating shall be 12 mils. The interior
and exterior surfaces shall be cleaned as per current NACE No.
2/SSPC-SP 10 prior to the coating application.
Mat Specifications\Watermain Mat Specifications MW-19.5 – March 31, 2013

M.S. No: MW-19.5
Date: March 2013
Page: 2 of 10
VALVES
19.5.7.2 For valves larger than 600 mm, the flange faces shall not be
coated to ensure proper gasket seating.
19.5.7.3 The manufacturer shall provide proof that the coating products
are certified as suitable for contact with drinking water by an
accredited certification organization in accordance with
ANSI/NSF Standard 61, Drinking Water Systems Components-
Health effects. Manufacturers shall state the certification file
numbers of the accredited organization. The water supply
contains chlorine or chloramines in accordance with the Safe
Drinking Water Act. The manufacturer shall prove the coating
materials are designed to be immersed in a potable water system
that requires chemical disinfection.
19.5.8 NUTS AND BOLTS

19.5.8.1 Nuts and bolts for gate valve bodies/bonnets, actuator bodies and
gland rings to be type 304 or 316 stainless steel.
19.5.8.2 All gaskets, other hardware and type 304 or 316 stainless steel
flange bolts and nuts are to be provided as per the contract
documents for valves with flanged ends.
19.5.9 SUBMITTALS
The following submittals are required for all butterfly valves 600mm
and larger and shall be submitted to the Contract Administrator for
review prior to acceptance of the valve for production and/or delivery
on any watermain construction project or tendered contract.
• Certified drawings and materials specifications for valves and

actuators sufficient to verify compliance with this specification;
• Test records and certificates required by AWWA and Section
19.5.11.13;
• Operational instructions including the number of turns to close
and torque requirements.
• Proof of a service warranty in accordance with Section 19.5.9
• For valves 900 mm and larger, all submittals shall be signed and
stamped by a Professional Engineer prior to submission to the
Contract Administrator.
These submission requirements do not preclude a manufacturer or

supplier from the City’s product approval process as outlined in the
General Specification, MW19.1 and the requirement to be noted on

M.S. No: MW-19.5
Date: March 2013
Page: 3 of 10
VALVES
the Approved Water Distribution Products Listing, MW-19.15 prior to

use with the City’s water distribution system.
19.5.10 SERVICE WARRANTY

19.5.10.1 All products must carry a full 100% parts and labour warranty.
The Supplier will repair or replace, at the Supplier’s expense, at
the Site, any part of the equipment, which, within 2 years of
commissioning, is found to be defective in workmanship or in
material.
19.5.10.2 The manufacturer will provide proof that their valve has been
manufactured in North America for at least 5 years and guarantee
in writing that all replacement parts will be available for 5 years
following the approval of their valve, and that a representative will
be available to provide technical and factual data as required.
19.5.11 GATE VALVES

19.5.11.1 Gate valves up to 300 mm for line, branch, isolation, auxiliary, air,
drain, tapping and meter installations shall be Resilient-Seated
Gate Valves that meet or exceed AWWA C-509.
19.5.11.2 Gate valves shall be cast iron or ductile iron body, with non-rising
stems and an operating nut positioned for vertical operation. The
stem seal shall be of the standard O-ring type.
19.5.11.3 For 400mm and larger watermains manual air and drain valves
shall be 150mm gate valves with handwheels instead of an
operating nut. Both ends shall be flanged. Attach on one side a
reducing flange, tapped with a 100mm FIP thread with an ABS
plug installed to keep debris out.
19.5.11.4 All gate valves shall follow the test procedures in AWWA C-509
and C500 – Latest Revision. The manufacturer shall provide to
the City an Affidavit of Compliance indicating that all the tests
specified have been performed and all test requirements have
been met.
19.5.11.5 Factory certified leakage results meeting current AWWA C-500

requirements to be provided for each tapping valve 400 mm or
larger.
19.5.11.6 Gate valves shall be epoxy coated as per section 19.5.6.

M.S. No: MW-19.5
Date: March 2013
Page: 4 of 10
VALVES
19.5.11.7 Tapping Valves

19.5.11.7.1. Tapping valves in sizes 100 to 300mm shall
be resilient-seated gate valves meeting C-509.
19.5.11.7.2. For sizes 400 and greater tapping valves shall

be metal-seated gate valves with bypass
valves meeting AWWA C-500 or resilient-
seated valves without bypass valves that meet
AWWA C-509 or C-515.
19.5.11.7.3. Tapping valves for 100 to 400mm DI and PVC

pipe shall have one end mechanical joint, in
accordance with AWWA C-111 and one end
flanged in accordance with AWWA C-110.
19.5.11.7.4. Tapping valves 400mm and larger for concrete

pressure pipe shall be flanged.
19.5.11.7.5. Bolts, nuts, gaskets and other hardware for

both the M.J. and flanged ends shall be
provided with the valves.
19.5.12 BUTTERFLY VALVES

19.5.12.1 Line, branch and isolation valves sizes 400 to 1200 mm will be
Rubber Seated Butterfly Valves that meet or exceed AWWA C-
504 latest revision.
19.5.12.2 For butterfly valves over 1200 mm, the valves shall be designed
to meet specific operating conditions.
19.5.12.3 Butterfly valves and actuators shall be epoxy coated as per

section 19.5.6.
19.5.12.4 Valves shall be class 150B ANSI/AWWA C-504, bubble-tight at

rated pressures for bi-directional conditions and be satisfactory
for applications involving valve operation after long periods of
inactivity regardless of valve size.
19.5.12.5 Valves shall have mechanical joint ends for ductile iron and PVC
pipe. Valves shall have flanged ends for pre-stressed concrete
pipe and for all pipe 600 mm and larger.

M.S. No: MW-19.5
Date: March 2013
Page: 5 of 10
VALVES
19.5.12.6 All valves 600 mm and larger, shall incorporate lifting lug which
comprise of tapped holes and hoist rings correctly sized for valves
and actuator weights, strategically located to facilitate lifting and
installation of the valve and actuator as a single unit.
19.5.12.7 Valve Bodies

19.5.12.7.1. Valve bodies shall be ductile iron ASTM A536,
short body design or shall be cast iron ASTM
A126, class B and have narrow body design.
Wafer or lug wafer body valves are not
acceptable.
19.5.12.7.2. Flanged bodies shall be designed to ANSI

B16.5, Class 150 - Steel Pipe Flanges and
Flanged Fittings.
19.5.12.7.3. Valve flanges, including dimensions and

drilling, to be as per ANSI 16.1.
19.5.12.7.4. Valve flanges shall be flat faced, parallel and

concentric.
19.5.12.7.5. For valves 900 mm and larger, spot face the

boltholes on the back of all flanges and flanged
fittings so that the spot faced surface is parallel
to the flange face.
19.5.12.7.6. Body thickness shall be in strict accordance

with AWWA-C504 latest revision.
19.5.12.7.7. Inside diameters shall be equal to the stated

nominal diameter. Body stops are not
acceptable.

M.S. No: MW-19.5
Date: March 2013
Page: 6 of 10
VALVES
19.5.12.8 Valve Discs

19.5.12.8.1. Shall be constructed of ductile iron ASTM A536
or for 600 mm and larger cast iron to ASTM A-
126 Class B. Disc edges to be 316 stainless
steel with a dielectric material between the iron
disc and 316 stainless edge materials.
19.5.12.8.2. Shall be solid and shall incorporate a flow

through design for valves 600 mm and larger.
For smaller diameters a flow through design is
optional.
19.5.12.8.3. All surfaces shall be capable of visual

inspection.
19.5.12.8.4. Disc and shaft connections shall be made with

mechanically secured by solid 316 stainless
steel pins through the operating shaft. The
manufacturer shall provide head loss analysis
upon request.
19.5.12.8.5. The allowable angular disposition of the disc

shall be 1.5 degrees off centre without leakage.
19.5.12.8.6. All valves will be shipped with valve discs open

2-3 degrees during long periods of inactivity or
delivery.
19.5.12.9 Valve Seats

19.5.12.9.1. Shall be of a synthetic rubber compound and
be suitable for contact with chloraminated
water.
19.5.12.9.2. Valve seats shall be mechanically retained and

epoxy bonded to the valve body without metal
retaining rings, segments, screws or hardware
of any kind.
19.5.12.9.3. Valve seats applied to the disc will not be

accepted.

M.S. No: MW-19.5
Date: March 2013
Page: 7 of 10
VALVES
19.5.12.9.4. Shall be field adjustable bi-directionally around

the full 360 degree circumference.
19.5.12.9.5. Valve seats shall be field replaceable without

the dismantling of the valve or actuator, or
removal from the pipe. Seat bonding will be
tested per AWWA C-504 and ASTM D429 as
per methods applicable to the valve sizes
specified.
19.5.12.10 Shaft Seals

19.5.12.10.1. Shall be of the self adjusting chevron “V”-type
and any parts exposed to fluids shall be type
304 stainless steel.
19.5.12.10.2. Shall be secured independently of the actuator

so that the actuator can be removed while the
valve is under pressure.
19.5.12.10.3. For valves 600 mm and larger, the shaft seals

are to be field replaceable without removal of
the valve shaft.
19.5.12.11 Valve Shafts
19.5.12.11.1. Shall be 304 or 316 ground and polished

stainless steel. Shaft diameters shall satisfy
the requirements of AWWA C-504 latest
revision. Carbon steel shafts with stainless
journals are not acceptable.
19.5.12.11.2. Shall be capable of horizontal mounting.
19.5.12.11.3. Valve bearings shall be sleeve type non-

metallic non-corrosive self-lubricating bearings.
Bearing loads shall not exceed 1/5 of the
compressible strength of the bearing or shaft
material.
19.5.12.11.4. For all two-piece valve shafts, the lower valve

shaft shall incorporate a dual thrust bearing to
permit valve positioning in a 360 degree
circumference.

M.S. No: MW-19.5
Date: March 2013
Page: 8 of 10
VALVES
19.5.12.11.5. Valves 600 mm and larger shall incorporate a

factory designed and installed locking device.
The device shall incorporate locking pins for
positioning the disc in either the full open or full
closed position. Each devise will be designed
to with stand the maximum torque in the open
or closed position and the maximum output
torque of the actuator, whichever is greater.
19.5.12.12 Manual Actuators

19.5.12.12.1. Manual actuators shall conform to AWWA C-
504 latest revision. All housings and covers
shall be ductile iron. Internal components shall
be zinc plated. Lower housings shall
incorporate pressure relief grooves combined
with non-metallic non-corrosive bearings.
19.5.12.12.2. All butterfly valves shall be furnished with a

heavy-duty actuator, suitable for direct burial
and long-term operation in submerged valve
chambers.
19.5.12.12.3. The actuator shall be equipped with an

operating nut mounted for vertical operation.
19.5.12.12.4. All actuators shall be sized to operate with a

maximum rim pull of 356 N on handwheels and
a maximum input torque of 203 N-m on a 51 x
51 mm square AWWA operating nuts.
19.5.12.12.5. All actuators shall be supplied with a removable

combination nut and handwheel. The
maximum handwheel diameter shall be
600 mm.
19.5.12.12.6. All actuators shall be designed to produce the

necessary torque to seat and un-seat the valve
based on bi-directional flow with a differential
pressure equal to the specified maximum
working pressure applied to either face of the
disc at the maximum stated velocity.

M.S. No: MW-19.5
Date: March 2013
Page: 9 of 10
VALVES
19.5.12.12.7. All actuators shall be designed to produce

sufficient torque exceeding the maximum
dynamic valve torque requirements based on
bi-directional flow on differential pressures
equal to the maximum specified working
pressure.
19.5.12.12.8. All actuators shall be equipped with stop

limiting devices to prevent over-travel of the
disc in the open and closed positions as per
AWWA C-504 latest revision. All actuator
components shall be able to withstand an input
torque of 400 N-m.
19.5.12.12.9. All actuator operating nuts shall be open right

(turn clockwise to open the valve). It must be
clearly indicated on the actuator casing the
direction to open.
19.5.12.12.10. All actuators shall be packed with lubricant

suitable for potable water applications.
19.5.12.13 Testing
19.5.12.13.1. All butterfly valves shall be tested in
accordance with AWWA C-504 – Latest
Revision. In addition to standard tests for
valves 600 mm and larger other required tests
include, but are not necessarily limited to,
• actuator torque tests,
• proof-of-design tests,
• production tests and
• applicable ASTM or other standard tests for
materials specified or required herein.
All of the test records and certificates shall be
available to the City prior to delivery. All
actuators shall be mounted by the valve
manufacturer and pressure/leakage tested bi-
directionally in North America with the
actuators assembled to the valve. All valves
shipped to the City shall include the test
certificates.

M.S. No: MW-19.5
Date: March 2013
Page: 10 of 10
VALVES
19.5.12.13.2.2. The City reserves the right to witness or elect

a third party to represent the City to witness
factory testing.
19.5.12.13.2.3. Witnessing of any testing that has to be
repeated due to necessary rework shall be
paid for at the Contractor’s expense.

M.S. No: MW-19.6
Date: March 2016
Page: 1 of 10
WATER METERS
19.6.1 SCOPE
19.6.1.1 This specification covers the product requirements for water

meters.
19.6.2 DEFINITIONS
19.6.3 WATER METERS
19.6.3.1 General
19.6.3.1.1. All water meters and associated components in

contact with potable water shall be NSF 61
compliant.
19.6.3.1.2. The water meters are for horizontal installation and

shall conform to standards:
• AWWA C-700 Positive Displacement Type

• AWWA C-701 Turbine Type
• AWWA C-702 Compound Type
• AWWA C-703 Fire Service Turbine Type
19.6.3.1.3. Meters shall be equipped with a register, digitally

encoding the meter reading and the remote
receptacle.
19.6.3.2 Main Casing
19.6.3.2.1. Main casing for all meters shall be of a copper alloy

containing not less than 75% copper.
19.6.3.3 Registers
19.6.3.3.1. All registers shall be a fully sealed type with the size,
model and date of manufacture stamped on the
faceplate. A break-away screw or tamper resistant
device shall be used to secure the register to the
main casing.
Mat Specifications\Watermain Mat Specifications\MW-19.6–March 1, 2016

M.S. No: MW-19.6
Date: March 2016
Page: 2 of 10
WATER METERS
19.6.3.4 Registration
3
19.6.3.4.1. All meters shall be read in cubic meters (m ). The

register is to be encoded in digital format and shall
have a minimum of 8 remotely readable digits
compatible with the radio-based endpoint.

M.S. No: MW-19.6
Date: March 2016
Page: 3 of 10
WATER METERS
19.6.3.4.2. Meters sized 15mm, 15mm x 20 mm, 20mm, 25mm, &

40mm shall be a minimum 1 litre read and shall be
encoded to read a minimum of 3 digits to the right of
decimal and 5 digits to the left of the decimal place.
19.6.3.4.3. Meters sized 50mm to 150mm shall be a minimum

10 litre read and shall be encoded to read a
minimum of 2 digits to the right of the decimal and 6
digits to the left of the decimal place.
19.6.3.4.4. Meters sized 200mm to 250mm shall be a minimum

of 100 litre read and shall be encoded to read a
minimum of 1 digit to the right of the decimal and a
minimum of 7 digits to the left of the decimal place.
19.6.3.5 Lens
19.6.3.5.1. The lens shall be of unbreakable clear plastic or

heat treated glass securely held in place.
19.6.3.6 Gear Trains
19.6.3.6.1. Intermediate gear trains shall be located in the

register compartments and the piston oscillations or
disc nutations shall be transmitted to the register by
magnetic couplings.
19.6.3.7 Frost Bottoms
19.6.3.7.1. Meters of sizes 25mm and under shall have frost

bottoms made of plastic or other non-ferrous
material. They shall be of such design that they will
yield or break under normal freezing conditions to
minimize damage to other parts of meter.
19.6.3.8 Serial Number
19.6.3.8.1. The serial number must be permanently stamped on

the top of the inlet or outlet for meters 25mm or
smaller, or on top of the flange for meters 40mm and

M.S. No: MW-19.6
Date: March 2016
Page: 4 of 10
WATER METERS
larger. Otherwise, serial numbers must be stamped

on both sides of the meter body.
19.6.3.9 Markings
19.6.3.9.1. The size, model and direction of flow through the

meters shall be marked permanently on the outer
cases of meters.
19.6.3.10 Remote Receptacles
19.6.3.10.1. All meters shall be supplied with remote

receptacles that are digitally encoded by the
meter register.
19.6.3.10.2. The remote receptacle wire shall be 4

conductor, 22 AWG solid copper, each
polyethylene insulated and colour coded
black, red, green and yellow. The conductors
shall be covered by a grey P.V.C. jacket.
19.6.3.11 50mm (2") Magnetic Drive Compound Meters
19.6.3.11.1. The 50mm magnetic drive compound meters

shall be equipped with a flanged coupling
adapter to obtain a face-to-face dimension of
432mm as in the case of a positive
displacement meter.
19.6.3.12 Fire Service Meter Assembly
19.6.3.12.1. Fire service meter assemblies shall consist of

the following elements:
• ULC approved magnetic turbine meter

• ULC approved strainer
• detector check valve (per meter size)
• 50mm by-pass piping
• two 50mm gate valves, (one each side of P.D.
meter)
• 50mm check valve

M.S. No: MW-19.6
Date: March 2016
Page: 5 of 10
WATER METERS
• 50mm positive displacement meter with flanged

ends
19.6.3.13 Calibration
19.6.3.13.1. Turbine and compound meters are to be so

constructed that calibration can be done on
site without removing the meter from the line.
19.6.3.14 Accuracy Certificate
19.6.3.14.1. All meters are to be tested for accuracy of

registration in accordance with AWWA standard
series C-700 and amendments. The
manufacturer shall furnish with each shipment a
certificate stating that each meter has been
tested and complies with the accuracy and
capacity requirements of the applicable AWWA
standard.

M.S. No: MW-19.6
Date: March 2016
Page: 6 of 10
WATER METERS
19.6.3.15 Accuracy Test Reports
19.6.3.15.1. Upon delivery of all meters 75mm or greater, a

copy of each meter’s accuracy test report shall
be provided to the City.
19.6.3.16 Preliminary Inspection
19.6.3.16.1. The tender may require the supply of samples

of each meter type proposed for inspection.
Meters received in this way will be returned
after such inspection has been completed.
19.6.3.17 Service
19.6.3.17.1. Meter replacement parts listing, complete with

current prices, and a regional representative
to provide technical and factual information,
are to be available.
19.6.3.18 Warranty - Registers
19.6.3.18.1. Sealed registers be guaranteed against

defects for a minimum of ten years from the
date of shipment.
19.6.3.19 Warranty - Meter Accuracy
19.6.3.19.1. Positive displacement water meters sized 15 x

20 mm, 20 mm, and 25 mm water meters are
warranted to meet or exceed accuracy
standards of the AWWA C700 for 5 years from
the date of shipment
19.6.3.19.2. Positive displacement water meters sized 40

mm and 50 mm water meters are warranted to
meet or exceed accuracy standards of AWWA
C700 for 2 years from the date of shipment

M.S. No: MW-19.6
Date: March 2016
Page: 7 of 10
WATER METERS
19.6.3.19.3. Turbine and compound water meters will meet

or exceed AWWA accuracy standards for a
period of one year
19.6.3.20 Affidavit
19.6.3.20.1. The manufacturer shall, upon request, furnish

to the Standards Engineer an affidavit stating
that all meters furnished comply with all
applicable requirements of the AWWA standard
and amendments, and specifications of City.
19.6.3.21 Meter Couplings
19.6.3.21.1. Meter couplings to have soldered type outlet

connections.
19.6.3.22 Meter Flanges
19.6.3.22.1. Meter flanges to be bronze and have slotted

bolt holes.
19.6.4 STRAINERS
19.6.4.1 Strainers – General
19.6.4.1.1. The strainer shall be of bronze or cast iron with a

stainless steel or bronze strainer plate. The strainer
shall have an effective straining area at least double
that of the watermain casing inlet.
19.6.4.1.2. The strainers for fire service meter assemblies shall

be sized to meet U.L.C. standards.
19.6.4.2 Pressure Rating
19.6.4.2.1. The pressure rating for the strainers shall be

minimum 1114 kPa and each strainer shall be

M.S. No: MW-19.6
Date: March 2016
Page: 8 of 10
WATER METERS
hydrostatically tested a 2228 kPa before shipment

to assure hydraulic integrity.
19.6.4.2.2. The strainers for fire service meter assemblies shall

be pressure rated and tested to meet U.L.C.
standards.
19.6.4.3 Bolts and Nuts
19.6.4.3.1. Bolts and nuts shall be of high strength, low alloy

material as per ASTM A325 and with ANSI/AWWA
C-111/A21.11 Standards.
19.6.4.4 Gaskets
19.6.4.4.1. Flat, all rubber gaskets shall be supplied with each

strainer.
19.6.4.5 Connections
19.6.4.5.1. Main casing connections shall be flanged. The

flanges shall be of the round type, faced and drilled,
and shall conform to ANSI B16.1 cast iron flange
Class 125.
19.6.4.6 Coating
19.6.4.6.1. The strainer shall have a protective coating.
19.6.4.7 Markings
19.6.4.7.1. The size, model and direction of flow through the

strainer shall be marked permanently on the outer
cases of the strainers.
19.6.4.8 Warranty
19.6.4.8.1. The supplier will guarantee all strainers for one (1)
year after date of shipment.
19.6.5 SPECIAL FITTINGS FOR METER INSTALLATION

M.S. No: MW-19.6
Date: March 2016
Page: 9 of 10
WATER METERS
19.6.5.1 Flanged Reducers
19.6.5.1.1. Flanged reducers shall meet the requirements of the

current AWWA C-110. They shall be grey-iron or
ductile iron and rated for 1725 kPa working
pressure.
19.6.5.1.2. The joints shall be flanged and shall conform to

Class 125 ANSI B16.1.
19.6.5.1.3. The reducers shall be concentric.
19.6.5.1.4. Reducers shall be cement-lined.
19.6.5.1.5. Upon request by the purchaser, the manufacturer

shall furnish results of the transverse or tensile tests.
19.6.5.1.6. All gaskets, bolts and nuts shall be supplied with the
reducers.
19.6.5.1.7. The gasket shall be rubber, either ring or full face,

3.2mm thick.
19.6.5.1.8. The bolts and nuts shall be carbon steel conforming

to ANSI B18.2.1.
19.6.5.2 Companion Flanges
19.6.5.2.1. Companion flanges shall be grey-iron or ductile iron

conforming to Class 125 ANSI B16.1.
19.6.5.2.2. The companion flanges shall consist of three

elements: flange, gasket, and bolts and nuts.
19.6.5.2.3. The gasket shall be rubber, either ring or full face,

3.2mm thick.
19.6.5.2.4. The bolts and nuts shall be carbon steel conforming

to ANSI B18.2.1.

M.S. No: MW-19.6
Date: March 2016
Page: 10 of 10
WATER METERS
19.6.5.2.5. The outlet shall have a female national pipe thread

(NPT).
19.6.5.3 Flange Adaptors
19.6.5.3.1. The flange adaptors shall be for cast iron or ductile

O.D. for pipe 100 to 200mm inclusive and steel O.D.
for 75mm pipe.
19.6.5.3.2. Flange adaptors shall consist of three main

elements: a flange, gasket and a set of set screws.
The adaptor shall be capable of withstanding awater
working pressure of 1725 kPa and a hydrostatic test
of 5175 kPa without leakage.
19.6.5.3.3. The flange shall be of ductile iron as per ASTM

A-536. The drilling and facing shall be in
accordance with ANSI B16.1 for class 125.
19.6.5.3.4. Adaptor gasket shall be vulcanized natural or

vulcanized synthetic rubber for current ANSI/AWWA
C-111.
19.6.5.3.5. The set screws shall be of steel (as per ANSI 4140),
or ductile iron heat-treated and zinc-plated and shall
have a standard square head.
19.6.5.4 Pressure Reducing Valves
19.6.5.4.1. Pressure reducing valves for residential use shall:
• Meet CSA B356

• shall have soldered double union connections for
the fittings/connections for the inlet and outlet of
the PRV, to allow for ease of PRV replacement
• have an integral stainless steel strainer
• be serviceable in line
• have a renewable seat module
• have a bronze body

M.S. No: MW-19.7
Date: March 2013
Page: 1 of 3
TAPPING SLEEVES AND REPAIR CLAMPS
19.7.1 SCOPE
19.7.1.1 This specification covers the product requirements for watermain

tapping sleeves and repair clamps.
19.7.2 DEFINITIONS
19.7.3 TAPPING SLEEVES
19.7.3.1.1. The tapping sleeves are for a lateral connection on an
existing cast iron, ductile iron, PVC and concrete
watermain, under 1035 kPa test pressure with a drilling
machine using full-size shell cutters.
19.7.3.2 Description
19.7.3.2.1. The tapping sleeve shall consist of two sections of heavy
welded carbon steel which bolt together around the pipe
and seal against the gasket.
19.7.3.2.2. For concrete pressure pipe, the tapping sleeve shall consist
of seal plate complete with grout holes, air displacement
hole and a series of steel straps placed around the pipe to
secure the tapping saddle in position.
19.7.3.3 Outlet
19.7.3.3.1. The outlet flange shall be recessed flat faced to
accommodate tapping valves requirements in accordance
with AWWA C-207. The outlet half shall straddle the centre
line of pipe and shall have a 19mm test plug at the 12
o’clock position to ensure positive seal before tapping.
19.7.3.4 Bolts
19.7.3.4.1. Bolts, washers, nuts, studs and straps shall be type 304
stainless steel complete with an anti-galling compound.
19.7.3.5 Body
19.7.3.5.1. Body shall be carbon steel ASTM A285 Grade C, ASTM
A36 or CSA G40.21 300W with epoxy coating or approved
equivalent. All stainless steel with equivalent strength will
also be considered.

M.S. No: MW-19.7
Date: March 2013
Page: 2 of 3
19.7.3.6 Accessories
19.7.3.6.1. All gaskets, bolts and nuts for the sleeve are to be supplied
with the fitting.
19.7.3.7 Gasket
19.7.3.7.1. Gasket shall be roll-resistant, self-energizing grade 60
concave wedge gasket or equivalent.
19.7.3.7.2. Grout gasket shall be mechanically fastened or glued.

Tape is not acceptable.
19.7.3.8 Welding
19.7.3.8.1. All welding to meet CWB standards.
19.7.4 MATERIALS - REPAIR CLAMPS
19.7.4.1.1. The repair clamps shall be for cast iron, ductile iron or PVC
watermains.
19.7.4.2 Construction
19.7.4.2.1. Repair clamps shall consist of a single stainless steel band
for nominal pipe sizes 150mm and larger and of a double
band for nominal pipe sizes 75mm, 100mm and 125mm
and shall consist of four main elements: a sealing material
liner, a metal back-up strip, a clamping device and a
current conducting device joining the ends of the pipe to be
repaired. The clamps shall be capable of withstanding a
static pressure of 550 kPa and a shock loading of 1035 kPa
in the repaired joint.
19.7.4.3 Sealer
19.7.4.3.1. The sealing material shall be of a corrugated resilient
neoprene rubber running the full length and width of the
sleeve and shall be made in tapered overlap. The rubber
must be firmly bonded to the backing strip.
19.7.4.4 Metal Sleeve

19.7.4.4.1. The metal back-up strip shall be of stainless steel, type
304. The length of the whole clamp shall be 380mm
minimum. The lug design of the double band repair clamp
shall include a drop in bolt to eliminate loose parts.

M.S. No: MW-19.7
Date: March 2013
Page: 3 of 3
Clamping Device
19.7.4.4.2. The clamping device shall consist of a single or double row

of type 304 stainless steel bolts and hexagonal nuts per
current ANSI/AWWA C-111 standards, securely fastened to
one half of the stainless steel lug. Whether single or
double rows of bolts are used, the length of the bolts shall
be such that it shall not be necessary to disengage them
from their nuts or taps in order to assemble the sleeve on
the job. Washers shall be stainless steel.
19.7.4.5 Electrical Conductor

19.7.4.5.1. A current carrying device is not required. Electrical
continuity will be achieved via a CAD welded bonding cable
across the clamp/break.
19.7.4.6 Sizes
19.7.4.6.1. The repair clamps are required for the following nominal
pipe sizes and shall fit the following O.D. ranges:
Nominal Pipe O.D. Range Minimum

Size Clamp Length
75mm 89 to 109mm 400mm

100mm 121 to 141mm 400mm
125mm 132 to 152mm 400mm
150mm 174 to 183mm 400mm
200mm 229 to 238mm 400mm
250mm 281 to 290mm 400mm
300mm 333 to 342mm 400mm
400mm 434 to 465mm 400mm

M.S. No: MW-19.8
Date: March 2015
Page: 1 of 7
SERVICES
19.8.1 SCOPE
watermain services.
19.8.2 GENERAL
19.8.2.1 All service components in contact with potable water shall be
NSF-61 compliant. All brass components therefore shall be of
the low/no lead variety.
19.8.3 DEFINITIONS
19.8.4 COPPER TUBING

19.8.4.1 All copper piping shall conform to ASTM B88 Type "K" soft. The
pipe shall be a seamless copper tubing cold drawn to size and
furnished with the proper bending temper. It shall be made of
completely deoxidized copper 99.9% pure.
19.8.4.2 The weights and dimensions of copper tubing shall be in

accordance with AWWA C-800 and the following table:
TABLE MW19.8 - 1: COPPER TUBING SIZE AND WEIGHTS
Nominal Outside Inside Wall Weight

Size Diameter Diameter Thickness
mm mm mm mm kg/m
16 19.1 16.5 1.2 .62
19 22.2 18.9 1.7 .95
25 28.6 25.3s 1.7 1.25
38 41.3 37.6 1.8 2.02
50 54.0 49.8 2.1 3.07
19.8.4.3 Packing
19.8.4.3.1. All copper tubing in sizes 16mm to 38mm is to be
supplied in 20m lengths and packed in one or two
\Mat Specifications\Watermain Mat Specifications\MW-19.8.doc–March 2, 2015

M.S. No: MW-19.8
Date: March 2015
Page: 2 of 7
SERVICES
and not more than three coils per carton. Copper in

50mm diameter to be supplied in 6m lengths.
19.8.4.4 Copper Quality

19.8.4.4.1. Tubing shall be of the best quality. Each length of
copper tubing shall be uniform in bore and thickness
of metal throughout. It shall be free from cracks,
seams, slivers, scales, grooves and other inner or
surface defects. Pipe of hard or inferior metal will
not be accepted. All copper tubing shall be third
party certified.
19.8.5 PEX TUBING

19.8.5.1 PEX service tubing shall conform to AWWA C904, ASTM F876,
F877, F2023, CSA B137.5, NSF 14 and 61. The degree of
cross linking for PEX pipe shall be not less than 80% when
tested according to ASTM D2765, Method B. PEX pipe shall
have CSA/NSF approved pressure rating of 160psi @
23°C/73.2°F
19.8.5.2 The outside diameter of the pipe shall be copper tube size
(CTS) and must have a standard dimension ratio (SDR) of 9.
PEX pipe shall be manufactured in sky blue.
19.8.5.3 Only stainless steel support liners shall be used and shall
comply with the requirements of AWWA C800 and must be
approved by the fitting manufacturer for CTS SDR9 PEX tubing
per the AWWA C904 standard.
TABLE MW19.8 - 2: APPROVED PEX TUBING SIZES
Nominal AVG OD Tolerance

Size
mm mm mm
19 22.2 +/- .10
25 28.58 +/- .12
38 41.28 +/- .16
51 53.98 +/- .16

M.S. No: MW-19.8
Date: March 2015
Page: 3 of 7
SERVICES
19.8.5.4 PEX Tubing shall be of the best quality. Each length of PEX
tubing shall be uniform in bore and thickness of material. It shall
be free from cracks, grooves and other defects. Pipe of inferior
material will not be accepted. All PEX tubing shall be third party
certified
19.8.6 SERVICE SADDLES - GENERAL

19.8.6.1 Service saddles shall be designed to provide a drip-tight
connection to the main.
19.8.6.2 The width of PVC saddles shall be in accordance with the

following table:
TABLE MW19.8 - 3: SERVICE SADDLE WIDTHS FOR PVC
PIPE SERVICE SIZE
SIZE
MINIMUM SADDLE WIDTH – PVC PIPE
19mm 25mm 38mm 50mm
50mm - 100mm 150mm 150mm 200mm 200mm

150mm - 200mm 150mm 150mm 200mm 200mm
250mm - 400mm 200mm 200mm 200mm 200mm
Above 400mm 200mm 200mm 200mm 200mm
19.8.6.3 Service saddles must be sized to provide even support around

the full circumference of the pipe.
19.8.6.4 The minimum working pressure rating shall be 1380 kPa.
19.8.6.5 The outlet shall have standard AWWA threads as per AWWA C-
800.
19.8.7 SERVICE SADDLES FOR PVC PIPE

19.8.7.1 As per table MW19.8 - 2, service saddles are used for 19mm to
50mm main stops and chlorination nozzles.

M.S. No: MW-19.8
Date: March 2015
Page: 4 of 7
SERVICES
19.8.7.2 The band, side bars and fingers, keeper bar, stud bolts and nuts
shall be Type 304 stainless steel. The washers shall be heavy
duty nylon or stainless steel.
19.8.7.3 Service saddles for all sizes shall have a minimum of two bolts.
19.8.8 SERVICE SADDLES FOR ASBESTOS CEMENT, DI AND CI

19.8.8.1 Ductile and cast iron mains are direct tapped for 19mm and
25mm services and therefore saddles are not required.
19.8.8.2 For ductile and cast iron mains service saddles are used for
38mm and 50mm main stops and chlorination nozzles.
19.8.8.3 For Asbestos Cement service saddles are used for 19mm to
50mm main stops and chlorination nozzles.
19.8.8.4 The body shall be malleable or ductile iron body with a corrosion
protective epoxy coating.
19.8.8.5 The straps/bales, nuts and washer shall be stainless steel.
19.8.8.6 The saddle shall have an open canted ear for maximum strap
bearing and for ease of assembly.
19.8.8.7 The service saddles for all sizes shall have double straps.
19.8.9 SERVICE POSTS FOR NORMAL SOIL CONDITIONS

19.8.9.1 The service posts as per standard drawing W35, shall be
telescopic type adjustable from 2350mm to 2650mm and shall
come in two sizes as follows:
19.8.9.1.1. For 19mm to 25mm ball type curb stops, upper

section to be 25mm in diameter.
19.8.9.1.2. For 38mm to 50mm ball type curb stops, upper

section to be 25mm in diameter.
19.8.9.2 The service post assembly shall consist of five elements: cast
iron or polyethylene base, upper section and lid; type 304

M.S. No: MW-19.8
Date: March 2015
Page: 5 of 7
SERVICES
stainless steel rod (13mm dia x 1220mm long) and operating

"U" clip; brass cotter pin and pentagon plug.
19.8.9.3 The service post assembly shall be solid with clean surfaces,
free from scales, bumps, flaws, and other defects.
19.8.9.4 Ferrous components of the service posts shall have as a

minimum an asphaltic coating approximately 25m thick on both
the inside and outside surfaces. The finished coating shall be
continuous, smooth, neither brittle when cold nor sticky when
exposed to the sun and shall be strongly adherent to the pipe.
A continuous corrosion protective epoxy coating will also be
considered.
19.8.10 SERVICE POSTS FOR CORROSIVE SOIL CONDITIONS

19.8.10.1 The service post assembly for corrosive soil conditions shall be
the same as for normal soil conditions with the addition of an
approved petrolatum wrap of all buried metallic surfaces in
contact with the soil.
19.8.11 SERVICE POST REPLACEMENTS FOR EXIST. PLUG VALVES

19.8.11.1 For 38mm to 50mm plug valve type curb stops, upper section to
be 50mm in diameter. Rod to be 19mm x 1220mm steel.
19.8.11.2 All remaining dimensions and features shall be the same as for
normal soil conditions.
19.8.12 SERVICE POST EXTENSIONS

19.8.12.1 Service post extensions shall have the same gauge of metal
and same coating as the normal specified service posts.
19.8.12.2 Pipe to be same diameter to enable attachment of ground

clamp. Alternatively other diameters may be considered if a
screw type fitting is provided suitable for attaching tracer wire.
19.8.12.3 Provide a collar attached with a continuous weld to prevent soil

infiltration. Provide a square head set screw/bolt to rigidly
connect collar to top of service post pipe.
19.8.12.4 Provide a threaded top to screw the threaded ribbed cover onto.

M.S. No: MW-19.8
Date: March 2015
Page: 6 of 7
SERVICES
19.8.13 MAIN STOPS

19.8.13.1 All sizes to have standard AWWA inlet thread with compression
outlet. Supply with plastic thread protectors over inlets.
Couplings nuts to come with tracer wire terminals. Coupling
nuts and main stops shall be from the same manufacturer to
prevent loss of holding strength.
19.8.13.2 Valve type to be either plug or ball. Valves shall be in

accordance with AWWA C-800.
19.8.14 CHLORINATION NOZZLES

19.8.14.1 All sizes to have standard AWWA inlet thread with plastic thread
protectors.
19.8.14.2 Two sizes of nozzles are required as follows:
19.8.14.2.1. 38mm standard AWWA inlet with a 50mm

increased MIP thread outlet. Outlet to have
an inside driving thread.
19.8.14.2.2. 50mm standard AWWA inlet with a 50mm FIP

thread outlet.
19.8.14.3 Valve type to be ball. Valves shall be in accordance with

AWWA C-800.
19.8.15 CURB STOPS

19.8.15.1 All sizes to have compression inlets and compression outlets.
Couplings nuts to come with tracer wire terminals. Coupling
nuts and curb stops shall be from the same manufacturer to
prevent loss of holding strength.
19.8.15.2 Valve type to be ball. Valves shall be in accordance with

AWWA C-800.
19.8.16 COMPRESSION CONNECTIONS

19.8.16.1 Compression connections shall be copper tube size (CTS).
19.8.16.2 Design shall be equivalent to Ford “Quick Joint” or Ford “Pack

Joint”.

M.S. No: MW-19.8
Date: March 2015
Page: 7 of 7
SERVICES
19.8.17 FITTINGS
19.8.17.1 Fittings shall be in accordance with AWWA C-800.

M.S. No: MW-19.9
Date: March 2011

CATHODIC PROTECTION
Page: 1 of 4
19.9.1 SCOPE
19.9.1.1 This specification covers the product requirements for watermain cathodic
protection.
19.9.2 DEFINITIONS
19.9.3 ANODES
19.9.3.1 The chemical composition for Magnesium alloy anodes shall conform to the
latest edition of ASTM B 843, Type M1-C. Magnesium alloy anodes shall
have a minimum current efficiency of 50% and shall conform to the latest
edition of ASTM G97-97.
19.9.3.2 The chemical composition for Zinc alloy anodes shall conform to the latest
edition of ASTM B 418, Type II.
TABLE MW19.9 - 1: TABLE OF WEIGHTS AND DIMENSIONS
CASTING/EXTRUSION OVERALL PACKAGE ANODE

TYPE
WEIGHT NOMINAL NOMINAL NOMINAL
DIMENSIONS WEIGHT DIMENSIONS (dia.
(Minimum) (dia. x length mm) x length mm)
ZINC
5.4 kg 38 x 610 12.7 kg 127 x 760 Z-12-24
10.9 kg 38 x 1220 24.5 kg 127 x 1520 Z-24-48
MAGNESIUM
4 kg 90 x 340 13 kg 160 x 430 M-9-14
7.7 kg 90 x 640 22 kg 160 x 760 M-17-20
14.5 kg 140 x 560 40 kg 210 x 760 M-32-22
\Mat Specifications\Watermain Mat Specifications\MW-19.9.doc – March 31, 2011

M.S. No: MW-19.9
Date: March 2011

CATHODIC PROTECTION
Page: 2 of 4
19.9.4 ANODE PACKAGIN
19.9.4.1 The Magnesium and Zinc anode castings shall be supplied complete with an
anode lead wire and packaged within a water permeable cardboard tube
surrounded by a selected backfill material.
19.9.4.2 ** - Due to the tube length, ship the Z-24-48 anodes stacked horizontally for
City orders
19.9.5 ANODE LABELS
19.9.5.1 For Zinc anodes, each tube must be labelled with their type as follows:
“Z-XX-XX Anode for use in Ottawa”.
19.9.5.2 For Magnesium alloy anodes, each tube must be labelled with their type as
follows: “M-XX-XX Anode for use in Ottawa”.
19.9.5.3 Letters to be a minimum 25mm high.
19.9.6 ANODE CHEMICAL PACKING COMPOSITION
19.9.6.1 The anode casting shall be surrounded with a selected chemical packing
material having an electrical resistivity of less than 45 ohm-cm when wet, a
compacted density of 1.5 g/cm3, and the following composition:
19.9.6.1.1. Gypsum - 77 +/-2%

19.9.6.1.2. Bentonite - 15 +/-1%
19.9.6.1.3. Sodium Sulphate - 8 +/-1%
19.9.7 WIRES
19.9.7.1 Anode wire to be a 3m length of AWG #10/7 strand copper cable having
RWU-90 insulation (blue for magnesium anodes, white for zinc anodes) shall
be silver soldered to the electro-galvanized steel core of the anode casting
extending 75% of the anode length.
19.9.7.2 Anode header cables for anode banks shall be AWG #10/7 strand cable with
red RWU-90 insulation. Negative cables from test stations to ground clamps
or pipe shall be AWG #10/7 strand cable with RWU-90 black insulation.
19.9.7.3 Watermain test leads shall be AWG #10/7 strand cable having RWU-90
black insulation.

M.S. No: MW-19.9
Date: March 2011

CATHODIC PROTECTION
Page: 3 of 4
19.9.8 ANODE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE
19.9.8.1 The City reserves the right to randomly test any anode or backfill material to
guarantee its composition. The City also reserves the right to reject any
anode and request a suitable replacement.
19.9.9 TEST STATIONS
19.9.9.1 Each test station shall consist of a non-conductive housing and lid, a below
ground terminal board, and be flush mounted on a 300mm length of 150mm
diameter UV stabilized polyethylene or polycarbonate pipe.
19.9.9.2 The housing shall be flush mounted and made of a polycarbonate material.
19.9.9.3 The lid shall be supplied with stainless steel locking bolt with allen key head
and shall be blue in colour.
19.9.9.4 The terminal board shall consist of (5) stainless steel terminals and (1) nickel
plated copper bonding/shorting strap. All terminals shall have two (2) nuts
for locking purposes.
19.9.10 PETROLATUM TAPES
19.9.10.1 Petrolatum or petroleum wax tape coating and primer shall conform to the
ANSI / AWWA C217-04 Petrolatum and Petroleum Wax Tape Coatings for
the Exterior of Connections and Fittings for Steel Water Pipelines.
19.9.11 THERMITE WELD MATERIALS
19.9.11.1 Thermite Molds/Welders shall:
a) Have a handle and lid.

b) Be made of graphite or synthetic graphite, be able to withstand high
temperatures and be designed to provide an average life of not less
than 50 separate exothermic welds.
c) Shall be from the same manufacturer as the weld metal otherwise an
unacceptable finished product may result.
19.9.11.2 Thermite Powder Cartridges:
a) Shall be suitable for the pipe material.

b) Weld metal shall not contain tin but shall contain vanadium.
c) Weld metal shall be sealed in a suitable capsule and be identified with
their part number (size) and type of metals to be connected, such as
copper to steel or copper to ductile iron.
d) The batch control numbers shall be packaged with the product prior to
shipment from the factory.

M.S. No: MW-19.9
Date: March 2011

CATHODIC PROTECTION
Page: 4 of 4
19.9.11.3 Starting Material:
a) Where used shall consist of aluminum and copper and iron oxides. It
shall not contain phosphorous or any caustic, toxic or explosive
substance.
b) Electrical igniters where used shall have a lead length of 1.83m or
greater if required by the depth of bury and use an electric ignition
system which does not use starting material
19.9.11.4 Thermite Weld Protective Barrier Covers Shall:
a) Be moulded plastic domes filled with corrosion resistant compound on

a base of thick elastomeric tape.
b) Utilize an integrated primer in its adhesive.
19.9.11.5 Thermite Weld Protective Barrier Coatings Shall:
a) Bond firmly to surfaces without the use of primers and form a tough
coating resistant to oxidizing, cracking, alligatoring, checking,
loosening or scaling.
b) Be composed of heavy mastic with synthetic elastomeric additives in
mixed solvent.
19.9.12 MISCELLANEOUS
19.9.12.1 Ground Clamps for Copper Water Services to be UL467 listed for direct
burial, high strength, high conductivity and 80% copper minimum alloy.
19.9.12.2 Direct Bury Lugs Shall:
a) Be one piece, high impact housing, pre-filled with silicone providing

waterproof and corrosion proof protection and be designed for long
term direct bury applications
b) Be able to connect to main line without cutting it and tighten with a
screwdriver.
c) Have high impact housing with user-friendly design to prevent cuts or
handling discomfort.
d) Designed for use with tracer wires from #14 to #10 AWG or larger and
under 50 volts.
19.9.12.3 Solder for splice connections shall be lead free and in accordance with SAC
305 (96.5/3.0/0.5 ((Tin/Silver/Copper)) or approved equivalent.

M.S. No: MW-19.15
Date: March 2017
APPROVED WATER DISTRIBUTION PRODUCTS LISTING Page 1 of 30
Notice To Users: Complete technical requirements are located in the corresponding Material Specification sections.
All products noted in M.S. MW-19.15 are approved despite any inconsistencies between the products and the
requirements of any Material Specification.
TENDER PRODUCT TYPE SIZE MANUFACTURER/ NAME/DESCRIPTION and/or
REF. SUPPLIER/IMPORTER ORDER NO./MODEL NO.,
etc.
Valve Boxes and Chambers (M.S. MW – 13.1)
13.1-1 Valve Boxes Screw type 130mm dia. Bibby/McWane - Brochure VB-9605
as per drawing x 2400mm Sigma - VB6000
1493-B and assembly Star - VB-5008
W24 length
13.1-2 V. Chamber - B.V. Circular Per W2 M-Con Product Inc. – VC–1
Forterra – H-140
Anchor -
13.1-3 V. Chamber - G.V. Circular Per W3 M-Con Product Inc. – VC–1
Forterra – H–140
Anchor -
13.1-4 V. Chamber - Circular Per W4 M-Con Product Inc. – VC–1
Tapping Forterra - H–140
13.1-5 Base Sections Circular Per W5 M-Con Product Inc. – VC–2
Anchor - ACP-OTT-W5
13.1-6 Chamber Section Circular Per W6 M-Con Product Inc. – VC–1
Anchor - ACP-OTT-W6
13.1-7 Precast Top For Circular Per W7 M-Con Product Inc. – VC–1
B.V. Forterra – H–140
Anchor - ACP-OTT-W7
Mat Specifications\Watermain Mat Specifications\MW-19.15– March 1, 2017

M.S. No: MW-19.15
Date: March 2017
etc.
13.1-8 Precast Top For Circular Per W8 M-Con Product Inc. – VC–1
G.V. Forterra – H–140
Anchor - ACP-OTT-W8
13.1-9 Adjustment Circular Per W9 M-Con Product Inc. – VC–12
Section Forterra – H–140
Anchor -
13.1-10 R-1 Air,Drain V.C. Rectangular Per W10 M-Con Product Inc. – VC–3 (0 to 4m reinforcement)
0 to 4m Cover 2400x(1650 Forterra – H–617
to1800) Anchor - Valve Chamber R1
13.1-11 R-1 Air, Drain V.C. Rectangular Per W10 M-Con Product Inc. – VC–3 (4.01 to 6m reinforcement)
4.01 to 6m Cover 2400x(1650
to1800)
13.1-12 R-2 Air, Drain V.C. Rectangular Per W10 M-Con Product Inc. – VC–4 (0 to 4m reinforcement)
0 to 4m Cover 3000x(1650 Forterra – H–619
to1800) Anchor - Valve Chamber R2
13.1-13 R-2 Air, Drain V.C. Rectangular M-Con Product Inc. – VC–4 (4.01 to 6m reinforcement)
4.01 to 6m Cover 3000x(1650to1
800)
13.1-14 R-3 Branch V.C. Rectangular Per W11 M-Con Product Inc. – VC–5 (0 to 4m reinforcement)
0 to 4m Cover 3000x2400 Forterra – H–619
Anchor - Valve Chamber R3
13.1-15 R-3 Branch V.C. Rectangular Per W11 M-Con Product Inc. – VC–5 (4.01 to 6m reinforcement)
4.01 to 6m Cover 3000x2400
13.1-16 R-4 Branch V.C. Rectangular Per W11 M-Con Product Inc. – VC–6 (0 to 4m reinforcement)
0 to 4m Cover 3750x3000 Anchor – Valve Chamber R4
Forterra -
M.S. No: MW-19.15
Date: March 2017
etc.
13.1-17 R-4 Branch V.C. Rectangular Per W11 M-Con Product Inc. – VC–6 (4.01 to 6m reinforcement)
4.01 to 6m Cover 3750x3000
13.1-18 T.V.S. Chamber Rectangular Per W11.1 M-Con Product Inc. - VC-10
13.1-19 R-3 Line V.C. Rectangular Per W12 M-Con Product Inc. – VC–7 (0 to 4m reinforcement)
0 to 4m Cover 3000x2400 Forterra - H-619
13.1-20 R-3 Line V.C. Rectangular Per W12 M-Con Product Inc. – VC–7 (4.01 to 6m reinforcement)
4.01 to 6m Cover 3000x2400
13.1-21 R-4 Line V.C. Rectangular Per W12 M-Con Product Inc. – VC–8 (0 to 4m reinforcement)
0 to 4m Cover 3750x3000 Forterra -
13.1-22 R-4 Line V.C. Rectangular Per W12 M-Con Product Inc. - VC-8 (4.01 to 6m reinforcement)
4.01 to 6m Cover 3750x3000
13.1-23 R - 4 Branch & Rectangular Per W13 M-Con Product Inc. – VC–9 (0 to 4m reinforcement)
Line V.C. 3750x3000 Forterra -
13.1-24 R - 4 Branch & Rectangular Per W13 M-Con Product Inc. - VC–9 (4.01 to 6m reinforcement)
Line V.C. 3750x3000
13.1-25 Precast Top Rectangular Per W14 M-Con Product Inc. -
13.1-26 Park Meter Rectangular Per W31.1 M-Con Product Inc. – C-3
Chamber Forterra - 1829 x 1524 Meter Chamber
0 to 4m Cover
13.1-27 Sealant for Non- MS-13.1 Per W14.1 See MS-22.15 for approved
Circular Precast Butyl Rubber products
Inground Structure Based with
Joint Hydrophilic
Compounds

M.S. No: MW-19.15
Date: March 2017
etc.
13.1-28 Waterproof MS-13.1 Per W14.1 See MS-22.15 for approved
Membrane Rolls for large products
surfaces
13.1-29 Valve Chamber MW-13.1, MS- As per Detail Bibby/McWane – 14 to 20mm thick covers approved
Covers 13.1 Drawing W15 East Jordan -
OPSS 1850 Mueller –
Star – MH8006OT-2
PCHG - PCHG-201312
Suatac - S30C-VC
13.1-30 Regular Frames MW-13.1, MS- Regular as Bibby/McWane –
without centering 13.1 per Detail East Jordan -
tabs OPSS 1850 Drawings W16 Mueller -
and S25
13.1-31 Self-Level Frame MW-13.1, MS- Accepts W15 Bibby/McWane – Autostable C-54M
& Guide Frame 13.1 covers Mueller – AJ745
Sets OPSS 1850 PCHG – PCHG-201311
Star - MH8006R, MH8006G
East Jordan – 3028
Suatac - S30MC
13.1-32 Regular Frames MW-13.1, MS- As per Detail Bibby/McWane –
with Centering 13.1 Drawing W16 East Jordan -
Tabs OPSS 1850 Mueller -
(Limited list for City
Tenders)

M.S. No: MW-19.15
Date: March 2017
etc.
Pipe Materials (M.S. MW – 18.1)
18.1-1 Watermain Pipe Ductile Iron 100-400 mm Canada Pipe (Atlantic States Pipe to be supplied with end-caps
with sanitary end AWWA C-150 Special Pipe, Clow Pipe, McWane and tamper evident seals.
caps. Thickness Cast Iron Pipe, Pacific States
Class 52 Cast Iron Pipe) -
18.1-2 Watermain Pipe P.V.C. 100-300 mm IPEX - Blue Brute

with sanitary end AWWA C-900 Pressure Next Polymer - Aqualoc
caps and tamper (100 -300mm), Class 150 DR Royal –
evident seals. CSA-B137.3 18 National Pipe & Plastics -
18.1-3 Watermain Pipe P.V.C.O. 100-300 and IPEX - Bionax 100 to 300mm
with sanitary end AWWA C-909 400mm Bionax 400mm (Pre-Approval
caps and tamper (100 -400mm), Pressure Required for Each Project)
evident seals. CSA-B137.3 Class 235
18.1-4 Watermain Pipe P.V.C. 400 mm IPEX - Centurion
with sanitary end AWWA C-905 DR 18 Next Polymer – Aqualoc
caps and tamper (400mm) Royal -
evident seals. CSA-B137.3 National Pipe & Plastics -
18.1-5 Watermain Pipe Concrete 400mm Forterra - Pipe to be supplied with ends
with sanitary end Pressure pipe capped with disposable heat
caps . AWWA C-303 shrink plastic. No tamper evident
(400 mm) seal required.

M.S. No: MW-19.15
Date: March 2017
etc.
18.1-6 Feedermain Pipe Materials and 600 mm and Case-by-case basis Approved Materials and
Specifications over Specifications to be determined on
a case-by-case basis for each
project. Details pending
18.1-7 Watermain Pipe PVC (AWWA 100-400mm IPEX – Fusible, Terrabrute CR (300mm
for open cut river C-900 PC 150 Max Dia)
crossings or min) and HDPE Royal – Cobra Lock (300mm Max Dia)
directional drilling (AWWA C-906 Uponor – Sclairpipe
applications. DR11/ PC 160 Performance Pipe - Driscoplex 4000
min pressure)
PVC to be
Blue. HDPE
shall have Blue
stripes.
18.1-8 Fire Hoses for Double Jacket 64mm x Desmopan Liner
Temporary Hose 15.2m HI-RIZER
Servicing Aluminum CSA
thread
1035 kPa.
18.1-9 Joint Lube for NSF 61 All approved Pipe Mfg. Lube
Gasketed Pipe Approved products that meet NSF 61 -
Whitlam Plumb Pro – Blue Lube
Dymar Chemicals - Dymalube 10

M.S. No: MW-19.15
Date: March 2017
etc.
Tracing and Header Wire Connection Components (M.S. MW – 19.2)
19.2-1 Electrical C-Taps For two #10 Burndy - YC8L12
Connector gauge wires Thomas & Betts – 54710
19.2-2 Electrical Direct Bury For two #10 to Dryconn - Yellow (90120)
Connector Lugs, 14 gauge
waterproof wires
19.2-3 Compression For C-Taps FCI - Y2MR Hytool Mechanical Full
Tools Burndy - Cycle Ratchettool
Approved equivalent MD-6
19.2-4 Moisture Proofing For Buried 3M - Scotchkote
Sealant and Electrical Approved Equivalent
Bonding Connections
Compound
19.2-5 Dielectric For Buried 3M - 2200 Vinyl Mastic pads,
Insulating Electrical 3M - 2210 Vinyl Mastic rolls
Putty/Sealant Connections Tapecoat/Royston – TC Moldable Sealant
SCAPA –Rotunda - 2573 PIB Dielectric Tape Sealant
19.2-6 All-Weather Self .25mm to 3M - 50 Scotchrap, 51 Scotchrap
Corrosion Amalgamating .50mm
Protection Tapes Tape for Buried thickness.
Connections

M.S. No: MW-19.15
Date: March 2017
etc.
Special Fittings and Couplings (M.S. MW – 19.3)
19.3-1 Fittings -Bends, Mechanical 100-400 mm Sigma/ACIPCO -
Tees, Crosses, Joints: Bibby/Tyler/union/McWane -
Reducers, Caps, AWWA C-153 Star Pipe Products Inc. -
Plugs, etc... (ductile iron Pipeline Components Inc. -
Follower and fittings)
restraining/retainin AWWA C-104
g gland rings are (cement lined)
not included.
19.3-2 Electrofusion, Butt, HDPE (Special All sizes Central Plastics Company All potable water products
Socket, Sidewall case
and MJ Adapter applications)
Fittings.

M.S. No: MW-19.15
Date: March 2017
etc.
19.3-3 Straight Couplings Bolted Sleeve 100-400 mm Robar - 1408 (100 to 200mm)
for Normal or One Bolt Dia.. Romac - 501, Macro HP Extended Range
Connections Meet or Exceed Min Coupling
AWWA C-219 Pipe Sleeve Smith Blair – 442
- for Ductile Dia. Length Ford - FC1L12, FC2AL12
Iron, PVC (mm) (mm) Krausz/TPS Hymax Coupling, 2000
100 178
150 178
200 178
Min
Pipe Sleeve
Dia. Length
(mm) (mm)
250 274
300 274
400 294
19.3-4 Restraint Coupling Two Bolts, 100mm – Krausz/TPS – Hymax Grip
for High Deflection Wide Range for 300mm
Connections to DI/CI, PVC
Existing
Watermains

M.S. No: MW-19.15
Date: March 2017
etc.
19.3-5 Straight Couplings Two Bolts 100-600 mm Romac - Macro HP Extended Range
for High Deflection Meet or Exceed Dia. Coupling
Connections to AWWA C-219 Krausz/TPS- Hymax Coupling, 2000
Existing
Watermains - for Ductile
(Limited list for Iron, PVC, Cast
City supply Iron
tenders)
19.3-6 Straight Couplings Bolted Sleeve 600 mm & Robar - 1408, 1808
AWWA C-219, larger. Min. Dresser - Style 38
For Concrete sleeve length Smith Blair - 411
Pressure Pipe 250mm.
19.3-7 Reducing Bolted Sleeve 75 - 400 mm Robar 1408R
Couplings AWWA C-219 Romac - RC 501
- for Ductile Smith Blair - R441
Iron, PVC
19.3-8 Fittings (Except PVC Pipe 100 - 300 mm IPEX - Blue Brute/Centurion/Scepter
Crosses) and AWWA C-907 HARCO - C907 Blue (200 max available)
Couplings CSA B137.2
19.3-9 Tapped Couplings/ PVC Pipe 100 - 200 mm IPEX - Blue Brute/Centurion/Scepter
Tees restricted to AWWA C-907 Single and HARCO - Class 150 for C900 Pipe (Blue
lot widths of 6m or CSA B137.2 double only)
greater. AWWA services
Threads

M.S. No: MW-19.15
Date: March 2017
etc.
19.3-10 Follower (MJ, PVC Pipe 100 - 400 mm Sigma Mag Canada -
Standard) Glands (AWWA C900) Bibby/Tyler/union/McWane -
for M.J. Fittings. Star Pipe Products Inc. -
Pipeline Components Inc. -
19.3-11 Restraining Glands DI and PVC 100 - 300 mm Romac Industries Inc. – Grip Ring (with black ring)
for M.J. Fittings Pipe (C900 and Ford - UFR1500-x-I
(Limited list for C909) CLOW - TUFGrip Series 1500
City supply Gland pack
tenders) requirements
found in M.S.
MW – 19.3
19.3-12 Restraining Glands PVC Pipe 400 mm Ford Uni-Flange - 1500 (C905)
for M.J. Fittings (AWWA C905 EBBA Iron – 2000PV (C905)
(Limited list for & C909) Star Pipe Products Inc. - 4000, 4000G2(C900/C905/C909)
City supply Gland pack SIGMA – One-Lok SLC or SLCE (C905)
tenders) requirements CLOW - TUFGrip Series 1500
found in M.S.
MW – 19.3
19.3-13 Restraining Glands PVC Pipe 100 - 400 mm Ford Uni-Flange - UFR1500-x-l (C900, C909)
for M.J. Fittings (AWWA C900, EBBA Iron - 2000PV (C900)
(Not to be used C905 & C909) Star Pipe Products Inc. – 3500, 4000 4000G2(C900, C905,
for City supply Romac Industries Inc. - C909)
tenders. For SIGMA - Grip Ring (with black ring)(C900)
contractor use.) One-Lok SLC, SLCE (C900,
Clow Canada/McWane - C909)
MJ Field Lok (C900, C905)

M.S. No: MW-19.15
Date: March 2017
etc.
19.3-14 Split Restraining PVC Pipe 100 - 400 mm EBBA Iron - 2000SV (C900), 1100SV (C905)
Glands for existing (AWWA C900,
M.J. Fittings C905)
19.3-15 Split Restraining PVC Pipe 100 - 400 mm Ford Uni-Flange - 1360 (C900, C905)
and Back-up Rings (AWWA C900, EBBA Iron - 2500 (C900, C905)
for PVC AWWA C- C905 & C909) Clow Canada/McWane - 360 (C900)
907 Fittings SIGMA – PVPF (C900, C909)
Star Pipe Products Inc. – 1200G2 (C900, C909)
19.3-16 Restraining and PVC Pipe 100 - 400 mm Ford Uni-Flange - 1350, 1390 (C900, C905)
Back-up Rings for (AWWA C900 EBBA Iron – 1600 (C900), 2800 (C905)
Pipe Bells C905 & C909) EBBA Iron – 1900, (C909)
Clow Canada/McWane – 350 (C900)
SIGMA – PVP (C900, C909)
Star Pipe Products Inc. – 1100, 4100P (C900, C905)
Star Pipe Products Inc. – 1100G2 (C900, C909)
19.3-17 Split Restraining PVC Pipe 100 - 400 mm Clow Canada/McWane - 300 (C900)
Rings with gland (AWWA C900 Ford Uni-Flange - 1300 (C900, C905)
packs for PVC & C909) SIGMA – PWM (C900, C909)
Pipe holding MJ Gland pack Star Pipe Products Inc. – 1000C (C900, C905)
joints. Also for use requirements Star Pipe Products Inc. – 1000G2 (C900, C909)
with Follower found in M.S.
Glands for PVC MW– 19.3
pipe.

M.S. No: MW-19.15
Date: March 2017
etc.
19.3-18 Restraining Glands CL 52 Ductile 400 mm Ford Uni Flange - 1400
for M.J. Fittings Iron Pipe EBBA Iron - MEGALUG 1100
(Limited list for City Gland pack Star Pipe Products Inc. - STARGRIP 3000
supply tenders) requirements Clow - TUFGrip Series 1500
found in M.S.
MW – 19.3
19.3-19 Restraining Glands CL 52 Ductile 100 - 400 mm Ford Uni Flange - 1400
for M.J. Fittings Iron Pipe EBBA Iron - MEGALUG 1100
(Not to be used for Star Pipe Products Inc. – ALLGRIP 3600,
City supply Star Pipe Products Inc. – STARGRIP 3000
tenders. For Romac Industries Inc. – Grip Ring (with black ring)(400mm
Contractor use) not available)
Clow - TUFGrip Series 1500
19.3-20 Set Screw Ductile Iron 100 - 400 mm Bibby/Tyler/union/McWane –
Retainer Gland Pipe Gland Ford Uniflange – RGBAS
Packs for M.J. pack with Star Pipe Products Inc. - 600 retainer gland packs
Fittings ASTM A325 or
(For use by City A307 nuts and
staff under special bolts as a
circumstances single sealed
only) packaged unit.
UL Listed
19.3-21 Split Restraining CL 52 Ductile 100 - 400 mm EBBA Iron - MEGALUG 1100SD
Glands for existing Iron Pipe
M.J. Fittings

M.S. No: MW-19.15
Date: March 2017
etc.
19.3-22 Restraining and CL 52 Ductile 100 - 400 mm Uni Flange - 1390
Back-up Rings for Iron Pipe Star Pipe Products Inc. - 3100P
Pipe Bells
19.3-23 Gaskets for AWWA C-111 All sizes All makes meeting C-111 -
Mechanical Joints Vulcanized EBAA - EBAA-Seal
Synthetic and
Nitrile Rubber
19.3-24 Flange x MJ PVC and DI 150mm to Hymax – Grip x Flange
Adapters, Pipe 400mm Star – MJFAxxF Fittings
Epoxy Coated Sigma - MFA
19.3-25 Casing Spacers Stainless and All Diameters GPT (PSI) – C, S
Carbon Steel APS – SSI, SI
CCI Pipeline Systems - CSS, CSC
19.3-26 Rubber End Seals Rubber with GPT (PSI) – C, S
for Casings Heavy Duty S/S APS – AC, AM
Hose Clamps CCI Pipeline Systems - ESC
19.3-27 Test Tees Requires Contract
Administrators Approval
19.3-28 Flexible Expansion AWWA C110 100mm to EBAA – Flex-Tend
Joints for any pipe Flange 1200mm. Star Pipe Products Inc. – Starflex 5000
Material connections
19.3-29 Flexible Ball Joints Multiple 100mm to EBAA – Flex-900
for any Material connection 300mm.
options to
choose from -

M.S. No: MW-19.15
Date: March 2017
etc.
19.3-30 Expansion Joint Multiple 100mm to EBAA – Ex-Tend 200
connection 600mm.
options to
choose from -
Fire Hydrants (M.S. MW – 19.4)

19.4-1 Hydrants Three - Way 1980mm to McAvity/Clow/McWane – Brigadier M-67B
Compression 2850mm AVK - 2780
AWWA C-502 buried length
19.4-2 Hydrant Markers Polycarbonate, 1219mm long Flexstake – C804

UV Protected, yellow body Lakeshore Hydrant Services
Nozzle Mount
19.4.3 Dry Hydrants for Single Pumper Length as AVK - 2760
Drafting from AWWA C-502 specified
Storage
Reservoirs
Valves (M.S. MW – 19.5)
19.5-1 Gate Valves Resilient Seat 100 - 300mm Clow/M&H/McAvity/McWan- F6100, 20075-R, 4067
Manual Air and or Wedge Air Valves and AVK -
Drain-Out Valves Meet or exceed Drain-Out Bibby/McWane - NRS
AWWA C-509. Valves Mueller – A-2360

M.S. No: MW-19.15
Date: March 2017
etc.
19.5-2 Butterfly Valves Rubber seated 400mm and Mueller - Linseal III
AWWA C-504 larger Pratt Valves/Mueller - Triton XR-70
Dezurik – BAW
19.5-3 Tapping Valves Resilient seat 100mm to Clow / McAvity/McWane - F6114, 20695-R
or wedge 300mm Mueller – T-2360-19
AWWA C-509 M.J. x Flg
19.5-4 Tapping Valves Metal or 400mm Requires Contract (Note: C-500 valves require
Resilient seat M.J. x Flg Administrator’s Approval bypass valves see MW-19.5)
AWWA C-500,
C-509 or C-515
for DI and PVC
19.5-5 Tapping Valves Metal or 400mm and Requires Contract (Note: C-500 valves require
Resilient seat larger Administrator’s Approval bypass valves see MW-19.5)
AWWA C-500, Flg x Flg
C-509 or C-515
for C301 and
C303 concrete
pipe
19.5-6 Automatic Air
Release &
Vacuum Break
Valves

M.S. No: MW-19.15
Date: March 2017
etc.
Water Meters (M.S. MW – 19.6)
19.6-1 Water Meters Neptune Technology Group - Neptune Sensus Kent/
NSF - 61 Positive Sensus Metering Systems - Model No. Model No. AMCO
Displacement Kent/AMCO Inc. - Model No.
AWWA C-700
25mm and less 15mm T-10 SR AE
shall have non- 15 x 20 mm T-10 SR AE
ferrous frost 20mm T-10 SR AE
bottoms 25mm T-10 SR AE
40mm T-10 - AE
50mm T-10 SR AE
Turbine 75mm Nep-Turb AE

AWWA C-701 100mm Nep-Turb AE
150mm Nep-Turb AE
Compound 75mm Nep-Tru/Flo AE

AWWA C-702 100mm Nep-Tru/Flo AE
150mm Nep-Tru/Flo AE
200mm Nep-Tru/Flo AE
Fire Service 150mm HP Protectus III

AWWA C-703 200mm HP Protectus III
250mm HP Protectus III
AE = Approved Eqivalent

M.S. No: MW-19.15
Date: March 2017
etc.
19.6-2 Concentric Cast or Ductile 75mm to Tyler/Union/McWane -
Reducers Iron, Flanged 200mm Star Pipe Products –
19.6-3 Companion Cast or Ductile 75mm to Grinnell -
Flanges Iron 200mm Bibby/Tyler/Union/McWane -
Ward -
Star Pipe Products Inc. -
19.6-4 Meter Flanges Bronze with 38mm flange Ford - CF38-66-2
slotted bolt x 38mm male
holes IPT
19.6-5 Meter Flanges Bronze with 50mm flange Ford - CF38-77-2.125
slotted bolt x 50mm male
holes IPT
19.6-6 Meter Adapters Brass 16mm lead x Ford - A 95016
19mm copper
19.6-7 Meter Adapters Brass 16mm x Ford - A24
19mm to
25mm spud
19.6-8 Meter Adapters Brass 19mm to Ford - A34
25mm spud Mueller - H-10889
38mm flanged
50mm flanged
19.6-11 Meter Adapters Brass 38mm flanged Ford - A67
to
50mm flanged
M.S. No: MW-19.15
Date: March 2017
etc.
19.6-12 Meter Couplings Brass 38mm flange Ford - CF 34-66
for Flanged Meters x 38mm CTS
for Flanged Meters x 50mm CTS
for Flanged Meters x 38mm IP

for Flanged Meters x 50mm IP
19.6-16 Meter Couplings Brass 38mm tapped Ford - CT 34-66
for Tapped Meters x 38mm CTS
for Tapped Meters x 50mm CTS
for Tapped Meters x 38mm IP

for Tapped Meters x 38mm IP
19.6-20 Flange Adapters Ductile Iron 75mm to Smith Blair - Original Design 912
for Meters 200mm Robar - 7404
Clow/McWane - 40
EBBA Iron - 1000
Ford Uni-Flange - 400
19.6-21 Strainers Requires Contract
Administrators Approval

M.S. No: MW-19.15
Date: March 2017
etc.
19.6-22 Pressure Reducing CSAB356 15 to 50mm Watts Industries Inc. - 25AUB or Approved Equivalent
Valves (PRV’S)
19.6-23 Radio Based All All Itron Inc - Itron 100W ChoiceConnect
Endpoint
Tapping Sleeves and Repair Clamps (M.S. MW – 19.7)
19.7-1 Tapping Sleeves Epoxy coated 100mm to Concord Clow/McWane - TS-100
or S/S sleeve 400mm. Smith - Blair - No. 622
with stainless 304 Stainless Robar - 6906
fasteners. For Steel Nuts Mueller - H-620
CI/DI and PVC and Bolts Ford – Style - FTS
only. Alex Ayoutte Inc. –
Total Piping Solutions - Triple Tap (3000mm Max)
19.7-2 Tapping Sleeves Stainless Steel 100mm to Total Piping Solutions - Triple Tap (300mm max)
for CI, DI, PVC 400mm
19.7-3 Tapping Sleeves For concrete 600mm and Smith - Blair - No. 625
pipe larger Forterra -
19.7-4 Repair Clamps Stainless Steel, 150-300mm Clow/McWane – D76 R
Min. length of Single Band- dia. Smith - Blair - Type 261
clamp 400mm. Robar – 5616
Ford - F1-xxx-16, FS1-xxx-16
19.7-5 Repair Clamp Stainless Steel 75 - 127mm Robar - 5626
Min. length of Double Band dia. Smith - Blair - Type 262
clamp 400mm. Mueller - 500, 510, 520, 530
19.7-6 Repair Clamp Stainless Steel 400mm dia. Robar - 5636
Min. length of Triple Band and larger Smith - Blair - Type 263
clamp 400mm.
M.S. No: MW-19.15
Date: March 2017
etc.
Service Tubing and Components (M.S. MW – 19.8)
19.8-1 Service Saddles PVC 50- 300mm Robar - 2616 DB
All Stainless dia. Smith Blair - 376
Steel: Widths as per Cambridge Brass – 8407
Single Band table Romac – 305, 306
Double Bolts MW19.8-3 Ford - FS3138
19.8-2 Service Saddles PVC 400mm dia. Robar – 2626 DB

All Stainless and larger Smith Blair - 376
Steel, Single Widths as per Cambridge Brass – 8407
Band, Double table Romac - 305
Bolts MW19.8-3
19.8-3 Service Saddles Ductile Iron, 100-600mm Robar - 2506 DS(100 to 300mm available
Cast Iron and dia. only)
AC Smith Blair - 313 (With S/S steel straps and
hardware)
Mueller -
19.8-4 Service Posts Telescopic 19mm - 25mm Mueller - A-726
See M.S. MW – 2350-2650 Clow/Bibby/Trojan/McWane- D-1, D-1P, VSB 1
19.8 for details length Star – 12D1 - OT
PCHG - D1
19.8-5 Service Posts Telescopic, 38mm - 50mm Mueller - A-728
See M.S. MW – 2350-2650 Clow/Bibby/Trojan/McWane - VSB 2
19.8 for details length Star – 12D2 - OT
PCHG - D2

M.S. No: MW-19.15
Date: March 2017
etc.
19.8-6 Service Post Telescopic 19mm - 50mm Mueller -
Repair Extensions Clow/McWane –
Star -
Bren Technologies Inc. – SBE, TSBE
PCHG - SBE, TSBE
Approved Equivalent
19.8-7 Service Posts - Telescopic 38mm - 50mm Mueller - A-753
Special Case; See M.S. MW –
Replacements For 19.8 for details
Existing Plug
Valves
19.8-8 Main Stops Standard 16mm Cambridge Brass -
(For use by City AWWA Inlet x Ford -
staff under special CTS Mueller - H-15008NPB
circumstances Compression
only) Plug or Ball
Valves
19.8-9 Main Stops Standard 19mm Cambridge Brass - 301NL-A3HE3, 302NL-A3HE3
AWWA Inlet x Ford – F1000-3TW-Q-NL, FB1000-3TW-
Compression Q-NL
Plug or Ball Mueller - H-15008NPB, B-25008NPB, Both
Valves c/w Elec. Connection

M.S. No: MW-19.15
Date: March 2017
etc.
AWWA Inlet x Ford – F1000-4TW-Q-NL, FB1000-4TW-
Compression Q-NL
Plug or Ball Mueller - H-15008NPB, B-25008NPB, Both
Valves c/w Elec. Connection
AWWA Inlet x Ford - FB1000-6TW-Q-NL
Compression Mueller - H-15008NPB, B-25008NPB, Both
Plug or Ball c/w Elec. Connection
Valves
AWWA Inlet x Ford - FB1000-7TW-Q-NL
Compression Mueller - H-15008NPB, B-25008NPB, Both
Plug or Ball c/w Elec. Connection
Valves
19.8-13 Chlorination Standard 38mm Inlet Ford - FB 800-6-NL
Nozzles AWWA Inlet x x 50mm Cambridge Brass - 301NL-A6M7
Increased MIP Outlet. Mueller - B-2500NPB
Thread Outlet
with Inside
Driving Thread.
Ball Valves
19.8-14 Chlorination Standard 50mm Inlet Cambridge Brass - 301NL-A7F7
Nozzles AWWA Inlet x and Outlet Ford - FB 1600-7-NL
FIP Thread Ball Valves Mueller - B-20045NPB
Outlet.
M.S. No: MW-19.15
Date: March 2017
etc.
19.8-15 Curb Stops Compression x 16mm lead x Ford - BH64-233-NL
compression. 19mm copper
Ball Valves
19.8-16 Curb Stops Compression x 16mm lead x Ford - SI-B44-333-AWT-NL
Non conductive compression. 19mm copper
Ball Valves
19.8-17 Curb Stops Compression x 19mm Cambridge Brass - 202NL-H3HE3
compression. Ford - B44-333TW-Q-NL
Ball Valves Mueller - B-25209NPB With Elec Conn.
19.8-18 Curb Stops Compression x 25mm Cambridge Brass - 202NL-H4HE4
19.8-19 Curb stops Compression x 38mm Cambridge Brass - 202NL-H6HE6
19.8-20 Curb stops Compression x 50mm Cambridge Brass - 202NL-H7HE7
19.8-21 Couplings Compression x 16mm lead x Ford - Q24-23-NL
compression 19mm copper
19.8-22 Couplings Compression x 16mm lead x Ford - SI-C46-33-AWT-NL
Non conductive compression 19mm copper
19.8-23 Couplings Compression x 16 x 16mm Cambridge Brass -
compression Ford - C44-22-Q-NL
Mueller -

M.S. No: MW-19.15
Date: March 2017
etc.
19.8-24 Couplings Compression x 19mm Cambridge Brass - 118NL-H3H3
compression. Ford - C44-33-NL, C44-33-Q-NL
Mueller - H-15403NPB
Mueller - H15403NPB
Mueller - H15403NPB
Mueller – H15403NPB
19.8-28 Y-Branch Compression 25mm x Cambridge Brass - 152NL-H4H3
(for repair work all inlets and 19mm x Ford - Y44-243-NL, Y44-243-Q-NL
only) outlets. 19mm Mueller - H15343NPB
19.8-29 Reducers & Tees Compression 15mm to Cambridge Brass -
50mm Ford -
Mueller -
19.8-30 Service Tubing for Copper Tubing 19 - 50 mm Great Lakes Copper -
New or Rehab AWWA C-800 (CTS) Cerro -
Installations Certified ASTM
B88 Type “K”
soft copper
19.8-31 Service Tubing for PEX Tubing 19– 50mm Rehau - Municipex
New Installations AWWA C-904 SDR 9 (CTS) IPEX - Blue 904
Only
M.S. No: MW-19.15
Date: March 2017
etc.
19.8-32 Tapping Machines Watermain All Mueller - D4, D5
Pipe Concord/Daigle/McWane - 73.1, 73.2 with all std accessories
Ridgid - RT 1000, MLT 3401
Footage - Mainline tap, mini tap
19.8-33 Water Hammer Industrial, Sioux Chief - Mega-Rester 658-2002
Arresters for Park Copper, Watts - SG
Valve Chambers Factory Air Approved Equivalent
Charge
19.8-34 Sediment Faucets Brass, Globe, 19mm Dahl – 2316
for Park Meter W31.1, W31.2 Approved Equivalent
Chambers
Cathodic Protection (M.S. MW – 19.9)

19.9-1 Anodes Magnesium 13kg, 22kg, Anode Casting
M-9-14, 50 kg overall Dow -
M-17-20, weight US Magnesium -
M-32-22 Corroco -
See M.S. MW- Corrpro Canada Inc. -
19.9 for Exothermal -
detailed
requirements. Packaging
Bren Tech. -
ICCC –
Corrosion Services Inc. -
Maple Agencies
(Exothermal) -

M.S. No: MW-19.15
Date: March 2017
etc.
19.9-2 Anodes Zinc 13kg, 25kg, Anode Casting
Z-12-24, Z-24- overall weight Bren Tech -
48 See M.S. MW Canada Metal (Western) -
– 19.9 for Corrpro Canada Inc. –
detailed Exothermal -
requirements.
Packaging
Bren Tech -
ICCC –
Canada Metal (Western) -
DC Corrosion Corporation-
Maple Agencies
(Exothermal) -
19.9-3 Ground Clamps UL467 listed for 13mm to Thomas & Betts – 3110C
For Connection of direct burial 38mm Blackburn – JD (13mm to 25mm)
Anodes & Header Hubbell - BC/BH
Wires to Copper
Services
19.9-4 Ground Clamps UL467 listed for 32mm to Thomas & Betts – 3112
For Connection of direct burial 50mm Blackburn - J2D
Anodes & Header
Wires to Copper
Services

M.S. No: MW-19.15
Date: March 2017
etc.
19.9-5 Thermite Welder Thermite #10/7 Erico Products - CAHBA-IG
Connections for stranded wire ThermOweld M156
Cast and DI to 100mm dia
Pipe and larger
19.9-6 Thermite Welders Thermite #10/7 Erico Products - CAHAA-1G
Connections for stranded wire ThermOweld M100
Steel Pipe to 100mmǾ
and larger
19.9-7 Thermite Powder For Cast and ERICO – CA 25XF19
Cartridge Ductile Iron ThermOweld - 25PCI
19.9-8 Thermite Powder For Steel ERICO – CA 15
Cartridge ThermOweld - 15P
19.9-9 Thermite Weld Tapecoat/Royston – Handy Cap IP
Protective Barriers Thermoweld - Thermocap
19.9-10 Test Stations Flush-mounted Cott Manufacturing Co. – Street Fink
Handley Industries - 4” Test Stations
19.9-11 Test Stations Post Mounted Cott Manufacturing Co. – Big Fink
Handley Industries - 4” Test Stations
19.9-12 Petrolatum Primer AWWA C-217 Denso - Denso Paste
Trenton – Wax-Tape Primer
SCAPA - Renwrap 327 Primer
Petro Coating Systems - Petro Primer
ICCC/Rustrol - Petro Wrap Paste

M.S. No: MW-19.15
Date: March 2017
etc.
19.9-13 Petrolatum Tape AWWA C-217 Denso - Densyl Tape
Trenton – #1 Wax Tape
SCAPA Renwrap 330, 330L Joint
WrapTape, 355-15 Outerwrap
Petro Coating Systems – PetroTape, Petro Overwrap Tape
ICCC/Rustrol - Petro Wrap LT Anti-Corrosion
Tape
19.9-14 Petrolatum Denso – Profiling Mastic
Molding Mastic SCAPA Renwrap 331 Moulding Tape
Petro Coating Systems – PMULST
ICCC/Rustrol - Petro Wrap Moulding Mastic
19.9-15 Flange Isolation Kit Full face All GPT (PSI) –
gasket, full APS –
length sleeve, Central Plastics -
isolation
washers
Pavement Insulation For Watermains and Sewers (S.P.–7014 and S.P.-4102)
7014-1 Extruded Grade A,(275 600mm x Dow Chemical - Hl 40
Polystyrene kPa Comp. 2400mm, min Owens Corning Canada - Foamular 400
Insulation Boards Strength) 50mm thick
(XPS) OPSS 1605
ASTM C578
Type VI

M.S. No: MW-19.15
Date: March 2017
etc.
7014-2 Extruded Grade B,(400 600mm x Dow Chemical - HI-60
Polystyrene kPa Comp. 2400mm, min Owens Corning Canada - Foamular 600
Insulation Boards Strength) 50mm thick
(XPS) OPSS 1605
ASTM C578
Type VII
7014-3 Polystyrene Board Dow - All-Weather Adhesive
Adhesive Approved equivalent
7014-4 Factory applied Custom Urecon Inc. - Refer to Manufacturer’s
Polyurethane fabricated. Specifications.
Foam.

SEWER
\Mat Specifications\Title – Sewer Mat Specification.doc – March 1, 2002

CITY OF OTTAWA
SEWER – TABLE OF CONTENT
13 INGROUND STRUCTURES
14 METAL

18 PIPES AND ASSOCIATED DRAINAGE ITEMS
MS-18.1 Sewer Pipe

22 SEWERS MISCELLANEOUS

MS-22.15 Approved Sewer and Miscellaneous
Products Listing
23 INFRASTRUCTURE MISCELLANEOUS
MS-23.1 Geotextiles
\Mat Specification\Sewer Mat Specifications – Table of Content– March 1, 2017

M.S. No: MS-13.1
DATE: March 2017

MAINTENANCE HOLES AND CATCH BASINS
Page: 1 of 3
13.1.1 SCOPE
13.1.1.1 This specification covers the product requirements for catch

basin, storm, sanitary, combined sewer, and traffic maintenance
holes. It also covers frame and cover requirements for valve
chambers.
13.1.2 DEFINITIONS
13.1.3 PRECAST STRUCTURES GENERAL
13.1.3.1 OPSS 1351 shall apply except where superseded by these

material specifications.
13.1.3.2 Where high sulphate-resistant concrete is required by the

contract, type HS or HSb Portland cement/Blended hydraulic
cement shall be used.
13.1.3.3 Aluminium surfaces in contact with or cast into concrete shall

have polyethylene anchor insulating sleeves or be coated in
conformance with OPSD 405.020.
13.1.4 MAINTENANCE HOLES
13.1.4.1 Maintenance holes for normal applications with or without drop

pipes may be either round or box as per OPSS 1351. Special
applications may require only one type to be used, as specified
in the contract documents.
13.1.4.2 Benching and Channelling
Subsection 407.14 of OPSS 407 is amended by deleting the

first paragraph and replacing it with the following:
 The inside concrete bottom of all sanitary, combined
maintenance holes or storm maintenance holes 900mm and
greater shall be benched and channelled to accommodate
the pipes installed into them as per OPSD 701.021.
 Benching shall be placed to the level of the obvert as per
OPSD 701.021
\Mat Specifications\Sewer Mat Specifications\MS-13.1 – March 1, 2017

M.S. No: MS-13.1
DATE: March 2017

Page: 2 of 3
 The end of the pipeline shall be flush with the inside of the
structure wall.
 Benched maintenance holes 900mm and greater shall be
constructed with benching cut-outs as per S12.2.
13.1.5 CATCH BASINS
13.1.5.1 When a catch basin maintenance holes with an inlet control

device is being used as part of a grouping of two or more catch
basins, the exiting lead invert shall be lower than the incoming
lead invert by at least half the diameter of the exiting lead, to
prevent ponding in the cross street pipe from the inlet control
device.
13.1.5.2 Unless otherwise specified, the standard single concrete catch

basin for all applications in the travelled portion of the roadway
and under the sidewalks shall be “Alternate B” as described in
OPSD 705.010. Where double are required use OPSD 705.020
“Alternate B”. The corresponding distance from the top of the
precast concrete box to the invert of the catch basin lead shall
therefore be 1080mm. Corresponding sump depth is therefore
600mm.
13.1.5.3 For accessible surface inlet applications, openings shall not be

greater than 13mm in one direction and the longer dimension of
the opening shall be perpendicular to the pedestrian path of
travel.
13.1.5.4 For all other surface inlet applications, grate openings shall not
be so long or so wide as to pose a hazard to cyclists.
13.1.6 SEALANT FOR CIRCULAR PRECAST JOINTS
13.1.6.1 Joint seal system materials shall be waterproof and in

accordance with OPSS 1351.05.09.
13.1.7 SEALANT FOR NON-CIRCULAR PRECAST JOINTS
13.1.7.1 Joint seal material shall be butyl rubber based, formulated with
hydrophilic compounds. See MS-22.15 for approved products.

M.S. No: MS-13.1
DATE: March 2017

Page: 3 of 3
13.1.8 EXTERIOR JOINT MEMBRANE FOR NON-CIRCULAR PRECAST

JOINTS
13.1.8.1 Membranes/wrapping material for exterior joints to be

waterproof and flexible. See MS-22.15 for approved products.
13.1.9 STEPS
13.1.9.1 Maintenance hole and catch basin maintenance hole steps shall
be hollow circular aluminum conforming to OPSD 405.010
13.1.10 LADDERS
13.1.10.1 Ladders shall conform to OPSD 406.01.
13.1.11 NON-SHRINK GROUT
13.1.11.1 Non shrink grout shall be non-metallic and non-corrosive.

M.S. No: MS-14.1
DATE: March 2017

SEWER – MISCELLANEOUS METALS
Page: 1 of 2
14.1.1 SCOPE

miscellaneous metals for sewer structures and water valve
chambers.
14.1.2 DEFINITIONS
14.1.3 ALUMINUM
14.1.3.1 Aluminum extruded shapes to: CSA HA.5 M1980, alloy 6351-
T6. If alloy 6351-T6 is unavailable and subject to the approval
of the Contract Administrator, CSA HA.5 M1980 alloy 6061-T6
may be substituted.
14.1.3.2 Aluminum plates and checker plates to: CSA HA.5 M1980, alloy
6061-T6.
14.1.3.3 Cast aluminum to: CSA HA.5 M1980 alloy 6290.
14.1.3.4 Welding shall conform to CSA W47.2 M1987 and CSA W59.2-
1991.
14.1.3.5 All load carrying aluminum structures to be designed in

accordance with CSA S157 M1983.
14.1.4 STAINLESS STEEL
14.1.4.1 All stainless steel for the interior of sanitary sewer structures
shall be grade 316.
14.1.4.2 Unless specified otherwise stainless steel for storm sewer and
valve chamber structures shall be grade 304.
14.1.5 ANCHORS, FASTENERS AND BRACKETS
14.1.5.1 Only stainless steel shall be used in sewer construction for the
following:
 Nuts and bolts. Bolts shall be in lengths to ensure a

projection beyond the nut of one thread plus the point.
\Mat Specifications\Sewer Mat Specifications\MS-14.1.doc – March 1, 2017

M.S. No: MS-14.1
DATE: March 2017

SEWER – MISCELLANEOUS METALS
Page: 2 of 2
 Wall anchors for landing..

 All fasteners for gratings, railings and ladders.
 Anchors and fasteners for access hatches.
 All brackets used inside manholes and access shafts.
14.1.6 ANCHORS FOR COVER FRAMES
14.1.6.1 Expansion anchors for attaching cover frames to concrete

structures located outside of the travelled area shall be 304
stainless steel with minimum dimensions of 16mm x 120mm.
\Mat Specifications\Sewer Mat Specifications\MS-14.1.doc – March 1, 2017

M.S. No: MS-14.2
DATE: March 2017
Page: 1 of 3
FRAMES AND COVERS
14.2.1 SCOPE
14.2.1.1 This specification covers the product requirements for frame

and covers for maintenance holes, catch basins and valve
chambers.
14.2.2 DEFINITIONS
14.2.3 FRAMES AND COVERS
14.2.3.1 Maintenance Hole, Catch Basin and Valve Chamber frames and
covers shall conform to OPSS 1850 except as described below.
14.2.3.2 To avoid cycling accidents from long gaps associated with

surface inlet catch basins subsection 1850.07.01.01 is amended
with the requirement that the long gaps between the frame and
cover pieces shall total no more than 12mm.
14.2.3.3 Castings shall be made so as to conform to the dimensions

shown on the detail drawings, which accompany and form part
of these specifications. If ductile iron is used or test results
show that less grey iron is needed, then the thickness/volume of
material may be reduced so long as dimensions needed to
ensure proper fit are maintained as well as the design
requirements outlined in OPSS 1850.
14.2.3.4 All frames and covers that cannot be made with machined
bearing surfaces shall have bearing surfaces custom
fitted/ground so that the grates and covers sit firmly on the
frames without rocking. All frames and covers for use in the
roadway shall have a cover edge thickness and corresponding
frame depth tolerance of +/- 1mm each for a total maximum
tolerance of +/- 2mm.
14.2.3.5 Coating of frame and cover components is optional. Uncoated

or natural finish is approved.

M.S. No: MS-14.2
DATE: March 2017
Page: 2 of 3
FRAMES AND COVERS
14.2.3.6 Storm and Sanitary covers shall come with 25mm watertight
rubber plugs installed in 25mm sniffer holes. Plugs shall be
removable with pliers and easily pushed back into place.
14.2.3.7 Self Level Maintenance Hole, Valve Chamber and Catch Basins
shall have the following additional features:
 The frame and guide frame shall be designed to allow the

frame to follow the seasonal rise and fall of the road surface
and thus avoid tire and frost related damage to the road
surface.
 The upper frame shall have turned down edges to deflect
snowplough blades.
 The guide frame shall allow the frame to slide precisely
without shifting laterally. Guide frame to allow the inner
frame to tilt to match any grade.
14.2.3.8 Self Level Maintenance Hole and Valve Chambers shall have
the following additional features:
 The frame shall be designed to accommodate Ottawa S24

S24.1 and W15 745mm diameter by 50mm thick standard
covers, which are based on OPSD 401.020.
 The upper frame shall have a range of operation of a
minimum 156mm, an ID of no less than 701 mm.
 Slide types with typical 152mm guide frames shall have
minimum of 254mm long/high upper frames.
14.2.4 ACCESS HATCHES FOR MAINTENANCE HOLES
14.2.4.1 Covers shall be fabricated of 6.35mm thick aluminum tread

plate, reinforced on underside to eliminate warps and limit
deflection. Covers shall also be capable of withstanding a live
load of 12.0 kPa or 18 kN single wheel.
14.2.4.2 Access hatches shall be equipped with the following:
 Recessed stainless steel butt hinge;

 90 degree hold open arm;
 Recessed drop handle;

M.S. No: MS-14.2
DATE: March 2017
Page: 3 of 3
FRAMES AND COVERS
 A gas spring assist cylinder for easy operation;

 Slam lock, sealing plug and removable opening handle;
 Unique lock particular to the access hatch and a master key
that opens all locks;
 Tamper-proof fastener.

M.S. No.: MS-18.1
Date: March 2017
Page: 1 of 4
SEWER PIPE
18.1.1 SCOPE
18.1.1.1 This specification covers the product requirements for sanitary, storm,
combined, sub-drainage sewer pipe.
18.1.2 DEFINITIONS
18.1.3 GENERAL
18.1.3.1 Manufacturers with Nitrile gaskets available for all gasketed sewer
pipes preferred.
18.1.3.2 Pipe “Seconds” are not to be used for the final infrastructure.
18.1.3.2.1. A non- pressurized concrete pipe Second has a red or

black “X” or “” (dot) on the inside or outside end. A “” in the
middle area indicates the balance point for lifting.
18.1.3.3 To prevent confusion by excavating crews, blue watermain pipe typically

blue PVC Pipe or HDPE pipe with blue stripes shall not be used for
sewer applications.
18.1.4 NON-PRESSURIZED CONCRETE SEWER PIPE
specifications.
18.1.4.2 Non-pressurized concrete sewer pipe shall be round and

manufactured in accordance with CSA standards A257.2 (reinforced)
and A257.3 (joints).
18.1.4.3 Pipe shall be supplied only by manufacturers pre-qualified by the

OCPA. Lifting holes shall not be permitted on 900 mm diameter pipe
and smaller. Lift holes on larger pipe shall be made watertight.
18.1.4.4 Factory “Cored Tee” type service connections must :
 be performed at the factory;

 be drilled into preformed shoulder of adequate thickness and at
right angles;
 include a “pipe stop” as an integral part of the cored hole where
gasketed inserts are not used.

M.S. No.: MS-18.1
Date: March 2017
Page: 2 of 4
SEWER PIPE
18.1.4.5 Pipe shall be subject to rejection on account of any of the following :
 variations in diameter beyond CSA standards
 fractures or cracks exceeding 50 mm in length in bell or spigot.
 blisters and defects that indicate defective mixing and moulding
 failure to produce a clear ringing sound when placed on end and

dry-tapped with a light hammer
 insecure attachment of branches or spurs.
18.1.5 CONCRETE PRESSURE PIPE
18.1.5.1 Concrete pressure pipe used for sewer pipe shall be in accordance
with :
 AWWA C301 - Prestressed Concrete Cylinder Pipe

 AWWA C302 - Reinforced Concrete Non-Cylinder Pipe
 AWWA C303 - Pretensioned Concrete Cylinder Pipe (350-500mm
dia.)
18.1.6 PSM PVC SEWER PIPE AND FITTINGS
specifications.
18.1.6.2 As per OPSS 1841.05.01 polyvinyl chloride sewer pipe and fittings
shall be certified to CSA standards B182.2 or CSA B182.7.
18.1.7 PROFILE PVC SEWER PIPE AND FITTINGS
specifications.
18.1.7.2 Profile pipe is allowed only under special circumstances. See S.P. F-
4100.
18.1.7.3 Profile PVC sewer pipe and fittings shall be certified to CSA standards
B182.4.

M.S. No.: MS-18.1
Date: March 2017
Page: 3 of 4
SEWER PIPE
18.1.8 TUBING GRADE POLYETHYLENE PIPE
18.1.8.1 Application – Perforated road subdrains.
specifications.
18.1.9 SMOOTHWALL POLYETHYLENE STORM PIPE
18.1.9.1 Application - Restricted for use in ditch pipe, rear yard and
landscaping systems.
specifications.
18.1.9.3 Pipe and fittings shall be certified to CSA B182.8 or 182.6 latest
revision (Profile Polyethylene Sewer Pipe and Fittings).
18.1.9.4 For joining perforated pipe sections split couplings shall be used. For
all other sections the pipe shall be joined by water tight systems.
18.1.9.5 The pipe shall have a minimum stiffness of 320 kPa at 5% deflection.
Tests shall be conducted in accordance with ASTM D2412.
18.1.10 PRESSURE GRADE POLYETHYLENE PIPE
18.1.10.1 Application – Sewer Forcemains.
specifications.
18.1.11 PIPE LABELLING
18.1.11.1 All pipe required to have CSA approval must have “CSA” labels on the
pipe at regular intervals. This is to ensure CSA will conduct quality
assurance testing following any product failures.
18.1.12 RUBBER GASKETED INSERTS FOR CONCRETE PIPE
18.1.12.1 Inserts to be abrasion resistant and provide a flexible watertight seal.
18.1.12.2 Inserts to be one-piece strapless, self holding and sealing with only
drilling and insertion required.

M.S. No.: MS-18.1
Date: March 2017
Page: 4 of 4
SEWER PIPE
18.1.12.3 Inserts to have both interior and exterior shoulders to act as a stopper
during pipe insertion. Insertion distances to be sufficient to prevent
pipe from pulling out while in service.
18.1.12.4 Gasket for the inside wall of the saddle to be anchored to the pipe to
prevent it from dislocating during installation. Gasket for the exterior
of the saddle to be firmly affixed, preferably anchored as well.
18.1.12.5 Inserts to be abrasion resistant, of non-metallic material and without

attachments straps.
18.1.13 CONNECTORS FOR CONCRETE AND FLEXIBLE PIPE TO

MAINTENANCE HOLES
18.1.13.1 Straps holding the rubber connectors in contact with the pipe shall be
316 Stainless Steel.

M.S. No.: MS-18.2
Date: March 2017
Page: 1 of 1
BACKWATER VALVES
18.2.1 SCOPE

backwater valves for exterior foundation drain retrofit
applications. This specification applies for use on both private
and public property in the City of Ottawa.
18.2.2 DEFINITIONS
18.2.3 BACKWATER VALVES FOR EXTERIOR RETROFIT APPLICATIONS
18.2.3.1 Backwater valves for exterior applications shall be constructed so

that the flapper valves can be removed and replaced for
maintenance purposes from the surface utilizing a supplied tool.
18.2.3.2 The moving part/flapper valve shall not depend on the cover
being tightened properly to prevent it from becoming dislodged as
the top immediately above the valve is to remain open for
maintenance purposes.
18.2.3.3 The access sleeve shall be of a material that can be glued to the
backwater valve making a permanent watertight seal.
18.2.3.4 Products with watertight flush, frost heave resistant, self level tops
for laneway or lawn installations are preferred. Products shall be
made of PVC.
\Mat Specifications\Sewer Specifications\MS-18.2 – March 1, 2017

M.S. No.: MS-18.3
Date: March 2017
Page: 1 of 3
CULVERT PIPE
18.3.1 SCOPE
18.3.1.1 This specification covers the product requirements for culverts for
installation in the Right-Of-Way.
18.3.2 DEFINITIONS
18.3.3 GENERAL
18.3.3.1 Pipe “Seconds” are not to be used for the final infrastructure.
18.3.4 NON-PRESSURIZED PRECAST ROUND CONCRETE CULVERTS
18.3.4.1 MS18.1 shall apply.
18.3.5 PRECAST CONCRETE BOX CULVERTS
18.3.5.1 OPSS 1821, shall apply.
18.3.5.2 Concrete strength minimum 35 MPa at 28 days
18.3.6 HDPE CULVERTS
18.3.6.1 OPSS 1840, shall apply except where superseded by these material
specifications.
18.3.6.2 Pipe and fittings shall be certified to CSA B182.8 or 182.6 latest
revision (Profile Sewer Pipe and Fittings).
18.3.6.3 Joints to be soil-tight or better.
18.3.6.4 Pipe shall have a minimum stiffness of 320 kPa at 5% deflection.

18.3.7 LARGE DIAMETER PROFILE WALL POLYETHYLENE CULVERT
18.3.7.1 ASTM 894-98, shall apply except where superseded by these material
specifications.
18.3.7.2 Profile wall to be closed profile.

M.S. No.: MS-18.3
Date: March 2017
Page: 2 of 3
CULVERT PIPE
18.3.7.3 Pipe shall have a minimum stiffness of 320 kPa. at 5% deflection.

18.3.8 CORRUGATED STEEL CULVERTS
18.3.8.1 OPSS 1801, shall apply except where superseded by these material
specifications.
18.3.8.2 Materials and Coatings to be one of the following:
 Aluminized Type 2 conforming to CSA G401 and ASTM A929.

 Polymer Laminated conforming to ASTM A929, ASTM A742
18.3.8.3 Minimum Wall Thickness:
 2.0mm for under 600mm.

 2.8mm minimum for 600mm and over.
18.3.9 SPIRAL RIB CORRUGATED STEEL CULVERTS
18.3.9.1 CSA G401 and OPSS 1801, shall apply.
18.3.9.2 Materials to be one of the following:
 Aluminized Type 2 conforming to CSA G401 and ASTM A929

18.3.10 STEEL ARCH CULVERTS
18.3.10.1 OPSS 1801, shall apply.
18.3.10.2 Materials to be one of the following:
 Aluminized Type 2 conforming to CSA G401 and ASTM A929


M.S. No.: MS-18.3
Date: March 2017
Page: 3 of 3
CULVERT PIPE
18.3.11 CULVERT LABELLING
18.3.11.1 All culverts required to have CSA approval must have “CSA” labels on
the pipe at regular intervals. This is to ensure CSA will conduct quality
assurance testing following any product failures.

M.S. No: MS-18.4
DATE: March 2017

INLET CONTROL DEVICES (ICD’S)
Page: 1 of 2
18.4.1 SCOPE
18.4.1.1 This specification covers the product requirements for inlet

control devices (ICD’s).
18.4.1 DEFINITIONS
18.4.1 INLET CONTROL DEVICES
18.4.1.1 Inlet control devices for catch basins to cover or insert into the
CB lead and shall be vertical sliding type for removal for
cleaning. Insertion types shall only be used for replacement of
existing and shall incorporate a taper to ensure a tight fit. Both
Vortex and orifice types with odour/floatable traps will be
considered. For orifice types, round openings are preferred
over notched bottom types for uninhibited removal of flushing
hoses.
18.4.1.2 Head vs Flow data for each size/type of ICD to be supplied in

chart form and be certified by an independent third party and be
obtained by one of the following methods in order of preference:
 Measured head vs. discharge calibration curves using an

independent third party laboratory. This method is highly
recommended where non-standard orifice shapes are
proposed or where bends are involved.
 Calculated curves based on sound engineering/scientific

principles and utilizing coefficients that are derived from
papers/studies by industry recognized sources/journals.
18.4.1.3 For round orifice types to be located in the right-of-way the

minimum diameter shall be 83mm to reduce the likelihood of
plugging. Smaller diameters are permitted on private property
only, but are not recommended unless the owner is prepared to
compensate with increased unplugging demands. Sizes for
round orifices to be limited to the following diameters: 83, 94,
102, 108, 127, 152 and 178mm.
18.4.1.4 Minimum flowrates for vortex types to be located in the right-of-

way to be limited to 6 l/s in order to reduce the likelihood of

M.S. No: MS-18.4
DATE: March 2017

INLET CONTROL DEVICES (ICD’S)
Page: 2 of 2
plugging. Smaller flowrates are permitted on private property

only, but are not recommended unless the owner is prepared to
compensate with increased unplugging demands.
18.4.1.5 All ICD’s to be marked with their manufacturers name, model

number and metric diameter/flowrate information. To ensure
longevity the information is to be engraved or melted into the
plastic. All sharp edges to be dulled to prevent cuts.
18.4.1.6 ICD types used in the City typically fall into one of the following
categories:
Category ICD Type Type Flow Rate CB Type Sump

1 Orifice&Trap Slide 15 l/s + Square Yes
2 Orifice&Trap Slide 15 l/s + Round Yes
3 Vortex&Trap Slide 6 or 10 l/s Square Yes
4 Vortex&Trap Slide 6 or 10 l/s Round Yes
5 Orifice Plug 15 l/s + Square Yes
(Rplcmnt Only)
6 Vortex Plug 6 or 10 l/s Square Yes
(Rplcmnt Only)
8 Orifice&Trap Slide 15 l/s + Round No
9 Orifice&Trap Slide 15 l/s + Square No
10 Vortex&Trap Slide 6 or 10 l/s Round No
11 Vortex&Trap Slide 6 or 10 l/s Square No

M.S. No: MS-22.1
DATE: March 2017

ADJUSTMENT UNITS/RINGS
Page: 1 of 1
22.1.1 SCOPE

adjustment units/rings for regular frame and covers for
maintenance holes, valve chambers, catch basins and ditch
inlets.
22.1.2 DEFINITIONS
22.1.3 PLASTIC ADJUSTMENT UNITS/RINGS
22.1.3.1 High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) adjustment units/ring

material shall meet or exceed OPSS 1854. The adjustment
units shall incorporate a male-female interlocking feature to
resist movement and, for maintenance holes and valve
chambers, facilitate a watertight seal following assembly.
22.1.3.2 EPS adjustment units/ring material will be evaluated on a case-

by-case basis.
22.1.3.3 EPP adjustment units/ring material will be evaluated on a case-

by-case basis.
22.1.3.4 All adjustment systems shall utilize flat levelling units of varying
thicknesses and slope units to match the required slope of the
area at the location of the structure.
22.1.4 SEALANT FOR HDPE ADJUSTMENT RINGS
22.1.4.1 Sealant for HDPE adjustment rings shall be butyl rubber

waterproof sealing compound conforming to ASTM D-1850.
Refer to MS-22.15 for approved products.
22.1.5 ADHESIVE FOR EPP AND EPS ADJUSTMENT RINGS
22.1.5.1 Adhesive for EPP and EPS adjustment rings shall be Polyether
meeting ASTM C920 in caulk or rope form. Refer to MS-22.15
for approved products.

M.S. No: MS-22.2
DATE: March 2017

ODOUR CONTROL
Page: 1 of 1
22.2.1 SCOPE
22.2.1.1 This specification covers the product requirements for odour

control units.
22.2.2 DEFINITIONS
22.2.3 ODOUR CONTROL UNITS
22.2.3.1 Activated carbon shall be designed specifically for the control of

hydrogen sulphide, methyl mercaptan and organic emissions
found in sewage.
22.2.3.2 Refer to MS-22.15 for approved activated carbon. Note; the

City is currently supplying the carbon.

M.S. No: MS-22.15
Date: March 2017
APPROVED SEWER AND MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS LISTING Page 1 of 26
All products noted in M.S. MS-22.15 are approved despite any inconsistencies between the products and the
Tender PRODUCT TYPE SIZE and/or MANUFACTURER MODEL NO.
Ref. Application
S13.1-1 Grab Bars and Aluminum MSU Mississauga -
Safety Tees Approved Equivalent
S13.1-2 Seals and Wall Flexible All Diameters PSI – Link Seal with Century -Line Sleeves
sleeves for S/S nuts and bolts available APS - Innerlynx
waterproof wall
penetrations
S13.1-3 Push-in Gaskets Flexible All Diameters Press-Seal - Kwik Seal
for flexible pipe No Metallic Straps available Blackthorn Inc - Push-in Dura-Seal
to M.H Hamilton Kent - Tylox HKT-CS
connections.
S13.1-4 Cast-in-Place Flexible All Diameters Blackthorn Inc. – Dura-Seal III, III-NV
Gaskets for No Metallic Straps available Hamilton Kent – Tylox, FT, XT, Dual Seal II
Flexible Pipe to Press-Seal - Econo Seal
M.H’s.
connections
S13.1-5 Cast-in-Place Flexible All Diameters Hamilton Kent – Tylox WT+
Gaskets for No Metallic Straps available
Concrete Pipe
to M.H’s.
connections
\Mat Specifications\Sewer Mat Specifications\MS-22.15– March 1, 2017

M.S. No: MS-22.15
Date: March 2017
Ref. Application
S13.1-6 Connectors for Flexible 825mm and NPC/Trelleborg – Kor-N-Seal II (316 S/S Special Order
Concrete and Straps shall be 316 smaller pipe Required, wedge style)
Flexible pipe to S/S where used. Press-Seal - PSX Direct Drive (316 S/S Special
M.H. Order)
connections
S13.1-7 Waterproof Seal Flexible, Hydrophilic Hydrotite - SS & DSS Series, Leakmaster
for Rigid Pipe Sealant
Penetrations
S13.1-8 Non Shrink Non-Metallic and SIKA - 212 HP
Grout For Non-Corrosive Approved Equivalent
Around M.H.
Openings
S13.1-9 Gaskets for Isoprene All sizes Hamilton Kent – Tylox Superseal (White or Green
round precast Stripe)
concrete MH Press-Seal - RFS
joints
S13.1-10 Gaskets for Nitrile All sizes Hamilton Kent – Tylox Superseal (Orange or Yellow
round precast Stripe)
concrete MH Press-Seal - RFS Nitrile
joints in soils
with
hydrocarbons

M.S. No: MS-22.15
Date: March 2017
Ref. Application
S13.1-11 Sealant for Non- MS-13.1 W14.1 Conseal - CS-231 Waterstop
Circular Precast Controlled Hydrotite – CJ Profiles
Inground Expansion, Butyl SIKA - Hydrotite CJ Profiles
Structure Joint Rubber Based with
Hydrophilic
Compounds
S13.1-12 Waterproof MS-13.1 W14.1 Sealtight - Mel-Rol
Membrane Rolls for large Sikadur Combiflex -
surfaces Approved Equivalent
S13.1-13 Round MH Reinforced Concrete Round Forterra -
Structures, with MS-13.1, OPSS 1200mm Dia, M-Con - Drawing A-1
or without drop 1351, OPSD Monolithic Pre-qualified OCPA
pipe 701.010 base members
or without drop 1351, OPSD Monolithic Pre-qualified OCPA
pipe 701.011 base members
or without drop 1351, OPSD Monolithic or Pre-qualified OCPA
pipe 701.012 Slab base members
or without drop 1351, 701.013 Slab base Pre-qualified OCPA
pipe members
M.S. No: MS-22.15
Date: March 2017
Ref. Application
or without drop 1351, 701.014 Slab base Pre-qualified OCPA
pipe members
Structures, with MS-13.1, OPSS 3600mm Dia, Pre-qualified OCPA
or without drop 1351, 701.015 Slab base members
pipe
S13.1-19 Box MH Reinforced Concrete All sizes M-Con -
Structures, with MS-13.1, OPSS Box Pre-qualified OCPA
or without drop 1351 Monolithic or members
pipe Slab base
S13.1-20 Catch Basin Reinforced Concrete All sizes Forterra -
Boxes for MS-13.1, OPSS M-Con -
Mainline 1351, Pre-qualified OCPA
Applications OPSD 705.010, members
705.020 Alternate
“B”

M.S. No: MS-22.15
Date: March 2017
Ref. Application
S13.1-21 Catch Basins Reinforced Concrete All sizes Forterra -
Boxes and MS-13.1, OPSS M-Con -
Tees for Ditches 1351, PVC, HDPE Pre-qualified OCPA
and Rear Yard members
Boss series
Applications Armtec –
Soleno -
Ideal –
ADS –
Hancor –
Nyloplast -
S13.1-22 Vortex Inducing For drop pipe insert All sizes IPEX - Vortex Flow Inserts
Drop Structure applications over 6
Inserts metres
S13.1-23 Internal Drop C/W Flapper All sizes IPEX - Ottawa Internal Drop TEE
Pipe “TEES” Drwg S12 Approved equivalent
S14.1-1 Wall Anchors for Heavy Duty All Sizes Hilti - HVA
Landings Adhesive Anchors Approved Equivalent
S14.1-2 Landing Aluminum, FRP or All Sizes Borden - B#8
Gratings and S/S MSU Mississauga -
Ladders Approved Equivalent Fibergrate – FRP Ladders and Platforms
Approved Equivalent
S14.1-3 Sewer Plugs For Plugging All Sizes Deblo – Deblo Sewer Plug
Abandoned Sewer Approved Equivalent
Services
M.S. No: MS-22.15
Date: March 2017
Ref. Application
S14.2-1 Catch Basin – MS-13.1, OPSS As per Detail Bibby/McWane –
Square Surface 1850 For Drawings East Jordan -
Inlet covers replacement of S19.1 Mueller/Walter -
Existing covers only
S14.2-2 Rectangular CB MS-14.2, OPSS As per Detail Bibby/McWane –

Frames and 1850 Drawings S20, East Jordan -
Covers For Old Round CB S21, S21.1 Mueller/Walter -
Replacement Structures
Only
S14.2-3 Surface Inlet CB MS-14.2, OPSS Fish Style as Bibby/McWane –
Frame and 1850 per Detail East Jordan -
Round Cover Drawing S19 Mueller/Walter -
S14.2-4 Self Level For OPSD 705.010 Fish Style Suatac - S24C-F, S24CB, S24D-SQ (Adapter
Surface Inlet CB or 600mm Round regular for OPSD 705.010 Boxes)
Frame & Cover CB’s, OPSS 1850 openings
S14.2-5 Self Level For OPSD 705.010 Modified Fish Suatac - S24C-A, S24CB, S24D-SQ (Adapter
Surface Inlet CB or 600mm Round with openings for OPSD 705.010 Boxes)
Frame & ADS CB’s, OPSS 1850 meeting ADS
Compliant requirements
Cover
S14.2-6 Curb Inlet CB For OPSD 705.010 As per Detail Bibby/McWane –
Frame and Boxes, MS-14.2, Drawings S22, East Jordan -
Cover OPSS 1850 S23 Mueller/Walter -
M.S. No: MS-22.15
Date: March 2017
Ref. Application
S14.2-7 Curb Inlet CB For Maintenance As per Detail Bibby/McWane –
Maintenance Hole Structures, MS- Drawings S28 East Jordan -
Hole Frame & 14.2, OPSS 1850 Mueller/Walter -
Cover
S14.2-8 Sanitary MS-14.2, OPSS As per Detail Bibby/McWane – (14 to 20mm thick covers approved)
Maintenance 1850 Drawing S24, East Jordan -
Hole Covers Mueller/Walter –
Star – MH8006OT
PCHG – 201314
Suatac - S30C-SA
S14.2-9 Storm MS-14.2, OPSS As per Detail Bibby/McWane – (14 to 20mm thick covers approved)
Maintenance 1850 Drawing S24.1 East Jordan -
Hole Covers Mueller/Walter –
Star – MH8006OT-1
PCHG – 201313
Suatac - S30MC-ST
S14.2-10 Maintenance 25mm dia. rubber, Cretex – Style 1
Hole Lid Plugs watertight, easily Approved equivalent
removable
S14.2-11 Regular MS-14.2, OPSS Regular as per Bibby/McWane –
Maintenance 1850. Detail East Jordan -
Hole Frames Drawings S25 Mueller/Walter –

M.S. No: MS-22.15
Date: March 2017
Ref. Application
S14.2-12 Self Level MS-14.2, OPSS Per Approved Bibby/McWane – Autostable C-54M
Maintenance 1850. Mfgr drawings. East Jordan - 3028
Hole Frame & Not interchangeable Mueller/Walter – AJ745
Guide Frame between Mfg. Star – MH8006R, MH8006G
Units PCHG – 201311
Suatac - S30MC
S14.2-13 Frame and MS-14.2, Light/DI or Norinco - SOLO 7 SR
Covers for Sheroidal Graphite
Raised CI, cover max 71kg,
Maintenance locking, hinged,
Holes in NON 685mm or greater
traffic areas clear opening
S14.2-14 Trench Drains For Storm Drainage All Sizes ABT Inc. - Polydrain
For Storm Channels Zurn Industries Inc. – Z886 Perma-Trench
Drainage HDPE or Polymer ADS/Hancor - Duraslot with 150mm slot height
Channels for Concrete
Retrofit
Applications by
City Only

M.S. No: MS-22.15
Date: March 2017
Ref. Application
S14.2-15 Trench Drain Removable and All Sizes ABT Inc. - Polydrain 500 series
Grates For fixed, End grate Zurn Industries Inc. – Z886 HDD, HR
Storm Drainage Ductile Iron, removable for ADS/Hancor - Duraslot with 150mm slot height
Channels for Slotted grates, long flusing, all
Roadway opening 90˚ to others fixed
Retrofit bicycle traffic, H-20
Applications by loading
City Only
MS-18.1 Sewer Pipes
S18.1-1 Sewer Pipe, Reinforced Concrete All Dia. Manufacturers pre-
Round MS-18.1, OPSS Gravity qualified by OCPA
1820 systems
S18.1-2 Sewer Pipe, Reinforced Concrete All Dia Forterra -
Round MS-18.1, OPSS Gravity M – Con -
with “Cored 1820, Gravity Max branch
Tees” systems size 375mm
S18.1-3 Sewer Pipe AWWA C301- All Dia. Forterra –
Pressurized Prestressed Gravity and Munro -
Concrete Cylinder forcemain
Pipe systems
S18.1-4 Sewer Pipe AWWA C302- All Dia. Forterra –
Pressurized Reinforced Concrete Gravity and Munro -
Non-Cylinder Pipe forcemain
systems

M.S. No: MS-22.15
Date: March 2017
Ref. Application
S18.1-5 Sewer Pipe AWWA C303- All Dia. Forterra -
Pressurized Pretensioned Gravity and
Concrete Cylinder forcemain
Pipe systems
S18.1-6 Sewer Pipe PSM PVC All Diameters, IPEX Inc - Ring-Tite, Enviro-Tite
Non Pressurized CSA B182.2, 182.7 SDR 28 Next Polymers – DURALOC
For apps OPSS 1841 SDR 35 Royal Pipe Systems - Royal Seal, Gasketed Sewer Pipe
meeting min Regular and Nitrile National P & P –
separation gaskets. Lead times Northern Pipe -
requirements. for Nitrile ordrs vary. Diamond - Diamond PVC Sewer
S18.1-7 Sewer Pipe PSM PVC (CSA All Diameters, IPEX Inc - Ring-Tite, Series Pipe, Enviro-Tite
B182.2, 182.7) with SDR 35 Royal Pipe Systems – Royal Seal, Gasketed Sewer Pipe,
For parallel joints capable of 345 or Royal Pipe Systems – IPS Series Pressure Pipe
common trench kPa min., OPSS SDR 41 Next Polymers – AQUALOCK PVC Series Pipe,
applications with 1841 or CSA B137.3 SDR 32.5 Next Polymers – DURALOC
inadequate (No Blue Watermain SDR 26 Northern - PVC 1120 Series 160, 200
horizontal or Pipe). SDR 21
vertical Regular and Nitrile
separation. gaskets
Please note lead
times for Nitrile
Gasket orders vary
between
manufactures.

M.S. No: MS-22.15
Date: March 2017
Ref. Application
S18.1-8 Sewer Fittings PSM PVC All Diameters IPEX Inc - Ring-Tite
Non Pressurized CSA B182.2 SDR 28 Next Polymers – DURALOC
Lead times for OPSS 1841 SDR 35 Royal Pipe Systems - Royal Seal, Gasketed Sewer Pipe
Nitrile Gasket Regular and Nitrile Gravity Sewer Galaxy Plastics Ltd.– PVC Gasketed Sewer Fittings
orders vary gaskets systems Northern -
between makes. Diamond – Diamond PVC Sewer
Harco -
S18.1-9 Sewer Pipe for PVC and HDPE 100-400mm IPEX – Fusible, Terrabrute CR (300mm Max
open cut river PVC to be Green or Dia)
crossings or White Royal – Cobra Lock (300mm Max Dia)
HDD apps. HDPE shall have Uponor – Sclairpipe
Gravity or green stripes. Performance Pipe - Driscoplex 4000
Pressurized
S18.1-10 Sewer Pipe PVC and HDPE All Diameters, IPEX Inc - Series Pipe
Pressurized/ CSA B137.3 (4m or 14ft. Next Polymers – AQUALOCK PVC Series Pipe
Forcemain lengths) Royal Pipe Systems - IPS Series Pressure Pipe
Systems Regular and Nitrile SDR 41 Northern – PVC 1120 Series 160, 200
gaskets SDR 32.5 Please note lead times for Nitrile
No Blue Watermain SDR 26 Gasket orders vary between makes.
Pipe. SDR 21 Uponor – Sclairpipe
Performance Pipe - Driscoplex 4000

M.S. No: MS-22.15
Date: March 2017
Ref. Application
S18.1-11 Sewer Fittings PVC All Diameters IPEX Inc - Cycle Tough 4000
Pressurized/ CSA B137.3 SDR 41 Next Polymers– AQUALOCK PVC Series Pipe
Forcemain SDR 32.5 Royal Pipe Systems - IPS Series Pressure Pipe
Systems Regular and Nitrile SDR 26
gaskets SDR 21 Please note lead times for Nitrile
No Blue Watermain Gasket orders vary between makes.
Fittings
S18.1-12 Sewer Pipe and Profile PVC Allowed under IPEX - Ultra-Rib
Fittings CSA B182.4 Special Royal - Kor-Flo
Non Pressurized OPSS 1841 Circumstances
Only
S18.1-13 Sewer Service PSM PVC 100, 135 and IPEX Inc - Ring-Tite, Enviro-tite
Pipe, 22.5º CSA B182.2 150mm Next Polymers – DURALOC
Radius Bends, OPSS 410 and 1841 SDR 28 only Royal Pipe Systems - Royal Seal, Gasketed Sewer Pipe
Controlled Regular and Nitrile National –
Settlement gaskets Northern -
Joints. Lead times for Nitrile Diamond - Diamond PVC Sewer
Gasket orders vary
between makes.
S18.1-14 Couplings for ASTM C 425, ASTM All sizes - For Mission – Flex-Seal (316 Sp.Order.)
Sewer Service C 1173 Rehab (Nitrile www.Missionrubber.co.uk)
Pipe – 316 S/S Clamping projects only Fernco – Flexible Couplings (316
Connections to Bands, EPDM, SBRr Sp.Order.)(Nitrile
existing and Nitrile rubber Approved equivalent www.flexseal.co.uk)

M.S. No: MS-22.15
Date: March 2017
Ref. Application
S18.1-15 Tubing Grade Road and Other 150mm Armtec - Big “O” Tubing, Boss 1000
Corrugated Subdrainage 170 kPa Min. Soleno - Drainage Pipe, Solflo
HDPE Pipe Applications Ideal – Drainage Tubing, Challenger 1000
OPSS 1840 ADS/Hancor Single-wall corrugated
S18.1-16 Interior Smooth Polyethylene 100 to 900mm Armtec - Boss 2000, Boss Poly-Tite
Walled HDPE CSA B182.8 or 320 kPa Min Soleno - Solflo Max
Pipe for Ditch 182.6 Ideal – Challenger 2000, 3000
Pipe, Rear Yard OPSS 1840 ADS/Hancor - N-12
and Landscape
Drainage Apps.
S18.1-17 HDPE Sewer Polyethylene All sizes Uponor - Sclairpipe
Pressure Pipe OPSS 1842 Forcemains Imperial - Thermolene
for Forcemains CPChem - Performance Pipe - DriscoPlex
S18.1-18 Electrofusion, HDPE Forcemains All sizes Approved HDPE Pipe
Butt, Socket, Forcemains Manufacturers
Sidewall and MJ Central Plastics -
Adapter Fittings.
S18.1-19 Rubber Flexible Service All sizes Uroplast – Universal, old style (curved gasket)
Gasketed Connections for Gravity only
Inserts Reinforced Concrete Galaxy – Core-Bell Concrete Adapter
Pipe IPEX - PVC CSA B182.1 saddle

M.S. No: MS-22.15
Date: March 2017
Ref. Application
S18.1-20 Water tight Water tight For seal Tapecoat - TC Moldable Sealant
sealant for bell thermoplastic between
insert type elastomeric and service pipe
service synthetic resins. bells and host
connections concrete pipe
S18.2-1 Sanitary CSA B181.1 125 mm dia for Mainline – Fullport Backwater Valve
Backwater use on the
Valves – Interior mainline All others meeting
Installations Building Code
S18.2-2 Backwater Maintainable/ PVC 100mm Mainline – Adapt-A-Valve c/w Normally Closed
Valves for removable flap valve diameters Gate
Foundation from the surface with Royal – Single Service Inspection Chamber
Drains –Exterior tool/pole without All others meeting
Retrofit Apps digging. Building Code
Only. Requirements
S18.2-3 Check Valves Duck Bill All Styles and Elasto valve -
sizes Tideflex -
S18.2-4 Sampling/Inspec PVC 200mm Min Royal – PVC Inspection Chambers
tion Chambers Requires Case by Riser PWEagle – WAC
for Space Case Approval All Service line GPK Products Inc.- WAC
Limited Diameters JM Eagle – WAC 15
Locations Approved Equal

M.S. No: MS-22.15
Date: March 2017
Ref. Application
S18.3-1 Round Precast Reinforced Concrete All Sizes Manufacturers
Culvert MS-18.3, OPSS prequalified
1820 by OCPA
S18.3-2 Box Precast Reinforced Concrete All Sizes Manufacturers

Culvert MS-18.3, OPSS prequalified
1821 by OCPA
S18.3-3 HDPE Culverts OPSS 1840 150 to 900 mm Armtec - Boss 1000, 2000
Dual Wall Pipe OPSD 806.02 320 kPa or Soleno - Solflo, Solflo Max
CSA B182.8 greater Ideal – Challenger 2000, 3000
Soil-Tight joints or ADS - N-12 WT IB, N-12 ST IB (Both For
better CSA 320 kPa)
S18.3-4 Large Dia. OPSS 1840 460 to 760mm Uponor - Weholite
Closed Profile ASTM 894-98 RSC160
Wall HDPE OPSD 806.021
Culvert Pipe or Welded Joints 840 to
Culvert Liner 2130mm
RSC 250
2290 to
3050mm
RSC 400

M.S. No: MS-22.15
Date: March 2017
Ref. Application
S18.3-5 Corrugated Aluminized Type 2 2.0 mm thick Armtec – Hel - Cor
Steel Round CSA G401, OPSS for under Atlantic - Corrugated Steel Pipe
Culverts 1801 OPSD 805.010 600mm Dia, Canada Culvert - Steelcor Pipe
2.8 mm for
600 to 1000
mm. 3.5 mm
for over 1000
mm
S18.3-6 Corrugated Polymer Laminated 2.0 mm thick Atlantic – Corrugated Steel Pipe
Steel Round CSA G401, OPSS for under Canada Culvert - Steelcor Pipe
Culverts 1801 600mm Dia,
ASTM A929, ASTM 2.8 mm for
A742 OPSD 600 to
805.010 1000mm. 3.5
mm for over
1000mm
S18.3-7 Corrugated Aluminized Type 2 2.0 mm thick Armtec – Hel - Cor
Steel Pipe Arch CSA G401, OPSS for under Atlantic - Corrugated Steel Pipe
Culverts 1801 600mm Dia, Canada Culvert - Steelcor Pipe
OPSD 805.020 2.8 mm for
600 to 1000
mm. 3.5 mm
for over 1000
mm

M.S. No: MS-22.15
Date: March 2017
Ref. Application
S18.3-8 Corrugated Polymer Laminated 2.0 mm thick Atlantic - Corrugated Steel Pipe
Steel Pipe Arch CSA G401, OPSS for under Canada Culvert - Steelcor Pipe
Culverts 1801 600mm Dia,
ASTM A929, ASTM 2.8 mm for
A742 600 to 1000
OPSD 805.020 mm. 3.5 mm
for over 1000
mm
S18.3-9 Spiral Rib Aluminized Type 2 2.8mm thick Armtec – Ultra Flo
Round Pipe CSA G401, OPSS Atlantic - Hi-Flo (Temporary Pending
1801 Certification)
S18.3-10 Spiral Rib Polymer Laminated 2.8mm thick Armtec – Ultra Flo
Round Pipe CSA G401, OPSS Atlantic - Hi-Flo (Temporary Pending
1801 Certification)
ASTM A929, ASTM
A742
S18.3-11 Spiral Rib Arch Aluminized Type 2 2.8mm Thick Armtec – Ultra Flo
Pipe CSA G401, OPSS Atlantic - Hi-Flo (Temporary Pending
1801 Certification)
OPSD 805.040

M.S. No: MS-22.15
Date: March 2017
Ref. Application
S18.3-12 Spiral Rib Arch Polymer Laminated 2.8mm Thick Armtec - Ultra Flo
Pipe CSA G401, OPSS Atlantic - Hi-Flo (Temporary Pending
1801 Certification)
ASTM A929, ASTM
A742
OPSD 805.040
S18.3-13 Precast Alternate to OPSD M-Con - E-2 (Max pipe size available
Concrete 804.02. 1500mm dia.)
Headwall for
sewer or Culvert
Pipe 900mm
dia. and greater
S18.3-14 Precast Alternate to OPSD M-Con - E-1
Concrete 804.03 Forterra - H-10
Headwall for
pipes less than
900mm dia.

M.S. No: MS-22.15
Date: March 2017
Ref. Application
S18.3-15 Precast Alternate to OPSD M-Con - E-3 (Max pipe size available
Concrete 804.04. 1650mm dia.)
Headwalls for Forterra - (Max pipe size available 1800 dia.)
Sewer or
Culvert Pipe
Outlet

S18.4-1 Category 1 Slide Type For Min flowrate Pedro Plastics - SWR-1
Inlet Control OPSD 705.010 15 l/s (83mm Mosbaek North Amer. - Mosbaek Type TO
Devices (ICD) Square CB’s dia). IPEX – Tempest HF
with Orifice & For applications Plas-Tech Fab. - SW Tech Odor Trap Square CB
Trap maintained by City
S18.4-2 Category 2 Slide Type For Min flowrate Mosbaek North Amer. – Mosbaek Type TO with Adaptor
ICDs with 600mm Round CB’s 15 l/s (83mm IPEX – Tempest HF & Round Adapter Plate
Orifice & Trap dia). Plas-Tech Fab. - SW Tech Odor Trap Round CB
S18.4-3 Category 3 Slide Type for Vortex type J. Meunier Hydrovex – FV-VHV-1-O
ICDs with OPSD 705.010 min flowrate ACG/Hydro Intl – Reg-U-Flo Vortex Valve: SMXH
Vortex & Trap Square CB’s 6 /l/s. Mosbaek North Amer. – Mosbaek Type CEV
IPEX – Tempest LMF
Plas-Tech Fab. - SW Tech 6L Vortex Square CB

M.S. No: MS-22.15
Date: March 2017
Ref. Application
S18.4-4 Category 4 Slide Type For Vortex type J. Meunier Hydrovex – FV-VHV-1-O with Adaptor
ICDs with 600mm Round CB’s min flowrate ACG/Hydro Intl – Reg-U-Flo Vortex Valve: SMXH with
Vortex & Trap 6 /l/s. Adaptor
Mosbaek North Amer. – Mosbaek Type CEV with Adapter
IPEX – Tempest LMF & Round Adptr Plate
Plas-Tech Fab. - SW Tech 6L Vortex Round CB
S18.4-5 Category 5 Plug or Slide type for Min flowrate IPEX – MHF, MHF with Round Adapter
ICDs with Round or Square 15 l/s (83mm) Plate mounting
Orifice & NO CB’s, Diamond with Pedro Plastics – (Round Orifice)
Trap – Plug for Slot sizes A to F, Plas-Tech Fab. - SW Tech Round and Diamond with
replacement Round 83, 94, 102, Slot Orifices, Sliding Plate and plug
only in ROW 108, 127, 152 &178 types, for Square and Round Catch
Basins
S18.4-6 Category 6 Vortex Plug Type for Min flowrate Hydrovex – VHV, SVHV
ICDs without OPSD 705.010 6 /l/s. ACG/Hydro Intl - Reg-U-Flo: SH, SXH
Trap Square CB’s
S18.4-7 Category 8 Slide Type for Min flowrate IPEX –
ICDs with 600mm Round CB’s 15 l/s (83mm) Mosbaek –
Orifice & Trap with NO sump Plastech Fab. – SW Tech Shallow Sump (SFC)
Round CB
S18.4-8 Category 9 Slide Type for Min flowrate IPEX –
ICDs with OPSD 705.010 15 l/s (83mm) Mosbaek –
Orifice & Trap Square CB’s with Plastech Fab. – SW Tech Shallow Sump (SFC)
NO sump Square CB

M.S. No: MS-22.15
Date: March 2017
Ref. Application
S18.4-9 Category 10 Slide Type for Min flowrate Mosbaek –
ICD’s with 600mm Round CB’s 6 /l/s. Plastech Fab. – SW Tech Shallow Sump Vortex
Vortex & Trap with NO sump (SSV) Round CB
S18.4-10 Category 11 Slide Type for Min flowrate Mosbaek –
ICDs with OPSD 705.010 6 /l/s. Plastech Fab.– SW Tech Shallow Sump Vortex
Vortex & Trap Square CB’s with (SSV) Square CB
NO sump
S22.1-1 Plastic and MS-22.1, HDPE - All Sizes – For McCoy/East Jordan – Infra-Riser (Ending 1 Oct. 2017)
Rubber OPSS 1854, EPP, Regular MH Highway Rubber &
Adjustment EPS, Rubber and CB Safety – Flex-O-Ring (Ending 1 Oct. 2017)
Units/Rings (Ending 1 Sept. Frames IPEX/Ladtech – Lifesaver/Ladtech (HDPE)
2017) Cretex – Pro-Ring (EPP)
StrataWORKS/UGT - StrataWORKS (EPS)
S22.1-2 Concrete Reinforced Concrete All sizes. Manufacturers pre-
Adjustment MS-13.1, OPSS For Curb Inlets qualified by OCPA
Units/Rings 1351
S22.1-3 Sealant for ASTM D-1850 Tremco - Vulkem 116
Rubber Units (For Rubber Ring Sika - Sikaflex 1A
Adhesion)
S22.1-4 Sealant for Waterproof, Butyl Caulk or Rope Conseal – CS-102
HDPE Units Rubber, ASTM C- Press-Seal – Pro-Stik, EZ-Stik
990, Hamilton Kent - Kent Seal Butyl Sealant
AASHTO M-198,

M.S. No: MS-22.15
Date: March 2017
Ref. Application
S22.1-5 Adhesive for Polyether, ASTM Caulk or Rope Chem Link – M-1 Structural Adhesive
EPP and EPS C920, Type S, UGT - Secure N Seal
Units Grade NS, Class 35
S22.2-1 Activated Carbone Canada - STI-X (Supplied by the City)
Carbon
MS-23.1 Geotextiles
S23.1-1 Non-Woven Non-Woven Class I Armtec – 160
Geotextile for Grab Tensile 445N Carthage – FX40HS
Separation, Min. Contech – C40NW
Drainage A.O.S. .19 to .212 Layfield Geosynthtcs – LP 4
Asphalt Overlay mm. Maccaferri - Mactex MX140
OPSS 1860 Mirafi - 140NC
Propex/SI – Geotex 401
SRW - NW4
Terrafix – 270R
Thrace-Linq – 130EX
Hanes Geo – N04.5
Nilex – 4546
Soleno - TX-70

M.S. No: MS-22.15
Date: March 2017
Ref. Application
S23.1-2 Non-Woven Non-Woven Class II Armtec – 200
Geotextile for Grab Tensile 660N Carthage – FX 50HS
Separation, Min. Layfield Geosynthtcs – LP 6
Drainage A.O.S. .15 to .212 Maccaferri - Mactex MX225
mm Min. Mirafi – 160N
OPSS 1860 Propex/SI – Geotex 501
SRW – NW6
Terrafix – 360R
Thrace-Linq – 150EX
Hanes Geo – N06
Nilex – 4551
Soleno - TX-170
S23.1-3 Woven Woven Class I Armtec – 835
Geotextile for Geotextile Carthage – FX-55
Separation/ Grab Tensile 800N Layfield Geosynthtcs – LP 200
Stabilization Min. Maccaferri- Mactex MXW9
A.O.S. .300 to Mirafi – 500X
.425mm Propex/SI – Geotex 200ST
OPSS 1860 SRW - SS5
Thrace-Linq – GTF 200S
Terrafix – 24-15
Hanes Geo – Terratex GS
Nilex – 2002
Soleno - 2002W

M.S. No: MS-22.15
Date: March 2017
Ref. Application
S23.1-4 Woven Woven Class II Armtec – 845
Geotextile for Geotextile Carthage – FX 65
Separation/ Grab Tensile 1100 Layfield Geosynthtcs – LP 315
Stabilization Min. Maccaferri - Mactex MXW13
A.O.S. .300 to Mirafi – 550X
.425mm Propex/SI – Geotex 250ST
OPSS 1860 SRW - SS6
Thrace-Linq – GTF 250
Terrafix – 200W
Hanes Geo – Teratex HD
Nilex – 2004
Soleno - 2004W
S23.2-1 Tactile Walking Cast Iron All Sizes and Neenah -
Surface Cast in Place Radii, MS- East Jordan - Duralast
Indicators Uncoated/Natural 13.1, ADA Advantage Cast Iron -
(TWSI) Finish. Dome top Compliant Ironped –
dia. 12 to 25mm ADA Solutions – Irondome
Bibby-Ste-Croix – Safety Detection System
Star -

M.S. No: MS-22.15
Date: March 2017
Ref. Application
S23.3-1 Pothole Hardens using Perma Patch Inc. - Perma Patch
Patching pressure from traffic
Products All season
All weather
2 year shelf life min.
MS-23.4 Miscellaneous
S23.4-1 Bicycle Counter Polymer Concrete 300x300x300 Channell – GLB121212
Handhole Boxes Open Bottom Old Castle/Synertech - S1212B12FA, S1212HFAOA01
& Covers Custom Lid per
Detail Drawing BC5
S23.4-2 Flexible Bollards Light, Flexible, As Specified IRS – Tuff Post
for Cycling Reflective, UV Develotech - Cyclo-Zone Delineator
Lanes Protected.
Post Style, Colour,
Size, Sheeting
Grade, Base and
Anchors as
Specified

M.S. No: MS-23.1
DATE: March 2017

GEOTEXTILES
Page: 1 of 1
23.1.1 SCOPE

geotextiles for use with infrastructure projects.
23.1.2 DEFINITIONS
23.1.3 NON-WOVEN GEOTEXTILE MATERIAL
23.1.3.1 Products shall be according to OPSS 1860 except they shall

have the following certifiable minimum average roll values:
Class Min Grab Tensile A.O.S. (Apparent Opening

Size)
Newtons (N)
Micrometers (um)
I 445 .19 to .212
II 660 .15 to .212
23.1.4 WOVEN GEOTEXTILE MATERIAL
23.1.4.1 Products shall be according to OPSS 1860 except they shall

have the following certifiable minimum average roll values:
Class Min Grab Tensile A.O.S. (Apparent Opening Size)
Newtons (N) Micrometers (um)

I 800 .3 to .425
II 1100 .3 to .425

M.S. No: MS-23.2
DATE: March 2017

TACTILE WALKING SURFACE INDICATORS (TWSI’S)
Page: 1 of 1
23.2.1 SCOPE
23.2.1.1 This specification covers the product requirements for tactile

walking surface indicators (TWSI).
23.2.2 DEFINITIONS
23.2.3 TACTILE WALKING SURFACE INDICATORS
23.2.3.1 Tactile walking surface indicators shall be ADA compliant, cast-

in-place installation, made of cast iron or ductile iron, and be
uncoated/natural finish. Truncated domes shall meet ISO
23599:2012 and the following:
 Flat-topped domes shall be 5mm (+/- 1mm) high;

 Top of flat top domes shall be 12 to 25mm diameter;
 Diameter of lower base of the flat–topped domes are 10 mm
(+/- 1mm) more than the diameter of the top (eg, base diameter
of 21 to 36 mm is typical);
 Dome shall be arranged in a square grid
 Spacing between adjacent flat-topped domes is adjusted
depending on the size of the domes as identified below
Truncated Dome Spacing Requirements
Top Diameter of Flat Spacing Between Centres

Topped Domes (mm) of Adjacent Domes (mm)
12 42 to 61
15 45 to 63
18 48 to 65
20 50 to 68
25 55 to 70

M.S. No.: MS-23.3
Date: March 2017
Page: 1 of 1
POTHOLE PATCHING MATERIALS
23.3.1 SCOPE
23.3.1.1 This specification covers the product requirements for pothole

patching materials.
23.3.2 DEFINITIONS
23.3.3 MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS
Pothole patching materials shall:
23.3.3.1 Contain pressure sensitive plastics that require dynamic pressure

from traffic to cure. The greater the traffic the quicker it should set up.
23.3.3.2 Be all season.
23.3.3.3 Be all weather.
23.3.3.4 Be a permanent asphalt patching material.
23.3.3.5 Be easy to use.
23.3.3.6 Requires no mixing.
23.3.3.7 Requires no special pothole preparation.
23.3.3.8 Displaces water.
23.3.3.9 Accepts traffic immediately.
23.3.3.10 Bond permanently to asphalt and concrete surfaces.

TRAFFIC
\Mat Specifications\Traffic Mat Specifications\Title – Traffic.doc –March 1, 2002

CITY OF OTTAWA
TRAFFIC – TABLE OF CONTENT
MT-24.1 Underground Traffic Control Plant
MT-24.2 Traffic Detector Loops
\Mat Specification\Traffic Mat Specifications\ Traffic - Table of Content.doc – March 1, 2002

M.S. No : MT-24.1
Date : June 2001
Page : 1 of 1
UNDERGROUND TRAFFIC CONTROL PLANT
(1) Concrete and Reinforced Concrete Materials
Concrete and reinforced concrete materials shall conform to:
(a) the specifications set out in OPSS 1350 and OPSS 1351; and
(b) the Standard Drawings attached to this tender document or shown on the Contract Drawings.
(2) Rigid Conduit and P.V.C Duct
The following materials shall be used
(a) Where rigid conduit is specified for elbows in foundations and risers, Rigid PVC Conduit having the
following dimensions and conforming to the "Specifications for Plastic Underground Power Cable
Ducting" of the Canadian Standards Association (CSA- B196.1 - 1972 and subsequent revisions
thereof) shall be used.
Nominal Wall
Size ID OD Thickness
50mm 60.3 mm 52.5 mm 3.9 mm
75mm 88.9 mm 77.9 mm 5.5 mm
125mm 141.3 mm 128.2 mm 6.6 mm
Where PVC electrical duct is specified, duct
(i) conforming to the "Specifications for Plastic Underground Power Cable Ducting" of the Canadian
Standards Association (CSA-22.2 #211.0 and #211.1 and subsequent revisions thereof), and
(ii) having a minimum impact value of 25 ft/lbs at -18o C with no cracks or splits with the following
dimensions shall be used:
Nominal Wall
Type Size OD ID Thickness
DB2 50mm 54.2mm 52.1mm 2.1mm

DB2 76mm 82.7mm 77.4mm 2.7mm
DB2 100mm 107.2mm 100.1mm 3.2mm
\Mat Specifications\Traffic Mat Specifications\MT-24.1.doc – March 1, 2002

M.S. No: MT-24.2
Date: June 2001
Page: 1 of 2
TRAFFIC DETECTOR LOOPS
1. Epoxy Sealant:
a. Epoxy for sealing sawcuts shall be:
i. 3M “Scotch” Detector Loop Sealant as supplied by 3M Canada Limited;
b. All epoxy sealant will be supplied by the City.
2. Flexible Conduit:
a. Twenty-five (25mm) millimeter flexible conduit shall:
i. be C.S.A. certified 100 P.S.I. polyethylene flexible tubing which meets or exceeds
Canadian Standards Association Specification B.137-1-1970 as amended or revised; and
ii. have the following dimensions:
Nominal Size Inside Diameter Outside Diameter

25mm 26.6mm 32mm
b. Flexible conduit shall be supplied by the Contractor.
3. Lead-in Cable:
a. Lead-in cable shall be:
i. 3M Canada Loop Detector Home-Run Cable Model 30003, or equivalent approved by

the Contract Administrator which meets the following specifications:
Conductor AWG Stranding Insulation Jacket Thickness Working

s Voltage
4 12 7 x 27 0.010" 0.030" 2,500v
b. All lead-in cable will be supplied by the City.
4. Loop Cable: (Loop Conductor and Loop Feeder)
a. Loop cables shall be RWU 90 and shall be:
i. A.W.G.#12, A.W.G.#14 or A.W.G.#16 stranded copper;
ii. labeled as type RWU 90, cross link minus 40 degrees Celsius, 12 A.W.G. or 14 A.W.G.,
1,000 volt;
iii. C.S.A. Certified;
iv. direct buried type cable; and insulated with thermo-setting cross-linked polyethylene;
or equivalent cable subject to the approval of the Contract Administrator.
\Mat Specifications\Traffic Mat Specifications\MT- 24.2.doc – March 1, 2002

M.S. No: MT-24.2
Date: June 2001
Page: 2 of 2
TRAFFIC DETECTOR LOOPS
b. All loop cable will be supplied by the City.
5. Loop Identification Dots:
a. Loop Identification Dots shall be Sta-Mark Duro Disc 3-3/4" yellow model #994 as supplied by
3M Canada Ltd.
b. All Identification Dots shall be supplied by the City.
6. Loop Identification Dot Primer:
a. Loop Identification Dot Primer shall be Sta-Mark P-46 as supplied by 3M Canada Ltd.
b. All Loop Identification Dot Primer will be supplied by the City.
\Mat Specifications\Traffic Mat Specifications\MT- 24.2.doc – March 1, 2002

ELECTRICAL/
STREETLIGHTING
FOR STANDARD
INSTALLATIONS
\Mat Specifications\Title – Electrical-Streetlighting Mat Specification – March 31, 2009

CITY OF OTTAWA
ELECTRICAL / STREETLIGHTING – TABLE OF CONTENT
SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION REVISION REV. DATE
LAS0001 Photoelectric Controllers 4 February 2016
LAS0010 LED Control Nodes and Gateways 0 February 2016
LBS0001 Streetlight Brackets and Adapters 7 February 2016
LCS0001 Cable 6 February 2016
LGC0001 General Conditions 3 February 2016
LGS0001 General Servicing - Existing System 6 February 2016
LIS0001 Installation of Streetlight Equipment 7 February 2016
LLS0001 HID Coach Style Luminaire 7 February 2016
LLS0002 HID Shoebox Style Luminaire 6 February 2016
LLS0003 HID Cobra Head Style Luminaire 6 February 2016
LLS0005 HID Lamps & Ballasts 6 February 2016
LLS0006 Cleaning & Relamping 6 February 2016
LLS0007 Replacement of Luminaires 7 February 2016
LLS0010 LED Style Luminaire 0 February 2016
LPS0001 Concrete Poles 7 February 2016
LPS0002 Aluminum Poles 7 February 2016
\Mat Specification\Electrical/Streetlighting Mat Specifications – Table of Content – March 1, 2016

TITLE:
Engineering Specification
RECOMMENDED: W. Quackenbush NO: 1 REV:
APPROVED: G. Sergeant LAS0001 OF

4
REV. DATE: 2016-02-16 7
City of Ottawa Street Lighting
Street Lighting Auxiliary Equipment
Photoelectric Controllers
NOTE : These specifications apply only to

existing materials and/or fixtures;
for all new construction refer to LAS0010
© For City of Ottawa Use Only

REVISION SHEET
REVISION DESCRIPTION DATE INITIAL

1 Supersedes LAS0005 2006-01-15 csm jb
General Conditions referenced in
separate specification
Approval and Recommended 2010-01-07 se do

2 authorization changed
3 (14.0) Associated Standard 2014-01-31 wq kw

Drawings identified
Approval and Recommended
authorization changed
Approval and Recommended 2016-02-16 wq gs

© For City of Ottawa Use Only LAS0001 Rev.4 Page 2 of 7

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL ......................................................................................................................... 4

1.1 SCOPE .............................................................................................................................. 4
2.0 REFERENCE STANDARDS .......................................................................................... 4
3.0 APPROVAL OF SOURCE .............................................................................................. 4
4.0 PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS ................................................................................ 4
4.1 SIZE AND WEIGHT ............................................................................................................ 4
4.2 PLUG ................................................................................................................................ 4
4.3 CASE ................................................................................................................................ 5
4.4 WINDOW .......................................................................................................................... 5
5.0 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS .......................................................................... 5
5.1 SUPPLY VOLTAGE............................................................................................................. 5
5.2 LOAD CAPACITY .............................................................................................................. 5
5.3 DIELECTRIC STRENGTH AND LIGHTNING PROTECTION .................................................... 5
5.4 PHOTOELECTRIC SENSOR ................................................................................................. 5
5.5 RELAY ............................................................................................................................. 5
6.0 ENVIRONMENTAL CHARACTERISTICS ................................................................ 5
6.1 TEMPERATURE RANGE ..................................................................................................... 5
6.2 HUMIDITY ........................................................................................................................ 5
6.3 WEATHERPROOF MOUNTING ........................................................................................... 6
6.4 WATERPROOF CASE ......................................................................................................... 6
7.0 OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS ............................................................................ 6
7.1 FACTORY SET POINTS ...................................................................................................... 6
7.2 FAILURE MODE ................................................................................................................ 6
7.3 TIME DELAY .................................................................................................................... 6
7.4 RATED LIFE ..................................................................................................................... 6
8.0 MARKING ........................................................................................................................ 6
9.0 INFORMATION SUPPLIED TO THE BIDDERS ....................................................... 6
10.0 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS .................................................................................... 7
10.1 GENERAL ......................................................................................................................... 7
10.2 TECHNICAL INFORMATION REQUESTED ........................................................................... 7
10.3 SAMPLES .......................................................................................................................... 7
11.0 PACKAGING AND SHIPMENT .................................................................................... 7
12.0 MANUFACTURING INSPECTIONS ............................................................................ 7
13.0 WARRANTY..................................................................................................................... 7
14.0 DRAWINGS ...................................................................................................................... 7

1.0 General
1.1 Scope
This specification covers the physical, electrical, environmental and operating requirements for
photoelectric controllers (PECs) used for the control of individual street light luminaires, street
light relays and street light circuits.
It is not intended that this specification restrict bidder's ideas, inventions, advances in the state of
the art, or technological improvement, and therefore all bids will be given careful consideration.
It must be noted, however, that the City of Ottawa or its agent requires sufficient explanations and
descriptions to be able to make a good value judgement. Any variation from the requirements of
this specification shall be quoted as additional bids. This specification section shall be read in
conjunction with engineering specification LGC0001.
2.0 Reference Standards

The photoelectric controllers supplied shall meet or exceed all applicable requirements in the
latest issue of the following standards:
ANSI C136.10 Locking Type Photo-control Devices and Mating Receptacles, Physical
and Electrical Interchangeability and Testing
UL 773 Plug-in, Locking Type Photo-controls for Use with Area Lighting
3.0 Approval of Source

PECs shall be supplied only by manufacturers approved by the City of Ottawa or its agent. Only
PECs evaluated and approved before submission of a quotation will be accepted. Once approved,
the manufacturer shall not change the material type or component parts without prior approval for
subsequent orders.
4.0 Physical Characteristics

4.1 Size and weight
a) Outside diameter of the base (90 mm or less)
b) Height above socket when mounted (60 mm or less)
c) Net weight (250 g or less)
4.2 Plug
To fit standard EEI-NEMA three terminal locking type receptacle. The plug blades shall be
composed of solid brass.

4.3 Case
a) High impact resistant plastic cover to protect against weather-induced electrical or
mechanical malfunction. Cover to be complete with a neoprene or cross linked polyethylene
gasket.
b) Colour (grey or clear for 120 V types)
c) The assembled PEC shall pass the resistance to impact test described in UL 773.
4.4 Window
Clear acrylic with an ultraviolet inhibitor to impede discoloration.
5.0 Electrical Characteristics

5.1 Supply voltage
120 V nominal @ 60 Hz (105 V to 130 V operating range)
5.2 Load Capacity

1000 W incandescent or 1800 V·A ballast type loads
5.3 Dielectric Strength and Lightning Protection

5 kV minimum dielectric strength between any current carrying part and the metal mounting
surface. Surge protection shall consist of a metal-oxide varistor (MOV) wired line to neutral. The
MOV shall have at 160 J, at 6500 A and at 320 V RMS rating. The clamping voltage shall be a
maximum of 810V.
5.4 Photoelectric Sensor

Shall be cadmium sulphide (CdS) cell, hermetically sealed to prevent damage due to moisture and
industrial pollutants.
5.5 Relay
Electronically controlled heavy duty, quick-response DC electromagnetic relay.
6.0 Environmental Characteristics

6.1 Temperature Range
-40oC to 65oC.
6.2 Humidity
Operate normally at 96% relative humidity.

6.3 Weatherproof Mounting
When properly attached to its mounting receptacle, the PEC neoprene or cross-linked
polyethylene gasket shall prevent beating rain, snow, dust and insects from entering the
receptacle.
6.4 Waterproof Case

Shall remain operative when subjected to water delivered at an angle of 45º to the vertical in the
direction(s) most likely to cause water to enter.
7.0 Operating Characteristics

7.1 Factory Set Points
a) Turn-on 1.0 fc (+/-20%) nominal, 2.0 fc max
b) Turn off 4.5 fc max
c) Ratio Off/On 3:1 nominal
7.2 Failure Mode

Fail "ON" contacts (i.e. normally closed) unless otherwise specified in the purchase inquiry.
7.3 Time Delay

Turn-on time delay shall be less than 1 second; turn-off delay shall be less than 5 seconds.
7.4 Rated Life

5000 "On-Off" operations minimum at rated load with no chattering of the relay contacts upon
opening and closing.
8.0 Marking
8.1 The base of the PEC shall be clearly and permanently marked with voltage and load rating
of the device.
8.2 A nameplate shall be affixed to the base of the PEC showing the manufacturer’s name or
trademark, catalogue number that specifically defines the device, and the date of
manufacture.
8.3 Provision for date coding (year and month of installation) shall be permanently moulded
into the base of the PEC.
9.0 Information Supplied To Bidders

The following minimum information will be supplied to the bidder when requesting a quotation:
a) Quantity
b) Turn-on level, if other than as specified in Section 7
c) Failure mode, if other than as specified in Section 7
d) Lightning arrester option, if other than as specified in Section 5

e) Photo-electric sensor type, if other than specified in Section 5
f) Circuitry, if other than as specified in Section 5
10.0 Instructions to Bidders

10.1 General
Suppliers shall submit with their quotations the technical information requested herein. Suppliers
who fail to provide the information requested might have their quotations rejected as incomplete.
10.2 Technical Information Requested

a) Manufacturer's reference: catalogue number of the PEC
b) Power consumption of device: when contacts open and when contacts closed
c) Average rated life
d) Quality control plan to ensure compliance of the products with this specification
10.3 Samples
If requested, the supplier shall provide a sample identical in every way to the units being
tendered. Samples will be returned to the supplier after evaluation.
11.0 Packaging And Shipment

Each PEC shall be individually packaged in a carton that will identify and protect it during
handling after it is removed from the shipping carton.
All shipping charges shall be the responsibility of the supplier and the supplier shall obtain
approval from the City of Ottawa or its agent prior to shipment.
12.0 Manufacturing Inspections

The City of Ottawa or its agent reserves the right to request and be granted permission to visit the
manufacturer's plant to inspect the photo-electric controllers and manufacturing methods during
assembly and testing.
13.0 Warranty
Manufacturers shall warrant that the photoelectric controllers furnished by them conform to all
requirements and conditions of this specification. The manufacture shall remedy, at no expense
to the City of Ottawa or its agent, defects due to faulty workmanship, material or design for a
period of four years after installation, but in no case for more than five years after receipt of the
unit by the purchaser. Any additional improvements in the warranty conditions shall be stated
with the quotation.
14.0 Drawings
LAD001A, LAD002A, LAD003A

TITLE:
APPROVED: G. Sergeant LAS0010 OF

0
REV. DATE: 2016-02-16 7
Street Lighting Auxiliary Equipment
LED Control Nodes and Gateways

REVISION SHEET

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL ......................................................................................................................... 4

1.1 SCOPE .............................................................................................................................. 4
4.1 SIZE AND WEIGHT ............................................................................................................ 4
4.2 PLUG ................................................................................................................................ 5
4.3 CASE ................................................................................................................................ 5
5.0 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS .......................................................................... 5
5.1 SUPPLY VOLTAGE............................................................................................................. 5
5.2 LOAD CAPACITY .............................................................................................................. 5
5.3 DIELECTRIC STRENGTH AND LIGHTNING PROTECTION .................................................... 5
5.4 PHOTOELECTRIC SENSOR ................................................................................................. 5
6.0 ENVIRONMENTAL CHARACTERISTICS ................................................................ 5
6.1 TEMPERATURE RANGE ..................................................................................................... 5
6.2 HUMIDITY ........................................................................................................................ 6
6.3 WEATHERPROOF MOUNTING ........................................................................................... 6
6.4 WATERPROOF CASE ......................................................................................................... 6
7.0 MARKING ........................................................................................................................ 6
8.1 GENERAL ......................................................................................................................... 6
8.3 SAMPLES .......................................................................................................................... 7
10.0 MANUFACTURING INSPECTIONS ............................................................................ 7
11.0 WARRANTY..................................................................................................................... 7
12.0 DRAWINGS ...................................................................................................................... 7

1.0 General
1.1 Scope
This specification covers the physical, electrical, environmental and operating requirements for
wireless control and monitoring node (NODE) and adaptive controls (GATEWAY) used for the
control of individual street light luminaires, street light relays and street light circuits.
It is not intended that this specification restrict bidder's ideas, inventions, advances in the state of
the art, or technological improvement, and therefore all bids will be given careful consideration.
It must be noted, however, that the City of Ottawa or its agent requires sufficient explanations and
descriptions to be able to make a good value judgement. Any variation from the requirements of
this specification shall be quoted as additional bids. This specification section shall be read in
conjunction with engineering specification LGC0001 & LLS0010.

The NODE & GATEWAY supplied shall meet or exceed all applicable requirements in the latest
issue of the following standards:
ANSI Standard C136.10 Locking Type Photo-control Devices and Mating Receptacles,
Physical and Electrical Interchangeability and Testing
ANSI Standard C136.37 Roadway and Area Lighting Equipment – Solid State Light
Sources Used in Roadway and Area Lighting
ANSI Standard C136.41 Roadway and Area Lighting Equipment – Dimming Control
Between an External Locking Type Photocontrol and Driver
UL Standard 773 Plug-in, Locking Type Photo-controls for Use with Area
Lighting
UL Standard 8750 Light Emitting Diode (LED) Equipment for use in Lighting
Products

NODES & GATEWAYS shall be supplied only by manufacturers approved by the City of
Ottawa or its agent. Only NODES & GATEWAYS that are evaluated and approved before
submission of a quotation will be accepted. Once approved, the manufacturer shall not change the
material type or component parts without prior approval for subsequent orders.

4.1 Size and weight
NODE
a) Outside diameter of the base (90 mm or less)
b) Height above socket when mounted (160 mm or less)
c) Net weight (250 g or less)
GATEWAY
a) Outside dimensions the case (390mm X 320mm X 160mm or less)
b) Net weight (5kg or less)

4.2 Plug
To fit standard EEI-NEMA 7pin terminal twist locking type receptacle. The plug blades shall be
composed of solid brass.
4.3 Case
NODE
a) Lexan SLX Polycarbonate cover to protect against weather-induced electrical or mechanical
malfunction. Complete with a neoprene or cross linked polyethylene gasket.
b) Colour (black for 120 V types)
c) The assembled node shall pass the resistance to impact test described in UL 773.
GATEWAY
a) Molded Fiberglass Polyester.
b) Colour (grey, black for 120-240 V types)

5.1 Supply voltage
120 V nominal @ 60 Hz (105 V to 130 V operating range)
5.2 Load Capacity

GATEWAY
a) 1 gateway required for up to 500 nodes (depends on typography and node locations)
5.3 Dielectric Strength and Lightning Protection

5 kV minimum dielectric strength between any current carrying part and the metal mounting
surface. Surge protection shall consist of a metal-oxide varistor (MOV) wired line to neutral. The
MOV shall have at 160 J, at 6500 A and at 320 V RMS rating. The clamping voltage shall be a
maximum of 810V.
5.4 Photoelectric Sensor

Photo Sensor for local light detection (selectable) with GPS based astronomical Dawn/Dusk
backup.
6.0 Environmental Characteristics

6.1 Temperature Range
NODE
-40oC to 50oC.
GATEWAY
-40oC to 60oC.

6.2 Humidity
Operate normally at 96% relative humidity.
6.3 Weatherproof Mounting

When properly attached to its mounting receptacle, the NODE neoprene or cross-linked
polyethylene gasket shall prevent beating rain, snow, dust and insects from entering the
receptacle.
6.4 Waterproof Case

NODE & GATEWAY to be IP66 for ingress protection and shall remain operative when
subjected to water delivered at an angle of 45º to the vertical in the direction(s) most likely to
cause water to enter.
7.0 Marking
NODE
a) The base of the NODE shall be clearly and permanently marked with voltage and load
rating of the device.
b) A nameplate shall be affixed to the base of the NODE showing the manufacturer’s name or
manufacture.
c) Provision for date coding (year and month of installation) shall be permanently moulded
into the base of the NODE.
GATEWAY
a) Within the interior of gateway a label that shall be clearly and permanently marked with
voltage and load rating of the device.
b) Enclosed in case a nameplate shall be affixed showing the manufacturer’s name or
manufacture.

8.1 General

a) Maximum number of Nodes per Gateway
b) Manufacturer's reference: catalogue number of the NODE & GATEWAY
c) Power consumption of device
d) Average rated life
e) Quality control plan to ensure compliance of the products with this specification
f) Dimming ramping process of NODE
g) Accuracy and method of energy measurement of NODE & GATEWAY

8.3 Samples

Each NODE & GATEWAY shall be individually packaged in a carton that will identify and
protect it during handling after it is removed from the shipping carton.
All shipping charges shall be the responsibility of the supplier and the supplier shall obtain
approval from the City of Ottawa or its agent prior to shipment.
10.0 Manufacturing Inspections

manufacturer's plant to inspect the NODE & GATEWAY and manufacturing methods during
assembly and testing.
11.0 Warranty
Manufacturers shall warrant that the photoelectric controllers furnished by them conform to all
to the City of Ottawa or its agent, defects due to faulty workmanship, material or design for a
period of ten years after installation. Any additional improvements in the warranty conditions
shall be stated with the quotation.
12.0 Drawings
LAD004A, LAD005A

TITLE:
RECOMMENDED: W Quackenbush NO: 1 REV:
APPROVED: G. Sergeant LBS0001 OF

7
REV. DATE: 2016-02-16 6
Streetlight Brackets and Adapters

REVISION SHEET

1 Add 4.7m bracket 2005-02-24 csm/jb
Renamed LPS0011 to LBS0011,
LBS0001, and LBS0002
Text and Drawings
2 Supersedes LBS0004 2006-01-15 csm jb

Revised scope
3 (10.0) Associated Standard 2007-01-15 jb

Drawings identified
4 (4.0) 51mm IPS tenon 2007-12-05 jb
5 Approval and Recommended 2010-01-07 se do


Drawings updated
7 2016-02-16 wq gs
© For City of Ottawa Use Only LBS0001 Rev.7 Page 2 of 6

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL ......................................................................................................................... 4

1.1 SCOPE .............................................................................................................................. 4
4.0 MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS .............................................................................. 4
6.1 GENERAL ......................................................................................................................... 5
6.2 INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED IN QUOTATIONS ............................................................. 5
6.3 SAMPLES .......................................................................................................................... 5
7.0 INSPECTION.................................................................................................................... 5
8.0 SHIPMENT ....................................................................................................................... 5
9.0 WARRANTY..................................................................................................................... 6
10.0 DRAWINGS ...................................................................................................................... 6

1.0 General
1.1 Scope
This specification covers the safety strength requirements, mounting/grounding arrangements and
size classification for tapered elliptical aluminium brackets for supporting "cobra head"
luminaries in addition to specialty brackets. This specification section shall be read in conjunction
with engineering specification LGC0001.

Brackets shall comply with all applicable requirements in the latest issues of the following
standards:
ANSI Standard C136.13 Metal Brackets for Wood Poles Used in Roadway Lighting
ASTM Standard B221 Aluminium Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes and Tubes
ASTM Standard B241 Aluminium Tubing - Aluminium Alloy Seamless Pipe and
Seamless Extruded Tube
CSA Standard S157 Strength Design in Aluminium
CSA Standard W59.2 Welded Aluminium Construction
The supplier shall be certified in accordance with the CSA Standard W47.2, certification of
companies for fusion welding of Aluminium.
The detail drawings attached to this specification complement and form part of the requirements of
this specification.

Only manufacturers approved by the City of Ottawa or its agent shall supply brackets. Only
brackets evaluated and approved before submission of a quotation will be accepted.
Each bracket supplied shall be of the same construction currently approved by the City of Ottawa or
its agent and once approved, the supplier shall not supply brackets with substantive changes in
design without prior approval.
4.0 Mechanical Requirements

The bracket arm shall be fabricated from aluminium alloy No. 6063-T4 tubing (heat treated after
fabrication to -T6) or equivalent.
The bracket shall not be torn apart or otherwise fail in such a manner as to shed an applied load of
115 kg vertical and 25 kg horizontal applied separately for ten minutes within 150mm of the
luminaire end of the bracket.
The bracket while supporting a luminaire under Class ‘C‘ loading, shall withstand without
permanent deformation, a wind load of 3.6 kg (approx. 88km/h and an ice load of 1.27 cm or
alternatively, a wind load of 18.0 kg (approx. 130 km/h) without ice.
The bracket shall be fabricated with a 51mm IPS tenon to permit safe mounting and support of a
luminaire 0.21 m2 projected area maximum and 25 kg maximum. All sharp edges and holes shall be
chamfered to remove burrs.

Bracket arm shall be rotary polished overall with No. 80 grit or otherwise finished to a smooth and
uniform appearance. Any finish other than rotary polished shall be stated at the time of quotation.
Each bracket shall have identification stamped on the pole plate showing the manufacture's name or
trademark and the date of manufacture.
5.0 Information Supplied To The Bidders

The following information will be supplied to the bidder:
a) Quantity
b) Length
c) Pole Mounting
d) Mounting Hardware (if required)
e) Grounding Provisions (if required)
f) Protection for Shipment (if required)
6.0 Instructions To Bidders
6.1 General
Suppliers shall submit with their quotations the information requested herein. Suppliers who fail to
provide the information requested might have their quotations rejected as incomplete.
6.2 Information to be provided in Quotations

Each bidder shall submit with his quotation two copies of the Outline Drawing.
6.3 Samples
If requested, the supplier shall provide a sample identical in every way to the units being tendered.
Samples will be returned to the supplier after evaluation.
7.0 Inspection
The purchaser reserves the right to act as its own inspection agency or appoint an inspection agency
to observe all steps of manufacturing testing and verification of the requirements of this
specification.
8.0 Shipment
When requested, each bracket shall be individually wrapped with paper or jute to provide
reasonable shipping protection against permanent marking of the polished surfaces.
The supplier shall obtain approval from the purchaser prior to delivery.

9.0 Warranty
The manufacturer shall warrant that the brackets furnished by them conform to all the requirements
and conditions of this specification. The manufacturer shall repair or replace, at no expense to the
purchaser, defects due to fault workmanship, material or design for a period of five years after
installation of the brackets, but in no case for more than six years after receipt of the unit by the
purchaser. All shipping charges shall be the responsibility of the supplier.
10.0 Drawings
LBD001A, LBD002A, LBD003A, LBD004A, LBD004B, LBD005A

TITLE:
APPROVED: G. Sergeant LCS0001 OF

6
REV. DATE: 2016-02-16 5
Streetlight Cable

REVISION SHEET
1 Add UV rating 2005-01-17 csm/jb

to insulation &
CSA approved.
To section 2
2 Supersedes LCS0002 2006-01-15 csm jb

Revised ‘General Construction’ to
include underground and overhead
Removed cable identification
3 RWU type added (2.1) 2007-01-15 jb

Twin wire spec revised. (2.3)
2010-01-07 se do
4 Approval and Recommended
2014-01-31 wq kw
2016-02-16 wq gs
© For City of Ottawa Use Only LCS0001 Rev.6 Page 2 of 5

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL ......................................................................................................................... 4

1.1 SCOPE .............................................................................................................................. 4
2.0 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION ....................................................................................... 4
2.1 UNDERGROUND CONDUCTOR .......................................................................................... 4
2.2 OVERHEAD STREETLIGHT CABLE .................................................................................... 4
2.3 TWIN WIRE ...................................................................................................................... 4
3.0 JACKET ............................................................................................................................ 4
4.0 CABLE AND REEL IDENTIFICATION ...................................................................... 4
4.1 REEL IDENTIFICATION ...................................................................................................... 4
5.0 GUARANTEE ................................................................................................................... 5

1.0 General
1.1 Scope
This specification covers cable for general use in a street lighting system operating at 600 volts
AC or less. This specification section shall be read in conjunction with engineering specification
LGC0001.
2.0 General Construction

2.1 Underground Conductor
Underground streetlight conductor to be copper strand RWU or TWU as per CSA standard C22.2.
Minimum conductor size shall be #8 AWG.
2.2 Overhead Streetlight Cable

Overhead streetlight cable shall be either duplex or triplex as per CSA standard C22.2- No. 129.
2.3 Twin Wire

Twin wire shall be composed of cross linked polyethylene (XLPE) insulated copper conductors
(plus bare ground where specified) all enclosed in a polyvinyl chloride (PVC) jacket, rated at 600
volts AC. Cable will be C.S.A. approved and UV rated.
2.3.1 The conductors shall be #14 AWG solid copper wire with 0.030" XLPE insulation colour
coded as follows:
Conductor Insulation
Number Colour
1 Black
2 White
3 Bare Ground (#14 AWG Solid Copper)
3.0 Jacket
The conductors (plus bare ground where specified) shall be laid in a parallel configuration and a
tight fitting jacket of 0.030" PVC shall be applied over all. The colour of the jacket shall be black
with white lettering.
4.0 Cable and Reel Identification

4.1 Reel Identification
Each reel shall have weight, length, name of the manufacturer and purchasers order number
plainly marked on a tag securely fastened to the cable and also on one end of the reel.

5.0 Guarantee
The manufacturer of cable under this specification shall agree to replace any length of cable
found to be defective in workmanship or material one year from the date of installation, but not
more than two years from the date of delivery to the user.

TITLE:
APPROVED: G. Sergeant LGC0001 OF

3
REV. DATE: 2016-02-16 20
General Conditions

REVISION SHEET

0 Original Document 2006-01-15 csm jb
Approval and Recommended 2010-01-07 se do

(1.18) Added. Commencement 2014-01-31 wq kw

2 of Work Notification
3 Approval and Recommended 2016-02-16 wq gs

© For City of Ottawa Use Only LGC0001 Rev.3 Page 2 of 20

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL CONDITIONS .............................................................................................. 4

1.1 DEFINITIONS .................................................................................................................... 4
1.2 SCOPE .............................................................................................................................. 4
1.3 PRE-QUALIFICATIONS OF CONTRACTORS ......................................................................... 4
1.4 INFORMATION REPORTING ............................................................................................... 5
1.5 WITHDRAWAL OF APPROVAL STATUS ............................................................................. 6
1.6 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS ..................................................................................... 6
1.7 EXAMINATION OF DOCUMENTS AND SITE ........................................................................ 7
1.8 PREPARING THE QUOTATION ........................................................................................... 7
1.9 SUBCONTRACTING ........................................................................................................... 7
1.10 AWARDING OF CONTRACT ............................................................................................... 7
1.11 CHANGES AFTER AWARDING CONTRACT ........................................................................ 8
1.12 INDEMNIFICATION ............................................................................................................ 8
1.13 INSURANCE - WORKER'S COMPENSATION ........................................................................ 8
1.14 INSURANCE – LIABILITY .................................................................................................. 9
1.15 CONFORMITY TO LEGISLATION ........................................................................................ 9
1.16 CONFORMITY TO SAFETY STANDARDS........................................................................... 10
1.17 PERMITS ......................................................................................................................... 10
1.18 COMMENCEMENT OF WORK NOTIFICATION ....................................................................... 10
1.19 SIGNS ............................................................................................................................. 10
1.20 SUPPLY OF MATERIALS .................................................................................................. 10
1.21 PROTECTION OF EXISTING WORKS................................................................................. 11
1.22 TRAFFIC CONTROL ......................................................................................................... 11
1.23 SUPERVISION AND EMPLOYEES ...................................................................................... 12
1.24 INSPECTIONS AND SAFETY AUDITS ................................................................................ 12
1.25 REINSTATEMENT ............................................................................................................ 12
1.26 PROTECTION OF TREES................................................................................................... 13
1.27 PROGRESS OF WORK ...................................................................................................... 14
1.28 CITY OF OTTAWA OR ITS AGENT MAY TAKE OVER AND COMPLETE ............................... 14
1.29 MEASUREMENTS FOR PAYMENT .................................................................................... 14
1.30 PAYMENTS ..................................................................................................................... 15
1.31 ACCEPTANCE ................................................................................................................. 15
1.32 GUARANTEE................................................................................................................... 15
1.33 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS ............................................................................................ 15
1.34 ABBREVIATIONS .......................................................................................................... 166
APPENDIX I - PROTECTION OF TREES...................................................................................... 17

APPENDIX II - STAFF COMPETENCIES ..................................................................................... 18
APPENDIX III - EQUIPMENT CAPABILITY ................................................................................ 19
APPENDIX IV - CONTRACTOR DUTY TO REPORT SIGNIFICANT HAZARDS CONDITIONS WITH
THE CITY OF OTTAWA OR THE ELECTRICAL SUPPLY AUTHORITY ........................................ 20

1.0 General Conditions
1.1 Definitions
As used in these specifications, the words City and Contractor shall mean respectively the City of
Ottawa and the party in contract with the City of Ottawa or its agent or the duly authorized
representative of these bodies. The Contract Inspector is the City of Ottawa or its agent who
monitors the progress of the work.
1.2 Scope
These specifications prescribe the general requirements for street lighting within City of Ottawa
service area.
1.3 Pre-qualifications of Contractors

Before contractors will be included on the list to receive tenders and requests for quotations, they
must submit various types of information for consideration and then be approved by the City of
Ottawa or its agent.
Certain projects will require Contractors to be members of appropriate contractor associations as

follows:
1.3.1 Membership in the Electrical Utilities Safety Association of Ontario (EUSA) is required
for contractors who install or maintain overhead lines, underground cables and other high
voltage facilities.
1.3.2 Membership in EUSA is preferred for contractors who install equipment pads and
pedestals, vaults, cable chambers, ducts and duct banks, poles, and trenches.
1.3.3 Membership in the Electrical Contractors Association of Ottawa (ECAO) is required for
contractors who install electrical facilities that will be owned and maintained by the
customer (as opposed to the City of Ottawa or its agent).
1.3.4 Membership in other appropriate safety or accident prevention associations or other
appropriate construction associations is preferred for all contractors.
1.3.5 To Be Submitted Annually
1.3.5.1 Names of the Contractor's in-house Health and Safety Committee or

representative and the appropriate corporate contact person.
1.3.5.1 A copy of the Contractor's corporate safety policy and details of their safety
program.
1.3.5.2 A copy of the Contractor's most recent Workplace Safety and Insurance Board
(WSIB) Experience Rating relating to the type of work for which the contractor
wishes to obtain approval. This may be a CAD-7, NEER, Cost and Frequency
Record, or Firm Detail Profile.
1.3.5.3 Membership certificates indicating the Contractor's affiliation with safety and
construction associations.

1.3.6 To Be Submitted Before Initial Acceptance by the City of Ottawa or its agent (in
addition to annual requirements)
1.3.6.1 Contractor's work experience including number of years in business, types and
numbers of jobs done previously, dollar value of jobs done previously, and the
type of work for which approval is requested.
1.3.6.2 Employees' qualifications including names of key company employees (not
contract) and areas of expertise, and years of experience (and certification) of
staff in related areas.
1.3.6.3 WSIB Clearance Certificate indicating that the Contractor is in good standing
(see Section 11).
(Note: It is incumbent on the Contractor to remain in a position of good

standing with WSIB, and a breach of this condition will constitute a
fundamental breach of contract.)
1.3.6.4 List of vehicles, major equipment and tools available to do the work and whether
they are owned, rented or leased.
1.3.6.5 Statement of availability, types and quantities of personal protective equipment.
1.3.6.6 Description of liability insurance including limits per occurrence and aggregate.
1.3.6.7 Financial statement or report for previous year.
1.3.6.8 References to include companies and contact person for which work has
previously been done.
1.4 Information Reporting

The Contractor craftsmanship approval is dependent on the approval of components such as
skilled personnel, equipment, tools, vehicles, and third party authorizations (from groups such as
ESA, MOL, MOE, MTO, EUSA, the municipality, Etc.) to carry out standard work. If any
required component is changed, added, removed, or service level lowered during the specific year
of approval, the approved contractor shall notify the City of Ottawa or its agent responsible
manager immediately in writing of their lower capabilities. Contractors have a duty to report, to
the City of Ottawa and Electrical Supply Authority in writing when working around electrical
distribution equipment, the information listed in Table 5-1. Failure to report this information will
void the contractor’s qualified status with the City Of Ottawa.
TABLE 5-1
Reportable Items
Item Reporting Frequency

Safety meeting details Upon Completion of Safety Meetings
All accidents or incidents on the City of Ottawa plant Immediately
Errors/Omissions of the City of Ottawa Records Within three (3) working days
Civil and Electrical Hazards with the City of Ottawa plant As per Appendix IV
Access Issues Immediately
Change of skilled staff, their certification, specialized
Within one (1) working day
equipment & tools, or vehicles

When requested, the Contractor shall also provide to the City of Ottawa or its agent personnel on
site the following information:
1.4.1 the job plan and associated traffic plan;

1.4.3 the communication coordination and emergency contact list;
1.4.4 the May Day and rescue plan;
1.4.5 the confined spaces entry access log; and
1.4.6 the Electrical Supply Authority’s current work protection.
1.5 Withdrawal of Approval Status

Once the Contractor has been approved by the City of Ottawa or its agent and the Electrical
Supply Authority for a specific year and type of work, the Contractor can be removed from the
approval status if:
1.5.1 The Contractor does not meet the minimum the City of Ottawa or Electrical Supply
Authority construction standards or fails to follow specific City of Ottawa and the
Electrical Supply Authority requirements;
1.5.2 he Contractor has provided the City of Ottawa or its agents and the Electrical Supply
Authority false information;
1.5.3 the Contractor fails to give the City of Ottawa or its agent the required notifications in a
timely fashion;
1.5.4 the Contractor does not keep a minimum level of competent personnel, working
equipment, specialized tools, insurance, or a satisfactory WSIB status;
1.5.5 the Contractor fails to act in a safe, professional manner;
1.5.6 the Contractor fails to maintain good standing with the local electrical supply authority
for required electrical connection protocol or working within electrical safe limits of
approach; or
1.5.7 the Contractor does not maintain, in good standing, all required licences, permits, or is in
contravention of any codes, regulations, by-laws, or laws;
1.5.8 the contractor does not have any outstanding debts to the City of Ottawa;
1.5.9 the contractor cannot meet the specific schedule timing.
1.6 Drawings and Specifications

The specification is intended to include all the instructions necessary for the proper and complete
execution of the work.
The interpretation of these specifications shall rest solely with the City of Ottawa or its agent, and
in case any doubt arises as to their meaning and correctness, work shall be discontinued until such
doubt is removed, or if continued, shall be at the risk of the Contractor.

1.7 Examination of Documents and Site
The Contractor shall be held to have ascertained personally the extent of its obligations by
calculation, by examination of the documents concerning the contract, and also by inspection of
the site or sites of the proposed works. The Contractor shall not, under any pretence whatsoever,
make any claim because of errors or omissions that may exist in the documents
associated with the contract.
1.8 Preparing the Quotation

The Contractor shall complete the "Contract Unit Prices" form, giving separate prices for the
items listed. Using the quantities and descriptions listed on the form, totals and a grand total shall
be calculated. In every case, the Contractor will be paid on a per unit basis using the contract unit
prices and the number of units completed in the field. The tender unit prices shall include
everything necessary for the completion of the work.
The interpretation of the "Description" of the unit on the "Contract Unit Prices" form rests solely
with the City of Ottawa or its agent. If any description appears ambiguous, the Contractor shall
clarify such descriptions with the City of Ottawa or its agent before preparing the quotation.
The quantity of units is an estimate and is not guaranteed to be exact. The Contractor may not
claim any damages because of any variation in quantity, and the unit prices shall remain the same,
whatever the quantity of work performed.
1.9 Subcontracting
The Contractor shall employ all workers, and individuals on contract or subcontractors shall only
be permitted with the written permission of the City of Ottawa or its agent.
1.10 Awarding of Contract

Awards will be based on the traditional considerations of price, past and current quality of work,
competency and the health and safety and environmental provisions of these bid specifications.
The lowest or any other tender will not necessarily be accepted.
The successful Contractor will be notified and, prior to the award, will be required to submit to
the City of Ottawa or its agent Purchasing Agent within 24 hours of such notification;
1.10.1 A list of the personnel who will be involved in each aspect of the work, noting their
qualifications and training (including dates). The form in Appendix II may be used for
this purpose. Staff not meeting the required competency level and not on the list shall not
be employed unless additional approvals are obtained. Note Section 22 of this
specification regarding requirements for the operating crew.
1.10.2 A list of vehicles and equipment to be used on the project. The City of Ottawa or its
agent must approve substitutions or alterations to this list. The form in Appendix III
may be used for this purpose. The list shall be accompanied by Ministry of
Transportation of Ontario (M.T.O.) mechanical fitness certificates and certification of
aerial devices per Occupational Health and Safety Act (OHSA) CAN/CSA 225 M88.

The Contractor shall certify that all vehicles (automobiles excepted) shall contain
pertinent rescue equipment, fire extinguishers and safety kits.
1.10.3 A certified cheque payable to the City of Ottawa or its agent or an Irrevocable Letter of
Credit in favour of the City of Ottawa or its agent and satisfactory to the City of Ottawa
or its agent in the amount of 10% of the grand total price submitted. The City of Ottawa
or its agent will hold this 10% back for a minimum period of 90 days without interest
following final acceptance of the work.
1.10.4 A WSIB Clearance Certificate (see Section 1.11).
1.10.5 A statement identifying what regulations applies to the work being bid on, and how the
contractor will comply.
In addition to the above submissions, before being awarded a contract, the Contractor will be
required to attend a pre-contract meeting to confirm all the practices and procedures to be
followed in completing the work and to ascertain that the Contractor's personnel and equipment
are acceptable for the project.
1.11 Changes After Awarding Contract

After receipt of the tenders, the City of Ottawa or its agent reserves the right to revise the quantity
of units. For example, as the work proceeds, the City of Ottawa or its agent reserves the right to
add additional service locations while the contractor is executing the work outlined in the
contract. When this is necessary, compensation will be provided at the rate quoted in the
Contract Unit Prices.
The Contractor must obtain written approval from the City of Ottawa or its agent before
proceeding with any work not listed for which compensation is expected.
1.12 Indemnification
The Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the City of Ottawa or its agent, their agents
and employees from and against claims, demands, losses, costs, damages, actions, suits, or
proceedings (herein called "claims") by third parties that arise out of, or are attributable to, the
Contractor's performance of the contract provided such claims are:
1.12.1 Attributable to the bodily injury, sickness, disease, or death, or injury to or destruction of
tangible property, and
1.12.2 caused by negligent acts or omissions of the Contractor or anyone for whose acts the
Contractor may be liable.
Without limiting the generality of this provision, this shall include violations of all applicable
statutes and regulations involving health and safety and environmental protection.
1.13 Insurance - Worker's Compensation

The Contractor shall provide, before award of contract, a WSIB Clearance Certificate indicating
that premiums are paid up to date.

For projects of duration longer than three months, such certificates must be updated every three
months. Failure to renew certificates will result in the immediate termination of the contract
without notice and without penalty to the City of Ottawa or its agent.
1.14 Insurance – Liability

Before being awarded a contract, the Contractor must provide a certified true copy of its liability
insurance certificate attesting its coverage by a General Liability Insurance Policy. The City of
Ottawa or its agent must be named as an additional insured by added endorsement on the
Contractor's policy. Such coverage must be maintained continuously during the course of the
work under contract, and renewal certificates must be provided as required, satisfactory in form to
the City of Ottawa or its agent. Failure by the Contractor to ensure that the required insurance
coverage remain in force during the course of the contract will result in the immediate
termination of the contract without notice and without penalty to the City of Ottawa or its agent.
The coverage shall be $5,000,000 aggregate and $2,000,000 for each occurrence involving bodily
injury or property damage.
(Note: Insurance policies shall contain coverage for environmental impairment, if the
potential for environmental impairment is identified in the Summary for Tender. Special
endorsements may be required for hazardous conditions such as blasting.)
Large dollar value contracts, which are considered of an exceptional nature, may require higher
insurance limits.
Where applicable, a Contractor will also be required to carry an all-inclusive Third Party
Automobile Liability Insurance Policy, with a minimum limit of $2,000,000.
The City of Ottawa or its agent may request, at its sole discretion, a copy of any insurance
policies including General Liability Insurance and Environmental Impairment coverage, to
determine the full extent of the coverage and any specific exclusions, prior to the start of certain
work. Such a request will be made whenever the nature of the work creates risk exposures that in
the opinion of the City of Ottawa or its agent require detailed analysis of full insurance coverage.
1.15 Conformity to Legislation

The Contractor shall conform to all applicable legislation and regulations. Without limiting the
generality of the foregoing, this shall include the Occupational Health and Safety Act (including
the Regulations for Construction Projects and Regulations for Industrial Establishments), the
Labour Act, the Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS), and the
Environmental Protection Act. It shall also include Federal and Provincial statutes and all City
regulations, ordinances, bylaws, etc., concerning excavation, erection of poles, traffic control
(M.T.O. Traffic Control Manual) and any other work required as part of the contract on City
roadways, boulevards, shoulders or sidewalks. In particular, the Contractor and its personnel
shall be familiar with and abide by the regulations of OHSA and the EUSA Rule Book regarding
entry and work in confined spaces and work in the vicinity of high voltage electrical cables and
apparatus. A breach of any of these conditions will constitute a fundamental breach of contract.
Where applicable, the requirements of the Ontario Electrical Safety Code shall apply.

1.16 Conformity to Safety Standards
The Contractor shall work in accordance with the City of Ottawa or its agent safety rules and the
safe work practices adopted by EUSA in their "Electrical Utility Safety Rules". In the event of
inconsistencies, the Contractor shall ask the City of Ottawa or its agent for a written judgement
on which rules apply.
In addition to any requirements specified by the City of Ottawa or its agent’s underground plant
locators, excavation or other work in the immediate vicinity of the local electrical control
authority’s cable chambers, transformer enclosures, pedestals and pad mounted switches must be
done in the presence of the local electrical control authority.
All work is to be done entirely at the Contractor's risk. The Contractor will be held liable for its
safety until it is accepted by the City of Ottawa or its agent and the local electrical supply
authority.
1.17 Permits
The Contractor shall obtain, at its own expense, the necessary permits for carrying out the work.
The Road Cut Permit shall be taken out in the City of Ottawa or its agents name and the original
copy forwarded to City of Ottawa or its agent.
1.18 Commencement of Work Notification

Prior to commencement of work at any construction site, the contractor responsible for
the Street light scope of work shall provide written or verbal notification to the City of
Ottawa Street Lighting Unit, 72 hours (3 days) prior to commencement of contract work,
for the purpose of coordinating required inspection.
Where the contractor has been off the site for more than one week, the contractor shall
provide to the Street Light Project Coordinator a minimum of 24 hour (1 day) verbal
notification of his intent to resume work at the job site.
1.19 Signs
For each contract, the Contractor shall provide signs that indicate, to whom it may concern:
a) That the work is being done for the City of Ottawa or its agent,
b) The name of the permit holder, and
c) The name of the person doing the work.
These signs shall be erected in a conspicuous place on the job site before the work is started and
shall remain on site during the work.
1.20 Supply of Materials

All materials required for the completion of the project, according to the specifications, shall be
supplied by the Contractor and approved by the City of Ottawa or its agent.

1.21 Protection of Existing Works
The construction drawings show the location of existing works. Neither the completeness nor the
locations can be guaranteed.
The Contractor shall ensure that no damage is caused to existing works and shall inform the
relevant owner before excavating in proximity to such works. The Contractor shall be prepared
to abide by the relevant owner's requirements in exposing the existing works and, if these works
are undermined, to abide by the relevant owner's requirements for both the temporary and
permanent support of these works without claiming additional payment from the City of Ottawa
or its agent.
Ample clearance must be allowed for the repair and removal of existing works and the Contractor
shall abide by the requirements of the relevant owner in this regard. Ducts, cable chambers,
equipment pads and foundations, pole foundations and poles installed close to other structures
shall be so located that either installation is free to move without interfering with the other. In no
case shall a gas line be allowed to pass through any structure of the City of Ottawa or its agent.
If it is found necessary to relocate any existing works, the Contractor shall notify the City of
Ottawa or its agent who will arrange for the relocation at no cost to the Contractor. However, the
Contractor must coordinate the work program with the relocation work without claiming any
additional payment from the City of Ottawa or its agent.
When an excavation is made against and deeper than an existing building foundation and/or it
becomes necessary to underpin the wall, the Contractor shall first obtain a written order from the
City of Ottawa or its agent approving such work and additional expense.
Notwithstanding any provision of this clause, the Contractor shall be held responsible for all
damage claims entered by owners of structures that are alleged to be due to the work performed
under this contract.
1.22 Traffic Control

The Contractor shall supply, erect and maintain warning devices, barricades and traffic signs
where applicable, in accordance with OHSA and with the M.T.O. Traffic Control Manual for
roadway work operations, for the protection of the work and for the safety of its employees and
the public.
All barricades shall be lit from sunset to sunrise and the lenses, reflectors and surfaces shall be
maintained in a state of good repair and kept clean at all times.
The Contractor shall notify the City Traffic Department before work is commenced, so that
arrangements may be made for the diversion of vehicular or pedestrian traffic when and if it is
necessary. The contractor must abide by all City Traffic Department regulations pertaining to
maintenance of traffic flow on City of Ottawa streets.
The Contractor shall ensure that the streets are kept clear of construction debris, including earth,
sand, stone and mud (as per City of Ottawa by-law).
The Contractor shall minimize any disruptions of traffic or of access to adjacent properties. This
includes providing and maintaining bridges and fences which may be necessary to maintain and

protect traffic on streets in which excavations are made and to maintain access to the buildings of
abutting property owners.
No crossings of streets, sidewalks, private walks, driveways, trees, etc. by tunnelling, boring or
open cutting will be allowed until permission has first been granted by the City of Ottawa or its
agent.
1.23 Supervision and Employees

The Contractor shall have on site during all working hours, adequate and competent supervision
satisfactory to the City of Ottawa or its agent.
The Contractor shall also have on site a sufficient work force to carry out the contract according
to specifications. When required by the City of Ottawa or its agent, the Contractor shall remove
from the work any employee whom the City of Ottawa or its agent may deem incompetent or
careless.
The Contractor and its employees shall cooperate at all times with the City of Ottawa or its agent
personnel in carrying out their respective duties
1.24 Inspections and Safety Audits

All material and workmanship, of whatever kind or character, shall be subject to inspection and
approval at any time by the City of Ottawa or its agent, who shall at all times have access to the
work.
No backfilling of any underground works shall be done before the City of Ottawa or its agent’s
inspector has checked the work.
From time to time the City of Ottawa or its agent will audit a project and determine whether its
bid specifications, and safety and environmental policies and practices are followed. Test
certificates of rubber gloves, insulating material and other equipment shall be maintained current
and up-to-date by the Contractor and shall be made available to the City of Ottawa or its agent on
demand. Failure of the Contractor to comply with all requirements may lead to the immediate
suspension of the project without penalty to the City of Ottawa or its agent.
For all projects where the work sub-contracted by the City of Ottawa or its agent is estimated at
$10,000 or more, or where the project lasts for more than 10 working days (whichever is greater),
contractors shall submit to the City of Ottawa or its agent project coordinator copies of their
regular completed project safety inspection reports. In addition, contractors working on any size
of project for the City of Ottawa or its agent shall submit copies of all accident/incident reports
for those projects.
1.25 Reinstatement
The permanent reinstatement of PUBLIC roadway and sidewalk surfaces may be done by
the City of Ottawa or its agent, or the Contractor, whichever is specified in the tender.
a) If the City of Ottawa or its agent is to do the reinstatement, the Contractor shall
notify the City of Ottawa or its agent Inspector when the cuts are ready for reinstatement.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the maintenance of the cuts until they have been
reinstated by the City of Ottawa or its agent, and during this time shall ensure that the trench
grade is kept reasonably close to the surrounding grade so that vehicles and pedestrians can
negotiate the cuts at normal speed and without hazard.
b) If the Contractor is to do the reinstatement, the work shall be carried out in accordance with
the City Road Activity By-Law.
c) All areas of proposed work shall be inspected by the City of Ottawa or its agent, and the
Contractor prior to starting excavation in order to make known to all parties the limits of
the proposed work and the existing conditions of the affected municipal surfaces.
Reinstatement of municipal surfaces outside the established limits shall proceed only after
approval by the City of Ottawa or its agent.
d) All reinstatement or public roadways and walkways done by the Contractor shall be subject
to inspection and approval by the City Engineer or their duly authorized representative.
Only after this approval will the City of Ottawa or its agent accept an invoice for this work.
The permanent reinstatement of PRIVATE concrete or asphalt driveways and walkways,

whether or not they are located on public property, may be done by the Contractor or the City of
Ottawa or its agent, whichever is specified in the tender.
e) If the City of Ottawa or its agent is to do the reinstatement, the Contractor shall notify the
City of Ottawa or its agent Inspector when the cuts are ready for reinstatement. The
Contractor shall be responsible for maintenance of the cuts until they have been reinstated,
and during this time shall ensure that the trench grade is kept reasonable close to
surrounding grade so that vehicles and pedestrians can negotiate the cuts at normal speed
and without hazard.
The permanent reinstatement of PRIVATE driveways and walks (excluding concrete and
asphalt), lawns, gardens, etc. whether or not they are located on public or private property, shall
be done by the Contractor, who shall maintain these areas until they have been restored to their
original condition or better and to the satisfaction of the party involved. All such reinstatement
shall be included in the Contractor's unit prices.
f) Where sod must be removed, it shall be handled and replaced carefully. If the original sod
is unsuitable for re-use, new sod of the type removed shall be used. Topsoil shall be kept
separate from other excavated material so that it can be replaced properly. When
excavating through a lawn, the excavated material shall be placed on a tarpaulin or canvas
to prevent damage to the lawn. If there is a possibility of ruts being formed by moving
heavy equipment over a lawn or newly seeded area, a runway of planks shall be laid.
g) All permanent asphalt reinstatement of driveways and walks shall be done with hot mix and
rolled with an acceptable roller to provide quality and appearance equal to or better than the
original.
h) After a job on a City right-of-way has been completed, and before the Contractor moves the
work force away from the area, the City inspector shall be called to the site to verify the job
has been cleaned up satisfactorily
1.26 Protection of Trees

Refer to Appendix I, "Corporation of the City of Ottawa Specifications for the Protection of City
Owned Trees During Utility Installations". These specifications shall apply to all work in the
proximity of trees, regardless of ownership. In addition to the requirements of Appendix I,
City of Ottawa or its agent may require the Contractor to place ductwork by tunnelling or boring
under large diameter tree roots.
1.27 Progress of Work

The work shall be carried out in such order as the City of Ottawa or its agent may decide. No
work shall be performed on Sundays or legal holidays without the specific consent of the City of
Ottawa or its agent. Also, no work shall be performed under weather conditions that, in the
judgement of the City of Ottawa or its agent, will not allow satisfactory results.
The City of Ottawa or its agent may, whenever it may deem necessary, order that the work be
suspended and the Contractor shall not be entitled to make any claim on account of such
suspension. When the work is suspended, the Contractor will protect the works from damages,
deterioration and accidents.
The Contractor shall employ such staff, plant and methods as will ensure a satisfactory quality of
work and rate of progress. If at any time such methods or appliances appear to be inadequate, the
City of Ottawa or its agent may order the Contractor to improve their character and the Contractor
must conform to such order, but failure on the part of the City of Ottawa or its agent to make such
demand shall not relieve the Contractor of any obligations.
No work shall be carried out on any project until the Contractor notifies the City of Ottawa or its
agent project representative of the project start date and time.
The contractor shall contact the City of Ottawa or its agent, between 8:00 am and 8:30 am each
morning to notify the City of Ottawa or its agent of the work location(s) for that day.
The contractor between his crews and the Electrical Supply Authority must provide a means of
communication, either by cellular phone or by 2-way radio.
1.28 City of Ottawa or its agent May Take over and complete
If at any time after commencement of the work the City of Ottawa or its agent is of the opinion
that the work is not being carried out in accordance with the contract or is not proceeding in a
satisfactory manner, the City of Ottawa or its agent, after having given the Contractor seven days
notice of its intention, shall be entitled to and may, without further notice, proceed to complete
the work at the expense of the Contractor.
1.29 Measurements for Payment

The term "rock" refers to any solid rock or boulder that may be adequately removed only by the
use of quarrying methods recognized and approved by the City of Ottawa or its agent.
Ducts are measured from one end of the duct run to the other along its centre-line in linear
metres.
Trenches are measured from pole to pole, pole to duct, duct to cable chamber, etc., along the
centre-line in linear metres.

Pole risers include the specified conduits on the pole; the ninety-degree bends at the base of the
pole, and the concrete encasement.
The total area of reinstatement shall be measured in the field by the City of Ottawa or its agent at
the completion of the work, in the presence of the successful contractor, as a basis for payment.
The Contractor shall take the necessary measurements and calculate quantities to be billed for
each job. These quantities shall be submitted on a Streetlight Installation Sheet and approved by
a representative of the City of Ottawa or its agent before the invoice is submitted.
When requested by a representative of the City of Ottawa or its agent, the Contractor shall
provide a person to assist in securing field measurements to determine the units and the accurate
location of the various structures for the City of Ottawa or its agent records.
1.30 Payments
The work will be divided into small jobs and normally the City of Ottawa or its agent will pay the
Contractor for each job only after final acceptance of that job. In these cases, only one invoice is
to be submitted for each job. However, to simplify paper work, a number of jobs may be grouped
in one invoice.
On jobs where delays are encountered, progressive billing will be allowed. The amount to be paid
under progressive billing shall be at the sole discretion of the City of Ottawa or its agent, but in
no case shall invoices on a job be submitted more frequently than once a month.
1.31 Acceptance
No part of the installation will be accepted unless inspected by the City of Ottawa or its agent
inspector and the City of Ottawa or its agent is satisfied that it fully complies with the true
meaning and intent of the specifications. Such acceptance, however, shall not impair any claim
that the City of Ottawa or its agent may have for the replacement of defective work or material.
1.32 Guarantee
The Contractor shall guarantee all work for one year after its acceptance by the City of Ottawa
or its agent, during which time any imperfections shall be made good at no cost to the City of
The Contractor shall also guarantee the compaction of the backfills of all his excavations and
guarantee any reinstatement of surfaces as per the applicable "Road Cut" By-Laws.
1.33 Successors and Assigns

The contract (composed of a Quotation submitted by the Contractor and a Purchase Order issued
to the Contractor by the City of Ottawa or its agent) shall inure to the benefit of and be binding
upon the parties thereto, and except as otherwise provided therein, upon the executors,
administrators, successors, and assigns. Notwithstanding this provision, the parties reserve the
right to approve of assignments, and such assignments may be denied without reason.

1.34 Abbreviations
Associations:
AASHTO American Association of the State Highway and Transportation officials

ANSI American National Standards Institute
ANSI/IES American National Institute/Illuminating Engineering Society
ASTM American Standards of Testing Materials
CSA Canadian Standards Association
ECAO Electrical Contractors Association of Ottawa
EEI-NEMA Electrical & Electronic Institute – National Electrical Manufacturers Association

ESA Electrical Safety Authority
EUSA Electrical Utilities Safety Association
MOL Ministry of Labour
MOE Ministry of Environment
MTO Ministry of Transportation of Ontario
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
OHSA Occupational Health and Safety Association
UL Underwriters Laboratory
WHMIS Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System
WSIB Workplace Safety Insurance Board
General:
EPA Effective Projected Area

HID High Intensity Discharge
HPS High Pressure Sodium
INC Incandescent
MH Metal Halide
MV Mercury Vapour
M-CO-II Medium, Cut-off, Type II distribution
M-CO-III Medium, Cut-off, type III distribution
M-FCO-II Medium, Full cut-off, Type II distribution
M-FCO-III Medium, Full cut-off, Type III distribution
M-SCO-II Medium, Semi cut-off, Type II distribution
M-SCO-III Medium, Semi cut-off, Type III distribution
OCV Open Circuit Voltage
PEC Photo-electric Controller
PVC Polyvinyl Chloride

Appendix I - Protection of Trees
City of Ottawa Department of Recreation and Parks Specifications for the

Protection of City Owned trees during Utility Installations
1. PROTECTIVE MEASURES BEFORE EXCAVATION STARTS
Where a tree is located on a street, lane or other City property within 8' of the area where work is to
be executed, the contractor shall:
a) Before commencing any work notify the Arborist as to date of commencement. He shall
take precautions to protect the trunk and limit damage to the roots.
b) Before work commences all trees shall be completely planked around, with 1" plank or
heavier, or protected with any other comparable material acceptable to the City Arborist.
Planks should extend up the main part of the trunk at least 8' and should be wired to each
other, not to the tree.
NOTE: Depending on the method of excavation the 8' distance may be reduced by special
arrangement with the Department of Recreation and Parks.
2. PROTECTIVE MEASURES DURING EXCAVATION
a) The excavation around trees shall not be larger or deeper than strictly necessary.
b) All tree roots shall be cut flush during the excavation work, and any roots of 1" diameter or
larger shall be treated with tree preservative as soon as the excavation is completed.
c) The exposed areas shall be covered with burlap or any other material that will reduce the
effect of the sun or drying out of the soil.
3. PROTECTIVE MEASURES AFTER CONSTRUCTION
a) Backfilling of the excavated area shall be done as soon as possible.

b) The excavated area shall be backfilled with soil.
c) Extensive watering around the trees shall be done as soon as the excavation has been
backfilled.
4. TRIMMING OF THE TREES AFTER COMPLETION OF THE

CONSTRUCTION
a) Any branches damaged during the excavation shall be trimmed properly and the cuts 1/2"
diameter and over shall be treated with a tree preservative.
b) Where the natural balance between the root and branch system has been affected seriously,
experienced tree trimming personnel shall restore this balance by trimming.
5. BLASTING OPERATIONS
Where blasting operations are proposed within 12' of City owned trees, the contractor shall
contact the City of Ottawa Arborist before carrying out such operations.

Appendix II - Staff Competencies
Electrical Confined
Journeyman/ Years Certification First Traffic Rescue
Name Trade Safety CPR Space Whmis
Apprentice Experience Number Aid Control Techniques
Awareness Entry

Appendix III - Equipment Capability
MTO Dielectric Test CAN/CSA 225 M-88

Age
Vehicle # Description Other
(year)
Cert.# Date Y/N Date Y/N Date

Appendix IV - Contractor Duty to Report Significant Hazards Conditions
with the City of Ottawa or the Electrical Supply Authority
From time to time, the City of Ottawa or the Electrical Supply Authority has safety hazards and
significant conditions with its electrical distribution plant, which requires promote response. The
following list is the minimum equipment conditions that would require the Contractor to report the City
of Ottawa or Electrical Supply Authority within a specified time:
Safety Hazards to be reported Immediately to the City of Ottawa or the Electrical Supply
Authority’s Dispatch
 Openings on support structures, pad mounted switches and transformers, and indoor vaults where a
small child could insert an arm or stick
 Broken electrical station fence / gate
 Missing locks or unlocked equipment
 Dangling overhead wire within 15' from grade
 Exposed underground high voltage cable at grade where no excavation is occurring
 Missing / damaged cable guards
 Electrical tingle / shock on contact with electrical plant
 Electrical plant arcing, sparking, or exploding
 Electrical plant very hot to touch
 Oil spill / stains
 Damaged high voltage insulation on conductors
 Sharp edges from metal objects within reach of the public
Significant Conditions to be Reported Within the Next Working Day to the City of Ottawa or the
Electrical Supply Authority’s Service Desk
 Support structures (poles, manholes, transformer bases, etc.) that are visibly weak
 Large ground depressions around support structures
 Broken ground wires
 Broken pole anchor
 Graffiti
 Obstructions or access issues to equipment

TITLE:
RECOMMENDED: W Quackenbush NO: 1 REV:
APPROVED: G. Sergeant LGS0001 OF

6
REV. DATE: 2016-02-16 8
General Servicing of the Existing

Street Lighting System

REVISION SHEET
1 Added sections 4.0 and 5.0 2005-02-24 csm/jb

Information Report and
Withdrawal of Approval Status.
Text and Drawings Changes
2 General Conditions referenced in 2006-01-15 csm jb

Revised pre-requisites for work
Removed Appendices I, II, & IV and
renamed Appendix III
3 (6.0) Associated Standard Drawings 2007-01-15 jb

identified

4 authorization changed 2010-01-07 se do
(6.0) Associated Standard Drawings 2014-01-31 wq kw

5 removed
2016-02-16 wq gs
© For City of Ottawa Use Only LGS0001 Rev.6 Page 2 of 8

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL ......................................................................................................................... 4

1.1 SCOPE .............................................................................................................................. 4
2.0 SUPPLY OF MATERIALS ............................................................................................. 4
3.0 SUPERVISION AND EMPLOYEES ............................................................................. 4
4.0 EQUIPMENT .................................................................................................................... 5
5.0 PROCEDURES FOR TROUBLE SHOOTING ............................................................ 5
APPENDIX I ................................................................................................................................. 7

1.0 General
As used in these specifications, the words City and Contractor shall mean respectively the City of
Ottawa and the party in contract with the City of Ottawa or its agent or the duly authorized
representative of these bodies. The Contract Inspector is the City of Ottawa or its agent who
monitors the progress of the work.
1.1 Scope
These specifications cover the general requirements for servicing the street light system in the
City of Ottawa service area. This specification section shall be read in conjunction with
engineering specification LGC0001.

The City of Ottawa or its agent will supply at their warehouse all materials required
3.0 Supervision and Employees

There are two classifications for personnel involved only with street light work.
1. Streetlight re-lamper and globe washer

2. Streetlight maintainer
The following are minimum pre-requisites for the work.
Street light Relamper and Globe Washer
Shall be competent by virtue of training and experience in the following:
a) Use of aerial device

b) Use and maintenance of log books
c) Vehicle inspection including aerial device
d) Procedures for bucket evacuation when working alone
e) Use and care of personal protective equipment - e.g. clothing, hardhat, eye and foot
protection, etc.
f) Use of fall protection equipment
g) First aid
h) Traffic control - MTO (short duration)
i) Use and care of rubber gloves
j) Electrical awareness, system knowledge and voltage recognition
k) Limits of approach to transformers, primary drops, primary risers, etc.
l) Proper handling and disposal of used lamps, broken glass, globes, etc.
Note: This worker shall not do any hands-on work on any voltage, and shall not work
within 3.0 m of a conductor or object energized over 750 volts unless approved by
the Electrical Supply Authority

Street Light Maintainer
a) Shall have completed a certified level II training from a recognized Power Lineman training
program which includes:
1. Limits of approach
2. Street light circuits
3. Aerial devices
4. Electrical theory
5. Electrical awareness
6. Personal protective equipment
b) Hands-on training which includes:
1. Energized secondary work

2. Connecting relays
3. Connecting ballasts etc.
Note: Streetlight maintainers may work only on secondary voltage equipment, i.e. relays,
ballasts, photoelectric controllers, secondary connections etc. As well, they shall
install street light arms no closer than 3.0 m to primary conductors. Work within
the 3.0 m safe limits of approach shall require written authorization from the
Electrical Supply Authority. They are allowed to apply rubber blankets or line hose
to conductors or apparatus energized below 750 volts.
For work inside safe limit of approach >750V, the contractor shall be “Approved” by the
Electrical Supply Authority.
4.0 Equipment
The Contractor shall provide a truck equipped with an insulated aerial lift device and bucket that
is adequate to reach all streetlights on the system.
The Contractor shall also provide all the necessary vehicles for the transportation of personnel
and equipment.
A flashing lane changer (arrow board) shall be mounted on the rear of the vehicle at a height of
1.75 m from the bottom of the sign to the road. The sign shall meet Ministry of Transportation of
Ontario specifications pertaining to such signage. The vehicle shall also be equipped with a
system of four way flashing lights and a rotating light on the roof at the rear left corner.
5.0 Procedures For Trouble Shooting

The following are some considerations for trouble shooting street light outages. For details steps,
refer to the flow charts in Appendix I.
5.1 What is the nature of the complaint?
Multiple lights out or just one, cycling on and off, Etc. Knowing this type of information
will be a tremendous help in zeroing in on the problem.

5.2 What is the most likely thing to fail?
The lamp. Unless there is good information to indicate that there is no lamp problem, first
replace the lamp and blind the PEC to test the new lamp. The rationale for always
changing the lamp is that it may be at its end of life cycling mode.
Note: When changing a lamp at night, remove the PEC to de-energize the
luminaire. This turns off the high voltage pulses for personal safety and
protection of the lamp and socket.
5.3 Although photoelectric controllers (PEC) normally fail in the ON state, there is a
possibility that their contacts have burned open. Change the PEC.
5.4 Perform a quick visual inspection inside the luminaire to check for burned wiring,
overheated ballast, flashed lamp socket, loose wiring connections, etc. Depending on the
problem, it may be necessary to change the luminaire.
5.5 Check voltage (at terminal block, then hand hole or overhead secondary) to ensure that
fuses and wiring are good.
5.6 In the unlikely event that the new lamp was defective, replace lamp again with another new
one and double-check wiring connections.
5.7 Replace luminaire as a last resort.

START
Appendix I Light Out
Aluminium & Concrete Poles

NOT OK
3’ Safe Limit of
Approach
OK
Change Lamp
Check orientation of P.E.C
WORKS
Blind P.E.C.
DOESN’T WORK
P.E.C. was the WORKS

problem, go re- install Change blind
original good lamp P.E.C.
DOESN’T WORK
Lineman Required
NOT OK Visual
Change Luminaire
Inspection inside
luminaire
OK
WORKS
NOT
OK Check Voltage Check
Replace OK Probable Cable
at terminal block NOT OK Voltage line
Starter Fault
side of inline
fuse
DOESN’T
WORK OK
WORKS
Change Check
Lamp Voltage load Change
OK
side of inline Fuse
OK
fuse NOT
OK
DOESN’T
WORK OK
NOT
Check for bad or OK
burned connections
Replace
Luminaire
Repair as required
END
Luminaire working
Return defective material to City of

Ottawa Streetlight Maintenance Provider
Note problem on report sheet and return to

Fill in report sheet and return it City of Ottawa Streetlight Maintenance
to City of Ottawa Streetlight Provider
Maintenance Provider

Appendix I (Cont’d) START
Wood Poles Light Out
3’ Safe Limit NOT OK

of Approach
OK
Change Lamp
Check orientation of P.E.C
Blind P.E.C.
WORKS
DOESN’T WORK
P.E.C. was the WORKS

problem, go re- install Change blind
original good lamp P.E.C.
DOESN’T WORK
Lineman Required
NOT OK Visual
Change Luminaire Inspection inside
luminaire
OK
NOT NOT
WORKS OK OK
Check Check
Replace Check Voltage Voltage line connections on
Starter at terminal block side of in- secondary
OK NOT OK line fuse
OK
DOESN’T WORK
OK
NOT
OK Check
Replace
Fuse
Fuse
WORKS
Change
OK
Lamp
OK
DOESN’T WORK
NOT
OK
Replace fuse holder
Replace
Luminaire
END
Luminaire working
Return defective material to City

of Ottawa Streetlight Note problem on report
Maintenance Provider sheet and return to City
of Ottawa Streetlight
Fill in report sheet and return

it to City of Ottawa Streetlight

TITLE:
APPROVED: G. Sergeant LIS0001 OF

7
REV. DATE: 2016-02-16 8
Installation of Ducts, Poles, Bases
And Associated Streetlight Equipment

REVISION SHEET

1 Revised c/p installation 2005-02-24 jb/csm
Text and Drawings
2 Supersedes LIS0003 2006-01-15 csm jb

Wiring: removed ‘supply of
encapsulated connectors’
3 Associated Standard Drawings 2007-01-15 jb

identified (4.0).
Poles (2.4) Added installation
requirement.
4 Wiring (2.6) Added in-line fuse. 2007-12-18 jb

Trenches (2.2) Added marker tape.
Poles (2.4) Added swamp cribbing.

6 (2.4)Right of Way Crossings and (2.8)

Inspections: Added 2014-01-31 wq kw
(4.0) Associated Standard Drawings
updated

© For City of Ottawa Use Only LIS0001 Rev.7 Page 2 of 8

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL ......................................................................................................................... 4

1.1 SCOPE .............................................................................................................................. 4
1.2 SUPPLY OF MATERIALS .................................................................................................... 4
2.0 CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS ......................................................................... 4
2.1 LOCATIONS ...................................................................................................................... 4
2.2 TRENCHES ........................................................................................................................ 4
2.3 DUCTS.............................................................................................................................. 5
2.4 RIGHT OF WAY CROSSING ................................................................................................ 6
2.5 POLES .............................................................................................................................. 6
2.6 CONCRETE BASES AND HAND HOLES ............................................................................... 6
2.7 WIRING ............................................................................................................................ 6
2.8 INSPECTIONS .................................................................................................................... 6
2.9 BACKFILLING AND REINSTATEMENT ................................................................................ 7
3.0 MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................................... 7
3.1 CONCRETE ....................................................................................................................... 7
4.0 DRAWINGS ...................................................................................................................... 8

1.0 General
1.1 Scope
These specifications cover the general requirements for the installation of ducts, poles and
associated equipment to be used for street lighting. These installations will normally be minor in
nature. This specification section shall be read in conjunction with engineering specification
LGC0001.

The City of Ottawa or its agent will supply Streetlight Conduit Hand Hole & Maintenance Hole
Frame/Covers. All other material required for the completion of the work, according to the
specification, shall be supplied by the Contractor.
2.0 Construction Specifications

2.1 Locations
The construction drawings show the approximate location of the trenches, ducts and poles. No
excavation is to be made until the City of Ottawa or its agent has provided to the Contractor
benchmarks in the field to permit the accurate location of the proposed works. The Contractor
shall set stakes or lines to indicate this location and contact utilities for a stakeout of their
underground plant prior to making any cuts. The locations of equipment may be adjusted by the
City of Ottawa or its agent to eliminate conflicts with driveways, walks, fire hydrants, and other
utilities as well as to improve aesthetics where possible.
2.2 Trenches
Before trenching begins the work area will have been graded to within 150 mm of finished grade
so each trench shall be excavated for the full depth shown on the electrical standard drawing
details.
The trench shall be of a minimum width to allow for the indicated duct or cable installation. Cuts
in roadways, sidewalks and other paved surfaces shall be made in such a way so as to avoid
breaking or damaging the surrounding pavement.
In all cases where the excavated material is not to be reused for the backfilling of the trench, such
material shall be loaded immediately and removed from the site.
In the case where wiring is to be direct-buried in the trench, the Contractor shall inform the City
of Ottawa or its agent 24 hours in advance of when the trench will be ready, so that the City of
Ottawa or its agent may install the wire and so that the trench can be backfilled promptly.
75mm (3”) wide, “RED” coloured marker tape shall be installed, 305mm (12”) below grade.

2.3 Ducts
Ducts of the size and type shown on the drawings shall be installed in the trench in the manner
indicated on the electrical standard drawing details. The ducts shall be assembled as nearly as
possible with watertight joints.
Three different types of joints are normally used:
1. Fibreglass reinforced epoxy ducts may be joined using the bell coupling which is
supplied on one end of the duct or, when necessary, using a rigid PVC coupling
sleeve or Fibreglass reinforcing epoxy coupling sleeve.
2. Rigid PVC duct is joined using a rigid PVC coupling sleeve.
3. Flexible (thick wall) Polyethylene duct is joined by cutting a sleeve from the next
larger size (i.e. 50mm flexible duct is used to sleeve 38mm flexible duct) and
clamping it in place with hose clamps.
Note: Non-collapsible corrugated flexible duct with inner liner is an option to polyethylene
duct.
Where possible, no ducts shall be laid until the trench has been opened between termination
points of the duct run. Where this is not possible, test holes shall be opened at points along the
line of the proposed duct so that the nature and location of obstructions may be determined.
Where possible, the bottom of the trench shall be graded so that the duct run will have no sags or
depressions in which water will accumulate.
Normally PVC Type DBII connections will be held in place by joining them to the straight duct
using PVC couplings with joints cemented using PVC adhesive appropriate to the duct type.
When indicated on the construction drawings or required in the field, a concrete envelope shall be
poured around the duct. Such envelope shall be 20 MPa concrete allowing a separation between
ducts of 25 mm where applicable and an outside cover of 75 mm. Duct support devices shall be
used to secure duct in place and allow concrete to surround ducts. When duct is set into rock, the
rock cut shall be filled with concrete ensuring a concrete cover of 75 mm above the duct.
The Contractor shall backfill the duct leaving the ends exposed for pulling in the wires. The
Contractor shall then ensure that each duct is clean and free from obstacles after which he shall
install 8mm polypropylene pull rope. When the pull rope is in place, the Contractor shall cap
each end of the duct and notify the City of Ottawa or its agent that the wires can be installed.
2.4 Right of Way Crossings
Road crossing and subsequent concrete pours shall be scheduled for completion between the
working hours to 8:00 am to 4:00 pm, Monday through Friday to allow for inspection.
Where project timelines do not permit the contractor to observe the above schedule for
completion, with prior approval of the street lighting coordinator, the contractor may complete
the concrete pour by providing dated photos of the prepared trench and a copy of the concrete
ticket to the coordinator. The contractor shall then provide steel plates across the opening to the
satisfaction of the project supervisor. The road crossings may not be backfilled until inspected. At

the discretion of the Street light coordinator, he may delegate responsibility of inspection to
another qualified City of Ottawa worker.
Should the contract not allow for completion of the road crossings under either of the above
conditions, the contractor may request from the City of Ottawa Project Manager, to the Street
Light Coordinator, written authorization that the crossings to be completed and inspected outside
normal working hours.
2.5 Poles
Poles shall be installed in the manner detailed on the City of Ottawa standard electrical drawing
Details. Connection to third party poles with street light brackets or electrical supply devices
(such as protective disconnects) shall be in conformance to the electrical supply authority and the
electrical safety authority requirements.
Light fixtures must be installed at the time poles are erected.
Where high water tables create unstable soil conditions, swamp cribbing shall be used.
2.6 Concrete Bases and Hand holes

Poured concrete bases for streetlight poles and street lighting mounted on bridge decking shall be
constructed as shown on the City of Ottawa standard electrical drawing details.
Excavation for the base shall be the minimum size to allow for placing and removing forms.
Where rock is encountered, the base shall be constructed in a manner specified by the City of
Where indicated on the contract drawings, concrete conduit and maintenance hand holes shall be
installed to accommodate the installation and repairs of street light conductors. Refer to the
electrical standard drawing details.
2.7 Wiring
The installing Contractor shall be responsible to identify all streetlight conductors installed as part
of the contract. Circuit identification must be completed at all conduit and maintenance hand
hole locations and all power supply locations where final connections are to be completed by the
Electrical Supply Authority. All connections will be installed within the pole hand hole using
encapsulated connectors and an in-line fuse with fuse holder. The fuse will be installed in series
between the luminaire and encapsulated connector.
Encapsulated connectors and in-line fuse assemblies shall be supplied only by a manufacturer
approved by the City of Ottawa or its Agent. Only fuse assemblies and connectors evaluated and
approve before a submission of a quotation will be accepted. Once approved, the contractor shall
not change the material type or component parts without prior approval for subsequent orders.

2.8 Inspections
City of Ottawa Street Lighting reserves the right of inspection at each project site to ensure
adherence to City specifications and other authorities with jurisdiction.
Provide minimum 24 hour verbal notification, to the Street Light Coordinate for the project, at
the following key points of construction.
1. Start up of the project on site. (3 day notice required)
2. Resumption of work at the job site.
3. Preparation of road crossings prior to concrete pour.
4. Trenching and installation of duct prior to backfilling.
5. Installation of panels, disconnects, grounding equipment prior to backfilling.
6. Installation of pre-fabricated bases, street light poles, luminaries, photocells.
Failure to provide notification for inspection on site will result in the City of Ottawa Street
lighting unit taking measures as required, to ensure the contractor’s installation is in compliance
with City of Ottawa specifications. These measures may include, at the discretion of the Project
Coordinator, daylighting the entire installation for which the contractor has failed to provide
notification.
2.9 Backfilling and Reinstatement

All backfilling must be done in conformance with the regulations of the City of Ottawa and as
further detailed on the electrical standard detail drawings. In no case shall rock or broken
concrete be used in the backfill. All backfill must be tamped so that settlement will not occur.
Reinstatement shall be made as detailed in the General Conditions engineering specification

LGC0001, Section 1.24.
On completion of the work, all debris and surplus excavated material shall be removed from the
site leaving it neat and tidy and at the same grades as before the contract was begun.
3.0 Material Specifications

3.1 Concrete
Unless otherwise specified, all concrete used throughout the work shall have a minimum
compressive strength of 20 Mpa for duct in trenches and 30 Mpa for bases at twenty-eight days
test and an 80 mm maximum slump. Concrete with 6% minimum air entrainment shall be used
for concrete bases. Refer to the electrical standard drawing details for additional information.
Ready-mix concrete that has not been placed within a maximum of sixty minutes after its arrival
at the site shall be rejected.
All concrete must be deposited in such a manner as to avoid segregation of the aggregate, and
shall be thoroughly compacted and worked around reinforcing rods and ducts and into all parts of
the forms by spading with suitable paddles.
At the request of the City of Ottawa or its agent, samples of the concrete may be required for
testing. No concrete shall be placed at temperatures below -12°C.

For temperatures between -12°C and +4°C the following conditions shall apply:
a) The temperature of the concrete, when deposited, shall be not less than +16°C nor more
than +27°C.
b) Before depositing concrete on any surface, all snow and ice shall be removed, using heat
where necessary.
c) Concrete shall not be placed on, or against any surface, that is at a temperature less than
+4°C.
As soon as the concrete is placed, it shall be properly insulated from the cold.
4.0 Drawings
LID001A, LID002A, LID002B, LID002C, LID002D, LID002E, LID002F, LID002G, LID003A,
LID003B, LID004A, LID004B, LID004C, LID004D, LID004E, LID004F, LID004G, LID005A,
LID005B, LID005C, LID005D LID005E. LID005F, LID005G, LID005H, LID006A. LID006B.
LID006C. LID007A. LID007B. LID007C.

TITLE:
APPROVED: G. Sergeant LLS0001 OF

7
REV. DATE: 2016-02-16 9
HID Coach Style Luminaire

for all new construction refer to LLS0010

REVISION SHEET
1 Add Lumec LU40, 2005-02-24 csm/jb

adapter brackets, and Nema
Labelling.
Text and Drawing
2 Title renamed 2006-01-15 csm jb

General Conditions & Electrical
Characteristics referenced in separate
specification
Light distribution: removed M-SCO-III
& bulb type

identified (11.0)
Revised Marking (4.6.4)
Added reference to electrical
characteristics (4.12)
4 Included Full Cutoff & Type III (4.10) 2007-12-05 jb

(11.0) Associated Standard Drawings

6 updated. 2014-01-31 kw

© For City of Ottawa Use Only LLS0001 Rev.7 Page 2 of 9

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL ......................................................................................................................... 4

1.1 SCOPE .............................................................................................................................. 4
4.1 MOUNTING ARRANGEMENTS ........................................................................................... 4
4.2 TERMINAL BLOCK AND GROUND LUG ............................................................................. 5
4.3 CONNECTION DIAGRAM ................................................................................................... 5
4.4 BALLAST, STARTER AND CAPACITORS ............................................................................. 5
4.5 LAMP SOCKET.................................................................................................................. 5
4.6 MARKING ......................................................................................................................... 5
4.7 HOUSING .......................................................................................................................... 6
4.8 TWIST LOCK RECEPTACLE ............................................................................................... 6
4.9 REFRACTOR PANELS ........................................................................................................ 6
4.10 LIGHT DISTRIBUTION PATTERN ....................................................................................... 6
4.11 COLOUR AND FINISHING .................................................................................................. 6
4.12 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS ...................................................................................... 6
5.0 INSPECTION.................................................................................................................... 6
6.0 PACKAGING AND SHIPPING ...................................................................................... 7
7.0 WARRANTY..................................................................................................................... 7
8.1 GENERAL ......................................................................................................................... 7
8.2 EXCEPTIONS ..................................................................................................................... 7
8.3 MODIFICATIONS ............................................................................................................... 7
8.5 SAMPLES .......................................................................................................................... 8
9.0 MAINTENANCE PARTS ................................................................................................ 8
10.0 INFORMATION SUPPLIED TO THE BIDDER ......................................................... 9
11.0 DRAWINGS ...................................................................................................................... 9

1.0 General
1.1 Scope
This specification covers the supply of High Pressure Sodium (HPS) luminaires complete with
integral ballast for post-top and side mounting. This specification shall be read in conjunction
with engineering specification LGC0001 and LLS0005.

Luminaires shall comply with all applicable requirements in the latest issues of the following
standards:
ANSI/IES RP-8 Roadway Lighting

ANSI Standard C78.1353 Specifications for 70W S62 High Pressure Sodium Lamps
ANSI Standard C82.9 Definitions for HID Lamp Ballasts and Transformers
ANSI Standard C136.10 Lock-type Photocontrol Devices and Mating Receptacles
ANSI Standard C136.15 Field Identification of High Intensity Discharge Lamps in
Luminaires
CSA Standard C22.2, No.9 Luminaires
CSA Standard C22.2, No. 43 Lamp holders
CSA Standard C22.2, No. 74 Equipment for use with Electric Discharge Lamps
CSA Standard C22.2, No. 97 Outdoor and Submersible Floodlights
CSA Standard C164 Hot Dip Galvanizing of Irregularly Shaped Articles
CSA Standard C653 Performance Standards for Roadway Lighting Luminaires
NEMA Standard OD150-1977 Field Identification of High-Intensity Discharge Lamps in
Luminaires used in Roadway Lighting Equipment.
3.0 Approval Of Source
Luminaires supplied to this specification shall be supplied only by manufacturers approved by the
City of Ottawa or its agent. Only luminaires evaluated and approved by the City of Ottawa or its
agent before or at the time a quotation is submitted will be accepted.
Luminaires supplied shall be of the same construction as the sample luminaire currently approved
by the City of Ottawa or its agent and, once approved, the supplier shall not change material, type
or source or production method without prior approval from the City of Ottawa or its agent.

4.1 Mounting Arrangements
Slipfitter
The luminaire shall be designed with an integral slipfitter to accommodate a 76 mm OD by 64

mm tenon and provided with three ¼” - 20 set screws to secure the luminaire to the tenon.

An adapter is required to mount the L40U to the standard 76mm tenon on the street lighting pole.
Side Mounted
The luminaire shall be designed to accept a scroll arm bracket. Refer to engineering specification
XBS0001.
4.2 Terminal Block and Ground Lug

A terminal block shall be provided and so placed that connection of No. 14 AWG solid copper
supply wires to it will be convenient and easy to make without special tools. In addition, a ground
lug shall be placed so that connection to it with a No. 14 AWG solid copper ground wire can be
made easily without special tools.
4.3 Connection Diagram

A connection diagram of a permanent material shall be located so as to be easily visible when
making connections.
4.4 Ballast, Starter and Capacitors

The ballast, starter and capacitors shall be mounted within the luminaire so that replacement may
be achieved easily. Further, special precautions in the form of spacing and barriers shall be taken
to shield the components from heat emitted by the lamp. Capacitors shall be non-PCB and
permanently marked "Non-PCB".
4.5 Lamp Socket

The standard lamp socket shall be a mogul screw base made from cold moulded porcelain and
pulse rated for HPS operation. The shell shall be nickel-plated with dimples or slots to prevent the
lamp loosening with vibration and shall be secured to the socket using a machine screw and nut
combination. The centre contact shall be nickel-plated and spring-loaded for positive contact.
4.6 Marking
4.6.1 Each luminaire shall have a permanent type nameplate indicating the manufacturers
name, catalogue/model number, wattage, supply voltage and frequency, input current and
year of manufacture. This nameplate may be a metallic nameplate attached to the
luminaire with self-tapping screws or alternatively a high quality stick-on foil type label
providing that the foil label is installed at the place of manufacture under quality
controlled conditions and will not fade, chip, peal or otherwise deteriorate under normal
service conditions.
4.6.2 A permanent label including a wiring diagram and stating ballast type and compatible
starter number and capacitor value shall be provided and attached to the ballast or interior
of the luminaire so that it is clearly visible during maintenance operations.
4.6.3 Labels identifying "House Side" and/or "Street Side" shall be affixed inside the
luminaire so they are clearly visible during installation and maintenance.
4.6.4 Each luminaire shall have an exterior identification marker affixed to the underside of the
luminaire near the bracket that would be visible from the ground and indicate the size of

lamp used in the luminaire. When an underside location is not appropriate, a self-
adhesive label is to be supplied with the fixture and attached in the location directed by
the City of Ottawa Street Light agent.
4.7 Housing
The luminaire housing/refractor assembly shall be designed and fabricated to prevent the ingress
of moisture, insects and other foreign material.
Suitable gaskets and filters shall be provided to minimize the accumulation of dirt on the lamp
reflector and refractor panels. Removable covers shall be firmly secured from under side of cover
but easily removed to allow access to the lamp socket, ballast, terminal block and ground
connector for field servicing.
4.8 Twist Lock Receptacle

The luminaire shall be equipped with a twist lock receptacle for a photoelectric controller. When
installed, the photoelectric controller shall be adjustable for a north-facing window and be
concealed within an imitation smoke chimney on top of the luminaire.
4.9 Refractor Panels

The refractor panels shall be heat-resistant acrylic, either clear or translucent white so as not to
distort the colour of the light.
4.10 Light Distribution Pattern

Luminaires shall be adjusted at the factory for a MSCO-II, MSCO-III, MFCO-II or MFCO-III
light distribution pattern. Lamp wattages are to be 70W, 100W, or 150W.
4.11 Colour and Finishing

Except for the refractor panels, all visible parts of the luminaire shall be finished with Black
Epoxy Baking Enamel. Permanent black anodizing to match is acceptable for aluminium parts.
Surfaces and edges shall be smooth and free from burrs and sharp corners

Refer to LLS0005.
5.0 Inspection
manufacturer's plant to inspect the luminaires and manufacturing methods during assembly and
testing.

6.0 Packaging And Shipping
Luminaires shall be shipped complete, suitably packaged to ensure all parts are delivered as an
entity.
The supplier shall advise the City of Ottawa or its agent Purchasing Department three days prior
to his shipping date of his intent to deliver.
7.0 Warranty
The manufacturer shall warrant that the luminaires furnished by him conform to all the
to the City of Ottawa or its agent, defects due to faulty workmanship, material or design for the
period of one year after installation of the luminaires, but in no case for more than two years
after receipt of the units by the City of Ottawa or its agent.

8.1 General
Suppliers shall submit with their tenders the technical information requested herein. Suppliers
who fail to provide the information requested might have their tenders rejected as incomplete.
8.2 Exceptions
Where the tender is not in complete accordance with the requirements of this specification, the
supplier shall submit a detailed list specifically outlining the exceptions or changes. If such a list
is not provided, it will be understood that the supplier shall comply with all the requirements.
8.3 Modifications
The supplier shall also submit a list of any changes in the design, components, construction or
materials employed if the luminaires of the type being quoted differ from these previously
approved by the City of Ottawa or its agent. Failure to notify the City of Ottawa or its agent of
such changes when tendering may constitute sufficient reason to reject the tender.

8.4.1 Manufacturer's Reference
a) Catalogue number of the luminaire

b) Catalogue number and manufacturer of major components including ballast, starter,
capacitor and refractor panels
8.4.2 Photometric Performance
a) Isocandela diagram
b) Iso-lux (iso-foot candle) diagram and utilization data.

c) Vertical candlepower distribution curve
d) Luminaire maintenance factor (suggested by manufacturer)
8.4.3 Mechanical Characteristics
a) Dead weight
b) Effective projected area of luminaire
c) Gasket/filter mechanisms for preventing dirt build-up on the lamp, reflector and
refractor panels
d) Types of finishes applied to various parts
8.4.4 Electrical Characteristics and Performance (Rated Supply Voltage Assumed)
a) Under open circuit condition, ballast input current and lamp voltage (O.C.V.)
b) Inrush current on striking of arc
c) Normal or operating ballast input and lamp currents and maximum values of same
d) Normal or operating ballast lamp voltage
e) Variation in lamp wattage for rated supply voltage variation
f) Ballast power factor
g) Nominal ballast supply voltage
h) Input watts and losses
i) Rated Life of ballast
j) Ballast trapezoidal drawings
8.4.5 Luminaire drawings and ballast schematic drawing.
8.4.6 Quality control program carried out by manufacturer including description of tests and
sampling plan.
8.5 Samples
Unless the luminaire being proposed has been previously approved by the City of Ottawa or its
agent, the supplier shall provide a sample identical in every way to the units tendered. Samples
will be returned to the supplier after evaluation.
9.0 Maintenance Parts

Suppliers are requested to quote on the following maintenance parts or components:
a) Ballast Kit, including ballast, capacitor, starter, and PEC receptacle prewired with
interconnecting wiring and mounting hardware as required by this specification
b) Refractor panels
c) Starter

10.0 Information Supplied To The Bidder
The following minimum information will be supplied to the bidders when requesting a quotation:
a) Quantity
b) Lamp wattage
c) Light distribution pattern, if other than as specified in Section 4.10
d) Input voltage of ballast, if other than as specified in specification LLS0005
11.0 Drawings
Refer to Specifications LLS0010

TITLE:

6
REV. DATE: 2016-02-16 9
HID Shoebox Style Luminaire


REVISION SHEET

1 Add detailed drawings LBS0004 2005-02-24 csm/jb
LLS0010, LLS0011, and LLS0012.
Removed Figure 1 reference
Text and Drawing
2 Title renamed 2006-01-15 csm jb

Electrical Characteristics referenced in
Revised scope, light distribution &
marking

identified (11.0)
Revised Marking, (4.7.1)
2010-01-07 se do

5 updated.
2016-02-16 wq gs
© For Hydro Ottawa Use Only LLS0002 Rev.6 Page 2 of 9

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL ......................................................................................................................... 4

1.1 SCOPE............................................................................................................................. 4
4.1 MOUNTING ARRANGEMENT ...................................................................................... 4
4.2 TERMINAL BLOCK AND GROUND LUG .................................................................... 5
4.3 CONNECTION DIAGRAM ............................................................................................. 5
4.4 REFLECTOR ................................................................................................................... 5
4.5 BALLAST, STARTER AND CAPACITORS ................................................................... 5
4.6 LAMP SOCKET .............................................................................................................. 5
4.7 MARKING ...................................................................................................................... 5
4.8 HOUSING ....................................................................................................................... 6
4.9 GLASS LENS ................................................................................................................. 6
4.10 LIGHT DISTRIBUTION PATTERN............................................................................ 6
4.11 COLOUR AND FINISHING ........................................................................................ 6
4.12 TWIST LOCK RECEPTACLE .................................................................................... 6
4.13 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS........................................................................... 7
5.0 INSPECTION.................................................................................................................... 7
7.0 WARRANTY..................................................................................................................... 7
8.1 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................... 7
8.2 EXCEPTIONS ................................................................................................................. 7
8.3 MODIFICATIONS ........................................................................................................... 7
8.4 TECHNICAL INFORMATION REQUESTED ................................................................. 8
8.5 SAMPLES ....................................................................................................................... 8
11.0 DRAWINGS ...................................................................................................................... 9

1.0 General
1.1 Scope
This specification covers the supply of High Pressure Sodium and Metal Halide shoebox type
luminaires complete with integral ballast and mounting bracket. This specification section shall
be read in conjunction with engineering specification LGC0001 and LLS0005.

standards:

Luminaires
CSA Standard C22.2 No. 9 Luminaires
CSA Standard C22.2 No. 43 Lampholders
CSA Standard C22.2 No. 74 Equipment for use with Electric Discharge Lamps
CSA Standard C22.2 No. 97 Outdoor and Submersible Floodlights
luminaires used in Roadway Lighting Equipment.

or source or production method without prior approval of the City of Ottawa or its agent.

4.1 Mounting Arrangement
The luminaire and bracket shall be designed to mount on a round pole that has a minimum top
diameter of 102 mm. The luminaire shall be horizontal when the bracket is mounted on a vertical
surface. The bracket shall be capable of safely supporting the luminaire at a wind speed of 160
km/h. Refer to engineering specification LBS0001.


making connections.
4.4 Reflector
The reflector shall be made of polished, chemically brightened anodized aluminium not subject to
distortion and shall be easily removable for servicing in the field without the use of special tools.

to shield the components from heat emitted by the lamp. Capacitors shall be non-PCB and
4.6 Lamp Socket

The standard lamp socket shall be a mogul screw base made from cold moulded porcelain and
pulse rated for HPS and MH operation. The shell shall be nickel-plated with dimples or slots to
prevent the lamp loosening with vibration and shall be secured to the socket using a machine
screw and nut combination. The centre contact shall be nickel-plated and spring-loaded for
positive contact.
4.7 Marking
lamp used in the luminaire. When an underside location is not appropriate, a self-
adhesive label is to be supplied with the fixture and attached in the location as directed by
4.7.2 Each luminaire shall have a permanent type nameplate indicating the manufacturer's
year of manufacture.
4.7.3 This nameplate may be a metallic nameplate attached to the luminaire with self-tapping
crews or alternatively a high quality stick-on foil type label providing that the foil label is
Installed at the place of manufacture under quality controlled conditions and will not
fade, chip, peel or otherwise deteriorate under normal service conditions.
4.8 Housing
The luminaire housing shall be aluminium, designed and fabricated to minimize the ingress of
moisture, insects and other foreign material.
Suitable gaskets and filters shall be provided to minimize the accumulation of dirt on the lamp,
reflector and glass lens. Removable covers shall be hinged so they hang freely in a vertical
position to allow easy access to the lamp, socket, ballast, terminal block and ground connector for
field servicing. In the closed position, all covers shall be secure and safe from damage due to
vibration. Screw fastenings on doors are not preferred, but if used, screws must have Robertson
type head.
4.9 Glass Lens

The lens shall be flat tempered glass with high resistance to breakage from thermal shock and
mechanical impact. The lens shall be easily removable for washing and maintenance, but fastened
safely and securely to the door at all other times whether the door is open or closed.

Unless otherwise requested, luminaires shall be adjusted at the factory for the following light
distribution patterns when used with the lamps indicated.
Table 4.1
Luminaire Factory Luminaire Factory

Wattage (HPS) Setting Wattage (MH) Setting
70 M-CO-II 250 M-CO-III
100 M-CO-II 400 M-CO-III
150 M-CO-II
200 M-CO-II
250 M-CO-III
400 M-CO-III

Except for the glass lens, all visible parts of the luminaire and bracket shall be finished to match
as specified:
4.11.1 White, Grey and Dark Bronze are acceptable colours. Paint shall be Epoxy Baked
Enamel. Permanent anodizing to match is acceptable.
4.11.2 All finishes shall be applied in strict adherence to manufacturer's specifications.
4.11.3 Surfaces and edges shall be smooth and free from burrs and sharp corners.

installed, the photoelectric controller shall be adjustable for a north-facing window.
.
Refer to LLS0005
5.0 Inspection
The City of Ottawa or its agent reserves the right to inspect the luminaires during manufacture for
the purpose of ascertaining whether the units meet the requirements of this specification.
6.0 Packaging and Shipping

Luminaires shall be shipped complete with hardware and bracket suitably packaged to ensure all
parts are delivered as an entity.
7.0 Warranty
The manufacturer shall warrant that the luminaires and brackets furnished by him conform to all
the requirements and conditions of this specification. The Manufacture shall remedy, at no
expense to the City of Ottawa or its agent, defects due to faulty workmanship, material or design
for the period of one year after installation of the luminaires, but in no case for more than two
years after receipt of the units by the City of Ottawa or its agent.

8.1 General
8.2 Exceptions
8.3 Modifications
materials employed if the luminaires of the type being quoted differ from those previously


capacitor and refractor
a) Dead weight
b) Dimensions of luminaire, bracket and pole plate
c) Effective projected area of luminaire and bracket combination
d) Gasket/filter mechanisms for preventing dirt build-up on the lamp, reflector and
glass lens
e) The manufacturer shall so specify if he intends to make use of a flat prismatic
glass lens to improve the photometric performance of the luminaire
f) Types of finishes applied to various parts.
a) Under open circuit condition, ballast input current and lamp voltage (OCV)
i) Rated life of ballast
8.4.5 Luminaire drawings and ballast schematic drawing.
8.4.6 Quality control program. Carried out by manufacturer including description of tests and
sampling plan.
8.5 Samples

a) Ballast Kit including ballast, capacitor, starter, pre-wired with interconnecting wiring and
mounting hardware as required by this specification
b) Glass Lens, and
c) Starter

a) Quantity
b) Lamp wattage
e) Exterior colour of luminaire, if other than as specified in Section 4.11
11.0 Drawings
Refer to Specification LLS0010

TITLE:

6
REV. DATE: 2016-02-16 9
HID Cobra Head Style Luminaire

Flat & Drop Glass


REVISION SHEET

1 Add MH and MV luminaires. 2005-02-24 csm/jb
Tables 4.2, 4.8
2 Supersedes LLS0004 2006-01-15 csm jb

Metal Halide reference removed
Electrical Characteristics referenced in
Revised mounting arrangement,
marking & light distribution

identified (11.0)
Revised Table 4.1
Revised Table 4.2
2010-01-07 se do

5 updated
wq gs
6 Approval and Recommended 2016-02-16

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL ......................................................................................................................... 4

1.1 SCOPE............................................................................................................................. 4
4.4 REFLECTOR ................................................................................................................... 5
4.5 BALLAST, STARTER AND CAPACITORS ................................................................... 5
4.6 LAMP SOCKET .............................................................................................................. 5
4.7 MARKING ...................................................................................................................... 5
4.8 HOUSING ....................................................................................................................... 6
4.9 REFRACTOR .................................................................................................................. 6
5.0 INSPECTION.................................................................................................................... 7
7.0 WARRANTY..................................................................................................................... 7
8.1 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................... 8
8.2 EXCEPTIONS ................................................................................................................. 8
8.3 MODIFICATIONS ........................................................................................................... 8
8.5 SAMPLES ....................................................................................................................... 9
11.0 DRAWINGS ...................................................................................................................... 9

1.0 General
1.1 Scope
This specification covers the supply of High Pressure Sodium Cobra Head luminaires complete
with integral ballast and mounting bracket. This specification section shall be read in conjunction
with engineering specification LGC0001 and LLS0005.

standards:

ANSI Standard C136.10 Lock-type Photocontrol Devices and Mating Receptacle Physical
and Electrical Interchangeability and Testing
Luminaires
Luminaires used in Roadway Lighting Equipment.

Roadway lighting luminaires shall be supplied only by manufacturers approved by the City of
Ottawa or its agent. Only luminaires evaluated and approved before submission of a quotation
will be accepted.
Once approved the supplier shall not change material type or component part without prior
approval for subsequent orders.

surface.

The bracket shall be capable of safely supporting the luminaire at a wind speed of 160 km/h.
Refer to engineering specification LBS0001.

A terminal block shall be provided and so placed that connection with No. 14 AWG solid copper
supply wires to it will be convenient and easy to make without special tools. In addition, a
ground lug shall be placed so that connection to it with a No. 14 AWG solid copper ground wire
can be made easily without special tools.

making connections.
4.4 Reflector
The reflector shall be made of polished, chemically brightened anodized (or equivalent)
aluminums not subject to distortion and shall be readily removable for servicing in the field
without the use of special tools.

to shield the components from heat emitted by the lamp. Capacitors shall be non-PCB and be
4.6 Lamp Socket

The lamp socket shall be mogul screw base made from cold molded porcelain and pulse rated for
HPS operation. The shell shall be nickel plated with dimples or slots to prevent the lamp
loosening with vibration and shall be secured to the socket using a machine screw and nut
combination. The centre contact shall be nickel plated and spring loaded for positive contact.
4.7 Marking
lamp used in the luminaire.
4.7.2 A permanent label indicating the socket positions required providing the various
photometric distributions obtained by use of the various lamps shall be provided and
attached to the interior of the luminaire where it is clearly visible during maintenance
operations.
year of manufacture. This nameplate may be a metallic nameplate attached to the

luminaire with self-tapping screws or alternatively a high quality stick-on foil type label
providing that the foil label is installed at the place of manufacture under quality
controlled conditions and will not fade, chip, peel or otherwise deteriorate under normal
service conditions.
4.8 Housing
The luminaire housing shall be cast aluminium with stainless steel hardware. All metal surfaces
and edges shall be smooth and free from burrs and sharp corners.
Suitable gaskets shall be provided between the reflector and refractor and between the reflector
and lamp socket to prevent the ingress of dirt, insects, etc. into the optical cavity.
Removable covers shall be hinged so they hang freely in a vertical position when open to provide
easy access to the lamp, socket, ballast, terminal block, ground connectors, slip fitter and
reflector. In the closed position, all covers shall be secure and safe from damage due to vibration.
A levelling surface shall be provided and identified on the top of the luminaire.
The slipfitter shall be designed to accommodate a 60 mm OD tenon (50mm I.P.S.) with a +/-3mm
minimum adjustment from the horizontal. The opening for the tenon shall incorporate a suitable
gasket or other arrangement to prevent birds from entering the luminaire
Table 4.1
Max. Effective Projected
Style Max. Weight Area (E.P.A.)

Small body 20 kg (44 lb) 0.15 m² (1.6 ft²)
Large body 25 kg (55 lb) 0.21 m² (2.3 ft²)
4.9 Refractor
The refractor shall be heat resistant glass with high resistance to breakage from thermal shock. It
shall be attached securely to the frame of the lower housing.

distribution patterns when used with the lamps indicated.

Table 4.2
Luminaire Factory Setting Factory Setting

Wattage (HPS) Flat Glass Drop Glass
70 M-FCO- II M-SCO- II
(Small Body)
200 M-FCO- II M-SCO-II
250 M-FCO- III M-SCO-III
(Large Body)
400 M-FCO- III M-SCO-III

as specified:
4.11.1 Luminaires shall be grey (natural) in colour.

installed, the photoelectric controller shall be adjustable for a north-facing window.

Refer to LLS0005.
5.0 Inspection

7.0 Warranty
expense to the City of Ottawa or its agent, defects due to faulty workmanship, material or design
for the period of one year after installation of the luminaires, but in no case for more than two
years after receipt of the units by the City of Ottawa or its agent.

8.1 General
8.2 Exceptions
8.3 Modifications

8.4.1. Manufacturer's Reference

capacitor and refractor
8.4.2. Photometric Performance
8.4.3. Mechanical Characteristics
a) Dead weight
d) Gasket/filter mechanisms for preventing dirt build-up on the lamp, reflector and
glass lens
e) The manufacturer shall so specify if he intends to make use of a flat prismatic
glass lens to improve the photometric performance of the luminaire
f) Types of finishes applied to various parts.
8.4.4. Electrical Characteristics and Performance (Rated Supply Voltage Assumed)

a) Under open circuit condition, ballast input current and lamp voltage (OCV)
i) Rated life of ballast
8.4.5. Luminaire drawings and ballast schematic drawing
8.4.6. Quality control program carried out by manufacturer including description of tests and
sampling plan.
8.5 Samples

a) Ballast Kit including ballast, capacitor, starter, pre-wired with interconnecting wiring and
mounting hardware as required by this specification
b) Refractor
c) Starter

a) Quantity
b) Lamp wattage
e) Exterior colour of luminaire, if other than as specified in Section 4.11
11.0 Drawings
Refer to Specification LLS0010

TITLE:

6
REV. DATE: 2016-02-16 9
HID Lamps and Ballasts


REVISION SHEET

2 Supersedes LLS0003 2006-01-15 csm Jb
Title & scope revised to include ballast
specifications
3 2009-01-15 JB
ANSI Designation removed from
‘Lamp Characteristics’ tables.
Table 4.2 – revised 'Bulb' and 'Base'
requirements for MH
4 2010-01-07 se do
authorization changed.
Section 4.1, added ‘graphite treated
brass’ lamp
2014-01-31 wq kw
authorization changed.
Approval and Recommended 2016-02-16 wq gs

6 authorization changed.

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL ......................................................................................................................... 4

1.1 SCOPE .............................................................................................................................. 4
3.0 APPROVAL OF SOURCES ............................................................................................ 4
4.0 LAMP CHARACTERISTICS ......................................................................................... 4
4.1 HIGH PRESSURE SODIUM LAMPS ..................................................................................... 4
4.2 METAL HALIDE LAMPS .................................................................................................... 5
4.3 MERCURY VAPOUR LAMPS .............................................................................................. 5
5.0 BALLAST CHARACTERISTICS .................................................................................. 6
5.1 GENERAL ......................................................................................................................... 6
5.2 BALLAST, STARTER AND CAPACITORS ............................................................................. 6
5.3 VOLTAGE ......................................................................................................................... 7
5.4 OPEN CIRCUIT VOLTAGE ................................................................................................. 8
5.5 STARTING PULSE VOLTAGE ............................................................................................. 8
5.6 POWER FACTOR ............................................................................................................... 8
5.7 CREST FACTOR ................................................................................................................ 8
6.0 INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS ....................................................................................... 8
6.1 GENERAL ......................................................................................................................... 8
6.2 TECHNICAL INFORMATION REQUESTED - LAMPS ............................................................. 8
6.3 TECHNICAL INFORMATION REQUESTED – BALLASTS ....................................................... 9
6.4 SAMPLES .......................................................................................................................... 9
7.0 INFORMATION SUPPLIED TO THE BIDDER ......................................................... 9
8.0 PACKAGING .................................................................................................................... 9
9.0 INSPECTION.................................................................................................................... 9
10.0 WARRANTY..................................................................................................................... 9
11.0 RECYCLE ......................................................................................................................... 9

1.0 General
1.1 Scope
This specification covers the supply of HID lamps and ballasts. This specification section shall
be read in conjunction with engineering specification LGC0001.

Lamps and ballasts shall comply with all applicable requirements in the latest issues of the
following standards:

Luminaires
3.0 Approval of Sources

Only manufacturers approved by The City of Ottawa or its agent shall supply lamps.
Only lamps evaluated and approved before submission of a quotation will be accepted. Once
approved, the suppliers shall not change the material type or component part without prior
approval.
4.0 Lamp Characteristics

4.1 High Pressure Sodium Lamps
All HPS lamps shall be capable of operating in any position. In addition, HPS lamps shall start
reliably within an ambient temperature range of -40°C to +45°C when provided with starting
pulses having a peak voltage of 2500 V to 4000 V, at 1 μs pulse width minimum at 90% of peak
and a pulse rate of at least 60 pulses per second.
The initial lamp operating voltage for all HPS lamps shall be between 95% and 100% of the
nominal lamp voltage listed in above table for each size lamp. All lamps shall have a nickel-
plated or graphite treated brass base with date coding provisions permanently stamped on as
follows:
1234567890 JFMAMJJASOND

Table 4.1
Ballast Open Nominal

Watts Bulb Base Finish Circuit Lamp
Voltage Volts
(Min.) (RMS)
E23½ or
70 Mogul Screw Clear 110 52
BT-25
E23½ or
BT-25
E23½ or
BT-25
200 E18 Mogul Screw Clear 195 100
4.2 Metal Halide Lamps

All MH lamps shall be capable of operating in any position. MH lamps shall start reliably with
an ambient temperature range of -40°C to +45°C.
All lamps shall have a nickel-plated base with date coding provisions permanently stamped on as
follows: 1234567890 JFMAMJJASOND
Table 4.2

Circuit Lamp
Watts Bulb Base Finish
Voltage Volts
(Min.) (RMS)
70 BD/ED-17 Medium Clear 250 127

Mogul
175 ED-23.5 Clear 382 127
Screw
Mogul
250 ED-28 Clear 382 127
Screw
BD-28 or Mogul
400 Clear 382 133
E-37 Screw
4.3 Mercury Vapour Lamps

MV lamps shall start reliably within an ambient temperature range of -40°C to +45°C.
All lamps shall have a nickel-plated base with date coding provisions permanently stamped on as
follows: 1234567890 JFMAMJJASOND

Table 4.3

Circuit Lamp
Watts Bulb Base Finish
Voltage Volts
(Min.) (RMS)
E23½
Delux
100 or Mogul Screw 225 130
White
BT-25
E28 or Delux
175 Mogul Screw 225 130
BT-28 White
E28 or Delux
BT-28 White
E37 or Delux
BT-37 White
5.0 Ballast Characteristics

5.1 General
The ballast and all other electrical components shall be suitable for the supply voltage and the
maximum temperature encountered in totally enclosed outdoor weatherproof luminaires. All
electrical components shall be CSA Approved. All components of the ballast assemblies (ballast,
starter and capacitor) shall be factory prewired and interconnected using insulated push-on
mechanical connectors. No "MARR" type connectors shall be used. All connections shall be
clearly marked and identified.

The ballast shall be one of the following:
a) Reactor
b) Autotransformer lag (MH)
c) Autotransformer lead (CWA) or
d) Isolated secondary lead (CWI)
Note: The ballast type to be used will be supplied to bidders when requesting a quotation.
Ballasts shall have Class H (180°C) insulation and be designed for operation at 60 Hz, low
temperature (-40°C) and power factor not less than 0.90.
Starters shall provide starting pulses within the limits specified in the individual ANSI reference
standards for High Pressure Sodium lamps and the minimum secondary open circuit voltage of
the ballast for various lamps shall be sufficient to provide reliable starting at -40°C. The
maximum ballast loss for various lamp sizes shall be as follows:

Table 5.1
Maximum Ballast Loss – High Pressure Sodium
Lamp Ballast Type

Watts Reactor (HPF) Auto-lag Auto-lead Isolated-lead
70 13W HPF 27W 27W 29W
100 16W HPF 30W 33W 33W
150 19W HPF 40W 49W 49W
200 N/A 40W 45W 50W HPF
250 N/A 45W 57W 60W HPF
400 N/A 60W 67W 82W HPF
Table 5.2
Maximum Ballast Loss – Metal Halide
Lamp Watts
Characteristics
70 100 150 175 250 400
Input Volts 117.5 117.5 117.5 117.5 117.5 117.5
Regulation (for a +/- 10% -16% -15% -17% -15% -15% -15%
variation in line voltage) /+17% /+18% /+20% /+19% /+19% /+19%
Input Power 90W 123W 180W 210W 295W 460W
Ballast Losses 20W 23W 30W 35W 45W 60W
Line Current .84A 1.06 1.62 1.80 1.60 2.80
Power Factor 91% 98% 95% 96% 96% 96%
Lamp Volts 85 100 95 98 108 113
Lamp Peak 1.45 1.80 2.80 3.40 3.90 4.50
Current: RMS .92 1.13 1.77 1.92 2.08 2.22
Crest Factor 1.58 1.59 1.58 1.58 1.58 1.58
Open Circuit Voltage 260 282 262 310 320 330
Reactor and Autotransformer Lag type ballasts shall have a maximum of +/- 12% variation in
lamp wattage for a +/- 5% variation in line voltage. Autotransformer Lead and Isolated Lead type
ballasts shall have a maximum of +/-12% variation in lamp wattage for a +/- 10% variation in line
voltage. Ballasts for 70 W, 100 W and 150 W lamps shall provide nominal operating voltage of
52/55 volts. Ballast for 200 W, 250 W and 400 W lamps shall provide nominal operating voltage
of 100 volts. All ballasts (hot) shall operate nominal lamps between 95% and 100% of their rated
voltage and wattage.
5.3 Voltage
Unless otherwise specified, the ballast shall be rated for 120-volt supply 60 Hz operations.

5.4 Open Circuit Voltage
To ensure reliable starting under low temperature conditions (-40°C), the ballast shall be designed
to provide the following minimum open circuit voltage (OCV) to the lamp listed.
Table 5.3
High Pressure Sodium
Lamp Nominal
Ballast No. ANSI Lamp Volts Minimum OCV
Watts
70 S62 52 110
100 S54 55 110
150 S55 55 110
200 S66 100 195
250 S50 100 195
400 S51 100 195
5.5 Starting Pulse Voltage

The ballast/starter combination shall be designed to provide a minimum starting pulse of 2500
volts, a maximum starting pulse of 4000 volts, with a minimum of 60 pulses per second. Each
pulse shall have a minimum width of 1μs at 90% of peak.
5.6 Power Factor

The power factor of the ballast shall be corrected to at least 90% lagging.
5.7 Crest Factor

The current crest factor of the ballast shall not exceed 1.8 for High Pressure Sodium and 1.6 for
Metal Halide
6.0 Instruction To Bidders

6.1 General
6.2 Technical Information Requested - Lamps

a) Catalogue number of the lamp

6.2.2 Photometric Characteristics
a) Initial rated lumens

b) Mean lumens (based on 10 hour duty cycle)
c) Average rated life (based on 10 hours per start)
d) Typical lumen maintenance curve
e) Typical mortality curve
6.3 Technical Information Requested – Ballasts

6.3.2 Refer to engineering specifications LLS0001, LLS0002, LLS0003 and LLS0004 for
additional ballast information.
6.4 Samples
7.0 Information Supplied To The Bidder

The following minimum information will be supplied to the bidder when requesting a quotation:
a) Quantity
b) Lamp type (e.g. HPS)
c) Lamp wattage (e.g. 100W)
8.0 Packaging
Each lamp shall be individually packaged in a sleeve that will protect the lamp during handling
after it is removed from the shipping carton.
9.0 Inspection
The purchaser reserves the right to request and be granted permission to visit the manufacturer's
plant to inspect the lamps and manufacturing methods during assembly and testing.
10.0 Warranty
The manufacturer shall warrant that the lamps furnished by him conform to all the requirements
and conditions of this specification. The manufacture shall replace, without charge, all lamps
which are defective upon receipt or upon installation or in which failure of the arc tube supporting
structure occurs at any time prior to the end of rated life. The manufacturer shall also provide a
replacement lamp without charge in the event of a failure within two years of installation when
used for street lighting service.
11.0 Recycle
All lamps shall be recycled. The components glass, metal and cardboard shall be separated in the
Recycle process.

TITLE:

6
REV. DATE: 2016-02-16 5
Cleaning and Relamping of Streetlight

Luminaires


REVISION SHEET

1 Supersedes LLS0005 2006-01-15 csm jb
General Conditions referenced in separate
specification
Revised supply of materials
2 Add, Replace lamp wattage label (5.0) 2007-01-15 Jb
3 Revised Cleaning method (2.0) 2007-12-11

Jb
4 Approval and Recommended authorization 2010-01-07 se do

changed
5 Approval and Recommended authorization 2014-01-31 wq kw

changed
6 Approval and Recommended authorization 2016-02-16 wq gs

changed

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL ......................................................................................................................... 4

1.1 SCOPE .............................................................................................................................. 4
2.0 LUMINAIRE CLEANING DETAILS............................................................................ 4
2.1 GENERAL ......................................................................................................................... 4
2.2 REFRACTOR ..................................................................................................................... 4
2.3 REFLECTOR ...................................................................................................................... 4
3.0 RELAMPING DETAILS ................................................................................................. 4
4.0 PHOTO-ELECTRIC CONTROLLER REPLACEMENT DETAILS ........................ 4
5.0 GENERAL DETAILS ...................................................................................................... 5
6.0 REPORTING .................................................................................................................... 5

1.0 General
1.1 Scope
These specifications covers the general requirements for washing and group relamping of street
lighting luminaires in a portion of the City of Ottawa or its agent service area. This specification
section shall be read in conjunction with engineering specification LGC0001.

The City of Ottawa’s agent will supply all materials required for the completion of this work
according to the specification.
2.0 Luminaire Cleaning Details

2.1 General
Bird nests, insects and other foreign material or dirt shall be removed from the luminaire body.
The cleansers to be used are the SWISH Cleaning product, code 9220-4 and SWISH micro-fibre
rag, code 8020041.
2.2 Refractor
The refractor shall be cleaned in place. They are to be sprayed with the cleanser both inside and
out. Once the cleanser has been applied, the refractor shall be wiped down using a micro-fibre
rag. The Contractor is responsible for replacing broken refractors with the direct equivalent.
2.3 Reflector
The reflector shall be sprayed and wiped thoroughly using the specified Swish Cleaning products.
Where the reflector's brilliance cannot be restored, the location shall be reported to the City of
Ottawa or its agent on the maps.
3.0 Relamping Details

In conjunction with the luminaire washing, the Contractor shall replace every lamp with a new
lamp of the same type and wattage. The Contractor shall mark the base of each new lamp with
the month and year of its installation. Operation of the each lamp must be verified by blinding
the photoelectric controller (approx. 1.0 sec. delay) on the top of the luminaire. All lamps
removed from the luminaires shall be returned to the City of Ottawa or its agent stores in suitably
marked sleeves and cartons.
4.0 Photoelectric Controller Replacement Details

In conjunction with the luminaire washing and relamping, the Contractor may be required to
replace the photo controller in the twist-lock receptacle on the top of the luminaire. Controllers
with less than four years in service shall be reinstalled. Operation of the photo controller must be
verified before leaving the site by blinding the photoelectric cell (approx. 1.0 sec. delay).

The base of each new controller installed shall be marked with the month and year of its
installation. All controllers removed from the luminaires shall be returned to the City of Ottawa
or its agent stores in suitable marked cartons.
5.0 General Details

All luminaires shall be checked thoroughly by the Contractor for damaged or defective parts. All
luminaires requiring the City of Ottawa or its agent attention shall be reported on the maps using
the following codes:
Table 5.1
Description Abbreviation Description Abbreviation

Tree Trimming (TT) Couldn't Reach (CR)
Vandalism (V) Refractor Required (RR)
Darkened Reflector (DR) Defective Hand hole (HH)
Defective Gasket (DG)
Close Primary (CP)
The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that any shields, deflectors or special refractors
are replaced with identical units so that the light distribution at that specific location remains
unchanged.
The Contractor shall install bird stops where necessary.
The Contractor shall replace the exterior identification marker that indicates the wattage of lamp
used in the luminaire. It is to be affixed to the underside of the luminaire near the bracket, visible
from the ground.
After an area has been washed and relamped by the Contractor, the City of Ottawa or its agent
will patrol the area reporting all outages and the Contractor shall be responsible for investigating
all locations where outages are reported to determine the nature of the problem. If the outage is
related to the washing and relamping the Contractor shall correct the problem. All other types of
problems shall be reported to the City of Ottawa or its agent for repairs.
6.0 Reporting
The Contractor shall report each morning to the City of Ottawa or its agent Street lighting
Supervisor for the following:
a) To sign Maintenance Report sheets.

b) Handing in maps showing work from the previous day. These maps shall identify
luminaires that require the City of Ottawa or its agent attention as indicated in Section 5,
which units had new bird stops installed and which units had broken refractors replaced.
c) Reviewing the area and number of lights worked the previous day.
d) Identifying the area to be worked that day.
e) Drawing out or returning material to the City of Ottawa or its agent stores.
f) Receiving direction as to which lights must be rechecked to correct outages observed by the
City of Ottawa or its agent patrol the previous night.

TITLE:

7
REV. DATE: 2016-02-16 7
Replacement of Street Lighting

Luminaires

REVISION SHEET

1 Minor Text Revision 2005-02-24 csm/jb
Text and drawings
2 General Conditions’ referenced in separate 2006-01-15 csm jb

specification
Scope revised - Includes relamping for all
lamp/pole types
3 Associated Standard Drawings identified 2007-01-15 jb

(3.0).
4 Bracket (2.2) revised bottom attachment to 2007-12-18 jb

include bolt option.
5 Approval and Recommended authorization 2010-01-07 se do

changed
6 Approval and Recommended authorization 2014-01-31 wq kw

changed
7 Approval and Recommended authorization 2016-02-16 wq gs

changed

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL ......................................................................................................................... 4

1.1 SCOPE .............................................................................................................................. 4
1.2 DEFINITIONS .................................................................................................................... 4
2.0 LUMINAIRE REPLACEMENT DETAILS .................................................................. 4
2.1 GENERAL ......................................................................................................................... 4
2.2 BRACKET ......................................................................................................................... 4
2.3 LUMINAIRE ...................................................................................................................... 5
2.4 PHOTO-ELECTRIC CONTROLLER ....................................................................................... 5
2.5 LAMP ............................................................................................................................... 5
2.6 WIRING ............................................................................................................................ 5
2.7 RECOMMENDED REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES ................................................................. 6

1.0 General
1.1 Scope
These specifications cover the general requirements for replacing INC, MV and MH luminaires
with HPS luminaires in the City of Ottawa or its agent Service area. This specification section
shall be read in conjunction with engineering specification LGC0001, LIS0001,
LAS0001, LLS0001, LLS0002, LLS0003 and LLS0004.
1.2 Definitions
Any words denoting gender shall be construed as denoting both genders.

The City of Ottawa or its agent will supply at its warehouse all lamps, bird stop material,
luminaires, brackets, photoelectric controllers, wire, fuse holders, fuses, bolts, nuts, washers,
connectors and tape.
2.0 Luminaire Replacement Details

2.1 General
New materials to be used in the work will be made available at the City of Ottawa or its agent
warehouse. Old materials removed from service must be returned to the City of Ottawa or its
agent warehouse.
There are four principal scenarios that will be encountered by the contractor in carrying out this
work; street light poles with or without a bracket change and wood distribution poles with or
without a bracket change. The work required for each is described in more detail below.
2.2 Bracket
Some existing luminaires may already be mounted on strong brackets with a 50mm tenon (e.g.
Tapered elliptical aluminium brackets). These brackets need not be replaced unless they are
obviously damaged. Double bend 32mm pipe brackets must be replaced with the tapered
elliptical style.
Tapered elliptical brackets are fastened to street light poles using 200mm x 16mm thru-bolts at
the top and bottom of the pole plate. When a bottom bolt is not possible, stainless steel banding
around the bottom may be used. On wood poles, brackets are fastened using a 16mm thru-bolt at
the top of the pole plate and a 114mm x 13mm lag bolt at the bottom. On wood poles, care must
be taken to install the bracket at right angles to the street or as shown on the detailed plans. If
attachment height cannot be achieved, the Contractor must notify the City of Ottawa or its agent
Operations Street Light Supervisor. Refer to engineering specification LBS0001.

2.3 Luminaire
Each luminaire shall be attached securely to its bracket and adjusted so that it is level from side to
side and front to back. A levelling pad is provided on the top of the luminaire. Post-top
luminaires must also be levelled and then tightened in place on the tenon using the setscrews.
The installation date must be marked on the inside of the luminaire body with a felt marker (e.g.
“12 JUNE 91”).
2.4 Photoelectric Controller

A photoelectric controller (PEC) shall be installed on each luminaire. The socket on the
luminaire must be adjusted so the window on the PEC faces north.
Luminaires connected at 600V do not require a PEC. In addition, there may be some luminaires
indicated on the detailed plans where a shorting cap is specified in place of a PEC. Shorting caps
will be provided by the City of Ottawa or its agent for these cases.
Some PEC’s have the date (e.g. “03”) shown on the tope of the plastic case. If the date is not
shown, the installation date must be scratched on the date coding on the base of the PEC (e.g. 01
02♦04 12345♦7 denotes JUNE 03).
2.5 Lamp
A correctly sized lamp shall be installed in the socket of the luminaire. The socket position shall
be adjusted to achieve the correct photometric distribution if a non-standard setting is specified on
the detailed plans.
The installation date must be marked on the date coding on the base of the lamp with a felt
marker (e.g. 0102♦04 JFMAM♦JASOND denotes JUNE 03).
2.6 Wiring
Supply wiring to the luminaire is 2-#14 AWG plus a ground wire. At the luminaire, the ground
conductor shall be fastened to the ground terminal, the neutral conductor to the neutral terminal
and the live conductor to the live terminal.
At the supply end in the hand hole of street light poles, a 15A inline fuse is installed in line with
the live conductor. In most cases these will not need to be replaced, but they must be checked to
ensure their integrity.
On wood poles, the supply end is connected to the secondary conductors with an in-line 30A
weatherproof fuse holder (fused at 15 A) in-line with the live conductor. The neutral and ground
wiring is connected to the neutral at the pole. In most bases there is no existing fusing and new
fusing will be required. For 600V luminaires, 15 A fusing on both supply conductors will be
required. Final connections to the overhead secondary shall be by the Electrical Supply
Authority.

2.7 Recommended Replacement Procedures
At all locations, the contractor shall inspect the general condition of the equipment which will
remain in place (poles, brackets, wiring, etc.) and, if required, either replace it or report any
unsafe conditions to the City of Ottawa or its agent Operations Street Light Supervisor.
The following are standardized procedures that are intended to provide adequate replacement of
the luminaires. The headings refer to the existing pole/bracket combinations.
2.7.1 Street Light Pole/Reusable Bracket (with 50mm tenon)
a) Disconnect luminaire by removing fuse(s) in the pole hand hole

b) Remove old luminaire
c) Install new luminaire, PEC and lamp
d) Connect wiring at the luminaire
e) Re-connect the circuit at the fuse
f) Test the installation by blinding the PEC and ensuring that the lamp turns on
2.7.2 Street Light Pole/Non-reusable Bracket (double bend 32mm pipe)
a) Disconnect luminaire by removing fuse(s) in the pole hand hole

b) Remove old luminaire and bracket
c) Install new bracket and fish in wiring (existing 2 #14 if reusable, otherwise new)
d) Install new luminaire, PEC and lamp
e) Connect wiring at the luminaire
f) Re-connect the circuit at the fuse
g) Test the installation by blinding the PEC and ensuring that the lamp turns on.
2.7.3 Street Light Pole/Post-top Luminaire (no bracket)
a) Disconnect luminaire by removing fuse in the pole hand hole

b) Remove old luminaire
c) Install new luminaire, PEC and lamp
e) Re-connect the circuit at the fuse
f) Test the installation by blinding the PEC and ensuring that the lamp turns on.
2.7.4 Wood Pole/Reusable Bracket (with 50mm tenon)
a) Disconnect luminaire by disconnecting wire at the secondary conductors

b) Remove old luminaire, and old 2 #14 street light wire
c) Install new luminaire, PEC and lamp, and fish in new 2 #14 wiring
e) Re-connect the circuit at the secondary conductors with a new fuse and holder in line
with the live lead to the streetlight
f) Test the installation by blinding the PEC and ensuring that the lamp turn on
2.7.5 Wood Pole/Non-Reusable Bracket (double bend 32mm pipe)
a) Disconnect luminaire by disconnecting wire at the secondary conductors

b) Remove old luminaire and bracket and old 2 #14 street light wire
c) Install new bracket and fish in new 2 #14 wiring

d) Install new luminaire, PEC and lamp
e) Connect wiring at the luminaire
f) Re-connect the circuit at the secondary conductors with a new fuse and holder in line
with the line lead to the streetlight
g) Test the installation by blinding the PEC and ensuring that the lamp turns on.
Handling of Old Materials
All material removed from service shall be separated into distinct categories (i.e. Lamps,
brackets, luminaire glass refractors or luminaire bodies) and returned to the City of Ottawa or its
agent warehouse.
Capacitors from Mercury Vapour and Metal Halide luminaires must be removed from the
luminaire and returned separately.

TITLE:

0
REV. DATE: 2016-02-16 8
LED Style Luminaire

REVISION SHEET

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL ......................................................................................................................... 4

1.1 SCOPE............................................................................................................................. 4
4.4 MARKING ...................................................................................................................... 5
4.5 HOUSING ....................................................................................................................... 6
4.6 GLASS LENS ................................................................................................................. 6
5.0 INSPECTION.................................................................................................................... 7
7.0 WARRANTY..................................................................................................................... 7
8.1 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................... 7
8.2 EXCEPTIONS ................................................................................................................. 7
8.3 MODIFICATIONS ........................................................................................................... 8
8.5 SAMPLES ....................................................................................................................... 8
10.0 DRAWINGS ...................................................................................................................... 8

1.0 General
1.1 Scope
This specification covers the supply of Light Emitting Diode (LED) type luminaires complete
with mounting bracket. This specification section shall be read in conjunction with engineering
specification LGC0001.

standards:

ANSI Standard C78.377 Chromaticity of Solid State Lighting Products
ANSI Standard C136.2 Roadway and area Lighting Equipment – Dialectric Withstand
Electrical Immunity Requirements
ANSI Standard C136.31 Roadway and Area Lighting Equipment – Luminaire Vibration
ANSI Standard C136.37 Roadway and Area Lighting Equipment – Solid State Light
Sources Used in Roadway and Area Lighting
ANSI Standard C136.41 Roadway and Area Lighting Equipment – Dimming Control
Between and External Locking Type Photocontrol and Ballast or
Driver
ASTM Standard B117.11 Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus
IESNA LM -79 Approved Method for the Electrical and Photometric
Measurements of Solid-State Lighting Products
IESNA LM-80 Approved Method for Measuring Lumen Maintenance of LED
Light Source
IESNA TM-21 Projecting Long Term Lumen Maintenance of LED Light
Sources
UL Standard 8750 Light Emitting Diode (LED) Equipment for use in Lighting
Products

or source or production method without prior approval of the City of Ottawa or its agent.

4.1 Performance Requirements
4.1.1 LM70 >= 70,000 hours
4.1.2 Rated CCT of approximately 4000K +/- 300K
4.1.3 CRI >= 70
4.1.4 Operating ambient temperature range of -40C to 40C or better
4.1.5 Fixture shall be wet location rated or better
4.1.6 LED and driver shall be IP66 rated or better
4.1.7 Fixture to be supplied with separate UL1449 3rd edition compliant surge
protection in line with IEEE C62.41 category C, high exposure level

surface. The bracket shall be capable of safely supporting the luminaire at a wind speed of 160
km/h. Refer to engineering specification LBS0001.


making connections.
4.5 Marking
luminaire near the bracket that would be visible from the ground and indicate the LED
wattage used in the luminaire. When an underside location is not appropriate, a self-
adhesive label is to be supplied with the fixture and attached in the location as directed by
year of manufacture.
4.5.3 This nameplate may be a metallic nameplate attached to the luminaire with self-tapping
crews or alternatively a high quality stick-on foil type label providing that the foil label is
installed at the place of manufacture under quality controlled conditions and will not
fade, chip, peel or otherwise deteriorate under normal service conditions.

4.5.4 A permanent label including a wiring diagram attached to the interior of the luminaire so
that it is clearly visible during maintenance operations.
4.6 Housing
The luminaire housing shall be aluminium, designed and fabricated to minimize the ingress of
moisture, insects and other foreign material.
Suitable gaskets and filters shall be provided to minimize the accumulation of dirt on the lens.
Removable covers shall be hinged so they hang freely in a vertical position to allow easy access
to the driver, terminal block and ground connector for field servicing. In the closed position, all
covers shall be secure and safe from damage due to vibration. Screw fastenings on doors are not
preferred, but if used, screws must have Robertson type head.
4.7 Glass Lens

The lens shall be flat tempered glass with high resistance to breakage from thermal shock and
mechanical impact. The lens shall be easily removable for washing and maintenance, but fastened
safely and securely to the door at all other times whether the door is open or closed.

distribution patterns when used with the fixture wattage indicated.
Table 4.1
Cree Luminaire Factory LRL Luminaire Factory

Wattage Setting Wattage Setting
51 2LG 54 2ES
101 2LG 80 2ES
153 2LG 108 2ES
138 3ME 133 3HB
273 3ME 158 3HB

as specified:
4.9.1 Black, White, Grey and Dark Bronze are optional colours. Paint shall be Epoxy Baked
Enamel. Permanent anodizing to match is acceptable.
4.9.2 All finishes shall be applied in strict adherence to manufacturer's specifications.
4.9.3 Surfaces and edges shall be smooth and free from burrs and sharp corners.

The luminaire shall be equipped with a NEMA 7pin twist lock receptacle for a photoelectric
controller. Fixture shall accept LED Roadway Lighting (LRL) wireless control and monitoring
node LumenIQ A240 (see specification LAS0010).
.
4.11.1 Power factor greater than 0.9
4.11.2 Luminaire shall meet or exceed requirements outlined in Hydro Ottawa’s latest
Technical Guideline “ECG0008 – Distribution System Voltage and Power
Quality” for each LED and driver combination at all required control lighting
levels.
4.11.3 Fixture to be supplied with a 120V dimming driver with 1-10V dimming input
compatible with the LED Roadway Lighting (LRL) wireless control and
monitoring node LumenIQ A240 (see specification LAS0010).
5.0 Inspection
6.0 Packaging and Shipping

7.0 Warranty
expense to the City of Ottawa or its agent, defects due to faulty components including LED’s,
driver, paint and lens for the period of 10 years after installation of the luminaires.

8.1 General
8.2 Exceptions

8.3 Modifications

b) Catalogue number and manufacturer of major components including LED’s
& drivers


a) Dead weight – maximum luminaire weight of 25kg
d) Gasket/filter mechanisms for preventing dirt build-up on the glass lens
e) Types of finishes applied to various parts.

a) Input watts and losses
8.5 Samples
9.0 Information Supplied to the Bidders

a) Quantity
b) LED wattage
d) Exterior colour of luminaire, if other than as specified in Section 4.9
10.0 Drawings
LLD001A, LLD001B, LLD001C, LLD002A, LLD002B, LLD003A, LLD004A, LLD005A,
LLD006A.

TITLE:
APPROVED: G. Sergeant LPS0001 OF
REV. DATE: 2016-02-16 9

7
Spun Reinforced and Prestressed

Concrete Poles

REVISION SHEET

1 Add second (lower) 2005-02-24 csm/jb
mounting hole.
Add 10.7m concrete
S/L / WIFI antenna pole.
Adjust pole height data.
Text and Drawings
2 Supersedes LPS0023 2006-01-15 csm jb


identified (15.0)
Table 8.1- uniform taper removed
4 Pole length (8.0) added 32ft 2008-01-03 Jb

Cambridge


Drawings updated.

© For City of Ottawa Use Only LPS0001 Rev.7 Page 2 of 9

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL ......................................................................................................................... 4

1.1 SCOPE .............................................................................................................................. 4
3.0 AMENDMENTS TO CSA STD. A14-M1979 ................................................................. 4
5.0 HAND HOLE AND COVER ........................................................................................... 6
6.0 RACEWAY ....................................................................................................................... 7
7.0 FINISH ............................................................................................................................... 7
8.0 POLE LENGTHS AND MEASUREMENTS ................................................................ 7
9.1 GENERAL ......................................................................................................................... 7
11.0 SHOP DRAWINGS .......................................................................................................... 8
12.0 INSPECTION AND REJECTION.................................................................................. 8
13.0 DELIVERY ....................................................................................................................... 9
14.0 WARRANTY..................................................................................................................... 9
15.0 DRAWINGS ...................................................................................................................... 9

1.0 General
1.1 Scope
This specification covers the design; material and manufacturing requirements for reinforced and
pre-stressed centrifugally spun round concrete poles for use in street lighting application. This
specification section shall be read in conjunction with engineering specification LGC0001.

This specification shall comply with all applicable requirements in the latest issues of the
following standards:
CSA Standard A14-M1979 Concrete Poles
Poles covered by this specification shall comply with the clauses of CSA Standard A14-M1979
unless otherwise amended in this specification.
3.0 Amendments To CSA STD. A14-M1979

3.1 Refer to clause 3.2.2 Aggregates
Change this clause to read:
"The maximum size of graded coarse aggregate for spun poles shall be 14 mm (0.5 in.).
The smallest size of graded course aggregates shall be 10 mm (0.39 in.)."
3.2 Refer to clause 3.4 Non-pre-stressed Longitudinal Reinforcing Steel

This clause applies to class AL, BL and CL poles. For all other classes, longitudinal
reinforcing bars shall have a minimum of 590 MPa (85,000 psi) yield strength.
Reinforcing steel coating shall be as specified on each order. Helical Reinforcement.
3.3 Refer to clause 3.6.1 Helical Reinforcement

Add the following:
“The wire to be used in poles designed for torsional loading shall have a minimum
diameter of 3 mm (0.125 in.) and a minimum yield strength of 900 MPa (130,000 psi).”
3.4 Refer to Clause 4.1.1 Class of Poles

Change this clause to read:
“Poles shall be supplied in classes and lengths as specified on each order.”

3.5 Refer to clause 4.2.1 Design Methods
Change the note to read:
“Poles designed in accordance with CSA Standard CAN3-A23.3-M77, Code for Design
of Concrete Structures for Buildings, shall pass an acceptance test as described in clause
7 of CSA Standard A14-M1979.”
3.6 Refer to clause 4.4.4 Helical Reinforcement

Change the note to a mandatory clause as follows:
"Helical reinforcement shall be provided in the clockwise and counterclockwise

directions for the entire length of the pole. The pitch shall vary with the pole class, but in
no case shall be greater than 100 mm (4") for the first 2000 mm (6 ft.) from the top, 230
mm (9") for the next 3000 mm (10 ft.) and not greater than 300 mm (12") for the
remainder of the pole.”
3.7 Refer to clause 4.7.9 Apertures

Add the following new clauses:
“The below grade aperture(s) shall be shaped such that the bottom surface is sloped
inward and upward to accept underground duct or cables entering the raceway of the
pole. The top surface shall be formed so that it has a 180° arc from the outside to the
inside of the pole across the horizontal dimensions of the aperture.”

Add the following:
“The inner edges of all apertures shall be free from all sharp material that may damage
conductors entering the raceway.”

Add the following:
“The location of the apertures shall be strictly in accordance with the drawings attached
to this specification.”
3.10 Refer to clause 4.8.2 Grounding Requirements

Add this clause:
“Street lighting Poles:

The grounding shall consist of two stranded copper wires of a size not less than 13 mm2
(no. 6 AWG). They shall be welded to the continuous bar that is normally used for
welding the form rings. The other end of one of the grounding wires shall enter the

raceway at the hand hole level and be of sufficient length to extend 300 mm (12") outside
the hand hole. The other end of the second grounding wire shall be bonded to the
metallic frame of the hand hole cover assembly. This second grounding wire shall be
totally embedded in the wall of the pole.”
3.11 Refer to clause 4.9.1 Marking

Change to read:
“A corrosion resistant identification plate shall be permanently placed on each pole as

shown on the drawings. This plate, which is to be separate from the handhole cover
plate, shall show the manufacturer's name or trademark, the class, length and the year of
manufacture. For poles 13.7m (45 ft.) and above, the mass of the pole shall also be
shown.”
3.12 Refer to clause 4.9.2 Marking

Add the following:
“Marking by inscribed lettering is not acceptable.”
3.13 Refer to clause 5.2.2 Reinforcement Requirements

Add after first sentence:
“This bar shall be designated as the grounding bar and shall not form part of the
reinforcement requirements.”
3.14 Refer to clause 5.3.3 Concrete Requirements

The minimum 28-day cylinder strength for concrete used in poles shall be 55 MPa (8000
psi).
3.15 Refer to clause 5.3.7 Concrete Requirements

The minimum total air content of all concrete mixes shall be 6 percent.

Concrete poles shall be supplied only by manufacturers approved by the City of Ottawa or its
agent. Only poles evaluated and approved before submission of a quotation will be accepted.
Once approved, the supplier shall not change the material type or production methods without
prior approval for subsequent orders.
5.0 Hand hole And Cover

The location of the hand hole shall be as shown on the pole drawings attached to this
specification. The size of hand hole opening shall be as specified on these drawings. A molded
or cast, corrosion resistant metallic frame shall be used to form the hand hole opening.

The material and design of this frame and its cover shall be submitted for approval prior to
manufacturing.
The frame shall extend towards the raceway to a depth of at least 45 mm measured from the
outside surface of the pole. The complete assembly shall be flush with the pole surface.
The cover plate shall be secured to the metallic frame using two stainless steel bolts with an Allen
key button pan head (as manufactured by Frontier Equipment of Allenbury, Ontario). Any other
alternative method must be submitted to the purchaser for approval prior to construction.
6.0 Raceway
The inner raceway shall have a minimum diameter at the top aperture of the pole as designated in
Section 8 of this specification. The entire raceway shall be as round as possible and clear of all
excess material that would prevent or impede the pulling of cables.
The pole top shall be capped to seal the raceway against rainwater except in the case of poles with
tenons.
7.0 Finish
The external surface of the completed pole shall be finished as specified on each order.
8.0 Pole Lengths And Measurements
Table 8.1
Raceway
Length
Class Min. Dia.
m Ft. mm in.
6.1 20-0 BL 50 2
9.1 30-0 B 50 2
*9.8 32-0 B 50 2
10.7 35-0 B 50 2
12.5 41-0 B 50 2
12.5 41-0 D 50 2
* For Cambridge style pole only.

9.1 General
Suppliers shall submit with their quotations the information requested herein. Suppliers who fail
to provide the information requested may have their quotations rejected as incomplete.

Each bidder shall submit with his quotation two copies of the following information to the City of
Ottawa or its agent Purchasing Office:
a) Outline Specification
b) Layout Drawings

The following minimum information will be supplied to the bidder:
a) Quantity
b) Class of pole (if other than as specified in Section 8)
c) Pole length
d) Pole top diameter (if other than as specified on electrical standard drawing details)
e) Pole cross-section
f) Pole finish
g) Reinforcing steel coating (if required)
h) Surface treatment or coating of concrete (if required)
i) Pole butt size (i.e. standard or enlarged)
j) Reference drawing numbers
k) Type of reinforcement (reinforced, pre-stressed, partially pre-stressed)
11.0 Shop Drawings

Within fifteen calendar days of receipt of a purchase order to supply poles as specified herein and
prior to the commencement of production, the supplier shall submit for approval two copies of the
pole drawing detailing all dimensions and bill of materials. If it is found to be acceptable, one
copy bearing approval of the purchaser will be returned to the manufacturer authorizing
commencement of production.
Non-acceptable drawings will be returned to the supplier marked with corrections and a
resubmission will be necessary. No manufacturing shall begin until the drawings are finally
approved.
Notwithstanding the approval of these drawings by the City of Ottawa or its agent, the
manufacturer shall be solely responsible for the design strength and integrity of the poles
supplied.
12.0 Inspection And Rejection

The purchaser reserves the right to act as its own inspection agency or appoint an inspection
agency to observe all steps of manufacturing, testing and verification of the requirements of
Appendix C of CSA Std. A14-M1979. When these requirements are not fulfilled to the
satisfaction of the inspection agency, a "proof test" shall be performed to verify both transverse
and torsional strengths of the poles.
If the proof test is unsatisfactory, it shall be repeated once, and if the results are still below the
minimum requirements, all the poles manufactured shall be rejected.

All poles will be inspected after delivery for conformity with the requirements of this
specification. Poles found at variance shall be rejected. Modifications or replacement shall be at
the supplier's expense.
13.0 Delivery
Poles purchased on any order may have to be delivered in small quantities, as and when
requested, to the utility stores or to specified individual pole locations. The supplier shall provide
the men and equipment necessary for unloading if delivery is to locations other than utility stores.
The supplier shall obtain approval from the purchaser prior to shipment.
14.0 Warranty
The supplier shall warrant that the poles furnished by him conform to all requirements and
conditions of this specification. The supplier shall repair or replace, at no expense to the
purchaser, defects due to faulty workmanship, material or design for a period of five years after
installation of the pole, but in no case for more than six years after receipt of the pole by the
purchaser. All shipping charges shall be the responsibility of the supplier. All replacement poles
shall have a further warranty for five years.
15.0 Drawings
LPD001A, LPD001B, LPD001C, LPD001D, LPD001E, LPD001F, LPD001G, LID006A.

TITLE:
RECOMMENDED: W. Quackenbush. NO: 1 REV:
APPROVED: G. Sergeant LPS0002 OF

7
REV. DATE: 2016-02-16 9
Aluminum Poles

REVISION SHEET

1 Addition of vibration dampers 2005-01-14 csm/jb
to street lighting poles and addition
of Drawing LPS0028.
Text and Drawings
2 Supersedes LPS0024 2006-01-15 csm jb

Revised pole type chart & direct
burial pole coating
3 (14.0) Associated Standard Drawings 2007-01-15 jb

identified.
(5.1) Revised. Vibration dampers
required on poles 9.8m or greater
Section 5. Direct burial pole - deleted.
4 (5.1) Revised. Vibration dampers 2009-01-01 jb

required on poles 6.1m or greater
(4.0) add ‘based on AASHTO…’

Authorization Changed
6 (14.0) Revised. Associated 2014-01-31 wq kw

Standard Drawings updated.


TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL ......................................................................................................................... 4

1.1 SCOPE............................................................................................................................. 4
2.0 REFERENCES STANDARDS ........................................................................................ 4
4.0 DESIGN ............................................................................................................................. 4
5.0 FABRICATION ................................................................................................................ 5
5.1 SHAFT ............................................................................................................................ 5
5.2 APERTURES AND HAND HOLE ................................................................................... 5
5.3 POLE TOP ....................................................................................................................... 5
5.4 MOUNTING PLATE ....................................................................................................... 5
5.5 BASE MOUNTING POLE................................................................................................ 5
5.6 FINISH ............................................................................................................................ 6
5.7 FRANGIBLE BASES ...................................................................................................... 6
6.0 MARKING ........................................................................................................................ 6
7.0 POLE TYPES AND LENGTHS ...................................................................................... 7
8.0 INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS ....................................................................................... 7
8.1 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................... 7
10.0 SHOP DRAWINGS .......................................................................................................... 8
11.0 INSPECTION AND REJECTION.................................................................................. 8
12.0 DELIVERY ....................................................................................................................... 8
13.0 WARRANTY..................................................................................................................... 8
14.0 DRAWINGS ...................................................................................................................... 9

1.0 General
1.1 Scope
This specification covers the design, material and manufacturing requirements for aluminum
poles for use in street lighting applications. This specification section shall be read in conjunction
with engineering specification LGC0001.
2.0 References Standards

The aluminum poles supplied shall comply with all applicable requirements in the latest issues of
the following standards:
AASHTO No.LTS-1 Specification for Structural Supports for Highway Signs,

Luminaires and Traffic Signals - 1975
CSA Standard C22.2 No. 206-M1987 Lighting Poles
CSA Standard C22.2 No. 0.4-M1982 Grounding and Bonding of Electrical Equipment
ASTM Specification B26 or B108 Aluminum Alloy Castings, Alloy 356.0-T6 or Alloy
135-T6 for base plate
ASTM Specification B221 Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bar, Rod, Wire, Shape and
Tube
CSA Standard W59.2-M1991 Welded Aluminum Construction (Inert Gas Shielded Arc
Process)
CSA Standard W47.2 Certification of companies for fusion welding of
aluminum
The Alloy 6063-T6 shall have minimum yield strength of 165 MPa and a minimum ultimate
tensile strength of 193 MPa after fabrication and any subsequent tempering.

Aluminum poles shall be supplied only by manufacturers approved by the City of Ottawa or its
agent. Only poles evaluated and approved before submission of a quotation will be accepted.
Once approved, the supplier shall not change the material type or production methods without
prior approval for subsequent orders.
4.0 Design
Each pole design shall be based on the shaft and bracket(s) combination being capable of
withstanding the pressure of 160 km/h wind (based on AASHTO 1994 76.5 mph sustained winds
with a 30 % gust factor) while supporting up to two luminaires, each having a maximum weight
of 25 kg and a maximum effective projected area (EPA) of 0.21m2.
Tapered shafts shall be round in cross-section and shall taper uniformly from bottom to top.
Straight sections with parallel sides will be permitted from the base to the hand hole location and
from the top to the arm attachment area to allow for ease of manufacture. Sweep (straightness
tolerance of the shaft’s centerline) shall not exceed 3.18mm per 4.57m, and the overall sweep
shall not be greater than:
Pole Length in Metres x 3.18mm

4.57

5.0 Fabrication
5.1 Shaft
All shafts shall be heat treated after fabrication to the T6 temper. The wall thickness of the shaft
shall be as specified in section 7 of this specification.
No circumferential (transverse) welded joints will be permitted on poles up to 10.7m in length.
All shafts greater than 6.1 meters in length and have a bracket and luminaire length less than
1.2m shall be equipped with a vibration dampening device.
5.2 Apertures and Hand hole

All the wiring apertures shall be accurately positioned on the pole as shown on the attached
drawings and shall provide a smooth cable entrance.
The hand hole cover frame shall be flush mounted.
The hand hole cover shall consist of an aluminum plate secured to the pole by stainless steel
1/4" - 20 security button head cap screws.
5.3 Pole top

A waterproof removable aluminum top cap shall be furnished with the shaft unless otherwise
specified. The cap shall blend with the general pole design to present a neat overall appearance.
The cap shall be rigidly secured to the shaft by 6 x 25 hex head stainless steel set screws.
The bracket, when requested, shall be supplied with the pole and in accordance with engineering
specification LBS0001.
5.4 Mounting plate

The mounting plate for the fuse connector clip and/or grounding lug, as specified on the attached
drawings, shall be welded to the shaft in such a manner that the temper of the shaft is not
impaired and to present a smooth surface on the exterior of the shaft.
The complete assembly, including grounding lug, shall be assembled inside the pole before
shipment.
5.5 Base mounting pole

The pole shall be supplied with a one-piece aluminum shoe base casting as specified on the
attached drawings.
The base shall telescope the butt end of the shaft and be secured with one continuous weld on the
inside of the base at the end of the shaft, and another continuous weld on the outside at the top of
the base. The two welds shall be made in such a manner as to ensure that the welded connection
shall have the full strength of the adjacent shaft section to resist any bending action.

Cast aluminum anchor bolt covers shall be supplied as specified on the attached drawings and
rigidly secured to the base by a # 10 Robertson stainless steel pan head machine bolt.
The underside of the anchor base shall be true, free from distortion and perpendicular to the
centerline of the pole shaft.
Hardware supplied with the pole shall include shims, rubber grommets and arm attachment
hardware as shown on the attached drawings. Anchor bolts, nuts and washers shall only be
supplied when specified.
5.6 Finish
5.7.1 All sharp edges or projections shall be ground to give a smooth surface prior to finishing.
5.7.2 The shaft shall be rotary sanded to finishing Grit No. 80.
5.7.3 Poles specified to have an applied protective or decorative finish should first be
chemically etched.
5.7.4 Poles specified to have a clear anodized finish should have a finishing coat with a
minimum film thickness of 0.7 mils. Coloured anodized finishes shall be hard coat and
unaffected by ultraviolet radiation. The coloured coat dry film thickness shall vary with
the pigmentation density of the finishing colour. Anodized poles shall have a medium
matte finish.
5.7.5 Poles to be finished with a baked polyester powder coating shall receive an
electrostatically applied coating of polyester powder a minimum of 4.0 mils thick.
5.7.6 The colour and type of finish shall be as specified on each order.
5.7 Frangible Bases

A frangible base must be installed on all roadways having a posted speed limit of greater than
60 km/hr.
6.0 Marking
Each pole shall have identification marking showing the manufacturer’s name or trade mark, the
length of the pole, the wall thickness, the bolt circle diameter (base mounting poles), and the date
of manufacture.
This marking shall be on a corrosion-resistant nameplate separate from the hand hole cover plate
and securely attached to the surface of the pole.

7.0 Pole Types And Lengths
Table 7.1
Shaft
Wall Thickness
Pole Type Length Top Configuration
M Ft. mm In.
Base Mtg. 4.5 15 6.4 0.250 Bracket Mount
Note: Refer to electrical standard drawing details for additional information
8.0 Instruction To Bidders

8.1 General
Suppliers shall submit with their quotations the information requested herein. Suppliers who fail
to provide the information requested might have their quotations rejected as incomplete.

Each bidder shall submit with his quotation two copies of the following information to the City of
Ottawa or its agent Purchasing Office:
a) Outline Specification
b) Layout Drawings

a) Quantity
b) Shaft length
c) Tapered shaft (yes or no)
d) Anchor bolts
e) Pole finish
f) Bracket type and length (if required)

10.0 Shop Drawings
Within fifteen calendar days of receipt of a purchase order to supply poles as specified herein the
supplier shall submit for approval, prior to the commencement of production, two copies of the
pole drawing detailing all dimensions and bill of materials. If found to be acceptable, one copy
bearing the City of Ottawa or its agent approval shall be returned to the manufacturer authorizing
commencement of production.
Non-acceptable drawings will be returned to the supplier marked with corrections and a
resubmission will be necessary. No manufacturing shall begin until the drawings are finally
approved. Notwithstanding the approval of these drawings by the City of Ottawa or its agent, the
manufacturer shall be solely responsible for the design strength of the pole supplied.
11.0 Inspection And Rejection

The City of Ottawa or its agent reserves the right to act as its own inspection agency or appoint an
inspection agency to observe all steps of manufacturing including welding, inspect and examine
plant records and certificates, material used, and to make any tests as may be considered
necessary.
If any test proves unsatisfactory, it shall be repeated once, and if the results are still below the
minimum requirements, all the poles manufactured shall be rejected.
All poles shall be inspected after delivery for conformity with the requirements of this
specification. Poles found at variance shall be rejected. Modifications or replacement shall be at
the supplier’s expense.
12.0 Delivery
The supplier shall provide reasonable shipping protection against marking of the pole’s polished
surface. When requested, each pole shall be protected for shipping with an easily removable
wrapping. Paper wrapping shall be complete with drawstring running the entire length of the
shaft. Poles shall be shipped complete with hardware suitably packaged to ensure that all parts
are delivered at the same time.
The poles purchased on any order may have to be delivered in small quantities, as and when
requested, to the City of Ottawa or its agent stores or to specified individual pole locations. The
supplier shall provide the men and equipment necessary for delivery and unloading unless quoted
otherwise. The supplier shall obtain the City of Ottawa or its agent approval prior to delivery.
13.0 Warranty
The manufacturer shall warrant that the poles furnished by him conform to all the requirements
and conditions of this specification. The manufacturer shall repair or replace, at no expense to the
City of Ottawa or its agent defects due to faulty workmanship, material or design for the period
of five years after installation of the poles but in no case for more than six years after receipt of
the units by the City of Ottawa or its agent. All shipping charges shall be the responsibility of the
supplier.
The supplier shall provide a further warranty for a minimum period of five years on all
replacements or repaired parts from the time of acceptance by the City of Ottawa or its agent.

14.0 Drawings
LPD002A, LPD003A, LPD003B,

STANDARD DETAIL
DRAWINGS
CITY OF OTTAWA
STANDARD DETAIL DRAWINGS - TABLE OF CONTENTS
S Sewer Drawings
S1 Installation of Catch Basin with Curb and Gutter

S2 Installation of Catch Basin with Monolithic Sidewalk and Curb, Barrier, and
Depressed Curb
S3 Installation of Curb Inlet Type Catch Basin
S4.1 Vortex ICD Installation
S5 Standard Trench Terminology
S6 Single Trench (Sewer and Sewer Services)
S7 Combined Trench (Sewer and Sewer Services)
S8 Clay Seal for Pipe Trenches
S9 Ditched Pipe Storm Sewer Installation
S10 Support Detail for Existing Utility Crossing Sewer or Watermain Trench
S11 Sewer Service Connections for Rigid Main Sewer Pipe (Modified OPSD 1006.010)
S11.1 Sewer Service Connections for Flexible Main Sewer Pipe (Modified OPSD
1006.020)
S11.2 Sewer Service Connections for Rigid Main Sewer Pipe Using Bell End Insert
Method
S11.3 Typical Single, Semi-Detached and Townhouse Lot Servicing
S11.4 Sewer Service Abandonment Beneath Pavement
S12 Internal Drop Structure (Exception Basis Only)
S12.1 MH Arrangement with Vortex Drop Pipe General Arrangement
S12.2 MH Placement for Existing & New 900 to 6000mm Diameter Pipes
S13 Connection to Sanitary or Combined Trunk Sewer
S13.3 Adjustable Stop Log Restrictor as shown in S13 (1220mm Round MH)
S13.4 Adjustable Stop Log Restrictor as shown in S13 (1220mm x 1220mm Square MH)
S14 Foundation Drain Backwater Valve Installation
S14.1 Sanitary Backwater Valve Installation Type 1
S15 Trench Drains (Exception Basis Only)
S16 Exterior Foundation Drain Backwater Valve Exterior Retrofit Applications (Exception
Basis Only)
S17 Typical Depressed Laneway Drainage Grate and Storm Drain
S18 Typical Depressed Driveway Backwater Valve and Standpipe Detail
S18.1 Wastewater Sampling/Inspection Chamber (Exception Basis Only)
S19 Heavy Duty "Fish" Type Round Catch Basin Cover (Modified
OPSD – 400.07)
S19.1 Heavy duty “fish” type Square Catch Basin Cover
S20 Replacement Rectangular Catch Basin Frame
S21 Replacement Rectangular Catch Basin Cover
S22 Curb Inlet "Fish" Type Catch Basin Frame
S23 Curb Inlet "Fish" Type Catch Basin Cover
S24 Standard Circular Sanitary and Combined Maintenance Hole Cover
S24.1 Standard Circular Storm Maintenance Hole Cover
S24.2 Standard Lockable Maintenance Hole Cover
S25 Standard Circular Frame for Maintenance Holes (Modified OPSD – 401.020)
S26 Private Entrance Detail - Rural
\Standard Detail Drawings\Table of Contents – March 1, 2017 i
CITY OF OTTAWA
S28 Curb Inlet “fish” type Frame and Cover for Catch Basin Maintenance Hole
S28.1 Catch Basin Maintenance Hole Cover (Modified OPSD-401.020)
S29 Perforated Pipe Installation for Rear Yard and Landscaping Applications
S30 Catch Basin – ‘T’ For Rear Yard, Ditched Pipe and Landscaping Applications
S31 Catch Basin – Elbow for Rear Yard, Ditched Pipe and Landscaping Applications
S33 Service Connection Detail for Sanitary Maintenance Hole in Cul-de-Sac
S34 Culvert Identification Sign
W Water Drawings
W1 Pipe Joints at Chambers

W2 Circular Chamber Butterfly Valves
W3 Circular Chamber Gate Valves
W3.1 Flow Monitoring Chamber
W3.2 Automatic Flushing Chamber
W3.3 Boundary Valve Chamber
W4 Tapping Valve & Sleeve in Chamber
W5 Circular Chamber Base Sections
W6 Circular Chamber Section
W7 Precast Top for Butterfly & Tapping Valve Chambers
W8 Precast Top for Gate Valve Chambers
W9 Adjustment Section
W10 Access, Air & Drain Valve Chambers R1 & R2
W11 Branch Valve Chamber R-3 & R-4
W11.1 T.V.S. Chamber
W12 Valve Chamber R-3 & R-4
W13 Branch & Line Valve Chamber R-4
W14 Precast Top
W14.1 Construction Joint Waterproofing Details
W15 Standard Cover for Valve Chambers
W16 Standard Frame for Valve Chambers (Modified OPSD – 401.020)
W17 Standard Trench Detail
W18 Hydrant Location
W19 Hydrant Installation
W20 Hydrants in Ditched Area
W21 Thermal Insulation in Ditched Areas
W22 Thermal Insulation For Watermains in Shallow Trenches
W23 Thermal Insulation of Watermains at Open Structures
W24 Valve Box Assembly
W25 Watermain Crossing Below Sewer
W25.1 Typical Connection Detail from New to Existing Watermain
W25.2 Watermain Crossing Over Sewer
W25.3 Concrete Thrust Blocks for PVC and DI Pipe 400mm and Under
W25.4 Thrust Block Dimension Tables for PVC and DI Pipe 400mm and Under
W25.5 Restraining and Retaining Rings for PVC and DI Pipe 400mm and Under
W25.6 Tables of Restrained Lengths for PVC and DI Pipe 400mm and Under
W26 Typical Service Line 19 & 25mm (Nominal) Diameter
\Standard Detail Drawing\Table of Contents – March 1, 2017 ii
CITY OF OTTAWA
W27 Location of Services Open Cut

W28 Temporary Support for Existing Watermain
W29 Support Detail for Crossing Below an Existing Watermain
W29.1 Support Detail for Crossing Below an Existing Watermain
W30 Typical Water Meter & Radio Endpoint Installation 15mm to 25mm
W31 Typical Water Meter & Radio Endpoint Installation 40mm & 50mm
W31.1 Typical Park Water Meter Installation 50mm
W31.2 Park or Garden Meter Installation 25mm (City Use Only)
W31.3 Secondary Rink Valve Chamber
W32 Typical Water Meter Installation 75mm & Larger
W32.1 Fire Line Meter Chamber
W33 Service Line 40 & 50mm (Nominal) Diameter
W34 Hydrostatic Test Gauge and Connector
W34.1 Swab Stack
W35 Service Post Assembly for Services Up to 50mm
W36 Tracer Wire Installation
W37 Watermain Layout for Residential Cul-de-Sacs
W37.1 Watermain Layout for Residential P-Type Cul-de-Sac
W37.2 Watermain Layout for Residential Dead-End Streets
W38 Service Installation at Sewer Crossing
W39 Cathodic Protection for Ductile Iron Watermain Systems
W40 Cathodic Protection for PVC Watermain Systems
W41 Typical Anode Installation D.I. Watermain
W42 Typical Anode Installation PVC Watermain
W43 Anode Installation in Cul-de-Sac D.I. Watermain
W44 Anode Installation in Cul-de-Sac PVC Watermain
W45 Anode Installation on Existing D.I. or C.I. Watermains with Copper Services
W46 Typical Chlorination Nozzle Locations
W47 Waterproofing of Splices
W48 Cathodic Protection Details Single Anode Array at Copper Service
W49 Single Vertical Anode Bank at Hydrants
W50 Typical Private Service > 100mm Connection Procedure
W51 Water Fill Station
W52 Underground Water Reservoir Draw Pipe Details
W53 Dry Hydrant Installation – Surface Water Source
W54 Typical Remote Fire Protection – Supply Main c/w Hydrants
R Road Drawings
R1 Subdrain Installation Detail

R3 Concrete Interlocking Paving Stones & Street Crossings
R4 Composite or Exposed Concrete Pavements (Full Depth Concrete Slab
Repair Layout)
R5 Exposed Concrete Pavement (Full Depth Concrete Slab Repair Joint
Details)
R6 Composite Pavement (Full Depth Concrete Slab Repair Joint Details)
\Standard Detail Drawing\Table of Contents – March 1, 2017 iii

CITY OF OTTAWA
R7 Typical Intersection Narrowing (Double)

R8 Typical Intersection Narrowing (Single)
R9 Typical Mid Block Narrowing
R10 Standard Trench Reinstatement in Paved Surface
R12 Concrete Retaining Wall Max. 1.0m High
R15 Typical Raised Crosswalk
R16 Bullnose Treatment
R17 Pavement Widening Existing Urban & Rural Roads
R18 Benching of Earth Slopes
R19 Speed Hump Detail
R19.1 Flat Top Speed Hump Detail
R20 General Water Plant to Utility Clearance
R21 Townhouse Servicing
R22 Traffic Structure Clearances to Water Plant
R23 Manholes and Valve Chambers Excavation Clearances
R24 Temporary Street Name Signs
R25 Asphalt Reinstatement
R26 Asphalt Paving at Unit Paving
R27 Rural Local Roadway Cross Section Over Earth
R28 Rural Local Roadway Cross Section Over Rock
ROW-8.5 Residential Road 8.5m Road Allowance
ROW-16.5JT Residential Road 16.5m Road Allowance 4 Party Joint Use Trench
ROW-18 Residential Road 18.0m Road Allowance
ROW-18A Residential Road 18.0m Road Allowance Sidewalk Options
ROW-18JT Residential Road 18.0m Road Allowance 4 Party Joint Use Trench
ROW-20R Residential Road 20.0m Road Allowance Rural Section
ROW-22 Residential Road 22.0m Road Allowance Sidewalk Options
ROW-Notes Standard Notes Road Allowance
SC Sidewalks, Curbs & Pathway Drawings
SC1.1 Concrete Barrier Curb for Granular Base Pavement (Modified OPSD-600.110)
SC1.2 Concrete Barrier Curb with Gutter for Granular Base Pavement
SC1.3 Concrete Mountable Curb with Gutter for Granular Base Pavement
SC1.4 Concrete Barrier Curb with Sidewalk
SC1.5 Modified Concrete Mountable Curb with Gutter for Roundabout Truck Apron
SC2 Monolithic Concrete Curb and Sidewalk
SC3 Concrete Curb and Gutter with Sidewalk
SC4 Typical Concrete Sidewalk in Boulevard
SC5 Sidewalk Construction Joints
SC6 Pedestrian Curb Ramp Without Boulevard
\Standard Detail Drawing\Table of Contents – March 1, 2017 iv

CITY OF OTTAWA
SC7 Pedestrian Curb Ramp With Boulevard

SC7.1 Curb Return Entrances
SC7.2 Pedestrian Curb Ramp at Intersection with Boulevard and Adjacent Sidewalk
SC7.3 TWSI Detail
SC8 Traditional Vehicle Access Crossing
SC8.1 Traditional Vehicle Access Crossing Transitions for Various Distances between
Accesses
SC9 Unit paving on granular base
SC9.1 Concrete curb and gutter with unit paver sidewalk
SC9.2 Sidewalk with Unit Paver Boulevard
SC9.3 Concrete Barrier Curb with Unit Paver Sidewalk
SC10 Concrete Median Cap
SC10.1 Pedestrian ramps
SC11 Concrete Shelter Pad Adjacent to Sidewalk
SC11.1 Steel Faced Curb and Platform Detail
SC11.2 Concrete Bench Pad Adjacent to Sidewalk
SC11.3 Typical Elevated Bus Pad Without Pedestrian Facilities with Depressed Curb at
Entrance
SC11.4 Typical Elevated Bus Pad Without Pedestrian Facilities with Depressed Curb at
Mid-Block
SC11.5 Typical Bus Stop Pole
SC12 Typical Bus Pad with Shelter Pad in Boulevard Between Curb and Sidewalk
SC12.1 Typical Bus Pad with Bench Pad in Boulevard Between Curb and Sidewalk
SC13 Ramp Style Vehicle Access Crossing
SC13.1 Continuous Vehicle Access Ramp
SC14 Sidewalk Joints
SC15 Right Turn Island
SC16 Sidewalks at Roundabouts
SC16.1 Multi-use Pathway Bypass at Multi-lane Roundabout
SC16.2 Multi-use Pathway Bypass at Multi-lane Roundabout – Splitter Island with
Pedestrian and Cyclist Crossing
SC16.3 Cycle Track Bypass at Multi-lane Roundabout
SC16.4 Cycle Track Bypass at Multi-lane Roundabout – Splitter Island with Pedestrian and
Cyclist Crossing
SC17 Overland Flow Route Curb & Sidewalk Depression (Exception Basis Only)
SC18 Flat Channel Swale at Curb or Sidewalk (Exception Basis Only)
SC19 Walkway Detail Plan c/w Light Standard (1.5m)
SC20 Asphalt Walkway
SC21 Asphalt Walkway / Service Access Heavy Duty
SC22 Light Duty Concrete Paving
SC23 Heavy Duty Concrete Paving
SC24 Stonedust Nature Trail
SC25 Stonedust Path
SC26 Turf Stone Unit Paving
SC27 Permeable Paving
SC28 Unit Paving on Concrete Base
\Standard Detail Drawing\Table of Contents – March 1, 2017 v
CITY OF OTTAWA
SC29 Accessible Engineered Wood Fibre Path

SC30 Walkway Culvert Plan and Section
T Traffic Drawings
T1 Traffic Control Conduit Handhole

T2 Traffic Handhole Frame Detail
T3 Traffic Handhole Cover Detail
T4 Sidewalk Type Traffic Control Junction Maintenance Hole
T5 Traffic Control Maintenance Hole Frame
T6 Traffic Control Maintenance Hole Cover
T7 Typical Buried Traffic Conduit Details
T8 Direct Buried Conduit in Unpaved Area
T9 Riser for Wood Pole
T10 Grounding Plate Installation in Soil
T11 Ground Rod Vertical in Soil
T12 Ground Rod Vertical in Rock
T13 Foundation for Pylon Sign
T14 Foundation for Overhead Sign
T15A Foundation for Overhead Flasher Installation in Soil
T15B Foundation for Overhead Flasher Installation on Rock
T16 Overhead Sign Foundation (Up to 3m Arm)
T17 170 Controller Foundation
T18 Special Overhead Sign Foundation in Soil
T19 Special Overhead Sign Foundation on Rock
T20 Temporary Foundation
T21 Tubular Pole Foundation
T22 Mast Arm Pole Foundation
T23 Joint Use Pole Foundation
T24 Controller Pole Foundation
T25 Controller, Tubular, Mast Arm and Joint Use Foundation in Rock
T26 Disconnect Pad Foundation
T28 Traffic Foundation Offset to Back of Sidewalk
T29 Local Grading at Pole Foundations
T30 UPS/Controller Pole Foundation
T40 Loop Installation Detail
T41 Multi-Loop Installation
T42 Loop Detector Identification Dots
T43 Typical Loop Detector Layout with Identification Dots - #1
T46 Loop Lead – in Details
BC1 Bicycle Counter Installation for Cycle Track
BC2 Bicycle Counter Installation for Multi-Use Pathway
BC3 Bicycle Counter Installation for Bike Lanes Adjacent to Boulevards
BC4 Bicycle Counter Installation for Sidewalks
\Standard Detail Drawing\Table of Contents – March 1, 2017 vi

CITY OF OTTAWA
BC5 Bicycle Counter Handhole Cover
L Landscaping Drawings
L1 Planting Trench Well Drained Soils

L2 Planting Trench Well Drained Soils (Lots)
L3 Planting Pit, Well Drained Soils (Road Allowance)
L4 Shrub Bed Planting
L6 Planting Pit Poorly Drained Soils
L7 Typical Armour Stone Retaining Wall
L8 Typical Timber Retaining Wall
L9 Boulder Wall on Asphalt
L12 Minor Road Corner Treatment Planting
L13 Major Road Corner Treatment 'B' Planting
L14 Coniferous Tree Planting on Slope
L15 Multi-Stem Tree Planting
L16 Deciduous Tree Planting on Slope
L17 Continuous Shrub Bed Planting
L18 Deciduous Bare Root Whip Planting for Naturalized Areas
L19 Deciduous Bare Root Shrub Planting for Naturalized Areas
L20 Bio-swale
D1 Community Gardens Accessible Planting Box
D2 Community Gardens Generic Planting Box
\Standard Detail Drawing\Table of Contents – March 1, 2017 vii

CITY OF OTTAWA
F Fence Drawings
F1 Pipe Handrailing
F2 Typical Post & Rail Fence
F3 Precast Concrete Bollard and Base
F4 200mm Diameter Steel Bollard Installation for Road Closure
F5 100mm Diameter Steel Bollard Installation for Parking Lots/ Parks
F6 Typical Closure at City Roadway
F6.1 Typical Closure at Emergency Access Lane
F7 Tree Preservation Protection Fence
F8 Two-Rail Post and Rail Fence
F9 Chain Link Fence
F10 P-Gate Detail
F11 Removable Bollard
F12 New Drawing
F13 Single Chainlink Gateway
F14 Double Chainlink Gateway
F15 Limited Access Entrance (no gate)
F21 Perennial and Ornamental Grass Planting
F22 Naturalization/ reforestati on Sample Planting Layout
F23 Aquatic Planting
L Streetlighting/Electrical Drawings
LAD001A PHOTOCELL & RELAY DETAIL

LAD002A 30/60/100A RELAY
LAD003A PHOTOCELL MONITORING
LAD004A CONTROL NODE
LAD005A GATEWAY
LBD001A UNIVERSAL ALUMINUM BRACKET
LBD001B UNIVERSAL SHORT STRAIGHT BRACKET
LBD002A ALUMINUM SCROLL BRACKET
LBD003A ADAPTOR BRACKET FOR ROUND SHOEBOX LUMINAIRE
LBD004A ADAPTOR BRACKET FOR WING LUMINAIRE - LARGE
LBD004B ADAPTOR BRACKET FOR WING LUMINAIRE - SMALL
LBD005A T.B.D
LID001A DUCT INSTALLATION
LID002A CONCRETE FOOTING DETAIL - DECORATIVE POLE
LID002B CONCRETE FOOTING DETAIL - DECORATIVE POLE WITH SHROUD
LID002C CONCRETE FOOTING DETAIL - ROUND
LID002D CONCRETE FOOTING DETAIL - PYRAMID
LID002E CONCRETE FOOTING DETAIL - MARKET STYLE LIGHT
LID002F DISCONNECT PAD FOUNDATION
LID002G DEEP CONCRETE DITCH FOOTING DETAIL - PYRAMID
LID003A CONCRETE POLE HANDLING & INSTALLATION
\Standard Detail Drawing\Table of Contents – March 1, 2017 viii
CITY OF OTTAWA
LID003B POLE GUY

LID004A CONCRETE CONDUIT HANDHOLE (STANDARD)
LID004B CONDUIT HANDHOLE FRAME
LID004C CONDUIT HANDHOLE COVER
LID004D CONCRETE CONDUIT MAINTENANCE HOLE
LID004E CONCRETE CONDUIT MAINTENANCE FRAME
LID004F CONCRETE CONDUIT MAINTENANCE COVER
LID004G CONCRETE CONDUIT HANDHOLE (SHALLOW)
LID005A SERVICE ENTRANCE DISCONNECT
LID005B POLE MOUNT DISCONNECT
LID005C 100A STREETLIGHT DISCONENCT WOOD POLE MOUNT
LID005D STREET LIGHTING DISCONNECT CABINET
LID005E STREET LIGHTING DISCONNECT PANEL
LID005F STREET LIGHTING DISCONNECT PANEL WITH REVENUE METER
BASE
LID005G STREET LIGHTING DISCONNECT PANEL WITH CHECK METER
BASE
LID005H STREET LIGHTING GROUNDING DETAIL
LID006A LUMINAIRE INSTALLATION/CONNECTION - AL./CONC. POLE
LID006B LUMINAIRE INSTALLATION/CONNECTION - WOOD POLE
LID006C SECONDARY OVERHEAD CONNECTION
LID007A POLE FOUNDATION GRADING
LID007B CULVERT DETAIL
LID007C SINGLE SUPPLY WITH TRAFFIC
LLD001A LRL LED COBRA HEAD STYLE LUMINAIRE
LLD001B CREE LEDWAY HO LED COBRA HEAD STYLE LUMINAIRE
LLD001C CREE XSP LED COBRA HEAD STYLE LUMINAIRE
LLD002A LED SQUARE LANTERN LUMINAIRE - POST TOP SPECIAL AREA
LLD002B LED SQUARE LANTERN LUMINAIRE - SIDE MOUNT SPECIAL AREA
LLD003A ROUND STYLE SHOEBOX LUMINAIRE
LLD004A LED WING STYLE LUMINAIRE SPECIAL AREA
LLD005A LED CONE STYLE LUMINAIRE SPECIAL AREA
LLD006A LED WALL PACK LUMINAIRE
LPD001A CONCRETE POLE POST TOP - CLASS BL
LPD001B CONCRETE POLE BRACKET MOUNT - CLASS B
LPD001C CONCRETE BRACKET MOUNT - LARGE BUTT CLASS D
LPD001D CONCRETE POLE MOUNT - LARGE BUTT CLASS B
LPD001E CONCRETE POLE - SEWER SCADA ANTENNA & STREET LIGHT
LPD001F CONCRETE POLE - OCTANGONAL TAPERED
LPD001G CONCRETE POLE -OCTAGONAL TAPERED (LARGE BUTT)
LPD002A ALUMINUM POLE
LPD003A FRANGIBLE BASE (ALUMINUM POLE)
LPD003B VIBRATION DAMPER
\Standard Detail Drawing\Table of Contents – March 1, 2017 ix

CITY OF OTTAWA
PA Play Area Drawings
PA1 Play Area Concrete Edge w/Engineered Wood Fiber (with Drainage Pipe)
PA2 Sand Play Area / Spade Edge (with Drainage Pipe)
PA3 Sand Play Area w/ Asphalt Rolled Edge (with Drainage Pipe)
PA4 Engineered Wood Fibre Play Area / Spade Edge (with Drainage Pipe)
PA5 Engineered Wood Fibre Play Area with Asphalt Rolled Edge (with Drainage Pipe)
PA6 Play Area – Concrete Access Ramp with Concrete Curb
PA7 Grain Size Distribution Detail for Playground Sand
PA8 Asphalt Ramp with Asphalt Pathway
PA9 Drywell Detail
PE Park Electrical Drawings
PE1 Distribution Enclosure

PE2 Opening / Receptacle Mounting Detail
PE3 Distribution Enclosure Section
PE3.1 Existing Distribution Enclosure Section
PE4 Push Button Mounting Detail
PE4.1 Push button shroud detail (bunker)
PE5 Electrical Fit-Up and Schematic for Bunker
PE6 Typical Direct Buried Pole Detail – Outdoor Rink
PE7 Typical Direct Buried Pole Detail – Pathway
SF Street/Park Furniture Drawings
SF1 City of Ottawa Standard Bench Detail

SF2 Accessible Concrete Pad for Benches
SF3 Concrete Pad for Benches
SF4 City of Ottawa Standard Waste Receptacle
SF5 Waste Receptacle Concrete Base
SF6 city of Ottawa Standard Bike Rack
SF7 Concrete Pad for City of Ottawa Standard Bike Rack
SF8 Standard Gazebo
SF9 Post and Ring Bike Rack
SI Signage Drawings
SI1 F3 - Local Parks – Single Post Sign – Assembly

SI2 F4 - Local Parks – Single Post Sing – Parts Detail
SI3 F5 - Local Parks – Two-Post Small General Assembly
SI4 F6 - Local Parks – Two-Post Large General Assembly
SI5 F7 - Local Parks – Two-Post Section Detail
SI6 F8 - Regional Post and Panel Sign General Assembly
SI7 F9 - Regional Post and Panel Sign Section
SI8 F10 - Regional Concrete Base Sign Assembly
\Standard Detail Drawing\Table of Contents – March 1, 2017 x

CITY OF OTTAWA
SI9 F11 - Precast Concrete Base

SI10 F12 - Regional Concrete Base Sign – Sign Box
SI11 G2 - Local Parks – Single Post Graphics
SI12 G3 - Local Parks – Two-Post – Small - Graphics
SI13 G4 - Local Parks – Two-Post Large – Graphics
SI14 G5 - Regional – Two-Post Large – Graphics
SI15 G6 - Regional – Concrete Base – Graphics
SI16 S2 - Local Parks – single Post Sign – Installation
SI17 S3 - Local Parks – Post and Panel Sign – Installation
SI18 S4 - Regional – Post and Panel Sign Installation
SI19 TS – 01 - Two-Post Sign – Small
SI20 TS – 02 - Two-Post Sign – Large
SI21 TS – 03 - One-Post Angled Interpretive Sign
SI22 TS – 04 - Two-Post angle Interpretive Sign
SI23 TS – 05 - One-Post Directional – Regulatory Sign
SI24 TS – 06 - Typical Panel Attachment Detail – Trail Signage
SI25 TS – 07 - Typical Footing Bracket – Trail Signage
SI26 TS – 08 - One-Post Interpretive – Panel Bracket
SI27 TS – 09 - Two-Post Interpretive – Panel Bracket
SI28 TS – 10 - Typical Footing Detail – Trail Signage
SI29 TS – 11 - Graphic Spec. – Two-Post Sign – Narrow – Trail Signage
SI30 TS – 12 - Graphic Spec. – Two-Post Sign – Wide – Trail Siagnage
SI31 TS – 13 - Graphic Spec. – Angled Interpretation – Single Post
SI32 TS – 14 - Graphic Spec. – Angled Interpretation – Two Post
SI33 TS – 15 - Graphic Spec. – One Post Regulatory, Directional & Interpretive Signs
SI34 Bulletin Boards
SI36 Bulletin Board Assembly
SI37 Bulletin Board General Assembly
SI38 Bulletin Board Installation
SI39 Park Regulatory Sign
SR Sports Field & Rink Drawings
SR1 Outdoor Rink Storage (Bunker)

SR2 Soccer Field Layout Mini Field
SR3 Soccer Field Layout Full-Size
SR4 Full-Size and Mini-Field Soccer Goal
SR5 Football Field Layout
SR6 Standard Ultimate Frisbee Field Layout
SR7 Soccer Field Layout Intermediate Size
SR8 Intermediate Soccer Goal
SR9 Senior Softball (16 Yrs and Over) Field Layout
SR10 Senior Softball (16 Yrs and Over) Infield and Backstop Layout
SR11 Junior Softball (Under 16 Yrs) Field Layout
SR12 Junior Softball (Under 16 Yrs) Infield and Backstop Layout
\Standard Detail Drawing\Table of Contents – March 1, 2017 xi

CITY OF OTTAWA
SR13 Senior Baseball (Hardball) (16 Yrs and Over) Field Layout
SR14 Senior Baseball (Hardball) (16 Yrs and Over) Infield and Backstop Layout
SR15 Junior Baseball (Hardball) (Under 16 Yrs) Field Layout
SR16 Junior Baseball (Hardball) (Under 16 Yrs) Infield and Backstop Layout
SR17 Softball Backstop: Section ‘A’ and Front Elevation
SR18 Softball Backstop: Plan View and Footing Detail
SR19 Baseball Backstop: Plan View and Details
SR20 Baseball Backstop: Section ‘A’
SR21 Baseball Dugout Plan
SR22 Baseball Dugout Plan Front and Side Elevation
SR23 Foul Line Post Detail
SR24 Baseball Outfield and Line Fence
SR25 T-Ball Field Layout
SR26 T-Ball Backstop
SR27 Basketball Court (Full Size)
SR28 Basketball Key
SR29 Tennis Court Layout
SR30 Tennis Court Fencing and Gate
SR31 Tennis Court Surface Section
SR32 Volleyball Court Layout
SR33 Shuffleboard Layout
SR34 Puddle Surface Layout
SR35 Community Ice Surfaces Layout ‘Double Puddle’
SR36 Community Rink Layout
SR37 Sports Field Spectators Bleachers
SR38 Volleyball Court Section
SR39 Soccer Goal Screen
\Standard Detail Drawing\Table of Contents – March 1, 2017 xii

SEWER STANDARD DETAIL DRAWINGS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
S1 Installation of Catch Basin with Curb and Gutter

S2 Installation of Catch Basin with Monolithic Sidewalk and Curb, Barrier,
and Depressed Curb
S3 Installation of Curb Inlet Type Catch Basin
S4.1 Vortex ICD Installation
S5 Standard Trench Terminology
S6 Single Trench (Sewer and Sewer Services)
S7 Combined Trench (Sewer and Sewer Services)
S8 Clay Seal for Pipe Trenches
S9 Ditched Pipe Storm Sewer Installation
S10 Support Detail for Existing Utility Crossing Sewer or Watermain Trench
S11 Sewer Service Connections for Rigid Main Sewer Pipe (Modified
OPSD 1006.010)
S11.1 Sewer Service Connections for Flexible Main Sewer Pipe (Modified
OPSD 1006.020)
S11.2 Sewer Service Connections For Rigid Main Sewer Pipe Using Bell End
Insert Method
S11.3 Typical Single, Semi-Detached and Townhouse Lot Servicing
S11.4 Sewer Service Abandonment Beneath Pavement
S12 Internal Drop Structure (Exception Basis Only)
S12.1 MH Arrangement with Vortex Drop Pipe General Arrangement
S12.2 MH Placement for Existing & New 900 to 6000mm Diameter Pipes
S13 Connection to Sanitary or Combined Trunk Sewer
S13.3 Adjustable Stop Log Restrictor as shown in S13 (1220mm Round MH)
S13.4 Adjustable Stop Log Restrictor as shown in S13 (1220mm x 1220mm
Square MH)
S14 Foundation Drain Backwater Valve Installation
S15 Trench Drains (Exception Basis Only)
S16 Exterior Foundation Drain Backwater Valve Exterior Retrofit
Applications (Exception Basis Only)
S17 Typical Depressed Laneway Drainage Grate and Storm Drain
S18 Typical Depressed Driveway Backwater Valve and Standpipe Detail
S18.1 Wastewater Sampling/Inspection Chamber (Exception Basis Only)
S19 Heavy Duty "Fish" Type Round Catch Basin Cover (Modified
OPSD – 400.07)
S19.1 Heavy duty “fish” type Square Catch Basin Cover
S20 Replacement Rectangular Catch Basin Frame
S21 Replacement Rectangular Catch Basin Cover
S22 Curb Inlet "Fish" Type Catch Basin Frame
S23 Curb Inlet "Fish" Type Catch Basin Cover
S24 Standard Circular Sanitary and Combined Maintenance Hole Cover
Standard Detail Drawing\Sewer Table – March 1, 2016 1

S24.1 Standard Circular Storm Maintenance Hole Cover
S24.2 Standard Lockable Maintenance Hole Cover
S25 Standard Circular Frame for Maintenance Holes (Modified OPSD –
401.020)
S26 Private Entrance Detail - Rural
S28 Curb Inlet “fish” type Frame and Cover for Catch Basin Maintenance
Hole
S28.1 Catch Basin Maintenance Hole Cover (Modified OPSD-401.020)
S29 Perforated Pipe Installation for Rear Yard and Landscaping
Applications
S30 Catch Basin – ‘T’ For Rear Yard, Ditched Pipe and Landscaping
Applications
S31 Catch Basin – Elbow For Rear Yard, Ditched Pipe and Landscaping
Applications
S33 Service Connection Detail for Sanitary Maintenance Hole in Cul-de-
Sac
S34 Culvert Identification Sign
Standard Detail Drawing\Sewer Table – March 1, 2016 2

EXPANSION JOINT
300
90^ UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE
A A
TOP OF CURB
GUTTER
CB LEAD
200mm DIA. MIN.
300
EXPANSION JOINT
PLAN VIEW
150
CONC.
GUTTER SEE NOTE #6
25
CONCRETE
ROADCROSSFALL
ASPHALT WEAR COURSE
FRAME&COVER
ASPHALT BINDER COURSE
CONCRETE SUPPORT
ADJUSTMENT
SEE NOTE #3
DETAILS
RUBBER SEE NOTE #2
ADJUSTMENT RING
SEE NOTE #2
SEE NOTE #1
1080
STANDARD
SEE NOTE #7
CATCH BASIN TRAP
NOT SHOWN FOR CLARITY.
PIPE LEAD IS NOT TO EXTEND IN

BEYOND INSIDE CONCRETE FINISH.
THE FIRST PIPE SEGMENT TO BE
ZERO GRADE FOR ICD INSTALLATION. CATCH BASIN
600
300 SUMP
BACKFILL WITH GRANULAR ’A’ MINIMUM

THICKNESS 300mm AROUND ALL
SIDES OF THE STRUCTURE AND
COMPACT TO OPSS 501
OPSD 705.010
ALTERNATE "B"
NOTES: UNLESS SPECIFIED
SECTION A-A OTHERWISE
1. BOTTOM EDGE OF FRAME TO BE TIGHT TO FACE OF CURB.
2. FOR ADJUSTMENT DETAIL OPTIONS, SEE F-4080.
3. A CONCRETE SUPPORT IS REQUIRED WHEN BUILT ADJACENT TO THE SIDEWALK.
4. DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETRES UNLESS SHOWN OTHERWISE.
5. CONNECTION OF LEAD TO C.B. WITH AN APPROVED CAST-IN-PLACE OR BOOT GASKET.
6. FACE OF SIDEWALK OR CURB IS TO BE PLACED AT A TOLERANCE OF +/- 25mm TO DIMENSIONS SHOWN.
OTHERWISE CONTRACTOR WILL RE-INSTALL AT HIS EXPENSE.
7. THE FIRST PIECE OF 200 DIAMETER PIPE LEAD SHALL BE 500mm LONG WITH A 22.5 DEGREE BEND
OR A LONG RADIUS BEND. N.T.S.
DATE: MARCH 2005
INSTALLATION OF CATCH BASIN REV.

MARCH 2009
DATE:
WITH CURB AND GUTTER

DWG. No.: S1
EXPANSION JOINT
300
90^ UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE
A A
EDGE OF FRAM E
FACE OF CURB
TOP OF CURB
CB LEAD
200mm DIA. MIN.
300
EXPANSION JOINT
PLAN VIEW
SEE NOTE #1
SEE NOTE #3
25
150
ROADCROSSFALL
ASPHALT WEAR COURSE
FRAME&COVER
SIDEWALK ASPHALT BINDER COURSE
CONCRETE SUPPORT
ADJUSTMENT
SEE NOTE #7
DETAILS
RUBBER SEE NOTE #4
ADJUSTMENT RING
SEE NOTE #4
1080
SEE NOTE #8
CATCH BASIN TRAP
PIPE LEAD IS NOT TO EXTEND IN

BEYOND INSIDE CONCRETE FINISH.
THE FIRST PIPE SEGMENT TO BE
ZERO GRADE FOR ICD INSTALLATION. CATCH BASIN
600
300 SUMP
BACKFILL WITH GRANULAR ’A’ MINIMUM

THICKNESS 300mm AROUND ALL
SIDES OF THE STRUCTURE AND
COMPACT TO OPSS 501
OPSD 705.010
ALTERNATE "B"
SECTION A-A
UNLESS SPECIFIED
OTHERWISE
NOTES:
1. FACE OF SIDEWALK OR CURB IS TO BE PLACED AT A TOLERANCE OF +/- 25mm

TO DIMENSIONS SHOWN. OTHERWISE CONTRACTOR WILL RE-INSTALL AT HIS EXPENSE.
2. ROAD CROSSFALL IS REVERSED TO DIRECT SURFACE WATER TO CATCH BASIN GRATE.
3. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL FRAME BE PLACED UNDER CURB OR SIDEWALK.
4. FOR ADJUSTMENT DETAIL OPTIONS, SEE F-4080.
5. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETRES UNLESS SHOWN OTHERWISE.
7. A CONCRETE SUPPORT IS REQUIRED WHEN BUILT ADJACENT TO THE SIDEWALK.
8. THE FIRST PIECE OF 200mm DIAMETER PIPE LEAD SHALL BE 500mm LONG WITH A 22.5 DEGREE
N.T.S.
BEND OR A LONG RADIUS BEND.
DATE: MARCH 2005

INSTALLATION OF CATCH BASIN WITH
REV.
MARCH 2009
MONOLITHIC SIDEWALK AND CURB, DATE:
BARRIER, AND DEPRESSED CURB DWG. No.: S2

1.8m BAY WITH
B
EXPANSION JOINTS
EACH SIDE
FRAME & COVER

600 600
100
CONCRETE
300
GUTTER GRADE
’
A
’
R
LA
U
N
A
A A R
G
FACE OF CURB FRONT VIEW

B
OR SIDEWALK
PLAN VIEW
ASPHALT WEAR COURSE

ASPHALT BINDER COURSE
622
SEE NOTE 2
MATCHEXI
STI
NG CROSSFALL
615 101
CONCRETE
150 CONCRETE 228
300
300
G
R
A
SEE NOTE 2 N SEE NOTE 2
’A UL
’ A
GRANULA R
R’
A’ ROAD
CONCRETE CONCRETE
BASE
IF BUILT IF BUILT
WITH WITH SIDEWALK
1080
SIDEWALK
CATCH BASIN CATCH BASIN
600
300 SUMP
300
BACKFILL WITH GRANULAR

’A’ MINIMUM THICKNESS
300mm AROUND ALL
SIDES OF THE
STRUCTURE AND
COMPACT TO OPSS 501
OPSD 705.010
SECTION ’B-B’ ALTERNATE "B"
SECTION ’A-A’
UNLESS SPECIFIED
CATCH BASIN TRAP
OTHERWISE
NOTES:
1. CATCH BASIN TO BE CENTERED BETWEEN EXPANSION JOINTS, WHERE CURB FACE HEIGHT IS 150mm MINIMUM.
2. ADJUSTMENT TO BE MADE WITH CONCRETE RINGS AND FORMED CONCRETE.
3. FRAME & COVER TO MATCH LONGITUDINAL GRADE.
5. LEAD TO BE 200mm DIA. MIM.
7. THE FIRST PIECE OF 200mm DIAMETER PIPE LEAD SHALL BE 500mm LONG WITH A 22.5 DEGREE BEND OR A LONG RADIUS BEND.
N.T.S.
DATE: MAY 2001
INSTALLATION OF CURB REV.

MARCH 2009
DATE:
INLET TYPE CATCH BASIN

DWG. No.: S3
.
SURFACE COURCES
GRANULAR BASE
GRANULAR SUBBASE
SUBGRADE
EXCAVATED TRENCH WIDTH FINAL

BACKFILL
COVER
INITIAL
BACKFILL
PIPE
EMBEDMENT
PIPE SPRING LINE

ZONE
HAUNCHING
BEDDING
FOUNDATION
(WHEN REQUIRED)
NOTES
1. ANY REFEREES IN THE STANDARD TO "BACKFILL"

TO BE INTERPRETED AS "FINAL BACKFILL".
2. ANY REFERENCES IN THE STANDARD TO "BEDDING"

TO BE INTERPRETED AS "PIPE EMBEDMENT".
DATE: MARCH 2008
REV.
STANDARD TRENCH TERMINOLOGY DATE:
DWG. No.: S5
ASPHALT
GRANULAR A
GRANULAR B
IMPERVIOUS CLAY SOIL
NATIVE SOIL OR ROCK
WATERMAIN
SEWER
NOTES:
1. CLAY SEAL TO EXTEND FROM BOTTOM OF TRENCH EXCAVATION TO UNDERSIDE OF ROAD STRUCTURE.
2. CLAY SEAL TO EXTEND FULL TRENCH WIDTH TO EXISTING NATIVE SOILS WITH A MINIMUM THICKNESS OF 1.0m ALONG PIPES.
3. CLAY SEAL TO BE LOCATED SO THAT NO PIPE JOINTS ARE WITHIN THE CLAY SEAL MATERIAL.
DATE: MAY 2001
REV.
MARCH 2006
DATE:
CLAY SEAL FOR PIPE TRENCHES
DWG. No.: S8
APPROVED NATIVE
ASPHALT ROAD BACKFILL MATERIAL
SURFACE (MAX. DEPTH 150mm)
LANDSCAPING-NURSERY SOD
CENTRELINE
OVER 100mm TOPSOIL
OF SWALE
TING
EXIS
ND
GROU
25mm CLEAR STONE

200mm MIN.
(TO BE REPLACED BY APPROVED

VARIABLE
DEPTH
NATIVE BACKFILL AT DRIVEWAYS)
APPROVED CLASS I GEOTEXTILE

(300mm OVERLAP
ON TOP OF TRENCH).
APPROVED 250mm MIN. DIA.

SMOOTH WALL PERFORATED
HDPE PIPE WITH FILTER SOCK
(TO BE REPLACED BY NON
PERFORATED PIPE AT
DRIVEWAYS)
150mm MIN. EARTH

300mm MIN. ROCK
TRENCH WIDTH
AS PER OPSD-802.010
NOTES:
1. THIS DRAWING TO BE USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH S26.
2. LONGITUDINAL SLOPE OF SWALES/DITCHES .3% MIN. WITH 1% OR GREATER PREFERRED.
3. PERFORATED HDPE PIPE TO BE PLACED AT MINIMUM GRADE OF 0.5%.
4. SEE MS 22.15 FOR APPROVED GEOTEXTILES.
5. POLYETHYLENE PIPE TO BE NON PERFORATED UNDER DRIVEWAYS AND BACKFILLED WITH APPROVED NATIVE BACKFILL.
6. ANY INCREASE IN TRENCH DEPTH BEYOND 1000mm MINIMUM SHALL RESULT IN A CORRESPONDING INCREASE IN THE DEPTH
OF 25mm CLEAR STONE ABOVE PERFORATED PIPE.
7. APPROVED NON-WOVEN CLASS 1 GEOTEXTILE SHALL BE USED.
8. SEE MS 22.15 FOR APPROVED PRODUCTS.
DATE: MAY 2001
DITCHED PIPE STORM SEWER REV.

DATE:
MARCH 2007
INSTALLATION DWG. No.: S9

.
S
E
W
E
R
1
S1
R BEDDING AND COVER
PE
AS SPECIFIED
GROUT AROUND
ID
CONNECTION
MAKE HOLE IN SEWER

IN ACCORDANCE WITH
NOTE 1
NOTES:
1. OPENING IN PIPE SHALL BE A ROUND MACHINE CUT HOLE.
2. INSERT TO CONSIST OF THE BELL END OF AN APPROVED SERVICE PIPE. LENGTH TO

BE LIMITED SUCH THAT NO PART OF THE INSERT PROTRUDES INTO THE OPENING OF THE PIPE.
3. WRAP APPROVED WATER-TIGHT SEALANT AROUND THE SPIGOT PORTION OF THE BELL END
PRIOR TO INSERTING. USE ENOUGH SEALANT TO ENSURE A TIGHT WATER-TIGHT CONNECTION
THAT WILL HOLD THE BELL IN POSITION.
4. GROUT AROUND THE BELL END TO PROTECT THE SEALANT AND SUPPORT THE BELL.
5. ALL OTHER NOTES OF S11 APPLY.
6. SEE MS-22.15 FOR APPROVED SEALANT PRODUCTS.
N.T.S.
MARCH 2011
SEWER SERVICE CONNECTIONS DATE:
REV.
FOR RIGID MAIN SEWER PIPE DATE:
DWG. No.: S11.2

USING BELL END INSERT METHOD
SINGLE SEMI-DETACHED
A B B
NE
LOT LI
CURB STOP TYP.
PROPERTY LINE
STORM SEWER
SANITARY SEWER
WATERMAIN
SEE NOTE 5
PROPERTY LINE
NE
LOT LI
SEE NOTE 5
SINGLE
SEMI-DETACHED
NE
SEE NOTE 4
LOT LI
300 OD 300 300 OD 300 300 OD 300 OD 300 OD 300 OD 300
STORM
SANITARY
WATER
1450 MIN. 2000 MIN.
SECTION A-A SECTION B-B
COMMON TRENCH FOR COMMON TRENCH FOR

SINGLE HOMES SEMI-DETACHED AND TOWNHOMES
NOTES:
1. NO HORIZONTAL BENDS IN RIGHT-OF-WAY UNLESS OTHERWISE APPROVED BY THE CITY.
MAXIMUM OF TWO 22.5 HORIZONTAL BENDS FOR SANITARY AND STORM SERVICES.
2. 1% MINIMUM SANITARY AND STORM SERVICE GRADIENT WITH 2% PREFERRED.
3. STORM SERVICE LATERAL SHALL BE LOCATED TO THE LEFT OF SANITARY SERVICE LATERAL
WHEN LOOKING AT THE STRUCTURE FROM THE STREET. SERVICE SIZES IN CONFORMANCE WITH S11.
4. SEE S7 FOR PIPE FOUNDATION, EMBEDMENT AND FINAL BACKFILL REQUIREMENTS.
5. MULTIPLE TAPS WITH SADDLES IN PVC WATERMAIN SHALL BE STAGGARED AND MINIMUM 600mm APART.
6. ELEVATION OF SERVICES VARIABLE DEPENDING ON GRADIENT AND/OR DEPTH OF COVER.
7. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETRES. N.T.S.

DATE: MARCH 2011
TYPICAL SINGLE, SEMI-DETACHED AND REV.

DATE:
TOWNHOUSE LOT SERVICING DWG. No.: S11.3

SEWER SERVICE FROM SEWER SERVICE FROM CATCH
HOUSE OR BUILDING BASIN OR OTHER
EXCAVATION IN
BOULEVARD
ANCHOR PLUG WHILE

FILL SETS
APPROVED SEWER PLUG

OR FABRICATED AS PER
SECTION A-A
ANCHOR PLUG IN
CATCH BASIN OR
EXCAVATION WHILE
1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 FILL SETS
MIN. MAX MAX MIN.

FILL SEWER SERVICE
WITH CEMENT STABILIZED
FLOWABLE FILL
SEWER SERVICE ABANDONMENT BENEATH PAVEMENT
LONG TYPE 316 STAINLESS STEEL

BOLT AND WASHER
THREADED ROD OR EQUIVALENT

ROD COUPLER WITH WASHER WITH THREADED END
FLEXIBLE COUPLING
CE
CE
D.OF SEW ER SERVI
A
D.OF SEW ER SERVI
M UM
3 #8X25
M UM
LONG SS
NI
SCREWS
LESS 25 M AXI
PLUS 25 M I
3 #8X32
LONG SS
SCREWS
.
I
2 LAYERS 19 THICK PLYWOOD

.
I
LAMINATED TOGETHER
19 WIDE STAINLESS STEEL

A
HOSE CLAMP
2 THICK PLASTIC DISC ATTACHED 19 WIDE STAINLESS

TO PLYWOOD WITH 3 #8X32 LONG STEEL HOSE CLAMP
STAINLESS STEEL SCREWS
SECTION A - A
FABRICATED SEWER PLUG
NOTES:
1. ALL DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETERS UNLESS OTHERWISE SHOWN.
N.T.S.
DATE: MARCH 2011
REV.
DATE:
DWG. No.: S11.4

.
VARIES
VARIES. A A
N
1200 m m M I
FRAME & COVER 1200
1200
ES
AS PER CITY STANDARDS.
VARI
TRANSITION SLAB
PRECAST RISER SECTIONS

ALUMINUM OR OR ENGINEERED SHOP
STAINLESS STEEL DRAWINGS TO BE APPROVED.
LADDER THERE IS NO PREFERENCE
(AS SPECIFIED) TO MH TYPE. ROUND MH’s
DISTANCE IS BASED UPON ARE OPTIONAL
5000 M AX.
THE VORTEX SIZE AND CONNECTIONS.

AMPLE OVERFLOW SPACE IS TO BE
PROVIDED. PLAN
OVERFLOW N.T.S.
RAILINGS AND LANDINGS
AS PER CITY STANDARDS
INCOMING PIPE CONNECTIONS MAY

VARY AND MAY NOT BE AS SHOWN
VORTEX DROP SHAFT
LANDING 1
VORTEX PIPE OVERFLOW SIDE TO BE KEPT

SEPARATE FROM THE MAN ENTRY SIDE.
100mm THICK CONCRETE SEPARATION WALL TO BE 500mm

5000 M AX.
N.
ABOVE THE VORTEX TOP. THIS WALL SHALL BE INSTALLED

2500 M I
IF THE UPPER OVERFLOW CAN NOT BE ISOLATED AWAY

FROM THE LANDINGS AND WORKERS.
2000mm HIGH REMOVABLE

PARTITION WALL VORTEX DROP SHAFT TO CONNECT TO AN ENERGY
DISSIPATION BASIN AT THE BENCHING ABOVE THE
OBVERT OF THE PIPE. APPROPRIATE BENCHING
MAY NEED TO BE DESIGNED FOR SUPPORT.
LANDING 2
ALUM. RUNGS COLLECTOR PIPE

OR STAINLESS
(AS SPECIFIED)
CONCRETE BASE WITH NEW PIPE OR OPTIONAL

SECTION A-A BOX SECTION MH TOP (DOG-HOUSE STYLE)
ON EXISTING PIPES.
N.T.S.
NOTES:
1. VORTEX DROP PIPES TO BE USED WHERE THE INVERTS BETWEEN INCOMING AND OUT GOING
SEWERS ARE GREATER THAN 6 METRES.
2. APPROVED REGULAR FRAME AND COVER TO BE USED WHERE VEHICULAR TRAFFIC

TRAVELS OVER THE STRUCTURE . APPROVED LIGHT COVERS TO BE USED FOR RAISED APPLICATIONS .
3. MH MAY NOT BE AS PER ABOVE BUT MUST HAVE A 1200mm DIAMETER STANDARD ACCESS
CHAMBER SEPARATED FROM THE VORTEX CHAMBER VIA A WALL. WORKER ACCESS OR MAINTENANCE
IS NOT TO BE COMPROMISED. THE MH CAN BE SQUARE OR ROUND,
4. OBTAIN VORTEX INFORMATION AND DESIGN CRITERIA FROM THE SUPPLIER AS REQUIRED. DROP STRUCTURE
CAPACITY TO BE CLEARLY MARKED ON THE UNIT. PRODUCT MATERIAL AND STRAPPING AS PER THE
SUPPLIER SPECS.
5. DESIGNS SHALL BE REVIEWED BY THE CITY ON A CASE BY CASE BASIS.
6. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETRES UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE.
N.T.S.
DATE: MARCH 2008
MH ARRANGEMENT REV.
MARCH 2011
DATE:
WITH VORTEX DROP PIPE
GENERAL ARRANGEMENT DWG. No.: S12.1
.
.
.
.
A
COMPONENTS GENERALLY LOCATED
ALONG FRONT SIDE OF HOUSE
TARY
STORM
SANI
FOUNDATION DRAIN
CONCRETE FOOTING
CONCRETE FOUNDATION WALL
CONCRETE FOOTING
SEE
NOTE 1
CLEANOUT
FLAP
STORM BACKWATER VALVE

SANITARY SEE S14
BACKWATER VALVE
NOTE 2
CONCRETE BASEMENT SLAB
MAKE SURE THE

VALVE COVER
IS TIGHTLY
SECURED AS
PER MANUFACTURERS
SPECIFICATIONS
SANITARY
FLOW DIRECTION TO THE
MAIN SEWER IN THE STREET
FLOW
NORMALLY OPEN FLAP

SECTION A-A
SANITARY BACKWATER VALVE
NOTES:
1. BACKWATER VALVE, CLEAN-OUTS AND ANY OTHER FITTINGS MUST BE INSTALLED A MINIMUM OF 300mm
INSIDE OF THE BASEMENT FOOTING. THIS IS TO ENSURE THERE IS SUFFICIENT ROOM TO REPLACE THESE
COMPONENTS IN THE FUTURE WITHOUT HAVING TO DAMAGE THE FOOTING/WALL DURING THE PROCESS
2. JOINTS BETWEEN THE ACCESS BOX SECTIONS AND THE ACCESS BOX AND THE BACKWATER VALVE AND
THE FLOOR SLAB SHALL BE SEALED.
N.T.S.
DATE: MARCH 2010
SANITARY BACKWATER REV.

DATE:
MARCH 2011
VALVE INSTALLATION TYPE 1 DWG. No.: S14.1

A
TARY
STORM
SANI
FOUNDATION DRAIN
CONCRETE FOOTING
CONCRETE FOOTING
SEE
NOTE 1
CLEANOUT
FLAP
CLEANOUT
SEE S14
SANITARY
BACKWATER VALVE
RISER AND
CLEANOUT
A THREADED CAP
MAKE SURE THE

VALVE COVER
IS TIGHTLY
SECURED
SANITARY FLOW DIRECTION TO THE

FLOW MAIN SEWER IN THE STREET
NORMALLY OPEN FLAP
SECTION A-A
SANITARY BACKWATER VALVE
NOTES:
1. BACKWATER VALVE, CLEANOUTS AND ANY OTHER FITTINGS MUST BE INSTALLED A MINIMUM OF 300mm
2. JOINTS BETWEEN CLEANOUT AND THE BACKWATER VALVE AND THE FLOOR SLAB SHALL BE SEALED.
N.T.S.
DATE: MARCH 2011
SANITARY BACKWATER REV.

DATE:
VALVE INSTALLATION TYPE 2 DWG. No.: S14.2

TARY
STORM
SANI
A
FOUNDATION DRAIN
CONCRETE FOOTING
CONCRETE FOOTING
SEE
NOTE 1
STORM CLEANOUT
FLAP
CLEANOUT FOR
SANITARY SEWER
(OR SANITARY
BACKWATER VALVE)
SEE DETAIL S 14.1
STORM CLEANOUT IS
NOT SHOWN FOR
CLARITY ONLY
NOTE 2
MAKE SURE VALVE COVER

IS TIGHTLY SECURED AS
PER MANUFACTURERS
SPECIFICATIONS
FLOW GOES THROUGH FLOW DIRECTION

THE CLEAN-OUT THEN FROM FOUNDATION DRAIN
TO THE MAIN SEWER

IN THE STREET
FLAP
SECTION A-A
NOTES:
1. BACKWATER VALVE, CLEAN-OUTS AND ANY OTHER FITTINGS MUST BE INSTALLED A MINIMUM OF 300mm
2. JOINTS BETWEEN THE SLEEVE AND THE BACKWATER VALVE AND THE FLOOR SHALL BE WATERTIGHT.
N.T.S.
DATE: DEC. 2002
FOUNDATION DRAIN BACKWATER REV.

DATE:
MARCH 2011
VALVE INSTALLATION DWG. No.: S14

TYPICAL A
SIDEWALK
B BARRIER CURB TOP B

450mm
MIN.
TYPICAL CONCRETE SIDEWALK
CONCRETE
200mm DIA.
ASPHALT
CB LEAD
A
PLAN CURB
TRENCH DRAIN CONCRETE

IS TO BE A SEPARATE
450mm
POUR FROM THE CURB.
C
B
L
CONCRETE CUT AWAY
E
75mm MIN.
A
FOR CLARITY
D
150mm
ASPHALT
PICTORIAL VIEW
ROAD BASE
150mm
MIN.
DRAIN DEPTH CAN

VARY FROM
130mm TO 310mm
150
125mm
GRANULAR "A" MIN. 150
COMPACTED TO
95% S.P.D.
SECTION A-A
OTHER APPROVED
TYPES
GRADE SLOPE
CURB FACE
290 P 300 P
CB
END CAP
150mm CONCRETE
CB TO HAVE A
600 mm DEEP
200mm DIA. CB LEAD
SUMP TYPICAL
SECTION B-B
NOTES:
1. INTERCEPTOR TRENCH DRAINS IN THE ROADWAY ARE ONLY TO BE USED ON AN EXCEPTION BASIS FOR 3 SEASON RETROFIT APPLICATIONS.
THEY ARE NOT TO BE USED FOR NEW DEVELOPMENTS.
2. FOR INTERMITTENT APPLICATIONS, CONSULT THE MANUFACTURER FOR CONNECTION DETAILS.
3. STANDARD CURB DETAILS TO BE USED AND NOTCHED AS SHOWN.
4. DRAIN TO HAVE MINIMUM 150mm OF CONCRETE ON ALL SIDES AS SHOWN.
5. CONCRETE TO BE AS PER F-3510 AND BE BEVELLED TO TOP OF GRATE.
6. FOR EACH CONTINUOUS RUN THE FIRST AND LAST GRATES TO BE REMOVABLE. FOR OTHER LOCATIONS GRATES TO BE FIXED.
7. TRECH DRAINS TO CONNECT TO NEAREST CB OR DITCH WHERE APPROPRIATE.
8. SEE MS-22.15 FOR APPROVED PRODUCTS.

N.T.S.
DATE: MAY 2001
TRENCH DRAINS REV.

DATE:
MARCH 2008
(EXCEPTION BASIS ONLY) DWG. No.: S15

.
.
837
R=150mm
C
L Typ 3
8
D
SEE DETAIL 1
27
33
A A C C
13mm Typ 49mm
Typ
C
L
837
45° 6
6
0
12.7
B 44
18
Typ
29
211
25
29mm Typ
13
°
94
45
25 29 B
624
94 211
FRAME PLAN PLAN
1
30
18
R
20
R
73
R 3
28
R R
81
87
695
R
49 +/- 1 m m
49 +/- 1 m m
685 DETAIL 1
632
624
624
25
559
25 572
3
89
146
60
27 476
26 25mm
565 613
TYPICAL
660
667
SECTION C-C
SECTION A-A
25 25
22 25 25
51
51
19
14 14
SECTION B-B SECTION D-D - SECTION D-D -

SOLID ALTERNATE PERFORATED
NOTES:
1. ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE FOR FINISHED CASTINGS ONLY. PATTERN MAKERS AND CASTING
SHOP SHOULD MAKE ALLOWANCES ACCORDINGLY.
3. FOR NEW CONSTRUCTION WHERE SURFACE INLETS ARE SPECIFIED.
4. COMPANIES WITH GRATE DIMENSIONS NOT EXACTLY THE SAME AS SHOWN ABOVE WILL
ALSO BE CONSIDERED.
5. ALTERNATE SOLID COVER TO HAVE EYE 25mm Dia. HOLE WITH 25mm APPROVED PLUG
DATE: MAY 2005

HEAVY DUTY "FISH" TYPE
REV.
MARCH 2017
ROUND CATCH BASIN COVER DATE:
(MODIFIED OPSD-400.07) DWG. No.: S19

3
60.
38.1
3
14.
2
5
8
2
384.
390.
466.
355.
476.
2
3.
3
60.
38.1
7
4.
6
8
28.
50.
79.4
638.3
555.7
4.7 3.2
14.3
4.7
562.1
38.1
38.1
4
50.8
79.
28.6
60.3 527.1 60.3
647.7
NOTES:
1. ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE FOR FINISHED CASTING ONLY. PATTERN MAKERS AND CASTING
2. FOR REPLACEMENT OF EXISTING ONLY. NOT FOR NEW CONSTRUCTION OR REAR YARD DRAINAGE.
N.T.S.
DATE: JAN. 2002
REPLACEMENT RECTANGULAR REV.

DATE:
MARCH 2011
CATCH BASIN FRAME DWG. No.: S20

31.7
8
15.
31.7
28.6
38.1
28.6
5
555.
520.
549.
28.6
50.8
38.1
28.6 15.9
38.1 50.8
28.6 15.9
31.7 50.8
15.8
31.7
7
12.
1
3.
6
8
50.
384.1
56.8
6
7
7
28.
28.
31.
31.
85.7 92.1 85.7
92.1 104.8 92.1

8
9
9
8
15.
15.
15.
15.
12.7
3.2
352.3
NOTES:
1. ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE FOR FINISHED CASTING ONLY. PATTERN MAKERS AND CASTING
2. FOR REPLACEMENT OF EXISTING ONLY. NOT FOR NEW CONSTRUCTION OR REAR YARD DRAINAGE.
N.T.S.
DATE: JAN. 2002
REPLACEMENT RECTANGULAR REV.

DATE:
MARCH 2011
CATCH BASIN COVER DWG. No.: S21

150 CURB
150 CURB
HEIGHT WIDTH
25 ROUNDING R=150 TYP.

A
80
53 150 25
B B
780
650
4
810
1410
2
6
TOP OF CURB / SIDEWALK
80
"SUPER DIAMOND"
200 A RAISED PATTERN
PLAN VIEW
CURB ELEVATION
150 CURB
WIDTH
300 DEPRESSION
WIDTH
25 SLOPE
755
OF FACE
695
715
685
67 632
632
624
624
25
20
20
49
V 25mm V
TYPICAL
SEE NOTE 3
228
228
150
20 575
25
130
133
27
STREET SURFACE
26
80 80
26
53
640
603
300 DEPRESSION
100 100 80 655 80
610
WIDTH
815
810
SECTION A-A SECTION B-B
NOTES:

2. FRAME UNITS IN ACCORDANCE WITH OPSD 400.082 ARE SUITABLE.
3. OPSD 400.001 HOISTING HOOKS ARE ALSO ACCEPTED.
DATE: MAY 2001
CURB INLET "FISH" TYPE REV.

DATE:
MARCH 2008
CATCH BASIN FRAME DWG. No.: S22

A
76
25
SEE DETAIL
#1
B B
20
624
613
R=15
25
76
V
A 25 X 25
PICK HOLE
SECTION A-A
PLAN
624
20
49
1
30
15 18 D
27 27
R
R
613 81
87
R
SECTION B-B
DETAIL #1
NOTES:
1. ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE FOR FINISHED CASTINGS ONLY.

PATTERN MAKERS AND CASTING SHOP SHOULD MAKE ALLOWANCES ACCORDINGLY.
DATE: MAY 2001

MARCH 2017
DATE:
CATCH BASIN COVER DWG. No.: S23

38mm 25 mm DIA. HOLE (ONE ONLY)
WITH 25mm APPROVED
RUBBER PLUG
125m m
B B
13mm SS PIN
LIFT HOLE RAISED LETTERS
57mm 19mm
A A
12mm
DANGER
SECTION B-B
RAISED LETTERS
TOP VIEW
-1m m
50 +/
5 42 20 24 24 22
100
R 20
R 20
15
145 145 145
735
745
SECTION A-A
C
L
25 mm DIA. HOLE
R 10
C R = 15
L
20
NOTES:
1. PIN TO BE SS.
2. FOR FRAME DETAIL SEE DWG No. S25. BOTTOM VIEW

3. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETRES UNLESS OTHERWISE SHOWN.
N.T.S.
DATE: MARCH 2008
STANDARD CIRCULAR
REV.
SANITARY & COMBINED DATE:
MARCH 2017
MAINTENANCE HOLE COVER DWG. No.:

S24
38mm 25 mm DIA. HOLE (ONE ONLY)
WITH 25mm APPROVED
RUBBER PLUG
125m m
B B
13mm SS PIN
LIFT HOLE RAISED LETTERS
57mm 19mm
A A
12mm
DANGER
SECTION B-B
RAISED LETTERS
TOP VIEW
-1m m
50 +/
5 42 20 24 24 22
100
R 20
R 20
15
145 145 145
735
745
SECTION A-A
C
L
25 mm DIA. HOLE
R 10
C R = 15
L
20
NOTES:
1. PIN TO BE SS.
2. FOR FRAME DETAIL SEE DWG No. S25. BOTTOM VIEW

3. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETRES UNLESS OTHERWISE SHOWN.
N.T.S.
DATE: MARCH 2010
STANDARD CIRCULAR
REV.
STORM MAINTENANCE DATE:
MARCH 2017
HOLE COVER DWG. No.:

S24.1
12 mm DIA. HOLE (ONE ONLY)
38mm
REQUIRED FOR
ATMOSPHERE TESTING
PLASTIC PLUG CAPS
ARE AVAILABLE
125mm
B B
13mm SS PIN
LIFT HOLE
19mm
57mm
A A
STABILOC
LOCK ASSEMBLY
12mm
SECTION B-B
NOTES:
1. PIN TO BE SS.
2. LOCKING DEVICE TO BE STABILOC ASSEMBLY
3. FOR FRAME DETAIL SEE DWG No. S25.
4. TOLERANCE 1.5mm. FOR LOCK AND LATCH DETAILS
5. STORM AND SANITARY COVERS ARE TO HAVE DETAILS
TOP VIEW
1m m
AS PER S24 AND S24.1.
N.T.S.
50 + /-
24
42 20 24 22
R 20 100
145.00 145.00 145.00
15 735
745
SECTION A-A
STABILOC
N.T.S.
LOCK ASSEMBLY
WITH S.S.
TEATHER
CABLE
RECEIVER IS
FIXED TO
THE FRAME
12 mm DIA. HOLE
CL
R=10
C
L R=15
20
BOTTOM VIEW
N.T.S.
DATE: MARCH 2008
STANDARD LOCKABLE REV.

MARCH 2017
DATE:
MAINTENANCE HOLE COVER

DWG. No.: S24.2
RAISED LETTERS
DANGER
A A
RAISED LETTERS
TOP VIEW
NTS
24.17
20
42 24.17 22
5 50+/- 1 mm
R=20 R=20 100
5
15
30 145 145 145
735
745
SECTION A-A
NTS
TYPICAL
C
L
R=10
R=10
C C
L L
BOTTOM VIEW
NTS
NOTES:
1. MATERIAL - GREY IRON.
2. FOR FRAME DETAIL SEE DETAIL DWG No. S25.
3. TOLERANCE +/-1.5mm.
4. FOR CATCHBASIN MAINTENANCE HOLE APPLICATIONS ONLY.
DATE: MARCH 2009

CATCH BASIN
REV.
MARCH 2017
MAINTENANCE HOLE COVER DATE:
DWG. No.: S28.1

(MODIFIED OPSD-401.020)
150
CURB
A
25 SLOPE OF FACE
25 ROUNDING
61
10
TY
PI
20 CA
TY L
PI
CA
L
974
949
174 750 25
5
47
25
740
400
50
922
381
800
228
228
150
B B 685
130
133
0
75 20
0 30
4
7
5
68
61
27 26 26
177 767 91
L
P °
A
Y 45
1035
IC
T
61
CURB FACE
200
A SECTION B-B
150 "SUPER DIAMOND"

RAISED PATTERN
CURB
76
PLAN VIEW
25
800
750
740
750
740
20
D D
V 25mm
TYPICAL
25
20
26
20
80
76
C 25 X 25
81 740 105 LIFT HOLE
SECTION C-C
SECTION A-A PLAN
750
Ø 20 R 352 50 20
15
27 27
740
R 43
R 136
DETAIL 1 SECTION D-D
NOTES:
1. ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE FOR FINISHED CASTINGS ONLY.
3. ASPHALT DEPRESSION IN FRONT TO MATCH CITY DETAIL S22. N.T.S.

DATE: JANUARY 2005

MARCH 2017
DATE:
FRAME AND COVER FOR CBMH
DWG. No.:
S28
CATCH BASIN -
PERFORATED 3 - WAY
PIPE
CATCH BASIN CATCH BASIN

- ELBOW (S31) - 'T' (S30)
NON PERFORATED
PIPE
CBMH
(OPSD-701.010,
STORM SEWER S28 OR S24/S25)
REAR YARD
C
L SWALE PROPERTY LINE
1.00m 1.00m
LANDSCAPING -
NURSERY SOD
OVER 100mm
TOPSOIL
150mm TO
600mm
NOTE 8
SEE NOTES FOR SLOPES

ABLE
25mm CLEAR STONE

N.VARI
GEOTEXTILE - SEE NOTE 4

1000m m M I
(300mm OVERLAP ON TOP)
APPROVED HDPE PERFORATED

SMOOTH INNER WALL PIPE
WITH FILTER SOCK 250mm MIN.
75m m
N
MI
REAR YARD
TRENCH WIDTH AS
PER OPSD-802.010
NOTES:
1. SIDE SLOPE OF SWALE - MIN. 1.5%, MAX. 3:1.
2. LONGITUDINAL SLOPE OF SWALE WITHOUT PERFORATED PIPE 1.5% MIN.
3. LONGITUDINAL SLOPE OF SWALE WITH PERFORATED PIPE 0.5% MIN. WITH 1% OR GREATER PREFERRED.
4. UNDER DRIVEWAYS NON PERFORATED PIPE TO BE USED WITH 75mm BEDDING AND BACKFILLED WITH APPROVED NATIVE MATERIAL.
5. CB "T" TO BE SPACED ABOUT EVERY 20 TO 25m AND LOCATED 1m OFF REAR YARD AND SIDE YARD PROPERTY LINES.
6. CB ELBOW TO BE AT UPPER ENDS OF PERFORATED PIPE AND LOCATED 1m OFF REAR YARD AND SIDE YARD PROPERTY LINES.
7. GEOTEXTILE SHALL BE APPROVED NON-WOVEN CLASS 1 OR AS SPECIFIED.
8. MAXIMUM REAR YARD WATER DEPTH IS 300mm.

N.T.S.
DATE: MARCH 2007
PERFORATED PIPE INSTALLATION
REV.
FOR REAR YARD AND DATE:
MARCH 2017
LANDSCAPING APPLICATIONS DWG. No.:

S29
.
.
.
WATER STANDARD DETAIL DRAWINGS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
W1 Pipe Joints at Chambers

W2 Circular Chamber Butterfly Valves
W3 Circular Chamber Gate Valves
W3.1 Flow Monitoring Chamber
W3.2 Automatic Flushing Chamber
W3.3 Boundary Valve Chamber
W4 Tapping Valve & Sleeve in Chamber
W5 Circular Chamber Base Sections
W6 Circular Chamber Section
W7 Precast Top for Butterfly & Tapping Valve Chambers
W8 Precast Top for Gate Valve Chambers
W9 Adjustment Section
W10 Access, Air & Drain Valve Chambers R1 & R2
W11 Branch Valve Chamber R-3 & R-4
W11.1 T.V.S. Chamber
W12 Valve Chamber R-3 & R-4
W13 Branch & Line Valve Chamber R-4
W14 Precast Top
W14.1 Construction Joint Waterproofing Details
W15 Standard Cover for Valve Chambers
W16 Standard Frame for Valve Chambers (Modified OPSD – 401.020)
W17 Standard Trench Detail
W18 Hydrant Location
W19 Hydrant Installation
W20 Hydrants in Ditched Area
W21 Thermal Insulation in Ditched Areas
W22 Thermal Insulation For Watermains in Shallow Trenches
W23 Thermal Insulation of Watermains at Open Structures
W24 Valve Box Assembly
W25 Watermain Crossing Below Sewer
W25.1 Typical Connection Detail from New to Existing Watermain
W25.2 Watermain Crossing Over Sewer
W25.3 Concrete Thrust Blocks for PVC and DI Pipe 400mm and Under
W25.4 Thrust Block Dimension Tables for PVC and DI Pipe 400mm and
Under
W25.5 Restraining and Retaining Rings for PVC and DI Pipe 400mm and
Under
W25.6 Tables of Restrained Lengths for PVC and DI Pipe 400mm and
Under
W26 Typical Service Line 19 & 25mm (Nominal) Diameter
W27 Location of Services Open Cut
W28 Temporary Support for Existing Watermain
W29 Support Detail for Crossing Below an Existing Watermain
W29.1 Support Detail for Crossing Below an Existing Watermain
W30 Typical Water Meter & Radio Endpoint Installation 15mm to 25mm
Standard Detail Drawing\Water Table – March 1, 2016

WATER STANDARD DETAIL DRAWINGS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
W31 Typical Water Meter & Radio Endpoint Installation 40mm & 50mm
W31.1 Typical Park Water Meter Installation 50mm
W31.2 Park or Garden Meter Installation 25mm (City Use Only)
W31.3 Secondary Rink Valve Chamber
W32 Typical Water Meter Installation 75mm & Larger
W32.1 Fire Line Meter Chamber
W33 Service Line 40 & 50mm (Nominal) Diameter
W34 Hydrostatic Test Gauge and Connector
W34.1 Swab Stack
W35 Service Post Assembly for Services Up to 50mm
W36 Tracer Wire Installation
W37 Watermain Layout for Residential Cul-de-Sacs
W37.1 Watermain Layout for Residential P-Type Cul-de-Sac
W37.2 Watermain Layout for Residential Dead-End Streets
W38 Service Installation at Sewer Crossing
W39 Cathodic Protection for Ductile Iron Watermain Systems
W40 Cathodic Protection for PVC Watermain Systems
W41 Typical Anode Installation D.I. Watermain
W42 Typical Anode Installation PVC Watermain
W43 Anode Installation in Cul-de-Sac D.I. Watermain
W44 Anode Installation in Cul-de-Sac PVC Watermain
W45 Anode Installation on Existing D.I. or C.I. Watermains with Copper
Services
W46 Typical Chlorination Nozzle Locations
W47 Waterproofing of Splices
W48 Cathodic Protection Details Single Anode Array at Copper Service
W49 Single Vertical Anode Bank at Hydrants
W50 Typical Private Service > 100mm Connection Procedure
W51 Water Fill Station
W52 Underground Water Reservoir Draw Pipe Details
W53 Dry Hydrant Installation – Surface Water Source
W54 Typical Remote Fire Protection – Supply Main c/w Hydrants
Standard Detail Drawing\Water Table – March 1, 2016

.
IF SPECIFIED, APPROVED
ANODE TEST STATION
LOCATED IN GRASSED AREA
SEE W39 FOR DETAILS
NOZZLE
ATTACH APPROVED RING CONNECTOR

TO STRIPPED END OF ANODE WIRE
THEN ATTACH TO VALVE BOLT
300
A A
BARE
M-9-14
MAGNESIUM
ANODE
NOZZLE PLAN
HATCHING INDICATES
BOLT AREA TO BE
PROTECTED WITH AN
APPROVED PETROLATUM
TAPE SYSTEM FRAME & COVER
(W15 & W16)
VARIES
762
ADJUSTMENT UNIT
(W9)
430
REINFORCE TOP
(W7)
VARIES
1525
152
381
CIRCULAR SECTION
(W6)
400
GROUT PRECAST BASE

(W5)
150
SECTION A -A BEDDING MATERIAL

(W17)
NOTES
FOR VALVES ON 400mm (NOMINAL) WATERMAINS.
1. CLEARANCE AROUND PIPE AND CHAMBER WALL TO BE 50mm MINIMUM.
2. REFER TO MW-13.1 FOR ADDITIONAL REQUIRMENTS.
3. REFER TO MW-19.15 FOR APPROVED MANUFACTURES.
DATE: MAY 2001
CIRCULAR CHAMBER REV.

DATE:
MARCH 2007
BUTTERFLY VALVES DWG. No.: W2

C
L
FIELD CUT TO FIT
50mm dia.
MAIN STOP
750 (CHLORINATION NOZZLE)
0
5
2
1829
762 FRAME & COVER (W15 & W16)
C
L
VARIES, ADJUSTMENT UNIT (W9)
PRECAST TOP
W8
CIRCULAR CHAMBER
SECTIONS
(W6)
KEYWAY JOINT TO BE
SEALED SEE MW 13.1
W6 (WITH CUTOUT)
50mm DIA.
MAIN CORPORATION STOP
(CHLORINATION NOZZLE) 1200
FILL WITH GRANULAR

"A" TOP OF PIPE
906mm O.D.
BASE SECTION W5 200
150mm OF GRAN. "A"
OUTSIDE DIA. +100mm
NOTES:
1. FOR 900mm DIA. (NOMINAL) AND SMALLER.

REFER TO MW-13.1 FOR ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS.
REFER TO MW-19.15 FOR APPROVED MANUFACTURERS.
N.T.S.
DATE: MAY 2001
FLOW MONITORING REV.

MARCH 2011
DATE:
CHAMBER DWG. No.: W3.1

.
BARE
M-9-14 ATTACH APPROVED RING
MAGNESIUM CONNECTOR TO STRIPPED
ANODE END OF ANODE WIRE THEN
ATTACH TO VALVE BOLT
50mm NOZZLE 50mm NOZZLE
ANODE TEST STATION
SEE W39 FOR DETAILS
A A
300
(SAMPLE POINT
M
ON LOW SIDE)
GLOBE VALVE
PRECAST BASE
(W5)
FLOWMETER
BYPASS ASSEMBLY TO BE
SUPPLIED AND INSTALLED
BACKFLOW PREVENTER BY CITY FORCES.
(MUST BE INSTALLED
ON HIGH SIDE)
PLAN
C
L GATE VALVE
HATCHING INDICATES
BOLT AREA TO BE
PROTECTED WITH AN
FRAME & COVER
APPROVED PETROLATUM
(W15 & W16)
TAPE SYSTEM
ES
VARI
ADJUSTMENT UNITS
(W9)
762
430
REINFORCED TOP
(W8)
1525
152
ES
VARI
CIRCULAR SECTION
M (W6)
19mm DIA. BYPASS ASSEMBLY FOR ZONE 575

BOUNDARY CHAMBERS ONLY
TO BE SUPPLIED AND INSTALLED
BY CITY FORCES
ES
VARI
150
SECTION A - A BEDDING MATERIAL

(W17)
NOTES
1. CLEARANCE AROUND PIPE AT CHAMBER WALL TO BE 50mm MINIMUM.
2. VALVE CHAMBERS IN LIEU OF BOXES ON WATERMAINS SMALLER THAN 300mm ONLY TO BE USED, IF APPROVED BY THE
CONTRACT ADMINISTRATOR.
3. REFER TO MW-13.1 FOR ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS.
4. REFER TO MW-19.15 FOR APPROVED MANUFACTURERS.
N.T.S.
DATE: MARCH 2007
REV.
MARCH 2011
BOUNDARY VALVE CHAMBER DATE:
DWG. No.: W3.3

BARE
M-9-14 ATTACH APPROVED RING
MAGNESIUM CONNECTOR TO STRIPPED
ANODE END OF ANODE WIRE THEN
ATTACH TO VALVE BOLT
50mm NOZZLE 50mm NOZZLE
ANODE TEST STATION
SEE W39 FOR DETAILS
A A
300
PRECAST BASE
(W5)
PLAN
C
L GATE VALVE
HATCHING INDICATES
BOLT AREA TO BE
PROTECTED WITH AN
FRAME & COVER
APPROVED PETROLATUM
(W15 & W16)
TAPE SYSTEM
VARIES
ADJUSTMENT UNITS
(W9)
762
430
REINFORCED TOP
(W8)
1525
152
VARIES
CIRCULAR SECTION
(W6)
575
VARIES
150
SECTION A - A BEDDING MATERIAL

(W17)
NOTES
2. VALVE CHAMBERS IN LIEU OF BOXES ON WATERMAINS SMALLER THAN 300mm ONLY TO BE USED, IF APPROVED BY THE
DATE: MAY 2001
CIRCULAR CHAMBER REV.

MARCH 2007
DATE:
GATE VALVES DWG. No.: W3

CUT TO SUIT
ANODE TEST STATION
SEE W39 FOR DETAILS NOZZLE
THRUST BLOCK
TAPPING SLEEVE
A A
ATTACH APPROVED RING CONNECTOR

TO STRIPPED END OF ANODE WIRE
THEN ATTACH TO VALVE BOLT
HATCHING INDICATES BARE

BOLT AREA TO BE M-9-14
PROTECTED WITH AN MAGNESIUM
APPROVED PETROLATUM ANODE
TAPE SYSTEM
PLAN
CUT BASE
SECTION
TO SUIT
VALVE
L
C
GATE
FRAME & COVER

(W15 & W16)
ADJUSTMENT UNIT
(W9)
PRECAST CHAMBER TOP

(W8)
1525
THRUST BLOCKS
575
CIRCULAR SECTION
(W6)
NOZZLE
PRECAST BASE
(W5)
BEDDING MATERIAL
150
(W17)
SECTION A-A
NOTES:
FOR TAPPING BRANCH VALVES ON 300mm (NOMINAL) WATERMAINS.
2. VALVE CHAMBERS IN LIEU OF BOXES, ON WATERMAINS SMALLER THAN 300mm, ONLY TO BE USED IF APPROVED BY THE
DATE: MAY 2001
TAPPING VALVE & SLEEVE REV.

DATE:
MARCH 2007
IN CHAMBER DWG. No.: W4

.
ATTACH APPROVED RING CONNECTOR IF SPECIFIED, APPROVED
TO STRIPPED END OF ANODE WIRE ANODE TEST STATION
THEN ATTACH TO VALVE BOLT LOCATED IN GRASSED AREA
SEE W39 FOR DETAILS
HATCHING INDICATES
BOLT AREA TO BE
PROTECTED WITH AN
APPROVED PETROLATUM
TAPE SYSTEM
SUMP
300
THRUST BLOCK
150mm
REF. NOTE 2
TYPICAL
PLAIN END BARE
M-9-14
R3:2400
R4:3000
300mm
MAGNESIUM
ANODES
A
A
600 MIN.
50
VALVE BOX R3: 3000
W/CAP R4: 3750
FINISHED GRADE
PLAN
CONCRETE 50mm DEEP

SEAL x 150 DIA. SEAT
C HAND WHEEL
VALVE BOX L
(SEE DETAIL "A")
FRAME & COVER

KEY HOLE ADJUSTMENT SECTION
100 DIA.
DETAIL "A"
N.
750
MI
TOP SECTION
NPS + 1375
N
P
S
C PIPE = C
JOINT LINE
L L
20MPa CONCRETE
1000 MIN.
BASE SECTION
SUMP
600 MIN.
GRANULAR 0.8 I.D.
NOTES:
SECTION A-A
FOR: BRANCH VALVES ONLY: 150 TO 1200mm (NOMINAL).
TYPE R-3: 600 TO 900mm (NOMINAL) MAINS.
TYPE R-4: 1100 TO 1800mm (NOMINAL) MAINS.
1. FOR ROOF SLAB DETAIL SEE W14.
2. THRUST BLOCKS FOR MAINS LARGER THAN 400mm REQUIRE INDIVIDUAL DESIGN.
3. FOR 600 TO 1200mm (NOMINAL), BRANCH MAY BE TANGENTIAL TYPE WITH AIR VALVE OR DRAIN OUT.
4. 100mm DIA. FLANGED TANGENTIAL, TEES MAY BE LOCATED FOR AIR OR DRAIN OUT PURPOSES ON EITHER LINE.
8. CHAMBER JOINTS TO BE SEALED AS PER W14.1. N.T.S.

DATE: MAY 2001
BRANCH VALVE CHAMBER REV.

MARCH 2011
DATE:
R-3 & R-4 DWG. No.: W11

.
.
FLEXIBLE WATERPROOF
MAMBRANE AROUND
PRECAST JOINT (TYP.)
300
300
300
HYDROPHILIC
WATERSTOP
(TYP.) EXTERIOR
FACE
(TYP.)
WALL WALL
WALL
300
HYDROPHILIC FLEXIBLE WATRPROOF
WATERSTOP MEMBRANE AROUND
PRECAST JOINT
TOP SLAB
PRECAST JOINT DETAILS
CONTINUOUS HYDROPHILIC
150mm PVC CONTINUOUS WATERSTOP AT ALL
WATERSTOP AT ALL CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
OR
WALL WALL
CAST-IN-PLACE JOINT DETAIL
NOTES
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETRES.
2. REFER TO MS - 22.15 FOR APPROVED PRODUCTS
DATE: DEC 2002
CONSTRUCTION JOINT REV.

DATE:
MARCH 2008
WATERPROOFING DETAILS DWG. No.: W14.1

.
.
2011-Mar-17 12:49:36
.
.
.
1. SOIL DESCRIPTION: VERY FINE SANDS, SANDY CLAYS, CLAYS.
SOILS WITH TYPICAL BEARING STRENGTH OF 100 TO 199 KPa
DIMENSION NOTED ON W25.3

PIPE
DIAMETER
A B C D
102 250 250 200 200
152 400 400 250 300
203 550 550 300 450
254 650 650 400 500
305 800 800 450 650
406 1050 1050 600 850
2. SOIL DESCRIPTION: SILTY SAND GRAVELS OR CLAYEY SAND GRAVEL

MIXTURES, MODERATE AMOUNT OF FINES.
SOILS WITH TYPICAL BEARING STRENGTH OF 200 TO 299 KPa

PIPE
DIAMETER
A B C D
102 200 200 150 150
152 250 250 200 200
203 350 350 250 270
254 450 450 300 350
305 500 500 350 400
406 750 750 400 600
3. SOIL DESCRIPTION: SANDS, GRAVELS AND GRAVEL-SAND MIXTURES,

LITTLE OR NO FINES.
SOILS WITH TYPICAL BEARING STRENGTH OF 300 KPa AND OVER

PIPE
DIAMETER
A B C D
102 150 150 150 150
152 200 200 200 200
203 300 300 200 230
254 400 400 250 270
305 450 450 300 300
406 650 650 350 450
NOTES:
1.THE ABOVE THRUST BLOCK DIMENSIONS MEET OR EXCEED THE WATERMAIN DESIGN CRITERIA FOR FUTURE ALTERATIONS
AUTHORIZED UNDER A DRINKING WATER WORKS PERMIT.
2.THE ASSUMPTIONS MADE FOR THE ABOVE CALCULATIONS ARE AS FOLLOWS:
a)MAXIMUM OPERATING PRESSURE OF 100 psi.
b)MAXIMUM SURGE PRESSURE WITH A FLOW VELOCITY CHANGE OF 0.6 m/s
OF 115 psi (115 psi FOR CLASS 52 DI AND FOR PVC MAX. SURGE IS 35 psi)
3.THE TABLES APPLY TO BOTH DUCTILE IRON AND PVC. WHERE ONE LENGTH EXCEEDED THE OTHER THE LONGER LENGTH WAS USED.
4.DIMENSIONS MAY BE ADJUSTED SO LONG AS THE BEARING SURFACE AREA OF THE THRUST BLOCK IS NOT REDUCED.
4.TO BE USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH W25.3.
DATE: MAY 2001

THRUST BLOCK DIMENSION TABLES
REV.
MARCH 2011
FOR PVC AND DI PIPE DATE:
400mm AND UNDER DWG. No.: W25.4

TABLE OF RESTRAINED LENGTHS FOR DI AND PVC WATERMAIN PIPE IN STANDARD
GRANULAR ’A’ EMBEDMENT IN SOILS OF BEARING CAPACITY OF 100 KPa AND OVER
REDUCERS LARGER DIAMETER SIDE (TO BE RESTRAINED)
SMALLER DIAMETER (UNRESTRAINED) 100mm 150mm 200mm 250mm 300mm 400mm
100mm N/A 3 6 8 10 14
150mm N/A N/A 4 6 9 13
200mm N/A N/A N/A 3 6 11
250mm N/A N/A N/A N/A 4 9
300mm N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 7
400mm N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
PIPE DIAMETER
100mm 150mm 200mm 250mm 300mm 400mm
DEAD ENDS, CAPS, PLUGS, VALVES
BEFORE CAPS AND EITHER SIDE OF VALVES - L 5 6 9 10 12 16
VERTICAL BENDS
LENGTH HIGH SIDE - LHS 3 4 5 6 7 9
LENGTH LOW SIDE - LLS 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4.5
TEES
LENGTH ALONG THE BRANCH - L 1 1 1 1 1 1
LENGTH ALONG THE RUN - Lr 3 3 3 3 3 3
HORIZONTAL BENDS
11.25, 22.5, AND 45 DEGREE BENDS 1 1.5 1.5 2 2 2.5
NOTES:
1. THE ABOVE RESTRAINED LENGTHS MEET OR EXCEED THE WATERMAIN DESIGN CRITERIA FOR FUTURE ALTERATIONS
AUTHORIZED UNDER A DRINKING WATER WORKS PERMIT.
2. THE ASSUMPTIONS MADE FOR THE ABOVE CALCULATIONS ARE AS FOLLOWS:
a)MAXIMUM OPERATING PRESSURE OF 100 psi.
b)MAXIMUM SURGE PRESSURE WITH A FLOW VELOCITY CHANGE OF 0.6 m/s

OF 115 psi (115 psi FOR CLASS 52 DI AND FOR PVC MAX. SURGE IS 35 psi)
3. FOR SOFTWARE CALCULATIONS A TEST PRESSURE OF 150 psi AND A SAFETY FACTOR OF 1.5 WAS USED WHICH RESULTS IN 225 psi MAXIMUM PRESSURE.
4. TYPE 5 TRENCH BEDDING.
5. DEPTH TO BURY 2.4 METRES EXCEPT FOR VERTICAL BENDS WHERE THE HIGH SIDE IS AT 1.8 METRES.
6. EMBEDMENT MATERIAL GRANULAR ’A’ WITH CHARACTERISTICS OF ASTM D2487 GP.
7. GP SOILS ARE DESCRIBED AS POORLY GRADED GRAVEL AND SAND-GRAVEL MIXES WITH LITTLE OR NO FINES.
8. (Lr) MUST BE OF SOLID PIPE WITHOUT JOINTS, FITTINGS, ETC.
9. THE TABLES APPLY TO BOTH DUCTILE IRON AND PVC. WHERE ONE LENGTH EXCEEDED THE OTHER THE LONGER LENGTH WAS USED.
10. RESTRAINED LENGTHS ARE IN METRES.
DATE: MAY 2001

TABLES OF RESTRAINED LENGTHS
REV.
MARCH 2011
FOR PVC AND DI PIPE DATE:
400mm AND UNDER DWG. No.: W25.6

.
.
NOTE 2
NOTE 2
NOTE 2
NOTE 2
NOTE 2
NOTE 2
NOTE 2
WATERMAIN
LOT LINE
NOTE 1
NOTE 1
NOTE 2
D
1/2 D
P
L
NOTES
1. FOR 6.0m AND UNDER, LOCATING SERVICES UNDER THE DRIVEWAY TO BE DONE ON A CASE BY CASE ONLY BASIS.
2. FOR OVER 6.0m, LOCATE SERVICES IN LANDSCAPED AREA.
3. LOCATION OF WATER SERVICES SHALL BE COORDINATED WITH UTILITIES & LANDSCAPE FURNITURE TO AVOID CONFLICTS.
4. TO AVOID CONFLICTS WITH OTHER UTILITIES, SERVICE POST CAN BE LOCATED IN THE DRIVEWAY SUBJECT TO APPROVAL
BY THE CONTRACT ADMINISTRATOR.
DATE: MAY 2001
LOCATION OF SERVICES REV.

DATE:
MARCH 2008
OPEN CUT DWG. No.: W27

.
1.2m DIA
STONEDUST
REMOTE METER POST

50mm DIA GALV PIPE 2- 150mm x 150mm REPLACE STAND CAP WITH THREADED 25mm CAP
BOLTED TO CHAMBER WITH CHAIN WELDED TO POST AND CAP
REMOTE RADIO ENDPOINT (BY CITY) SEE DETAIL 'A'
20mm DIA WIRE CONDUIT THROUGH

CONCRETE INTO CHAMBER
UPPER SECTION,
ADJUSTMENT SECTION AS REQUIRED 1000 MIN COVER AND PLUG
1200 MAX PER W35
FRAME AND COVER AS PER W15
200
FINISH GRADE
SERVICE POST AS PER

W35 LOCATED WITHIN
1.0m OF CHAMBER
THREADED COUPLING
SHUT-OFF
VALVE POSTS TO BE PREVENTED
FROM FALLING INTO
CHAMBER
2.4m
50mm SHUT-OFF & DRAIN
ROD PER W35 VALVE BY MUELLER, FORD OR
CAMBRIDGE BRASS
2000 MIN
APPROVED 50mm CURB STOP
APPROVED 50mm SEDIMENT VALVE

CURB STOP
TEMPLATE FOR
WATER METER
300
MIN SUPPLIED BY THE CITY SECONDARY PARK SUPPLY
CONCRETE OR STEEL
FLOOR SUPPORTS
GRANULAR
FROM THE CURB STOP/SERVICE POST AT

THE PROPERTY LINE REMOTE METER POST
SERVICE POST AS PER W33 SUMP 150mm
2 - 150mm x 150mm OR
BOLTED TO CHAMBER APPROVED EQUIVALENT
(LOCATION TO BE DETERMINED
BY INTERIOR PIPE LAYOUT) 1.2m DIAMETER STONE DUST PAD
REMOTE READER FROM TOP OF CHAMBER TO SURFACE
50mm SHUT-OFF & DRAIN

VALVE BY MUELLER, FORD OR
CAMBRIDGE BRASS
STAND PIPE 50mm DIA. GALVANIZED
APPROVED 50mm
CURB STOP
450
MIN 450mm SPACE

BETWEEN RINK SHUT OFF APPROVED 50mm WATER SECONDARY PARK SUPPLY
AS REQUIRED
AND POST / STANDPIPE HAMMER ARRESTER

1520 MIN
TO SUIT
CSA B64.5 BACKFLOW PREVENTOR

C/W STRAINER
490 DUAL CHECK BACKFLOW
50mm WATERLINE
TEMPLATE FOR TEE OFF LINE WITH
WATER METER APPROVED 19mm BRASS
SUPPLIED BY THE CITY SEDIMENT VALVE
3/8" DIA. X 1" H.D. GAL. BOLT

WELDED TO TOP OF CAP
1830 MIN
1" H.D. GAL. 1/4" H.D. GAL. CHAIN
END CAP WELDED TO SIDE OF PIPE
LOCKING HASP
NOTES:
WELDED
1. ALL MEASUREMENTS ARE IN MILLIMETRES UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED PIPE FROM STOP AND
2. ALL MATERIALS SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH MW-19.15 DRAIN VALVE
3. ENSURE BACKFLOW PREVENTER IS INSTALLED AFTER METER
4. DRAWING VALID FOR 50mm SERVICES ONLY
DETAIL À'
TITLE: DATE: MAR 2013
TYPICAL PARK WATER METER REV: FEB 2017
INSTALLATION 50mm DWG No:
W31.1
CONCRETE PAD FORMETER
TO REST ON
FILL VOID WITH GRANULAR

AS REQUIRED
PRECAST BASE
(W5)
REMOTE RADIO ENDPOINT PLAN

(BY CITY)
WHERE SPECIFIED REMOTE

SERVICE POST METER POST BOLTED TO
CHAMBER 150 x 150 OR
AS PER W35 APPROVED EQUIVALENT
POST TO BE PREVENTED FROM
FALLING INTO CHAMBER
FRAME & COVER
19mm DIA BRASS 20mm DIA. RECEIVER (W15 & W16)
MALE QUICK 1000mm
COUPLER C/W KEY 1200 MAX
WIRE CONDUIT
AND GARDEN HOSE
VALVE BY 'RAIN FINISH GRADE
BIRD' OR EQUAL
19mm DIA BRASS FEMALE
QUICK COUPLER 'RAIN
VARIES
BIRD' 33DNP OR EQUAL ADJUSTMENT UNITS

AS REQUIRED
'RAIN BIRD' PVB6RND (W9)
VALVE BOX OR EQUAL
C/W CLIP ON
REMOVABLE CAP (FILL
WITH GRAVEL) 762
430
REINFORCED TOP
'RAIN BIRD' 19mm DIA (W8)
TSJ SERIES SWING
JOINT OR EQUAL SERVICE POST
AS PER W35
1525
2.4m 152 LOCATED WITHIN
ADAPTER FROM
COPPER TO PVC 1.0m OF CHAMBER
SECURE WIRE & CONDUIT FOR
METER TO SIDE OF CHAMBER
25mm SUPPLY PIPE

1524
FROM WATERMAIN 25mm SHUTOFF AND DRAIN CIRCULAR SECTION

AND SERVICE POST VALVE BY MUELLER FORD (W6)
OR CAMBRIDGE BRASS
WHERE SPECIFIED
25mm WATER HAMMER
ARRESTER APPROVED 25mm
CURB STOP
275
25mm WATERLINE
150
BALL VALVE 25mm SUPPLY PIPE FROM

CONCRETE WATERMAIN AND
SUPPORT BLOCK BEDDING MATERIAL SERVICE POST
CSA B64.5 (W17)
DUEL CHECK
BACKFLOW PREVENTER TEE OFF LINE WITH APPROVED
19mm SEDIMENT VALVE
NOTES:
TEMPLATE FOR WATER METER
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETRES UNLESS SHOWN OTHERWISE
SUPPLIED BY THE CITY (25mm TYP)
2. METER MUST BE INSTALLED HORIZONTALLY
3. ALL MATERIALS SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH MW-19.15
4. ENSURE BACKFLOW PREVENTER IS INSTALLED AFTER METER
5. DRAWING VALID FOR 25mm SERVICES (NO RINK, NO SPLASH PAD)
TITLE: DATE: APR 2013

PARK OR GARDEN METER REV: JAN 2017
INSTALLATION 25mm (CITY USE ONLY) DWG No:
W31.2
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
BARE WIRE & ABRADE ALL SMOOTH
SURFACES OF INSULATION. APPROVED MOISTURE PROOFING SEALANT
HEADER CABLE
25 mm(MIN.) 25 mm(MIN.)
APPLY WRINKLE FREE LAYERS OF

APPROVED SELF-AMALGAMATING TAPE
SEE NOTES #2, 3 AND 4

LEAD CABLE
NOTES:
1. SEE MW-19.9 FOR WIRE SPECIFICATIONS.
2. C-TAP, THERMITE WELD OR DIRECT BURY LUG.
3. PRE SILVER SOLDER WIRES WITH C-TAP AND INSTALL USING APPROVED TOOL.
4. ILLUSTRATED PROTECTION MEASURES ARE NOT REQUIRED WITH DIRECT BURY LUGS.
5. SEE MS-22.15 FOR APPROVED PRODUCTS.
DATE: MAY 2001
REV.
MARCH 2011
DATE:
WATERPROOFING OF SPLICES
DWG. No.: W47
.
.
.
ROAD STANDARD DETAIL DRAWINGS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
R1 Subdrain Installation Detail

R3 Concrete Interlocking Paving Stones & Street Crossings
R4 Composite or Exposed Concrete Pavements (Full Depth Concrete
Slab Repair Layout)
R5 Exposed Concrete Pavement (Full Depth Concrete Slab Repair
Joint Details)
R6 Composite Pavement (Full Depth Concrete Slab Repair Joint
Details)
R7 Typical Intersection Narrowing (Double)
R8 Typical Intersection Narrowing (Single)
R9 Typical Mid Block Narrowing
R10 Standard Trench Reinstatement in Paved Surface
R12 Concrete Retaining Wall Max. 1.0m High
R15 Typical Raised Crosswalk
R16 Bullnose Treatment
R17 Pavement Widening Existing Urban & Rural Roads
R18 Benching of Earth Slopes
R19 Speed Hump Detail
R19.1 Flat Top Speed Hump Detail
R20 General Water Plant to Utility Clearance
R21 Townhouse Servicing
R22 Traffic Structure Clearances to Water Plant
R23 Manholes and Valve Chambers Excavation Clearances
R24 Temporary Street Name Signs
R25 Asphalt Reinstatement
R26 Asphalt paving at Unit Paving
R27 Rural Local Roadway Cross Section Over Earth
R28 Rural Local Roadway Cross Section Over Rock
ROW-16.5JT Residential Road 16.5m Road Allowance 4 Party Joint Use Trench
ROW-20R Residential Road 20.0m Road Allowance Rural Section
ROW-Notes Standard Notes Road Allowance
Standard Detail Drawing\Road Table – March 1, 2017

DEAD END OF SUBDRAIN
TO BE SEALED
TOP OF CURB
FACE OF CURB
EDGE OF FRAME
LAST 1m OF PIPE OUTLETTING

TO CATCH BASIN TO BE
NON-PERFORATED
LONGITUDINAL SUBDRAIN
CONNECTION TO CATCH BASIN
500
CONCRETE SIDEWALK
FINISHED ROAD
SURFACE
GRANULAR "A"
GRANULAR "B"
GEOTEXTILE FILTER CLOTH
300
150 DIA. PERFORATED SUB DRAIN
HL4 COARSE AGGREGATE BEDDING & BACKFILL
50
450
NOTES:
1. ALL CONECTIONS TO BE MADE ON BOTH SIDES OF THE CATCH BASIN AND TO BE MORTARED AT THE
INSIDE AND OUTSIDE OF THE CATCH BASIN WALLS. THE SUBDRAIN SHALL BE PLUGGED WITH A MANUFACTURED
PLUG AT THE HIGH POINT WHERE THERE IS NO CATCH BASIN.
2. APPROVED NON-WOVEN CLASS 1 GEOTEXTILE AS PER MS-22.15.
3. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS UNLESS OTHERWISE SHOWN.
4. ALL SUBDRAIN TO PROVIDE POSITIVE DRAINAGE.
DATE: MAY 2001
REV. MARCH 2009

SUBDRAIN INSTALLATION DETAIL DATE:
DWG. No.: R1
.
.
.
.
SURFACE COURSE KEY FULL DEPTH KEY
OPTI
ON #2 OPTION #1
50m m GRIND
300m m (MIN.) TYP. 300m m (MI
N.) TYP.
TRENCH W I
DTH
FULL DEPTH SAW CUT
TREAT ALL CUT FACES W I
TH TACK COAT
SAW CUT BEFORE PLACI
NG ASPHALT
EXI
STI
NG LI
FTS OF ASPHALT
EXI
STI
NG GRANULAR '
A'
GRANULAR '
A'- REI
NSTATE EXI
STI
NG (150m m MI
N.)
UNDI
STURBED GRANULAR
EXI
STI
NG GRANULAR '
B'
GRANULAR '
B'TYPE 2 - REI
NSTATE EXI
STI
NG (300m m MI
N.)
EXI
STI
NG SUBGRADE
TRENCH SAVE AND REPLACE W I

TH EXCAVATED (NATI
VE)
MATERI
AL EXCEPT I
N I
MMEDI
ATE AREA OF PI
PES
W HERE BEDDI
NG AND CUSHI
ON (COVER) REQUI
REMENTS
SHALL PREVAI
L. W HERE EXCAVATED MATERI
AL I
S
UNSUI
TABLE DUE TO MOI
STURE CONTENT OR CONTAMI
NATI
ON
A MATERI
AL OF SI
MILAR FROST SUSCEPTI
BILI
TY SHALL BE
I
MPORTED OR AN APPROVED FROST TAPER I
NSTALLED.
MATCH EXI
STING ASPHALT DEPTHS
LI
FTS TO BE 50m m DEPTH MAXI
MUM, EXCAVATED TRENCH COMPACTED I
N ACCORDANCE W I
TH D-029 TABLE 2
IN PAVED SURFACE
COMPACTED AS PER OPSS 310
STANDARD TRENCH REINSTATMENT

NOTES
1.ALL EXI
STI
NG ASPHALT TO BE SAW CUT.
REV.
DATE:
DATE:
2.UNLESS SPECI
FIED ELSEW HERE,SURFACE COURSE ASPHALT SUPERPAVE 12.5m m LEVEL B (PG58-34) AND BASE COURSE ASPHALT SUPERPAVE 19.0m m LEVEL B (PG58-34) I
S TO BE USED.
DWG. No.:
3.UNLESS SPECI
FIED ELSEW HERE,W HERE EXI
STI
NG PAVEMENT STRUCTURE EXCEEDS 150m m I
N DEPTH,ASPHALT REI
NSTATEMENT SHALL BE 150m m AND GRANULAR "A" FOR THE REMAI
NDER.
4.UNLESS SPECIFI
ED ELSEW HERE,W HERE AN UNDERLYI
NG LAYER OF CONCRETE PAVEMENT EXI
STS,REI
NSTATEMENT SHALL CONSI
ST OF 150m m OF SUPERPAVE 19.0m m LEVEL B (PG58-34)
COMPACTED IN LIFTS.
R10
MAY 2001
MARCH 2017
5.UNLESS SPECI
FIED ELSEW HERE,HOT MI
X ASPHALT PLACEMENT AND CONSTRUCTI
ON SHALL BE I
N ACCORDANCE W I
TH F-3130.
.
B
MILLED KEY
C
L
A A
SPEED HUMP
LOCAL STREET
4.0
SPEED HUMP
(HL 3)
NOTE 4
MILLED KEY
700mm 700mm
EXISTING
TOP PAVEMENT
SECTION A - A
LOCAL STREET
Sinusoidal Speed Hump Dimensions Table
DISTANCE(m) 0.000 0.125 0.250 0.375 0.5000 0.625 0.750 0.875 1.000 1.125 1.250 1.375 1.5000 1.625 1.750 1.875 2.000
FINISHED
0 1 3 7 12 18 25 32 40 48 55 62 68 73 77 79 80
HEIGHT(mm)
SPEED HUMP (HL 3)

0.5 MAX. TAPER 0.5
NOTE 1
CURB FACE
MILLED KEY 700mm EXISTING

TOP PAVEMENT
SECTION B - B
NOTES:
1. CROSSFALL SHALL BE IDENTICAL TO EXISTING CROSSFALL OF THE STREET.

2. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN METERS UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
3. REFER TO SINUSOIDAL SPEED HUMP TABLE FOR TOP OF PAVEMENT PROFILE.
4. REMOVED ASPHALT PAVEMENT MATERIAL SHALL BE DISPOSED OFF-SITE ACCORDING TO OPSS 180.
DATE: MARCH 2006
REV.
SPEED HUMP DETAIL DATE:
DWG. No.: R19

.
.
.
.
.
.
EXISTING GRANULARS NEW GRANULARS
200
NOTE:
1.SLOPE OF PAVEMENT TO MEET/MATCH EXISTING GRADES AT JUNCTION.

REFER TO GRADING PLAN FOR NEW CROSS SLOPE.
2.REMOVE CONTAMINATED GRANULARS
TITLE: DATE: JAN 2015
ASPHALT REINSTATEMENT REV:
DWG No:
R25
150
NOTE:
1.CROSS SLOPE WALKWAYS IN DIRECTION OF NATURAL DRAINAGE TO

PROVIDE POSITIVE DRAINAGE OFF ALL WALKWAYS
2.DEPTHS OF MATERIALS MAY VARY. WHERE DIFFERENCE IN DEPTH EXISTS,
TRANSITION AS SHOWN.
ASPHALT PAVING AT UNIT PAVING REV:
DWG No:
R26
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
NOTES:
1. THE STANDARDS INDICATE MINIMUM DIMENSIONS THAT ARE 18. STREET LIGHT CABLE SHALL BE PLACED IN JOINT USE TRENCH.
TO BE INCORPORATED INTO THE DESIGN OF ANY NEW STREET LIGHT CABLE SHALL BE AT SAME OFFSET AS STREET LIGHTS
DEVELOPMENTS INVOLVING NEW AND EXISTING STREETS. ANY WHEN JOINT USE TRENCH NOT CONSTRUCTED.
VARIATION TO THIS DESIGN WILL REQUIRE APPROVAL OF THE
19. TRAFFIC DUCT ALTERNATIVE PLACEMENT LOCATIONS ARE:
CITY OF OTTAWA.
1) JOINT USE TRENCH (JUT) LOCATION OR
2. ALL DRAWINGS TO BE READ IN CONJUNCTION WITH 2) SAME OFFSET AS STREETLIGHT POLES IN A SEPARATE TRENCH.
APPLICABLE CITY STANDARDS.
20. OPTIONAL LOCATION FOR THE TRAFFIC COMMUNICATIONS DUCT
3. ALL COMPOSITE UTILITY PLANS MUST ADHERE TO THE CITY OF OTTAWA’S IS A TRENCH LOCATED AT THE SAME OFFSET AS THE STREETLIGHT POLES.
STANDARD LOCATION OF UTILITY PLANT DRAWINGS IN
21. TRAFFIC ELECTRICAL DUCTS SHALL BE PLACED IN JOINT USE DUCT BANKS.
ORDER TO RECEIVE APPROVAL THROUGH THE SITE PLAN
22. TRAFFIC HANDHOLES MAY BE LOCATED IN THE BOULEVARD AREA ADJACENT
CONTROL AND SUBDIVISION APPROVALS PROCESS.
TO THE SIDEWALK.
4. TYPICAL CROSS SECTION BOULEVARD WIDTH SHALL BE
23. USE OF THE FOUR PARTY-UTILITY TRENCH WILL BE CONSIDERED AS AN
MAINTAINED WHEN CONSTRUCTING CUL-DE-SACS AND CORNER
OPTION, BUT REQUIRES THE AGREEMENT OF ALL UTILITIES PRIOR TO THE
LOTS REGARDLESS OF ROAD WAY GEOMETRY.
THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE COMPOSITE UTILITY PLAN, AND MUST BE IN
5. WATERMAIN AND HYDRANTS TO BE INSTALLED ON CONFORMANCE WITH THE GUIDELINES ESTABLISHED BY THE OTTAWA
SOUTH AND EAST SIDE OF R.O.W. WHEN POSSIBLE. UTILITY COORDINATING COMMITTEE.
6. SANITARY AND STORM SEWERS MAY BE INSTALLED OFF THE 24. THE DEVELOPER SHALL SUPPLY AND INSTALL DUCTS FOR UTILITY
STREET CENTERLINE TO ACCOMMODATE LARGE SIZE SEWER CROSSINGS AT INTERSECTIONS.
PIPES AND STILL MAINTAIN THE CLEARANCES REQUIRED TO

25. ONE TREE PER LOT TYPICAL. 2 TREES ON CORNER LOT
WATERMAINS.
WITH ONE OF THE TREES ON THE STREET SIDE OF THE LOT
7. THE USE IN-ROAD CATCH BASINS INSTEAD OF CURB INLET

CATCH BASINS SHALL BE APPROVED BY AN AUTHORIZED SPECIFIC TREE SPECIES SHALL BE SELECTED FOR SOIL TYPES
CITY REPRESENTATIVE. AND AVAILABLE SPACES FOR PLANTINGS.
8. THE USE OF BARRIER CURB AND MOUNTABLE CURB SHALL BE

TREE PLACEMENT LOCATION AND TREE SPECIES WILL REQUIRE
APPROVED BY AN AUTHORIZED CITY REPRESENTATIVE.
THE APPROVAL OF THE CITY.
MOUNTABLE CURB SHALL BE SPECIFIED FOR TYPICAL
TOWNHOUSE DEVELOPMENTS.
TREE PLANTING SHALL BE HAND EXCAVATED FOR THOSE LOCATIONS
9. BUILDING SEWERS AND WATER SERVICES ARE TO BE CONSTRUCTED WITH LESS THAN 1 METRE CLEARANCE TO THE JUT.
IN ACCORDANCE WITH CITY STANDARDS.
10. SANITARY AND STORM SERVICE CONNECTIONS WILL BE

EXTENDED A MINIMUM OF 2.0m BEYOND THE PROPERTY LINE TO
ALLOW FOR FUTURE CONNECTION. WATER SERVICE PIPE MATERIAL
SHALL BE LAID IN ONE CONTINUOUS PIPE LENGTH (i.e. SPLICING
AND JOINTING SHALL NOT BE PERMITTED) FROM INSIDE FACE OF

THE BUILDING TO THE CURBSTOP AND FROM THE CURBSTOP TO
THE MAIN / CORPORATION STOP.
11. 1.5m CLEARANCE TO BE MAINTAINED AROUND WATER SERVICE POST.
12. REFER TO UCC PROCEDURE MANUAL FOR UTILITY SPECIFICATION

CONCERNING PLANT INSTALLATIONS.
13. TRANSFORMERS AND PEDESTALS SHALL BE LOCATED BETWEEN
TOWNHOUSE BUILDING BLOCKS RATHER THAN ENCUMBERING AND/

OR PREVENTING THE INSTALLATION OF ROAD ALLOWANCE TREES.
14. ALL PEDESTALS TO BE INSTALLED IN LINE WITH HYDRO

TRANSFORMERS OR ON HOUSE SIDE OF TRENCH.
15. THE BASE OF A HYDRO TRANSFORMER MUST BE LOCATED A

MINIMUM OF 2.0m FROM THE EDGE OF A DRIVEWAY.
16. REQUIREMENTS FOR PROTECTIVE BOLLARDS AT TRANSFORMERS

SHALL BE DETERMINED BY HYDRO OR HYDRO ONE ON A
CASE BY CASE BASIS.
17. SERVICE LATERALS MUST BE LOCATED A MINIMUM OF 3.0m FROM

THE BASE OF A HYDRO TRANSFORMER. DATE: -
STANDARD NOTES REV.

MARCH 2009
DATE:
ROAD ALLOWANCE DWG. No.: ROW-NOTES

SIDEWALKS, CURBS and PATHWAYS STANDARD DETAIL DRAWINGS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SC1.1 Concrete Barrier Curb for Granular Base Pavement (Modified

OPSD-600.110)
SC1.2 Concrete Barrier Curb with Gutter for Granular Base Pavement
SC1.3 Concrete Mountable Curb with Gutter for Granular Base Pavement
SC1.4 Concrete Barrier Curb with Sidewalk
SC1.5 Modified Concrete Mountable Curb with Gutter for Roundabout
Truck Apron
SC2 Monolithic Concrete Curb and Sidewalk
SC3 Concrete Curb and Gutter with Sidewalk
SC4 Typical Concrete Sidewalk in Boulevard
SC5 Sidewalk Construction Joints
SC6 Pedestrian Curb Ramp Without Boulevard
SC7 Pedestrian Curb Ramp With Boulevard
SC7.1 Curb Return Entrances
SC7.2 Pedestrian Curb Ramp at Intersection with Boulevard and Adjacent
Sidewalk
SC7.3 TWSI Detail
SC8 Traditional Vehicle Access Crossing
SC8.1 Traditional Vehicle Access Crossing Transitions for Various
Distances between Accesses
SC9 Unit paving on granular base
SC9.1 Concrete curb and gutter with unit paver sidewalk
SC9.2 Sidewalk with Unit Paver Boulevard
SC9.3 Concrete Barrier Curb with Unit Paver Sidewalk
SC10 Concrete Median Cap
SC10.1 Pedestrian ramps
SC11 Concrete Shelter Pad Adjacent to Sidewalk
SC11.1 Steel Faced Curb and Platform Detail
SC11.2 Concrete Bench Pad Adjacent to Sidewalk
SC11.3 Typical Elevated Bus Pad Without Pedestrian Facilities with
Depressed Curb at Entrance
SC11.4 Typical Elevated Bus Pad Without Pedestrian Facilities with
Depressed Curb at Mid-Block
SC11.5 Typical Bus Stop Pole
SC12 Typical Bus Pad with Shelter Pad in Boulevard Between Curb and
Sidewalk
SC12.1 Typical Bus Pad with Bench Pad in Boulevard Between Curb and
Sidewalk
SC13 Ramp Style Vehicle Access Crossing
SC13.1 Continuous Vehicle Access Ramp
SC14 Sidewalk Joints
SC15 Right Turn Island
\Standard Detail Drawing\Sidewalks,Curbs and Pathway Table – March 1, 2016

SC16 Sidewalks at Roundabouts
SC16.1 Multi-use Pathway Bypass at Multi-lane Roundabout
SC16.2 Multi-use Pathway Bypass at Multi-lane Roundabout – Splitter
Island with Pedestrian and Cyclist Crossing
SC16.3 Cycle Track Bypass at Multi-lane Roundabout
SC16.4 Cycle Track Bypass at Multi-lane Roundabout – Splitter Island with
Pedestrian and Cyclist Crossing
SC17 Overland Flow Route Curb & Sidewalk Depression (Exception
Basis Only)
SC18 Flat Channel Swale at Curb or Sidewalk (Exception Basis Only)
SC19 Walkway Detail Plan c/w Light Standard (1.5m)
SC20 Asphalt Walkway
SC21 Asphalt Walkway / Service Access Heavy Duty
SC22 Light Duty Concrete Paving
SC23 Heavy Duty Concrete Paving
SC24 Stonedust Nature Trail
SC25 Stonedust Path
SC26 Turf Stone Unit Paving
SC27 Permeable Paving
SC28 Unit Paving on Concrete Base
SC29 Accessible Engineered Wood Fibre Path
SC30 Walkway Culvert Plan and Section
\Standard Detail Drawing\Sidewalks,Curbs and Pathway Table – March 1, 2016

.
.
200 150
R=6
R=6
50
25
50
6
350
250
#15 DOWELS 300mm LONG @

4.0m INTERVALS IN EXPANSION
JOINTS 6.0mm PREMOULDED
BITUMINOUS MATERIAL.
(SEE NOTE 3)
75
125 75
MOUNTABLE CURB WITH GUTTER
NOTES:
1. IF AN EXTRUSION CURBING MACHINE IS USED,

THE EXPANSION BITUMINOUS MATERIAL AND THE #15 DOWELS ARE TO BE PLACED AT THE END OF THE EXTRUSION.
3. DUMMY JOINTS SHALL BE 25mm DEEP, FRONT, BACK AND TOP OF SECTION AT 2m SPACING.
N.T.S.
DATE: JANUARY 2003
MODIFIED CONCRETE MOUNTABLE
REV.
JANUARY 2015
CURB WITH GUTTER DATE:
FOR ROUNDABOUT TRUCK APRON DWG. No.:

SC1.5
NOTE 9
CURB
ON
CURB
ON
TI
TI
2.4m
TRANSI
2.4m
TRANSI
TRANSITION
TRANSITION
5m
5m
1.
1.
N.
ABLE
2-4%
MI
D
MAX. 5%
B E
MAX. 5%
E C
S
VARI
P
SIDEWALK
R
E
8m
E U S
R R R SE
1.
P
E CU B D
D
DEPRESSED CURB
2.4m CURB 2.4m CURB

TRANSITION TRANSITION
CURB RETURN AT A PRIVATE OR COMMERCIAL ENTRANCE - UNSIGNALIZED INTERSECTION
NOTE 9
CURB
ON
CURB
ON
TI
TI
TRANSI
TRANSI
5m
5m
1.
CROSSW ALK
1.
N.
ABLE
0m
MI
SEE NOTE 8 SEE NOTE 8
3.
D
D
VARI
SIDEWALK SIDEWALK
E C
B E
1.8m
P U
S
R R
S
E
E S
R S
R
P U B E
E C D
D
2.7m CURB 2.7m CURB

150 TO 200 GAP (TYPICAL)
TRANSITION SEE NOTE 2 TRANSITION
COMMERCIAL ENTRANCE OR CURB RETURN PRIVATE ENTRANCE AT A CONTROLLED INTERSECTION

NOTE 9
CURB
ON
CURB
ON
2.4m
TI
TI
2.4m
TRANSITION
TRANSI
TRANSI
TRANSITION
5m
5m
1.
1.
N.
ABLE
2-4%
MI
MAX. 5% MAX. 5%
SIDEWALK
VARI
1.8m
D
D
E CU
R SE
P
R R
S
BOULEVARD BOULEVARD
B
E B
E
R S
U
P E
E C D
D
DEPRESSED CURB
VARIABLE
1.5m CURB 1.5m CURB 0.75m MIN.
TRANSITION TRANSITION
CURB RETURN AT A PRIVATE OR COMMERCIAL ENTRANCE WITH BOULEVARD - UNSIGNALIZED INTERSECTION
150 TO 200 GAP (TYPICAL)

CURB
ON
CURB
ON
TI
TI
TRANSI
TRANSI
NOTE 9
5m
5m
CROSSW ALK
N.
1.
1.
ABLE
DE CUR
MI
RB ED
0m
PR
SEE NOTE 8
S
SEE NOTE 8
VARI
3.
SIDEWALK
ES
8m
ES
R
1.
S
B
P
E
C
E
D
D
BOULEVARD BOULEVARD
1.5m CURB
SEE NOTE 2
TRANSITION 1.5m CURB VARIABLE
TRANSITION 0.75m MIN.
COMMERCIAL ENTRANCE OR CURB RETURN PRIVATE ENTRANCE WITH BOULEVARD AT A CONTROLLED INTERSECTION
NOTES:
2. APPROVED 610 X WIDTH OF CURB RAMP (1500MIN) TACTILE WALKING SURFACE INDICATOR,
RADIUS TO MATCH CURB. DRAIN GROOVES AS PER SC7.
3. CURB DETAILS SEE SC1.1, SC1.2 AND SC1.3.
4. SIDEWALK DETAILS SEE SC2 AND SC3.
5. CURB RAMPS AS PER SC6 AND SC7.
6. CONTROLLED MEANS SIGNALIZED OR A 4-WAY STOP INTERSECTION.
7. SUBJECT TO AVOIDANCE OF MEDIANS, CROSSWALK LINES TO BE CENTRED ON THE CURB RAMP.
8. FOR CURB RAMPS, SLOPE OF 2% TO 5%, MAXIMUM 8%.
9. MAXIMUM SLOPE VARIES, SEE PRIVATE APPROACH BYLAW
DATE: MARCH 2007
REV.
MARCH 2017
CURB RETURN ENTRANCES DATE:
DWG. No.: SC7.1

CURB RAMP DEPRESSED CORNER
VARIABLE
1.8m MIN.
1.5m CURB
TRANSITION
CURB
VARIABLE
(SEE NOTE 1)
300 +/- 50mm
SEE NOTE 7
CROSSW ALK
6
TE
SEE NOTE 2
0m
O
3.
N
E
SE
B
R
U
C
SEE NOTE 2
A
D
SEE NOTE 2
E
6
S
TE
S
O
N
E E
1.5m CURB SE R
TRANSITION P
E
D
SEE NOTE 6
DEPRESSED CURB
A
SEE NOTE 7
SEE NOTE 7
A A
1.5m CURB
TRANSITION
3.0m 3.0m
CROSSWALK PLAN CROSSWALK
R=0.30m 150mm BARRIER CURB
RAMP WIDTH
VARIABLE 1.5m
1.5m (SEE NOTE 1)
DROP CURB HEIGHT

(SEE NOTE 4)
SECTION A - A
NOTES:
1. CURB RAMP WIDTH SHOULD MATCH SIDEWALK WIDTH, BE A MINIMUM OF 1.5m WIDE.
2. FOR CURB RAMPS SLOPE OF 2% TO 5%, MAXIMUM 8%
4. DEPRESSED CURB HEIGHT - FOR PEDESTRIAN CURB RAMPS 0 TO 6 mm AND FOR PRIVATE ENTRANCES 0 TO 25mm.
5. SUBJECT TO AVOIDANCE OF MEDIANS, CROSSWALK LINES TO CENTRED ON THE CURB RAMP.
6. APPROVED 610 X WIDTH OF CURB RAMP (1500 MIN) TACTILE WALKING SURFACE INDICATOR (TWSI),
RADIUS TO MATCH CURB. ALL TWSI'S SHALL HAVE 6mm WIDE AND 6mm DEEP DRAIN GROOVES
AT CORNERS BETWEEN TWSI AND CURB. PANEL JOINTS MAY BE ADAPTED FOR USE IF TOUCHING.
TOP OF TWSI SHALL BE ALIGNED AND LEVEL WITH ADJACENT SURFACE.
7. 150 TO 200 GAP. FOR MONOLITHIC SIDEWALK, TWSI SHALL BE 300 TO 350mm BACK FROM CURB FACE.
DATE: MAY 2001
PEDESTRIAN CURB RAMP REV.

MARCH 2017
DATE:
WITH BOULEVARD DWG. No.: SC7

DISTANCE BETWEEN
ACCESSES < 6.8m DISTANCE < 3.9m
75
A’
B’
BACK OF WALK
E
BL
A
SIDEWALK
RI
A
V
MAX. 5% MAX. 5%
FACE OF CURB
GUTTER GRADE
150
A B MIN.2.4m
DROP CURB HEIGHT TAPER SECTION

(SEE NOTE 5)
SLOPE: 2% (SEE NOTE 3)

- FOR 1.8m WALKS: 36mm
- FOR 3.0m WALKS: 60mm
FACE OF CURB 100
ROAD
100
MINIMUM 100mm GRANULAR "A"
SECTION A - A
SECTION THROUGH SIDEWALK
SLOPE: 2-4% (SEE NOTE 4)

- FOR 1.8m WALKS: 36mm-72mm
GUTTER GRADE - FOR 3.0m WALKS: 60mm-120mm
150
ROAD
50
MINIMUM 150mm GRANULAR "A"

150
REINFORCING MESH 150x150mm MW9.1x MW9.1
SECTION B - B
SECTION THROUGH ACCESS CROSSING
NOTES:
1. IN ALL DEPRESSED ACCESS CROSSINGS, INCLUDING TAPER SECTION, CONCRETE SLABS SHALL BE
150mm IN DEPTH WITH 150x150mm, MW9.1 x MW9.1 REINFORCING MESH ON 150mm GRANULAR ’A’.
3. THE MAXIMUM SLOPE IS NOT TO EXCEED 2%.
4. THE MAXIMUM SLOPE IS NOT TO EXCEED 4% FOR VEHICLE ACCESS RAMPS.
5. DROP CURB HEIGHT MINIMUM 0mm, DESIRED 15mm, MAXIMUM 25mm.
DATE: MAY 2001
TRADITIONAL REV.
MARCH 2007
DATE:
VEHICLE ACCESS CROSSING DWG. No.: SC8

BRUSH CLEAN POLYMERIC JOINT SAND INTO JOINTS
UNLESS MANUFACTURER DOES NOT RECOMMEND IT
UNIT PAVERS
25mm LEVELLING BED OF

COARSE SAND
GRANULAR 'A' (THICKNESS

AS SPECIFIED) COMPACTED
TO 95% PROCTOR DENSITY
(SEE NOTE 5)
UNDISTURBED OR THOROUGHLY COMPACTED SUBGRADE
NOTES:
1. THE LEVELING COURSE (BEDDING SAND) SHALL BE PLACED LOOSE, IN A UNIFORM LAYER AT A MAXIMUM
DEPTH OF 25mm TO ACHIEVE THE FINAL COMPACTED THICKNESS AND GRADE AS SPECIFIED
2. INSTALL SOLID EDGE RESTRAINT BETWEEN UNIT PAVERS AND ANY SOFT SURFACE (SOD, PLANTING BED, ETC.)
3. UNIT PAVERS ARE THEN PLACED ON TOP OF THE LEVELING COURSE AND ADDITIONAL SAND SWEPT BETWEEN
THE UNIT PAVERS
4. THE UNIT PAVERS ARE THEN VIBRATED INTO PLACE WITH A VIBRA-PLATE AND WATER IS ADDED TO ASSIST IN
THE SETTLING OF THE JOINT SAND
5. GRANULAR 'A' DEPTH TO BE 100mm FOR PEDESTRIAN AREAS AND 150mm FOR VEHICULAR ACCESSES. OR AS
RECOMMENDED BY GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION
6. USE OF THIS DETAIL REQUIRES THE PRIOR APPROVAL OF THE GENERAL MANAGER
TITLE: DATE: MAY 2001
UNIT PAVING - ON GRANULAR BASE REV: FEB 2016
DWG No:
SC9
BRUSH POLYMERIC JOINT
SAND INTO JOINTS
UNIT PAVERS
TYPICAL SIDEWALK SECTION
DEPRESSED CURB HEIGHT

(SEE NOTE 5)
BRUSH POLYMERIC JOINT

SAND INTO JOINTS
UNIT PAVERS
SEE NOTE 6
REINSTATE
25mm SURROUNDING
LEVELING SAND MATERIAL
#15 DOWELS 300mm LONG @4.0m
INTERVALS IN EXPANSION JOINTS
6mm PREMOLDED BITUMINOUS MATERIAL
SECTION AT PEDESTRIAN RAMP
NOTES:
1. ALL MEASUREMENTS ARE IN MILLIMETRES UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED
2. THE MAXIMUM SLOPE IS NOT TO EXCEED 2%
3. FOR CURB RAMP, SLOPE OF 2% TO 5% MAXIMUM 8%
4. INTERLOCKING INSTALLATION AS PER SC9
5. DEPRESSED CURB HEIGHT - FOR PEDESTRIAN CURB RAMPS 0 TO 6mm AND FOR PRIVATE ENTRANCES 0 TO 25mm
6. FOR CURB RAMP REPLACE UNIT PAVERS WITH APPROVED 610 x WIDTH OF CURB RAMP (1500 MIN) TWSI, RADIUS TO MATCH CURB

CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTER REV: FEB 2016
WITH UNIT PAVER SIDEWALK DWG No:
SC9.1
DUMMY JOINTS
CONCRETE
SIDEWALK
PLAN
BRUSH POLYMERIC JOINT # 15 DOWELS

SAND INTO JOINTS UNIT PAVERS 300mm LONG @4.0m
INTERVALS IN
EXPANSION JOINTS
6mm PREMOLDED
BITUMINOUS MATERIAL
BRUSH POLYMERIC
JOINT SAND INTO UNIT PAVERS
JOINTS SEE NOTE 7
VARIABLE
DEPRESSED CURB
HEIGHT
(SEE NOTE 6)
# 15 DOWELS
300mm LONG @4.0m
INTERVALS IN EXPANSION
JOINTS
NOTES:
6mm PREMOLDED
BITUMINOUS MATERIAL
2. LAYOUT, PATTERN, COLOUR AND PAVERS AS SPECIFIED IN CONTRACT
3. SIDEWALK JOINTS AS PER SC5
5. FOR CURB RAMPS, SLOPE OF 2% TO 5%, MAXIMUM 8%

SIDEWALK WITH UNIT REV: FEB 2016
PAVER BOULEVARD DWG No:
SC9.2
BRUSH POLYMERIC JOINT SAND INTO JOINTS
25mm
LEVELING SAND
25mm
LEVELING SAND
NOTES:

3. FOR CURB RAMP, SLOPE OF 2% TO 5%, MAXIMUM 8%
4. EXPANSION AND DUMMY JOINTS AS PER SC5

CONCRETE BARRIER CURB REV: FEB 2016
WITH UNIT PAVER SIDEWALK DWG No:
SC9.3
.
.
REINFORCING MESH
COLORED TEXTURED
150x150mm MW9.1xMW9.1
CONCRETE SURFACE
TREATMENT
R40
610 R40
TOP OF 40 2%
CONCRETE
PAVEMENT
150
250
300
100
875 100
100 300
GRANULAR A
AS SPECIFIED
IN CONTRACT DRAWINGS
GALV. STEEL CURB GUARD
(6mm) WITH 200 LGx10 DIA.

EXPANSION JOINT HEAD ANCHOR STUDS FUSION WELDED
APPROVED NON-EXTRUDING TO PLATE @300 c/c. COMPLETE
PREMOULDED FIBREBOARD ASSEMBLY TO BE HOT DIPPED
GALVANIZED PER SCA-G164-M AFTER
FABRICATION
NOTES:
DATE: MARCH 2007
STEEL FACED CURB REV.

MARCH 2017
DATE:
AND PLATFORM DETAIL DWG. No.: SC11.1

A
NOTE 1 2.0m TAPER DRIVEWAY 2.0m TAPER NOTE 1
NOTE 5 NOTE 5
BACK OF SIDEWALK
ROUNDING
125 mm
CURB HEIGHT
EDGE OF ASPHALT
25mm +
10mm DROP CURB
-
400 mm
PROFILE
A
DRIVEWAY
1.8m MIN.
1.05m MIN. PEDESTRIAN PLATFORM 750mm
MONLITHIC RAMP
R=50mm
CONCRETE SIDEWALK 150 150
2% ROUNDING
R=2.5
25mm DROP CURB
+
-10mm
50mm 150mm
MIN. ROAD
1
4 400mm
SEE NOTE 3
150mm GRANULAR "A"
REINFORCING MESH
150mmx150mm
MW9.1xMW9.1 15 DOWELS 300mm LONG
#
@ 4.0m INTERVALS IN
250mm
EXPANSION JOINTS 6mm
PREMOLDED BITUMINOUS
MATERIAL
SECTION A - A
NOTES:
1. TYPICAL MONOLITHIC CONCRETE CURB AND SIDEWALK AS PER SC2,

EXCEPT USE 125mm CURB HEIGHT.
2. DEPRESSIONS AT INTERSECTIONS AS PER SC6.
3. FOR WIDER SIDEWALKS, PEDESTRIAN PLATFORM TO BE INCREASED ACCORDINGLY.
4. NOT APPLICABLE FOR PROFILE GRADES OVER 5%.
5. TAPERS TO BE 1.5m WHEN ON-STREET PARKING IS PERMITTED.
6. WHERE VEHICLE ACCESS FOR ADJACENT PROPERTIES IS LESS THAN 3.0m APART,
DO NOT APPLY TAPER; RAMP ACCESS IS CONTINUOUS - SEE SC13.1.
DATE: MARCH 2006
RAMP STYLE VEHICLE REV.

MARCH 2015
DATE:
ACCESS CROSSING DWG. No.: SC13

.
.
.
LEG 1:
MULTI-USE PATHWAY WITH NO

ON ROAD CYCLING FACILITIES
AND NO SEPARATE PEDESTRIAN
FACILITIES
LEG 2:

WITH SEPARATE PEDESTRIAN
FACILITIES
TRUCK APRON WITH MODIFIED

CONCRETE MOUNTABLE CURB
MULTI-USE PATHWAY & GUTTER AS PER SC1.5
(BICYCLE BYPASS)
MIN. 3.0m WIDE WITH
YELLOW CENTRELINE (TYP.)
BICYCLE RAMPS (TYP.)

(SEE NOTE 2)
BICYCLE RAMPS (TYP.)

(SEE NOTE 2)
LEG 4:
DEDICATED OFF ROAD CYCLING

FACILITIES WITH SEPARATE
PEDESTRIAN FACILITIES AND NO
LEG 3:
LEGEND SHARED USE LANE WITH

SEPARATE PEDESTRIAN FACILITIES
CONCRETE
CONCRETE SIDEWALK
MIN 1.8m WIDE (TYP.)
ASPHALT
NOTES:
1. REFER TO OTM BOOK 18 FOR GUIDANCE ON PAVEMENT MARKINGS FOR BICYCLES AT ROUNDABOUTS.
2. REFER TO NCHRP REPORT 672 (ROUNDABOUTS: AN INFORMATIONAL GUIDE 2nd EDITION) FOR
GUIDANCE ON GEOMETRY, PEDESTRIAN & CYCLIST CROSSING SETBACK, AND BICYCLE RAMP DESIGN.
N.T.S.
DATE: MARCH 2015
MULTI-USE PATHWAY BYPASS REV.

MARCH 2016
DATE:
AT MULTI-LANE ROUNDABOUT
DWG. No.:
SC16.1
NOT CURRENTLY AVAILABLE FOR USE. PLEASE CONTACT
STANDARDSSECTION@OTAWA.CA FOR MORE DETAILS.
MINIMUM ONE
CAR LENGTH
MULTI-USE PATHWAY
MIN. 3.0m WIDE (TYP.)
WITH YELLOW TWSI (TYP.)
CENTRELINE (TYP.)
CROSSWALK
(3.0m PREFERRED)
BICYCLE
CROSSING
(2.5m - 3.0m)
3.50m MIN. WIDE
REFUGE AREA
DEPRESSED
CURB (TYP.)
OPTION A: SPLITTER ISLAND WITH SEPARATE PEDESTRIAN AND CYCLISTS CROSSINGS
MINIMUM ONE
CAR LENGTH
MULTI-USE PATHWAY
MIN. 3.0m WIDE (TYP.)
WITH YELLOW TWSI (TYP.)
CENTRELINE (TYP.)
MIXED CROSSING
MIN. 4.0m
3.50m MIN. WIDE

REFUGE AREA
DEPRESSED
CURB (TYP.)
OPTION B: SPLITTER ISLAND WITH MIXED PEDESTRIAN AND CYCLISTS CROSSING
LEGEND
NOTES:
CONCRETE 1. TACTILE WALKING SURFACE INDICATORS (TWSI'S) TO BE MOUNTED IN CONCRETE AS PER SC7.3.
2. SPLITTER ISLAND LENGTH DEPENDS ON VARIOUS FACTORS AND SHOULD BE DETERMINED SPECIFICALLY
ASPHALT FOR EACH CONTEXT. CONSULT NCHRP REPORT 672 (ROUNDABOUTS: AN INFORMATIONAL GUIDE 2nd
EDITION) FOR GUIDANCE ON GEOMETRY AND LENGTH DIMENSIONS.
N.T.S.
MULTI-USE PATHWAY BYPASS DATE: MARCH 2015
AT MULTI-LANE ROUNDABOUT - REV.

MARCH 2016
DATE:
SPLITTER ISLAND WITH
PEDESTRIAN AND CYCLIST CROSSING DWG. No.:
SC16.2
BIKE SYMBOL
(TYP.)
TRUCK APRON WITH
MODIFIED CONCRETE
MOUNTABLE CURB &
GUTTER AS PER SC1.5
CYCLE TRACK
MIN. 2.0m (TYP.)
CONCRETE SIDEWALK
1.8m MIN. (TYP.)
YIELD
TO
PEDESTRIANS
RA-8 (TYP.)
LEGEND
CONCRETE
ASPHALT
N.T.S.
DATE: MARCH 2015
CYCLE TRACK BYPASS REV.

MARCH 2016
DATE:
AT MULTI-LANE ROUNDABOUT
DWG. No.:
SC16.3
NOT CURRENTLY AVAILABLE FOR USE. PLEASE CONTACT
STANDARDSSECTION@OTAWA.CA FOR MORE DETAILS.
MINIMUM ONE
CAR LENGTH
DEPRESSED
CURB (TYP.)
TWSI (TYP.)
CROSSWALK
(3.0m PREFERRED) BICYCLE
CROSSING
(2.5m - 3.0m)
3.50m MIN. WIDE

REFUGE AREA
LEGEND
NOTES:
CONCRETE 1. TACTILE WALKING SURFACE INDICATORS (TWSI'S) TO BE MOUNTED IN CONCRETE AS PER SC7.3.
2. SPLITTER ISLAND LENGTH DEPENDS ON VARIOUS FACTORS AND SHOULD BE DETERMINED

ASPHALT SPECIFICALLY FOR EACH CONTEXT. CONSULT NCHRP REPORT 672 (ROUNDABOUTS: AN
INFORMATIONAL GUIDE 2nd EDITION) FOR GUIDANCE ON GEOMETRY AND LENGTH DIMENSIONS.
N.T.S.
CYCLE TRACK BYPASS DATE: MARCH 2015
AT MULTI-LANE ROUNDABOUT - REV.

MARCH 2016
DATE:
SPLITTER ISLANDWITH
PEDESTRIAN AND CYCLIST CROSSING DWG. No.:
SC16.4
.
.
.
.
DRAINAGE VOID FILLED WITH MATERIAL
AS RECOMMENDED BY MANUFACTURER
PERMEABLE PAVER UNIT
150mm MIN. DEPTH OF GRANULAR

'A' COMPACTED TO 100% S.P.D.
SUBGRADE COMPACTED TO 95% S.P.D.

25mm LEVELING BED OF COARSE SAND
OR MATERIAL AS RECOMMENDED BY
MANUFACTURER
WORKMANSHIP
PERMEABLE PAVERS BY UNILOCK LIMITED OR APPROVED EQUAL.

PAVERS SHALL BE INSTALLED IN STRICT ACCORDANCE WITH THE MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS
WITH TIGHT BUTT JOINTS OF APPROXIMATELY 3mm, ON A SAND BASE. SAW CUT PAVERS AS REQUIRED.
USE AN APPROVED VIBRATORY COMPACTOR IN A CIRCULAR PATTERN.
ALL DAMAGED OR CHIPPED PAVERS MUST BE REPLACED AT THE CONTRACTOR'S COST
PREPARATION
EXCAVATE AND REMOVE ALL TOPSOIL AND UNSTABLE MATERIALS OFF SITE. SUBGRADE TO BE GRADED TO
SIMILAR CONTOURS AS FINISH GRADE. COMPACT SUBGRADE TO 95% S.P.D. PLACE 150mm LAYER OF
GRANULAR 'A' COMPACTED TO 100% S.P.D.
PLACE MAXIMUM 25mm UNCOMPACTED SAND FOR LEVELING COURSE OR MATERIAL AS RECOMMENDED
BY MANUFACTURER
INSTALL PERMEABLE UNITS IN THE PATTERN SPECIFIED ON THE PLAN DRAWING OR PER MANUFACTURER'S
PATTERN RECOMMENDATION
ALL MEASUREMENTS ARE IN MILLIMETRES UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE
TITLE: DATE: FEB 2013
PERMEABLE PAVING REV: FEB 2016
DWG No:
SC27
LIGHT DUTY PRECAST CONCRETE
UNIT PAVERS:
REFER TO MANUFACTURER'S
RECOMMENDATIONS FOR
INSTALLATION AND SEALING; REFER
TO THE PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
FOR PATTERN, PAVER TYPE AND
COLOUR AND DIMENSIONS.
25mm LEVELING BED OF COARSE SAND
PROVIDE 50 x 50 DRAINAGE HOLES

@ 300 O/C
VARIES
60-80
125mm CONCRETE BASE, 30 MPa @ 28 DAYS,

SEE SPECIFICATIONS
30
125
150
150 x 150 x 6 GA. WELDED WIRE MESH
150mm MIN. DEPTH OF GRANULAR 'A'

COMPACTED TO 100% S.P.D.
SUBGRADE, COMPACTED TO 98% S.P.D.
WORKMANSHIP
PAVERS SHALL BE INSTALLED IN STRICT ACCORDANCE WITH THE MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS WITH TIGHT
BUTT JOINTS OF APPROXIMATELY 3mm, ON A SAND BASE. SAW CUT PAVERS AS REQUIRED. USE AN APPROVED
VIBRATORY COMPACTOR IN A CIRCULAR PATTERN. SPRINKLE SAND OVER AREA TO PREVENT CHIPPING FOR HEAVIER
VIBRATORY COMPACTION. ALL DAMAGED OR CHIPPED PAVERS MUST BE REPLACED AT THE CONTRACTOR'S COST.
BRUSH SAND INTO JOINTS AND SPRINKLE WITH WATER UNTIL JOINTS ARE FILLED.
EDGE RESTRAINT
REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS. EDGE RESTRAINT MUST BE APPROVED BY LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT PRIOR TO COMMENCING
WORK. INSTALL WHERE UNIT PAVERS ABUT ANY SOFT SURFACE
PREPARATION
EXCAVATE AND REMOVE ALL TOPSOIL AND UNSTABLE MATERIALS OFF SITE. SUBGRADE TO BE GRADED TO SIMILAR
CONTOURS AS FINISH GRADE. COMPACT SUBGRADE TO 95% S.P.D. PLACE 150mm LAYER OF GRANULAR 'A'
COMPACTED TO 100% S.P.D
PLACE MAXIMUM 25mm UNCOMPACTED SAND FOR LEVELING COURSE
ALL MEASUREMENTS ARE IN MILLIMETRES UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED
UNIT PAVING ON CONCRETE BASE REV: FEB 2016
DWG No:
SC28
.
.
TRAFFIC STANDARD DETAIL DRAWINGS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T1 Traffic Control Conduit Handhole

T2 Traffic Handhole Frame Detail
T3 Traffic Handhole Cover Detail
T4 Sidewalk Type Traffic Control Junction Maintenance Hole
T5 Traffic Control Maintenance Hole Frame
T6 Traffic Control Maintenance Hole Cover
T7 Typical Buried Traffic Conduit Details
T8 Direct Buried Conduit in Unpaved Area
T9 Riser for Wood Pole
T10 Grounding Plate Installation in Soil
T11 Ground Rod Vertical in Soil
T12 Ground Rod Vertical in Rock
T13 Foundation for Pylon Sign
T14 Foundation for Overhead Sign
T15A Foundation for Overhead Flasher Installation in Soil
T15B Foundation for Overhead Flasher Installation on Rock
T16 Overhead Sign Foundation (Up to 3m Arm)
T17 170 Controller Foundation
T18 Special Overhead Sign Foundation in Soil
T19 Special Overhead Sign Foundation on Rock
T20 Temporary Foundation
T21 Tubular Pole Foundation
T22 Mast Arm Pole Foundation
T23 Joint Use Pole Foundation
T24 Controller Pole Foundation
T25 Controller, Tubular, Mast Arm and Joint Use Foundation in Rock
T26 Disconnect Pad Foundation
T28 Traffic Foundation Offset to Back of Sidewalk
T29 Local Grading at Pole Foundations
T30 UPS/Controller Pole Foundation
T40 Loop Installation Detail
T41 Multi-Loop Installation
T42 Loop Detector Identification Dots
T46 Loop Lead – in Details
BC1 Bicycle Counter Installation for Cycle Track
BC2 Bicycle Counter Installation for Multi-Use Pathway
BC3 Bicycle Counter Installation for Bike Lanes Adjacent to Boulevards
BC4 Bicycle Counter Installation for Sidewalks
BC5 Bicycle Counter Handhole Cover
Standard Detail Drawing\Traffic Table – March 02, 2015

Standard Detail Drawing\Traffic Table – March 02, 2015
**REVISED**
.
.
.
.
E
No. SIZE LENGTH MASS c D O
MARK Bars TYP A 8 E F G H J K L M R SHAPE
A15001 g 15 2115 30 17 860 395 860

A15002C g 15 2115 30 17 860 395 860
A20003 20 20 1195 57 STR
A20004C
' 20 1195 17 STR
.
~
MARK No. c F H J K R
A20001
Bora SIZE LENGTH MASS
12 20 1250 36 STR
A B D E G L
" 0 SHAPE
A15002 5 15 1650 13 TJ 260 440

A20003 20 20 1545 73 STR
A15004 11 15 2160 38 17 860 440 860
A20005C 6 20 1545 22 STR
A15006C 11 15 2160 38 17 860 440 860
.
.
.
.
**REVISED**
LANDSCAPING STANDARD DETAIL DRAWINGS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
L1 Planting Trench Well Drained Soils

L2 Planting Trench Well Drained Soils (Lots)
L3 Planting Pit, Well Drained Soils (Road Allowance)
L6 Planting Pit Poorly Drained Soils
L7 Typical Armour Stone Retaining Wall
L8 Typical Timber Retaining Wall
L9 Boulder Wall on Asphalt
L12 Minor Road Corner Treatment Planting
L13 Major Road Corner Treatment 'B' Planting
L14 Coniferous Tree Planting on Slope
L15 Multi-Stem Tree Planting
L16 Deciduous Tree Planting on Slope
L17 Continuous Shrub Bed Planting
L18 Deciduous Bare Root Whip Planting for Naturalized Areas
L19 Deciduous Bare Root Shrub Planting for Naturalized Areas
L20 Bio-swale
L21 Perennial and Ornamental Grass Planting
L22 Naturalization. Reforestation Sample Planting layout
L23 Aquatic Planting
D1 Community Gardens Accessible Planting Box
D2 Community Gardens Generic Planting Box
Standard Detail Drawing\Landscaping Table – March 1, 2017

100 x 100 POST GALVANIZED SCREWS
USED THROUGHOUT
50 x 200 CENTER BRACING

ATTACHED TO 100 x 100
POSTS WITH JOIST HANGERS
1200
GALVANIZED JOIST HANGER
AT CONNECTION
2400 2400
TITLE:
4800
ISOMETRIC VIEW
100 x 100 CORNER POSTS
STONEDUST PATHWAY
GALVANIZED SCREWS USED THROUGHOUT
760-865 ABOVE FINISHED

GRADE ALONG ACCESSIBLE
FRONT ELEVATION
COMMUNITY GARDENS
1200 1200
ACCESSIBLE PLANTING BOX

(TOP)
FILTER FABRIC
100mm SAND
100mm GRAVEL
(BOTTOM / GRADE)
NOTE:
REV:
SIDE ELEVATION SECTION VIEW 1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED
DATE:
2. ALL WOOD MEMBER DIMENSIONS ARE NOMINAL. ACTUAL DIMENSIONS
DWG No:
SHALL BE DETERMINED BY ACTUAL WOOD SIZE
3. GALVANIZED WOOD SCREWS SIZE, PATTERN AND DEPTH TO BE APPROVED
D1
BY SHOP DRAWINGS PRIOR TO FABRICATION
FEB 2017
DEC 2016
100 x 100 CORNER POST GALVANIZED
SCREWS USED
THROUGHOUT
750
TITLE:
2400
PLAN VIEW
100 x 100 CORNER POSTS

ISOMETRIC VIEW
GALVANIZED SCREWS USED THROUGHOUT
550-750
FRONT ELEVATION
COMMUNITY GARDENS
GENERIC PLANTING BOX
750 750
(TOP)
FILTER FABRIC
100mm SAND
100mm GRAVEL
(BOTTOM / GRADE)
NOTE:
SIDE ELEVATION SECTION VIEW 1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED
REV:
2. ALL WOOD MEMBER DIMENSIONS ARE NOMINAL. ACTUAL DIMENSIONS
DATE:
SHALL BE DETERMINED BY ACTUAL WOOD SIZE
DWG No:
3. GALVANIZED WOOD SCREWS SIZE, PATTERN AND DEPTH TO BE APPROVED
BY SHOP DRAWINGS PRIOR TO FABRICATION
D2
FEB 2017
DEC 2016
DO NOT PRUNE LEADER
REMOVE DAMAGED OR OBJECTIONABLE

BRANCHES. FOLLOW THE MOST RECENT
CANADIAN NURSERY & TRADES
ASSOCIATION PRACTICE
MINIMUM 1 STAKE 2400mm LONG ON
WINDWARD SIDE. SECURE WITH No. 12
GALVANIZED WIRE ENCASED IN 12mm
DIAMETER RUBBER HOSE, ALLOWING
SLACK IN GALVANIZED WIRE. REMOVE
STAKES AFTER 1 YEAR. STAKE BEYOND
EDGE OF ROOT BALL
ROOT COLLAR TO BE SET 100mm ABOVE
FINISHED GRADE
VARIES ACCORDING TO
PLANTING CORRIDOR CONSTRUCT 100mm SAUCER AROUND
CURB TREE BASE. FILL WITH 75mm WOODCHIP
SIDEWALK 2000 MULCH. PULL BACK MULCH FROM BASE OF
400
TREE. ENSURE THAT MULCH COVERS ALL

EXPOSED SOIL
ROAD
TOPSOIL IN TRENCH TO BE CONTINUOUS

BETWEEN TREES TOPSOIL MIXTURE AS
PER SPECIFICATIONS
EXISTING SUBGRADE
COMPACTED ROOT BALL SUPPORT PAD
VIEW PERPENDICULAR TO CURB
VIEW PARALLEL
TO CURB
NOTES:

2. CUT AND REMOVE BURLAP AND WIRE BASKET FROM TOP 2/3 OF ROOT BALL WITHOUT DISTURBING ROOTS
3. LOCATION AS SPECIFIED ON THE CONTRACT DRAWINGS
PLANTING TRENCH WELL DRAINED SOILS REV: JAN 2017
DWG No:
L1
BRANCHES, FOLLOW THE MOST
RECENT CANADIAN NURSERY &
MINIMUM 1 STAKE 2400mm LONG ON WINDWARD SIDE. SECURE
TRADES ASSOCIATION PRACTICE.
WITH No. 12 GALVANIZED WIRE ENCASED IN 12mm DIAMETER
DO NOT PRUNE LEADER
RUBBER HOSE, ALLOWING SLACK IN GALVANIZED WIRE. REMOVE
STAKES AFTER ONE YEAR. STAKE BEYOND EDGE OF ROOT BALL
TREE WRAP APPLIED SPIRALLY FROM
GROUND UP TO HEIGHT OF SECOND
BRANCHES.
REMOVE AFTER PLANTING
CONSTRUCT 100mm SAUCER ROOT COLLAR TO BE SET 100mm ABOVE FINISHED GRADE
AROUND TREE BASE
TOPSOIL MIXTURE AS PER SPECIFICATION
1800
APPLY APPROVED PLASTIC
RODENT GUARD 450mm MINIMUM
NOTE:
1. ALL MEASUREMENTS ARE IN MILLIMETRES

UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED
2. LOCATION AS SPECIFIED ON THE
CONTRACT DRAWINGS
CUT AND REMOVE BURLAP AND

WIRE BASKET FROM TOP 2/3 300
OF ROOT BALL WITHOUT
DISTURBING ROOTS
COMPACTED SUBGRADE
DECIDUOUS TREE PLANTING
MINIMUM 1 STAKE 2400mm LONG ON WINDWARD SIDE. SECURE

WITH No. 12 GALVANIZED WIRE ENCASED IN 12mm DIAMETER
STAKES AFTER ONE YEAR. STAKE BEYOND EDGE OF ROOT BALL
REMOVE DAMAGED OR
OBJECTIONABLE BRANCHES,
FOLLOW THE MOST RECENT
CANADIAN NURSARY & TRADES
ASSOCIATION PRACTICE. DO
ROOT COLLAR TO BE SET 100mm ABOVE FINISHED GRADE
NOT PRUNE LEADER.
CONSTRUCT 100mm SAUCER

AROUND TREE BASE. TOPSOIL MIXTURE AS PER SPECIFICATION
1800
NOTE:

CUT AND REMOVE BURLAP 2. LOCATION AS SPECIFIED ON THE
AND WIRE BASKET FROM TOP CONTRACT DRAWINGS
2/3 OF ROOT BALL WITHOUT 300
DISTURBING ROOTS.
COMPACTED SUBGRADE
CONIFEROUS TREE PLANTING

PLANTING TRENCH REV: JAN 2017
WELL DRAINED SOILS (LOTS) DWG No:
L2
REMOVE DAMAGED OR OBJECTIONABLE MINIMUM 1 STAKE 2400mm LONG ON WINDWARD SIDE. SECURE
BRANCHES, FOLLOW THE MOST RECENT WITH NO. 12 GALVANIZED WIRE ENCASED IN 12mm DIAMETER
CANADIAN NURSERY & TRADES RUBBER HOSE, ALLOWING SLACK IN GALVANIZED WIRE. REMOVE
ASSOCIATION PRACTICE. STAKES AFTER ONE YEAR. STAKE BEYOND EDGE OF ROOT BALL
DO NOT PRUNE LEADER
TREE WRAP APPLIED SPIRALLY FROM

GROUND UP TO HEIGHT OF SECOND
BRANCHES
CONSTRUCT 100mm SAUCER AROUND

TREE BASE. FILL WITH 75mm WOODCHIP ROOT COLLAR TO BE SET 100mm ABOVE FINISHED GRADE
MULCH. PULL BACK MULCH FROM BASE
OF TREE. ENSURE THAT MULCH COVERS
ALL EXPOSED SOIL
NOTE:

CONTRACT DRAWINGS
CUT AND REMOVE BURLAP AND WIRE

BASKET FROM TOP 2/3 OF ROOT BALL
WITHOUT DISTURBING ROOTS
MINIMUM 1 STAKE 2400MM LONG ON WINDWARD SIDE.

SECURE WITH NO. 12 GALVANIZED WIRE ENCASED IN
12mm DIAMETER RUBBER HOSE, ALLOWING SLACK IN
GALVANIZED WIRE. REMOVE STAKES AFTER ONE YEAR.
REMOVE DAMAGED OR OBJECTIONABLE STAKE BEYOND EDGE OF ROOT BALL
BRANCHES, FOLLOW THE MOST RECENT
ASSOCIATION PRACTICE.
DO NOT PRUNE LEADER

TREE BASE. FILL WITH 75mm WOODCHIP TOPSOIL MIXTURE AS PER SPECIFICATION
MULCH. PULL BACK MULCH FROM BASE
OF TREE. ENSURE THAT MULCH COVERS
ALL EXPOSED SOIL
2000
NOTE:

CONTRACT DRAWINGS
CUT AND REMOVE BURLAP AND WIRE BASKET
FROM TOP 2/3 OF ROOT BALL WITHOUT
DISTURBING ROOTS

PLANTING PIT, WELL DRAINED SOILS REV: JAN 2017
(ROAD ALLOWANCE) DWG No:
L3
TOPSOIL TO BE
DEPTH OF ROOTBALL
SLOPE GRANULAR
TOWARD SOAK PIT
FILTER CLOTH
TOP OF GRANULAR 'A'
SOAK PIT BOTTOM OF
GRANULAR 'A' SOAK PIT
TOPSOIL AS
PER SPEC.
PLAN VIEW
GRANULAR À' SOAK PIT

UNDER TOPSOIL AND SOD
CURB
ROAD
DO NOT PRUNE LEADER
REMOVE DAMAGED OR OBJECTIONABLE BRANCHES. FOLLOW

ACCEPTABLE HORTICULTURAL PRACTICE
2 STAKES MIN. 2400 LONG. SECURE WITH NO. 12 GALVANIZED

WIRE ENCASED IN 12mm DIAMETER RUBBER HOSE, ALLOWING
SLACK IN GALVANIZED WIRE. REMOVE STAKES AFTER 1 YEAR.
STAKE BEYOND EDGE OF ROOT BALL
CONSTRUCT 100mm SAUCER AROUND TREE BASE. FILL WITH

VARIES ACCORDING TO 75mm WOODCHIP MULCH. PULL BACK MULCH BASE OF TREE.
PLANTING CORRIDOR ENSURE THAT MULCH COVERS ALL EXPOSED SOIL
2000
CURB
ROAD SIDEWALK
300
DEPTH
OF
ROOTBALL
TOPSOIL IN TRENCH TO BE CONTINUOUS BETWEEN TREES
TOPSOIL MIXTURE AS PER SPECIFICATIONS
300
1200
NOTES:
GRANULAR À' SOAK PIT
1. ALL MEASUREMENTS ARE IN MILLIMETRES UNLESS
OTHERWISE NOTED
150mm PVC PIPE CONNECTED
400 2. CUT AND REMOVE BURLAP AND WIRE BASKET FROM TOP
TO CATCH BASIN
2/3 OF ROOT BALL WITHOUT DISTURBING ROOTS
CONTINUOUS PLANTING BED REV: JAN 2015
DWG No:
L5
REMOVE DAMAGED OR OBJECTIONABLE BRANCHES.
FOLLOW THE MOST RECENT CANADIAN NURSERY &
DO NOT PRUNE LEADER
MINIMUM 1 STAKE 2400MM LONG ON WINDWARD SIDE. SECURE
WITH NO. 12 GALVANIZED WIRE ENCASED IN 12mm DIAMETER
TREE WRAP APPLIED SPIRALLY FROM GROUND UP STAKES AFTER ONE YEAR. STAKE BEYOND EDGE OF ROOT BALL
TO HEIGHT OF SECOND BRANCHES
CONSTRUCT 100mm SAUCER AROUND TREE BASE.

FILL WITH 75mm WOODCHIP MULCH. PULL BACK
MULCH FROM BASE OF TREE.
ENSURE THAT MULCH COVERS ALL EXPOSED SOIL ROOT COLLAR TO BE SET 100mm ABOVE FINISHED GRADE

2800
1500
3
1
1/3 OF ROOT BALL ABOVE GRADE
CUT AND REMOVE BURLAP AND WIRE BASKET FROM TAPER TO BLEND NATURALLY WITH FINISHED GRADE
TOP 2/3 OF ROOT BALL WITHOUT DISTURBING
ROOTS.

NOTE:

2. USE TREE SPECIES TOLERANT TO POORLY DRAINED SOIL CONDITIONS
REMOVE DAMAGED OR OBJECTIONABLE BRANCHES. MINIMUM 1 STAKE 2400mm LONG ON WINDWARD SIDE. SECURE
FOLLOW THE MOST RECENT CANADIAN NURSERY & WITH No. 12 GALVANIZED WIRE ENCASED IN 12mm DIAMETER
TRADES ASSOCIATION PRACTICE. RUBBER HOSE, ALLOWING SLACK IN GALVANIZED WIRE. REMOVE
DO NOT PRUNE LEADER STAKES AFTER ONE YEAR. STAKE BEYOND EDGE OF ROOT BALL

CONSTRUCT 100mm SAUCER AROUND TREE
BASE AND FILL WITH 75mm WOODCHIP
MULCH MULCH TO BE PULLED BACK FROM TOPSOIL MIXTURE AS PER SPECIFICATION
BASE OF TREE.
ENSURE THAT MULCH COVERS ALL
EXPOSED SOIL
2800
1500
3
1
600mm WOODEN STAKE TO EXTEND INTO UNDISTURBED SOIL

1/3 OF ROOT BALL ABOVE GRADE
CUT AND REMOVE BURLAP AND WIRE BASKET TAPER TO BLEND NATURALLY WITH FINISHED GRADE
FROM TOP 2/3 OF ROOT BALL WITHOUT
DISTURBING ROOTS COMPACTED ROOT BALL SUPPORT PAD
NOTE:

2. USE TREE SPECIES TOLERANT TO POORLY DRAINED SOIL CONDITIONS
PLANTING PIT POORLY DRAINED SOILS REV: FEB 2017
DWG No:
L6
GUARD RAIL
(IF WALL IS OVER 600mm
IN HEIGHT)
SWALE AS REQUIRED
150mm
1:10 SLOPE
CONCRETE
HEIGHT (SIZE & DEPTH
(MAX 1.0m) TO BE DETERMINED)
FINAL GRADE
GEOTEXTILE
150mm
25mm CLEAR STONE
100 DIA. PERFORATED

PIPE WITH SOCK
INSTALL RODENTGUARD
WHERE PIPE IS
DAYLIGHTED
150mm GRANULAR "A" BASE
NOTE:

2. ALL WALLS TO BE APPROVED BY THE CONTRACT ADMINISTRATOR PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION
3. WALLS OVER 1.0m IN HEIGHT MUST BE DESIGNED AND CERTIFIED BY AN ENGINEER
4. RETAINING WALL TO BE CONSTRUCTED ON HIGHER SIDE PROPERTY
5. SUCCESSIVE WALLS OF 1.0m OR LESS IN HEIGHT SHALL BE CONSIDERED AS A SINGLE WALL WHEN:
a. THE SPACING IS LESS THEN 1.5m BETWEEN TWO WALLS; OR
b. THE GRADING IS GREATER THAN 5% BETWEEN TWO WALLS
6. GUARD RAIL IS REQUIRED AS PER POST AND RAIL DETAIL F1 OR AN APPROVED EQUIVALENT, WHEN
WALL EXCEEDS 600mm IN HEIGHT
7. CENTRE STONES OVER THE VERTICAL JOINTS OF THE LAYER BELOW

TYPICAL ARMOUR STONE REV: JAN 2015
RETAINING WALL DWG No:
L7
BURIED DEADMAN (600mm LONG)
GALVANIZED SPIKES
(1.5 TIMES THICKNESS
OF TIMBER)
TIEBACK
JOINTS TO BE STAGGERED
SIMILAR TO BRICKWORK
PRESSURE TREATED TIMBERS

NOMINAL SIZE: 140 x 140mm,
140 x 191mm, OR 191 x 191mm
TIEBACKS SPACED 1.2m TO 2m APART

AND ON EVERY SECOND ROW
LENGTH OF TIE = HEIGHT OF WALL
FINISHED SWALE AS REQUIRED

GRADE 250mm COVER 150mm
STEP TIMBERS
300mm OPTIONAL FILTER CLOTH AND

TO GRAN. 'M' BACKFILL USED FOR
600mm SOIL WITH POOR DRAINAGE
1
10 EMBED AT LEAST
ONE TIMBER
150mm
150mm
REQUIRED OPTIONAL GRAN. 'M'

BEDDING USED WHEN SOIL
CONDITIONS ARE POOR
NOTES:

2. ALL WALL DESIGNS TO BE APPROVED BY THE CONTRACT ADMINISTRATOR PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION
3. MAXIMUM HEIGHT FOR ALL TIMBER RETAINING WALLS TO BE 1.0m. WALLS OVER 1.0m IN HEIGHT MUST BE
DESIGNED AND CERTIFIED BY AN ENGINEER
4. RETAINING WALL ON HIGHER SIDE OF PROPERTY LINE
5. SUCCESSIVE WALLS OF 1.0m OR LESS IN HEIGHT SHALL BE CONSIDERED AS A SINGLE WALL WHEN:
a. THE SPACING IS LESS THAN 1.5m BETWEEN TWO WALLS; OR
b. THE GRADING IS GREATER THAN 5% BETWEEN TWO WALLS
6. STRUCTURAL GEOGRID MAY REPLACE TIMBER TIEBACKS
7. WALLS OVER 600mm MUST HAVE A HANDRAIL INSTALLED
TYPICAL TIMBER RETAINING WALL REV: JAN 2015
DWG No:
L8
ASPHALT PATH
BOULDER: APPROXIMATELY
900MM X 900MM X 400MM
IN SIZE WITH FLAT TOP.
FIT AND BUTT BOULDERS
TIGHT TOGETHER TO
PREVENT GAPS
TOPSOIL AND SOD

BEHIND WALL
400 +/-
50
150
COMPACTED SUBGRADE
150
GEOTEXTILE
COMPACTED GRANULAR 'A'
NOTES:

2. APPROVED NON-WOVEN CLASS 1 GEOTEXTILE AS PER MS-22.15
3. GRANULAR 'A' SHALL MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF OPSS 1010
BOULDER WALL ON ASPHALT REV: FEB 2014
DWG No:
L9
MINIMUM 1 STAKE 2400mm LONG ON
UPSLOPE SIDE. SECURE WITH NO.12
SLACK IN GALVANIZED WIRE. STAKE
BEYOND EDGE OF ROOT BALL

DO NOT PRUNE LEADER
ROOT COLLAR TO BE SET 100mm

ABOVE FINISHED GRADE
75mm DEPTH SHREDDED CEDAR MULCH.

ORI PULL BACK MULCH FROM BASE OF TREE
G
OF INAL TRUNK. ENSURE THAT MULCH COVERS
SLO G
PE RADE ALL EXPOSED SOIL

TREE BASE
300 300 MAX 3:1 RESULTING SLOPE
PLANTING SOIL MIXTURE.

COMPACT TO ELIMINATE
AIR POCKETS AND PREVENT
SETTLEMENT
CUT AND REMOVE BURLAP
AND WIRE FROM TOP 2/3
OF ROOTBALL
150
COMPACTED
SUBGRADE
WELL COMPACTED SOIL MIX UNDER ROOT BALL
SCARIFY SUBGRADE AND WHERE SOILS

ARE HEAVY, PROVIDE ADEQUATE DRAINAGE
NOTES:
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETRES UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED

2. PLANTING SOIL MIXTURE AS PER SPECIFICATION
3. STAKES TO BE REMOVED AT COMPLETION OF TWO YEAR WARRANTY PERIOD
4. REFER TO THE CITY OF OTTAWA STANDARDS FOR OFFSETS
CONIFEROUS TREE PLANTING ON SLOPE REV: JAN 2017
DWG No:
L14
CUT AND REMOVE BURLAP AND WIRE BASKET
FROM TOP 2/3 OF ROOT BALL
PRUNE (TO SUIT SPECIES) TO

REMOVE DAMAGED BRANCHES
FOLLOWING PROPER
HORTICULTURAL PRACTICES.
DO NOT PRUNE LEADER.
STAKE MULTI-STEMMED SPECIMENS

AT MAIN BRANCH USING MIN. 2400mm
LONG STAKE. SECURE WITH NO.12
SLACK IN GALVANIZED WIRE. STAKE
BEYOND EDGE OF ROOT BALL.
75mm DEPTH SHREDDED CEDAR MULCH

PULL BACK MULCH FROM BASE OF TREE TRUNK
ENSURE THAT MULCH COVERS ALL EXPOSED SOIL
300 300
COMPACT SUBGRADE
PLANTING SOIL MIX: LIGHTLY COMPACT AND

200
WATER WELL TO ELIMINATE AIR POCKETS AND

PREVENT SETTLEMENT
SCARIFY SUBGRADE OF PLANTING BED
NOTES:

MULTI-STEM TREE PLANTING REV: FEB 2014
DWG No:
L15
DO NOT PRUNE LEADER
MINIMUM 1 STAKE 2400MM LONG ON

UPSLOPE SIDE. SECURE WITH No.12
SLACK IN GALVANIZED WIRE.
STAKE BEYOND EDGE OF ROOT BALL
CUT AND REMOVE BURLAP AND

WIRE BASKET FROM TOP 2 3
OF ROOT BALL
75mm MIN. DEPTH SHREDDED

CEDAR MULCH. PULL BACK MULCH
FROM BASE OF TREE TRUNK.
ENSURE THAT MULCH COVERS
ORIG ALL EXPOSED SOIL
INAL
GRA
DE O
F SLO BUILT UP AREA TO PROVIDE A
PE
100mm MIN. SAUCER
MAX 3:1 RESULTING SLOPE
PLANTING SOIL MIXTURE.

COMPACT TO ELIMINATE
AIR POCKETS AND PREVENT
SETTLEMENT
UNDISTURBED SUBGRADE
SCARIFY SUBGRADE AND WHERE SOILS ARE
HEAVY, PROVIDE ADEQUATE DRAINAGE
NOTES:
4. REFER TO THE STREET TREE PLANTING MANUAL AND /OR PARKS AND PATHWAYS
MANUAL FOR NEW DEVELOPMENTS FOR OFFSETS FROM OTHER ELEMENTS
DECIDUOUS TREE PLANTING ON SLOPE REV: FEB 2017
DWG No:
L16
CUT AND REMOVE BURLAP AND WIRE BASKET FROM
TOP 2 3 OF ROOT BALL
TRADES ASSOCIATION PRACTICE
DO NOT PRUNE LEADER
STAKES MIN. 2400mm LONG SECURE WITH NO.12

GALVANIZED WIRE ENCASED IN 12mm DIAMETER
RUBBER HOSE, ALLOWING SLACK IN GALVANIZED
WIRE. STAKE BEYOND EDGE OF ROOT BALL
75mm DEPTH SHREDDED CEDAR MULCH. PULL BACK

MULCH FROM BASE OF SHRUBS. ENSURE THAT
MULCH COVERS ALL EXPOSED SOIL
REMOVE POTS COMPLETELY FROM POTTED STOCK

OR CUT AND REMOVE BURLAP AND WIRE FROM
TOP 2 3 OF ROOT BALL
MIN.
450
VARIES
WITH SPECIES
200
PLANTING SOIL MIX: LIGHTLY COMPACT ADD

WATER TO WELL TO ELIMINATE AIR POCKETS
AND PREVENT SETTLEMENT
SCARIFY SUBGRADE OF PLANTING BED
NOTES:
1. PLANTING SOIL MIXTURE AS PER SPECIFICATION.

2. SHRUBS SPECIFIED BARE ROOTS (B.R.) TO BE PLANTED SO THAT ROOTS ARE FULLY EXTENDED IN PLANTING
HOLE WITH SOIL MIX BACKFILLED CAREFULLY TO PREVENT ROOT DAMAGE
3. PROVIDE 100 HIGH EARTH SAUCER AROUND SHRUB BED

CONTINUOUS SHRUB BED REV: FEB 2014
PLANTING DWG No:

L17
WHIP PLANT MATERIAL
STAKE MIN. 2400mm LONG. SECURE
WITH NO. 12 GALVANIZED WIRE
ENCASED IN 12mm DIAMETER
RUBBER HOSE, ALLOWING SLACK
IN GALVANIZED WIRE.
STAKE BEYOND EDGE OF ROOT BALL EXPANDABLE PLASTIC
TREE GUARD FOR RODENT
PROTECTION
FIRMLY COMPACTED
SAUCER OF SUFFICIENT
HEIGHT TO CREATE PLACE WHIP AT ORIGINAL
MIN. 75mm HIGH LIP PLANTING DEPTH LINE
AROUND WHIP BASE
75mm DEPTH SHREDDED CEDAR
MULCH. PULL BACK MULCH
FROM BASE OF TREE TRUNK.
150 ENSURE THAT MULCH COVERS
ALL EXPOSED SOIL
VARIES ACCORDING
LINE OF ORIGINAL GRADE 150 150 SUBGRADE

TO ROOT SIZE
INSTALL PLANT MATERIAL

WITH ROOTS FANNED OUT
EVENLY IN NATURAL FASHION.
MINIMUM ROOT SPREAD TO BE
IN ACCORDANCE WITH
CANADIAN NURSERY TRADES
SPECIFIED PLANTING SOIL SPECIFICATION FOR NURSERY
MIX TO BE FIRMLY TAMPED. STOCK
WATER WELL AFTER PLANTING VARIES ACCORDING TO
ROOT SIZE
NOTES:
1. ALL MEASUREMENTS AND DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS


DECIDUOUS BARE ROOT WHIP REV FEB 2014
PLANTING FOR NATURALIZED AREAS DWG No:

L18
DO NOT PRUNE LEADER
PLANTING BED AROUND SHRUBS. COVER ENTIRE

BED WITH 75mm DEPTH SHREDDED CEDAR MULCH.
PULL BACK MULCH FROM BASE OF SHRUBS.
ENSURE THAT MULCH COVERS ALL EXPOSED SOIL
CONSTRUCT TOPSOIL SAUCER 100mm HIGH

AROUND SHRUB BASE OR SHRUB BED
TO ROOT SIZE
PLANTING SOIL MIX AS SPECIFIED, BACKFILL

ACCORDING
SOIL TO BE COMPACTED TO PREVENT AIR

VARIES
150
POCKETS AND SETTLEMENT
INSTALL PLANT MATERIAL WITH ROOTS FANNED OUT

150
EVENLY IN NATURAL FASHION. MINIMUM ROOT

SPREAD TO BE IN ACCORDANCE CANADIAN NURSERY
TRADES SPECIFICATION FOR NURSERY STOCK
SCARIFY SURFACE OF SUBSOIL

PRIOR TO PLANTING
NOTES:
1. SET SHRUBS 50mm HIGHER THAN SURROUNDING GRADE TO ALLOW FOR SETTLEMENT
2. SHRUBS PLANTED IN GROUPS SHALL BE SET IN CONTINUOUS BEDS
3. ALL MEASUREMENTS ARE IN MILLIMETRES UNLESS OTHERWISE STATED

DECIDUOUS BARE ROOT SHRUB REV: FEB 2014
PLANTING FOR NATURALIZED AREAS DWG No:

L-19
VARIES
VARIES MIN. 2.3-MAX. 3.5
VARIES 900 MIN. 500 900 MIN. VARIES

MAX 3:1 MAX 3:1
PLANTED PLANTED
2% SLOPE 400
SIDE SLOPE SIDE SLOPE 2% SLOPE
MIN.
300
300
MIN. 150 150
450
VARIES
MIN 400
VARIES
300mm DEPTH MIN. PLANTING

SOIL FOR BIOSWALE GROUND
COVER/GRASSES/SHRUBS
SEE APPROVED SPECIES LIST
300
100
MIN. 150 DIA. PERFORATED

BIOSWALE SUBDRAIN SLOPE
0.5% TO STORM SEWER OR
WRAP TRENCH IN ALTERNATE OUTLET
FILTER FABRIC CONNECTION OR DISCHARGE.
(REFER TO SITE GRADING
AND DRAINAGE)
19 mm CLEAR GRANULAR
NOTE:
1. MIN. WIDTH OF BIOSWALE IS 2.3m FROM TOP OF BANK. WIDTH VARIES FROM 2.3 TO
3.5 WHERE WIDTH ALLOWS.
2. CENTRE LINE OF BIOSWALE TO MEANDER WHERE WIDTH ALLOWS.
3. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETRES UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
BIO-SWALE REV: FEB 2014
DWG No:
L20
REMOVE FROM POT
75mm SHREDDED BARK
MULCH
PLANT PERENNIALS AND
GRASSES
25mm HIGHER THAN
100
ADJACENT
GRADE
SAUCER
PLANTING SOIL MIX:
LIGHTLY COMPACT
MIN.
450
TO ELIMINATE AIR
POCKETS AND
PREVENT SETTLEMENT
VARIES
WITH SPECIES
SCARIFY SUBGRADE OF
PLANTING BED
NOTES:
2. PLANTING SOIL MIXTURE AS PER SPECIFICATION.
3. PROVIDE 100MM HIGH EARTH SAUCER AROUND PERENNIAL/GRASS BED.
PERENNIAL AND ORNAMENTAL REV:

GRASS PLANTING DWG No:
L21
TYP FENCE LINE TYP FENCE LINE
MIN.
3000
SHRUBS TO BE PLANTED IN
GROUPINGS OF FIVE TO
NINE LIKE SPECIES
EDGE OF BED TO
BE SPADED EDGE
DECIDUOUS TREES TO BE
PLANTED IN GROUPINGS OF
THREE TO FIVE LIKE
SPECIES.
CONIFEROUS TREES TO BE
PLANTED SINGULARLY OR
IN GROUPINGS OF THREE
LIKE SPECIES
BED TO BE MULCHED WITH

100mm OF SHREDDED BARK
MULCH
NOTES:
2. MINIMUM OF 3000mm MOWING STRIP TO BE IMPLEMENTED ANYWHERE A BED ABUTS
A FENCELINE, PATHWAY, OR STRUCTURE
3. REFER TO PLANTING PLAN FOR SPECIES , SPACING, AND FINAL LAYOUT.
NATURALIZATION/REFORESTATION REV:
SAMPLE PLANTING LAYOUT DWG No:
L22
FENCE STANDARD DETAIL DRAWINGS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
F1 Pipe Handrailing
F2 Typical Post & Rail Fence
F3 Precast Concrete Bollard and Base
F4 200mm Diameter Steel Bollard Installation for Road Closure
F5 100mm Diameter Steel Bollard Installation for Parking Lots/ Parks
F6 Typical Closure at City Roadway
F6.1 Typical Closure at Emergency Access Lane
F7 Tree Preservation Protection Fence
F8 Two-Rail Post and Rail Fence
F9 Chain Link Fence
F10 P-Gate Detail
F11 Removable Bollard
F12 Steel Guardrail
F-13 Single Chainlink Gateway
F14 Double Chainlink
F15 Limited Access Entrance (no gate)
Standard Detail Drawing\Fence Table – March 02, 2015

40mm O.D EXTRA STRONG STEEL PIPE. HOT
DIPPED GALVINIZED, FINISHED WITH A 2 COAT
PAINT SYSTEM (PRIMER AND PAINT) PAINTED
IN SHOP WITH FIELD TOUCH UPS
1880 1880 1880
300 940 940
40mm NOM Ø 40mm NOM. Ø EXTRA

EXPANSION JOINT
EQ
STANDARD STEEL PIPE STRONG STEEL PIPE
625
TITLE:
EQ
WELDED CONNECTIONS (ALL AROUND)
925 MAX FOR HANDRAIL

50
VAR
1070 MAX FOR GUARD RAIL

65mm NOM Ø STEEL PIPE SET INTO CONCRETE.
300 - 445
POST GROUTED INTO SLEEVE
150
600
1500
FOUNDATION IN WALL HAND RAIL DETAIL
FOUNDATION IN EARTH
200
PIPE HAND RAILING

300
40mm NOM Ø STEEL PIPE

150 145
70 25mm NOM Ø STEEL PIPE
EXPANSION JOINT IN HAND RAIL TO BE

FITTED TO ALL HORIZONTAL RAILS
SET SCREW TO BE FLUSH
NOTES:
REV:
DATE:
DWG No:
2. GROUT TO BE NON-SHRINK AND NON FERROUS
3. ROUGH EDGES TO BE FILED OR GROUND PRIOR TO PAINTING
4. SLOPE OF RAIL VARIES WITH PATH SLOPE
F1
5. POSTS TO BE PLUMB REGARDLESS OF SLOPE
6. GALVANIZE HAND RAILING IN ACCORDANCE WITH CAN/CSA G164M UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
FEB 2017
MAY 2001
CORNER POST
CONCRETE
FOOTING
STONE DUST
COMPACTED
NOTES:

2. POST AND RAILS TO BE WELL-PEELED CEDAR, WITH NO PEELER MARKS
3. CORNER AND END POSTS TO HAVE MINIMUM 25 x 100mm OBLONG HOLES FOR RAILS.
LINE POSTS TO HAVE MINIMUM 64 x 100 OBLONG HOLES FOR RAILS
4. SOURCE OF FENCING TO BE APPROVED BY THE CITY
3 RAIL POST & RAIL FENCE REV: JAN 2015
DWG No:
F2
150mm CLEAR CRUSHED STONE
20mm DIA. HOLE
NOTES:

2. BOLLARDS TO BE MANUFACTURED BY CENTRAL PRECAST PRODUCTS, OR EQUIVALENT
3. EXPOSED SURFACES TO HAVE SANDBLAST FINISH
PRECAST CONCRETE BOLLARD & BASE REV: JAN 2015
DWG No:
F3
'DOME' CONCRETE FILLING TO PROVIDE RUN-OFF
3 - 50mm WHITE ENGINEERING GRADE REFLECTIVE TAPE
6mm CHAIN FROM BOLLARD TO BOLLARD
200mm O.D. STEEL PIPE FILLED WITH CONCRETE

AFTER IT IS SET IN PLACE
PAINT WITH 1 COAT RED OXIDE PRIMER PAINT AND

2 COATS OF TREMCLAD (COLOUR AS SPECIFIED)
RUST-PREVENTATIVE ENAMEL PAINT
30 MPa CONCRETE FOOTING

400mm DIA. SONOTUBE
NOTES:

200mm DIAMETER STEEL BOLLARD REV: JAN 2015
INSTALLATION FOR ROAD CLOSURE DWG No:
F4
100
'DOME' CONCRETE FILLING
TO PROVIDE RUN-OFF
50 3 - 50mm WHITE ENGINEERING

GRADE REFLECTIVE TAPE
1100
100mm O.D. STEEL PIPE FILLED WITH

CONCRETE AFTER IT IS SET IN PLACE
PAINT WITH 1 COAT RED OXIDE PRIMER PAINT

AND 2 COATS OF TREMCLAD (COLOUR AS
SPECIFIED) RUST-PREVENTATIVE ENAMEL PAINT
FINISHED GRADE
100mm GRANULAR 'A'
30 MPa CONCRETE FOOTING

400mm DIA. SONOTUBE
1100
25mm DIA. x 350mm LONG

STEEL PIN THROUGH PIPE
AS ANCHOR
150
COMPACTED SUBGRADE
400
NOTES:
ALL MEASUREMENTS ARE IN MILLIMETRES UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED

100mm DIAMETER STEEL BOLLARD REV: JAN 2015
INSTALLATION FOR PARKING LOTS/PARKS DWG No:
F5
.
.
EXISTING TREE CROWN
CRITICAL ROOT ZONE

OF EXISTING TREE
38 x 38 T-BAR POST
AT 1500 O.C. MAX
150
1200 PAGE WIRE FARM

FENCE SECURED WITH
WIRE TWIST TIES OR
1220
APPROVED EQUIVALENT
UNDISTURBED SOIL
914
NOTES:

2. THE AREA WITHIN THE CRITICAL ROOT ZONE OF ALL EXISTING TREES SHALL BE PROPERLY PROTECTED WITH
TEMPORARY FENCING AS PER THE APPROVED LANDSCAPE PLAN
3. THE SURVEY SHALL SHOW EXISTING ELEVATION AT BASE OF ALL TREES TO BE PRESERVED AS SHOWN BY "+"
4. THE AREA WITHIN THE PROTECTED FENCING SHALL REMAIN UNDISTURBED AND SHALL NOT BE USED FOR
THE STORAGE OF BUILDING MATERIALS OR EQUIPMENT. REMOVE ALL DEBRIS
5. PRUNE BRANCHES TO REMOVE DAMAGED OR OBJECTIONABLE BRANCHES. DO NOT PRUNE LEADERS
6. TREE PROTECTION SHALL REMAIN UNTIL SUBSTANTIAL PERFORMANCE OF THE PROJECT
7. IF CUTTING OF ROOTS OR CHANGING OF GRADES AROUND EXISTING TREES IS CALLED FOR, FOLLOW
APPROPRIATE DETAILS AS DIRECTED BY LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT
8. IF TREES ARE BEING AFFECTED BY CONSTRUCTION, A WATER AND FERTILIZING PROGRAM WILL BE REQUIRED
TO THE SATISFACTION OF THE CITY

TREE PRESERVATION REV: FEB2017
PROTECTION FENCE DWG No: F7
INSERT, OVERLAP AND SECURE RAILS
WITH GALVANIZED SPIRAL NAILS.
2500
POST MIN 120mm TOP DIA
RAIL MIN 90-114mm DIA
150
400
400
CORNER POST
IN 300 DIA
CONCRETE
1500
FOOTING
COMPACTED
STONEDUST
SCREENING
NOTES:
1. POST AND RAILS TO BE WELL PEELED CEDAR, WITH NO PEELER MARKS

2. CORNER AND END POSTS TO HAVE MINIMUM 25 x 100 OBLONG HOLES FOR RAILS
LINE POSTS TO HAVE MINIMUM 64 x 100 OBLONG HOLES FOR RAILS
3. SOURCE OF WOOD FENCING TO BE APPROVED BY THE CITY OF OTTAWA
4. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE SHOWN IN MILLIMETRES UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED
5. CONCRETE FOOTING SHALL BE CSA 30MPa CLASS F-1

TWO-RAIL POST REV FEB 2014
AND FENCE RAIL DWG No:
F8
88.9mm DIA. END OR CORNER
POST WITH POST TOP
STRETCHER BAR/BANDS
305mm O.C.
INSTALL 42.2mm DIA.

MID-RAIL WHEN FENCE IS
1800mm AND HIGHER
42.2mm DIA. TOP RAIL
KNUCKLED SELVAGE
WIRE TIES -
AT 450mm O.C. (TOP RAIL)
AT 300mm O.C. (LINE POSTS)
VARIES
50mm GALVANIZED WIRE MESH

9 GAUGE. SEE NOTE 4
60.32mm DIA. LINE POSTS
WITH POST TOPS, AT 3000mm
MAX SPACING
FINISHED
GRADE
PROVIDE TENSION WIRE WITH
FASTENERS AT 450mm O.C.
SURFACE MATERIAL AS
INDICATED ON SITE PLAN
1500
CONCRETE FOOTINGS
1500
COMPACTED
BACKFILL
250
300
NOTES:

2. IF FENCE IS TO BE BLACK VINYL, THE FENCE SHOULD BE 9 GAUGE GALVANIZED WIRE
CORE WITH BLACK VINYL COATING TO PROVIDE A TOTAL OF 6 GAUGE THICKNESS
3. POSTS, RAILS AND ALL OTHER HARDWARE SHOULD BE ELECTROSTATIC PAINTED
5. FENCING ADJACENT TO PRIVATE RESIDENTIAL PROPERTY SHALL MEET THE POOL
ENCLOSURE BY-LAW, NAMELY THE MESH SHALL BE 38mm AND THE GAUGE OF VINYL
COATED 9 GAUGE GALVANIZED WIRE SHALL BE 6. COLOUR AS SPECIFIED
CHAINLINK FENCE REV: JAN 2017
DWG No:
F9
20 REBAR PIN
CLOSED
POSITION
POS
OPE
I
N
TION
2800 O.C.
OR
3400 O.C.
60 DIA. SCHED. 40
1000 OPENING GALV. STEEL PIPE
900 OR 900
GREASE FITTING (UPPER)
38
1600 OPENING
INSTALL NEON REFLECTOR
TAPE 25mm WIDTH (TYP.)
89 DIA. SCHED. 40 GALV.
650
STEEL PIPE
1075
15
0R
GREASE FITTING (LOWER)
5mm RESTING PLATE

73 DIA. SCHED. 40 GALV.
14
(50-100mm ABOVE
GROUND) LOCKING DEVICE STEEL INSERT (MALE)
2170
(SEE DETAIL)
EXISTING
360 O.C.
UNDISTURBED
SUBGRADE
CONCRETE FOOTING
1500 MIN
150
400 DIA
GREASE FITTING 50 MIN.
ABOVE REBAR PIN
89 DIA. STEEL PIPE (GATE)
20mm REBAR PIN THROUGH
73 DIA. STEEL PIPE (FIXED) BOTH PIPES. BEND ONE END AT
NOTES: 90 TO PROVIDE 100mm HANDLE.
50 MIN.
DRILL HOLE AT OTHER END TO

ACCEPT HEAVY DUTY PADLOCK.
1. ALL PIPE AND COMPONENTS SHALL BE GALVANIZED AFTER FABRICATION
REBAR TO BE WELDED TO HEAVY
2. ALL PIPE SHALL BE SCHEDULE 40. STEEL
DUTY CHAIN. CHAIN TO BE
3. ALL JOINTS TO BE CONTINUOUS WELDS (MIN .6 THICK) AND BE
WELDED TO 73 DIA. PIPE
GROUND SMOOTH
100
4. CONTRACTOR TO SUPPLY HEAVY DUTY PADLOCK AS REQUIRED

5. 5MM RESTING PLATE TO BE WELDED TO INSERT
6. ALL MEASUREMENTS ARE IN MILLIMETRES UNLESS STATED OTHERWISE
7. CONCRETE FOOTING SHALL BE CSA 30MPA CLASS F-1 60mm GALV STEEL INSERT PIPE
TO BE DRILLED TO RECEIVE
REBAR PIN IN CLOSED OR
(100%) OPEN POSITION
LOCKING DEVICE 150
1. LOCKING PIN TO BE GALVANIZED AFTER BENDING
P-GATE DETAIL REV FEB 2014
DWG No:
F10
110 ID PIPE SLEEVE CAPPED
20mm REBAR PIN THROUGH BOTH PIPES. BEND ONE

END AT 90 TO PROVIDE 100mm HANDLE
1000
DRILL HOLE AT OTHER END TO ACCEPT HEAVY DUTY
PADLOCK. REBAR TO BE WELDED TO HEAVY DUTY
CHAIN. CHAIN TO BE WELDED TO 73 DIA. PIPE
60mm GALV STEEL INSERT PIPE TO BE DRILLED TO

RECEIVE REBAR PIN IN CLOSED OR (100o) OPEN
POSITION
125
5mm RESTING PLATE

(25mm ABOVE GRADE)
25
EXISTING UNDISTURBED
SUBGRADE
CONCRETE FOOTING
1000
102 OD x 1150 LENGTH

SCHED. 40 PIPE CAPPED
200
NOTES:
1. ALL PIPE AND COMPONENTS SHALL BE GALVANIZED AFTER FABRICATION
2. CONTRACTOR TO SUPPLY HEAVY DUTY PADLOCK AS REQUIRED
3. 5mm RESTING PLATE TO BE WELDED TO INSERT
4. ALL MEASUREMENTS ARE IN MILLIMETRES UNLESS STATED OTHERWISE
5. CONCRETE FOOTING SHALL BE CSA 30MPA CLASS F-1
LOCKING DEVICE
LOCKING PIN TO BE GALVANIZED AFTER BENDING.
REMOVABLE BOLLARD SCALE FEB 2014
DWG No:
F11
5mm EXPANSION GAP
1290 645
100 O.C. TYP
50X50 STEEL SQUARE TUBE TOP RAIL
50X50 STEEL SQUARE TUBE SUPPORT POST ALL WELDS CONTINUOUS

(AROUND TUBE)
25X25 STEEL SQUARE TUBE PICKET
TITLE:
30X30 STEEL SQUARE TUBE BOTTOM RAIL
1070 MIN
150mm COVER OVER SURFACE - CONSULT

WALL DETAIL FOR TREATMENT
100
150
30 MPA CONCRETE FOOTING
IN SONOTUBE TYP
CLEAR STONE AS PER WALL DETAIL
1000
1500
STEEL GUARDRAIL
250
MIN
NOTES:
REV:
2. ALL STEEL SQUARE TUBES TO BE 10 GAUGE (3mm THICK WALL)
DATE:
GALVANIZED STEEL.
DWG No:
F12
JAN 2015
1220
PADLOCK
RETENTION GATE HINGE
CLASP
A-1220
TYPICAL
90 O.D.
STRETCHER GATE GATE
BAR POSTS
TYPICAL
CHAIN LINK
FABRIC
STRETCHER
BAR BANDS
35 O.D.
GATE FRAME
1220
TERMINAL
POST
FOOTING
SEE
DETAIL
150
350
NOTES:

2. GATE FRAMES SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED OF 33 O.D. GALVANIZED STEEL PIPE, SHOP BENT, WELDED.
AND GROUND SMOOTH
3. STRETCHER BARS TO BE 5 x 19 MINIMUM
4. STRETCHER BAR BANDS 300 O.C., 6 x 19 MINIMUM
5. CHAIN LINK FENCE TO BE BLACK VINYL COATED, 38 WOVEN MESH, 6 GAUGE O.D. OF 9 GAUGE
GALVANIZED STEEL CORE FASTENED TO LINE POSTS, TOP RAIL, MID RAIL, INTERMEDIATE RAIL, AND
BOTTOM RAIL, AND GATE FRAME WITH 3.5 (9 GAUGE) KNUCKLED FASTENERS
6. PADLOCK RETENTION CLASPS TO BE INSTALLED
7. FINISH OF FABRIC AND TIES TO MATCH ADJACENT FENCE
8. ALL FENCE POSTS, GATE FRAMES, AND RAILS TO BE GALVANIZED SCHEDULE '40' PIPE
9. NO PLASTIC FITTING OR COMPONENTS ARE TO BE USED
10. WELD ALL JOINTS
SINGLE CHAINLINK GATEWAY REV: FEB 2017
DWG No:
F13
1475
PADLOCK
RETENTION GATE HINGE
CLASP TYPICAL
A-1220
DROP PIN 90 O.D. GATE

TYP GATE POSTS
STRETCHER TYPICAL
BAR CHAIN LINK
STRETCHER FABRIC
BAR BANDS
35 O.D.
GATE FRAME
1220
400 x 150 x 100 TERMINAL

CONCRETE PAD POST
AND SLEEVE FOR FOOTING
SEE
DROP PIN -REFER
DETAIL
150
TO STANDARD
LIGHT DUTY
350 CONCRETE DETAIL
-SLEEVE TO BE
GALVANIZED PIPE
TO SUIT
NOTES:
2. GATE FRAMES SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED OF 33 O.D. GALVANIZED STEEL PIPE, SHOP BENT, WELDED.
AND GROUND SMOOTH
3. STRETCHER BARS TO BE 5 x 19 MINIMUM
4. STRETCHER BAR BANDS 300 O.C., 6 x 19 MINIMUM
5. CHAIN LINK FENCE TO BE BLACK VINYL COATED, 38 WOVEN MESH, 6 GAUGE O.D. OF 9 GAUGE
BOTTOM RAIL, AND GATE FRAME WITH 3.5 (9 GAUGE) KNUCKLED FASTENERS
6. PADLOCK RETENTION CLASPS TO BE INSTALLED
7. FINISH OF FABRIC AND TIES TO MATCH ADJACENT FENCE
8. ALL FENCE POSTS, GATE FRAMES, AND RAILS TO BE GALVANIZED SCHEDULE '40' PIPE
9. NO PLASTIC FITTING OR COMPONENTS ARE TO BE USED
10. WELD ALL JOINTS
DOUBLE CHAINLINK GATEWAY REV: JAN 2017
DWG No:
F14
1500
1800
1800
NOTE:
1. REFER TO APPROPRIATE FENCE DETAIL FOR
POST SPACING

LIMITED ACCESS ENTRANCE REV:
(NO GATE) DWG No:
F15
STREETLIGHTING/ELECTRICAL STANDARD DETAIL DRAWINGS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
LAD002A 30/60/100A RELAY
LAD004A CONTROL NODE
LAD005A GATEWAY
LBD001A UNIVERSAL ALUMINUM BRACKET
LBD002A ALUMINUM SCROLL BRACKET
LBD003A ADAPTOR BRACKET FOR ROUND SHOEBOX LUMINAIRE
LBD004A ADAPTOR BRACKET FOR WING LUMINAIRE - LARGE
LBD004B ADAPTOR BRACKET FOR WING LUMINAIRE - SMALL
LBD005A T.B.D
LID001A DUCT INSTALLATION
LID002D CONCRETE FOOTING DETAIL - PYRAMID
LID003B POLE GUY
LID004D CONCRETE CONDUIT MAINTENANCE HOLE
LID005A SERVICE ENTRANCE DISCONNECT
LID005D STREET LIGHTING DISCONNECT CABINET
LID005F STREET LIGHTING DISCONNECT PANEL WITH REVENUE METER
BASE
LID005G STREET LIGHTING DISCONNECT PANEL WITH CHECK METER
BASE
LID005H STREET LIGHTING GROUNDING DETAIL
LID006B LUMINAIRE INSTALLATION/CONNECTION - WOOD POLE
Standard Detail Drawing\Streetlighting Electrical Table – March 1, 2016

STREETLIGHTING/ELECTRICAL STANDARD DETAIL DRAWINGS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
LID007B CULVERT DETAIL
LLD001A LRL LED COBRA HEAD STYLE LUMINAIRE
LLD001B CREE LEDWAY HO LED COBRA HEAD STYLE LUMINAIRE
LLD001C CREE XSP LED COBRA HEAD STYLE LUMINAIRE
LLD003A ROUND STYLE SHOEBOX LUMINAIRE
LLD004A LED WING STYLE LUMINAIRE SPECIAL AREA
LLD005A LED CONE STYLE LUMINAIRE SPECIAL AREA
LLD006A LED WALL PACK LUMINAIRE
LPD001D CONCRETE POLE MOUNT - LARGE BUTT CLASS B
LPD002A ALUMINUM POLE
Standard Detail Drawing\Streetlighting Electrical Table – March 1, 2016

STREET LIGHTING STANDARD DETAIL DRAWINGS
CATEGORY SUB CATEGORY DETAIL

LIGHTING AUXILLORY PHOTOELECTRIC
CONTROLLERS
RELAY LAD002A 30/60/100A RELAY
DETAIL
LAS
LAD001 PHOTOCELL MONITORING

CONTROL NODE LAD004A CONTROL NODE

GATEWAY LAD005A GATEWAY
LBD001 LBD001A UNIVERSAL ALUMINUM BRACKET

GROUP A
LIGHTING BRAKETS
LBD002 GROUP B LBD002A ALUMINUM SCROLL BRACKET

DETAIL
LBD
LBD003 GROUP C LBD003A ADAPTOR BRACKET FOR ROUND SHOEBOX LUMINAIRE
LBD004A ADAPTOR BRACKET FOR WING (250W-400W) LUMINAIRE

LBD004 GROUP D
LBD004B ADAPTOR BRACKET FOR WING (70W-150W) LUMINAIRE
LBD005 GROUP E LBD005A T.B.D
LID001 DUCTING LID001A DUCT INSTALLATION
LID002 FOUNDATION LID002D CONCRETE FOOTING DETAIL - PYRAMID

LID003 POLES
LID003B POLE GUY

LIGHTING INSTALLATION DETAIL
LID004 MANHOLE & HANDHOLE LID004D CONCRETE CONDUIT MAINTENANCE HOLE

LID
LID005A SERIVCE ENTRANCE DISCONNECT
LID005 SERVICE ENTRANCES LID005D STREET LIGHTING DISCONNECT CABINET
LID005F STREET LIGHTING DISCONNECT PANEL WITH METER BASE
LID005G STREET LIGHTING GROUNDING DETAIL

STREET LIGHTING STANDARD DETAIL DRAWINGS
LID006 LUMINAIRES LID006B LUMINAIRE INSTALLATION/CONNECTION - WOOD POLE
LID007 MISCELLANEOUS LID007B CULVERT DETAIL
LLD001A LRL COBRA HEAD STYLE LUMINAIRE

LIGHTING LUMINAIRE DETAIL
LLD001 GROUP "A" LUMINAIRE LLD001B CREE LEDWAY COBRA HEAD STYLE LUMINAIRE
LLD001C CREE XSP COBRA HEAD STYLE LUMINAIRE

LLD002 GROUP "B" LUMINAIRE
LLD
LLD003 GROUP "C" LUMINAIRE LLD003A ROUND STYLE SHOEBOX LUMINAIRE
LLD004 GROUP "D" LUMINAIRE LLD004A LED WING STYLE LUMINAIRE SPECIAL AREA
LLD005 GROUP "E" LUMINAIRE LLD005A LED CONE STYLE LUMINAIRE SPECIAL AREA
LLD006 WALL PACK LUMINAIRE LLD006A LED WALLPACK LUMINAIRE

LIGHTING POLE DETAIL

LPD001 CONCRETE POLES LPD001D CONCRETE POLE MOUNT - LARGE BUTT CLASS B

LPD
LPD002 ALUMINUM POLES LPD002A ALUMINUM POLE

LPD003 MISCELLANEUOS
FROM POWER SOURCE-LINE
IN LINE 600VAC FUSE
NIU
3 L1 L2 L3 L4
B R
9
2 T1 T2 T3 14
NIU
W
B W W B
W B T1 T2 T3 14
120VAC IN 120VAC OUT
POWER TO RELAY
SUPPLY
TO PHOTO TO STREET LIGHT LOAD
CONTROLLER
FIG. 1 PHOTO CONTROLLER FIG. 2 30A 600VAC RELAY
N.T.S
NOTES: DATE: 2014-01-31

1. CONTACTS SHALL BE RATED 600VAC –5%
REV. REV:
PHOTOCELL & RELAY DATE:
2014-01-31 NO: 0
2. COIL SHALL BE RATED 120VAC –5%
DETAIL
DWG:
LAD001A
NOTES:
N.T.S
1. CONTACTS SHALL BE RATED 600VAC ±5%
2. ALL A240 NODES TO BE BLACK

DATE: 2016-02-16
LRL A240 WIRELESS REV. REV:
3. MUST BE READ IN CONJUNCTION WITH ENGINEERING
2016-02-16 0
SPECIFICATIONS LAS0010 AND LLS0010 CONTROL & MONITORING DATE: NO:
NODE DETAIL DWG:

LAD004A
FIG. 1 LRL G200 GATEWAY
NOTES:
1. MUST BE READ IN CONJUNCTION WITH ENGINEERING
SPECIFICATIONS LAS0010 AND LLS0010
N.T.S
DATE: 2016-02-16
LRL G200 WIRELESS REV. REV:
2016-02-16 0
CONTROL & MONITORING DATE: NO:
GATEWAY DETAIL DWG:

LAD005A
REACH
+ 3
- 0
CAL
VERTI 51 IPS
LENGTH 1.8m 2.4m 3.0m 4.7m
REACH 1.8m 2.4m 3.0m 4.7m
SE
RISE 0.9m 1.2m 1.2m 1.2m
RI
ARM SEE NOTES 2&3
AW
WIRING HOLE
32mm MINIMUM
POLE PLATE
51
17mm DIA.
114
156
229
304
WIRING HOLE
32mm MIN
17mm DIA.
55RADIUS
55RADIUS
POLE PLATE
1.8m, 2.4m, & 3.0m
POLE PLATE NOTES:
4.7m 1. ALL DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETERS UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
2. 4.7m LENGTH NOT FOR USE ON ALUMINUM POLES.
3. WHEN MOUNTING 4.7m LENGTH TO CONCRETE POLES, BOLT

BRACKET AT TOP AND FASTEN BOTTOM OF BRACKET USING
BANDING.
4. MUST BE UTILIZED IN CONJUNCTION WITH CURRENT CITY OF OTTAWA

STREET LIGHTING ENGINEERING SPECIFICATIONS.
DATE: 2014-01-31
REV. REV:
UNIVERSAL ALUMINUM DATE:
2014-01-31 NO: 0
BRACKET
DWG:
LBD001A
25
203
127
305
229
19mm KEY SLOT
1 HOLE @ 32mm
51mm SCH 40 Pipe X 203MM Lg

1 SLOT @ 19mm X 44.5mm
102 41
108
11
305MM POLE PLATE

NOTES:
1. ALL DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETERS UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
2. MUST BE UTILIZED IN CONJUNCTION WITH CURRENT CITY OF OTTAWA

STREET LIGHTING ENGINEERING SPECIFICATIONS.
DATE: 2016-02-16
UNIVERSAL SHORT STRAIGHT REV. REV:
2016-02-16 0
BRACKET DATE: NO:
(ALUMINUM) DWG:
LBD001B
FOR 60" TO LUMINAIRE
CENTERLINE 2" sch 40 pipe
56
1420MM
034
012
30
034
312 5
A 11
2
USSD-6
A
15
380 MM
A-A
230 MM
B-B
3
25 8
645 MM
1534 11
0 16
400 MM
1
4 2
112
7
10 8
412
USSD-6
11
16X1" SLOT
41/8
B-B
N.T.S
NOTES: DATE: 2014-01-31

1. ALL DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETERS UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED. REV:
REV.
ALUMINUM DATE:
2014-01-31 NO: 0
SCROLL BRACKET
DWG:
LBD002A
54
38
28
76
TOP VIEW
16
114
NOTE: DRAWING UNDER REVIEW, DIMENSIONS
286
229
124
MUST BE CONFIRMED BY THE CITY OF

OTTAWA STREET LIGHT DEPARTMENT
PRIOR TO ORDERING.
19 DIA (1) HOLE
2X DRILL AND TAP FOR

"-13 UNC-2B
2 OBROUND HOLE
25 x 17
FRONT VIEW
N.T.S
DATE: 2014-01-31
NOTES:
ADAPTOR BRACKET REV. REV:
1. ALL DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETERS UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED. 2014-01-31 0
FOR ROUND SHOEBOX DATE: NO:
LUMINAIRE DWG:
LBD003A
229
102
98
49
31
98
56 93 64
84
17 x 26
2X DRILL THRUn.312, 102 52

TAP 3/8-16" UNC-2B.
149 114
109
52
341
ISOMETRIC VIEW
NOTES:
2. MATERIAL: ALUMINUM ALLOY 356-T51 OR EQUAL.
3. EJECTOR PIN LOCATION MUST BE APPROVED BY GARDCO.
4. FINISH: POWDER PAINT ALL SURFACES. N.T.S
5. THE FOLLOWING ADAPTER IS REQUIRED FOR DATE: 2016-02-16

THE CITY OF OTTAWA STREET LIGHTING POLES:
2016-02-16 0
FOR LARGE WING DATE: NO:
LUMINAIRE DWG:
LBD004A
229
76
97
50
33
71
59
17 x 26
2X DRILL THRUn .257
TAP 5/16-18" UNC-2B
96
52
343
ISOMETRIC VIEW
NOTES:
2. MATERIAL: ALUMINUM ALLOY 356-T51 OR EQUAL.
3. EJECTOR PIN LOCATION MUST BE APPROVED BY GARDCO.
4. FINISH: POWDER PAINT ALL SURFACES.
5. THE FOLLOWING ADAPTER IS REQUIRED FOR DATE: 2016-02-16

THE CITY OF OTTAWA STREET LIGHTING POLES:
2016-02-16 0
FOR SMALL WING DATE: NO:
LUMINAIRE DWG:
LBD004B
6mil PLASTIC SHEET AS REQUIRED
75
25 25 BY THE CITY OF OTTAWA OR ITS AGENT
ROADWAY
TRENCH REINSTATED AND OR DRIVEWAY 75 GRASS AREA
COMPACTED WITH CLEAN 3x76mm PVC DB2
FILL. DUCT CONCRETE
ENCASED DUCT > 20MPa.
1050 M AX.
DUCT SPACER
(NOTE 2)
760
75
DETAIL "B1"
MARKER TAPE
MARKER TAPE AS PER ESA. UNDER ROADWAY OR
THIS DIMENSION DEPENDS
AS PER ESA.
ON ROCK CONDITION AND MUST BE APPROVED MAJOR DRIVEWAY
6mil PLASTIC SHEET BY THE CITY OF OTTAWA OR ITS AGENT
3 DUCT STRUCTURE
75
AS REQUIRED BY THE FOR EACH CASE WHERE IT IS LESS
760
TRENCH REINSTATED
CITY OF OTTAWA THAN 450mm
AND COMPACTED WITH
OR ITS AGENT
APPROVED FILL.
75 76mm DUCT AS APPROVED
BY THE CITY OF OTTAWA OR ITS AGENT 6mil PLASTIC SHEET AS REQUIRED 6mil PLASTIC SHEET AS REQUIRED
75
25
COVERED ALL AROUND WITH A MINIMUM 25
BY THE CITY OF OTTAWA OR ITS AGENT 25 25 BY THE CITY OF OTTAWA OR ITS AGENT
75
OF > 20MPa CONCRETE.
75
2x76mm PVC DB2 75
4x76mm PVC DB2
DUCT SPACER DUCT CONCRETE
DUCT CONCRETE
75
(NOTE 2) ENCASED DUCT > 20MPa.

ENCASED DUCT > 20MPa.
75
DUCT SPACER DUCT SPACERS BURIED CABLE IN A 38mm
(NOTE 2) (NOTE 2) POLYETHYLENE PIPE.
75
DETAIL "A"
IN ROCK DETAIL "B" DETAIL "B2"
UNDER ROADWAY OR UNDER ROADWAY OR
MAJOR DRIVEWAY DETAIL "C"
MAJOR DRIVEWAY
2 DUCT BORING IN BOULEVARDS, LAWNS
4 DUCT STRUCTURE
OR OTHER GRASSED AREAS
GRASS AREA RIGID DUCT COUPLING SLEEVE

RIGID DUCT COUPLING SLEEVE
+WELDED TO RIGID DUCT
SIDEWALK +WELDED TO RIGID DUCT
USING PVC SOLVENT
OR DRIVEWAY USING PVC SOLVENT
150 150 1500 max 1500 max 150 150

150mm OF GRANULAR "A". 150mm OF TOPSOIL.
1050 M AX.
1050 M AX.
760
760
DUCT SPACERS
MARKER TAPE (NOTE 2)
AS PER ESA.
MARKER TAPE
AS PER ESA.
DETAIL "F"
TRENCH REINSTATED
JOINING RIGID DUCT
n
300 m i
AND COMPACTED WITH

TRENCH REINSTATED
N
CLEAN UTILITY SAND.

300 M I
AND COMPACTED WITH

CLEAN UTILITY SAND.
75
76mm PVC DB2 DUCT
WITH CLEAN UTILITY
75 NOTES:
76mm PVC DB2 DUCT
SAND ALL AROUND.
WITH CLEAN UTILITY
SAND ALL AROUND. 1. ALL DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETERS UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
75
2. ALL SPACERS SHALL BE TIED TO DUCT USING #18AWG STEEL WIRE.

75
DETAIL "D" 3. CONTRACTOR MUST ENSURE ALL DUCTS ARE: CLEAN, RODDED & A
UNDER SIDEWALK DETAIL "E" 8mm(3/8") POLYPROPYLENE ROPE IS INSTALLED IN EACH DUCT.
OR DRIVEWAY GRASS AREAS
4. MARKER TAPE SHALL BE AS PER ESA SECTION 12-012 SUBRULE 11
& MUST BE 300mm MIN. ABOVE DUCT STRUCTURE.
5. BELL END TERMINATORS TO BE USED WHEN TERMINATING IN DUCT

STRUCTURES.
6. REFER TO ENGINEERING SPECIFICATION LIS0001, FOR

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION.
DATE: 2014-01-31
REV. REV:
2014-01-31 0
DUCT INSTALLATION DATE: NO:
DWG:
LlD001A
50mm I.D. PVC DUCTS STUBBED UP 50mm
NOTE 5 FROM TOP OF CONC. AND CENTRE OF DUCTING CONFIGURATION
FOUNDATION. OPTIONS
(SEE DUCT CONFIGURATION OPTIONS)
TYPE "A" BASE
TYPE "B" BASETYPE "C" BASE
(TYPICAL)
DUCT DETAIL DUCT DETAIL
DUCT DETAIL
25mm x 45CHAMFER
380
N.T.S
NOTE 2 N.T.S N.T.S
TYPE "D" BASE TYPE "E" BASETYPE "F" BASE

DUCT DETAIL DUCT DETAIL DUCT DETAIL
NOTE 2
25mm x 45CHAMFER
COIL 2m OF
CONDUCTOR
85
N.T.S
N.T.S N.T.S
75
NOTE: TYPE "A" BASE DUCTS ARE TYPICAL UNLESS

OTHERWISE SPECIFIED ON STREETLIGHT DESIGN
FINISHED
250
GRADE
4-750mm x 25mm DIA. GALVANIZED

ANCHOR BOLTS C/W:
810
19mm RIGID - 2 NUTS

CONDUIT - 2 FLATWASHERS
- 1 LOCKWASHER EACH
DUCT ENTRY EACH SIDE 2-50mm (TYPICAL)

PVC DB2 DUCT 90 600mm RADIUS
1830
APPROVED BACKFILL AROUND FOOTING TO BE

COMPACTED IN 150mm LAYERS. NOTES:
1. ALL DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETERS UNLESS
OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
GROUND WIRE
2. THE BOLT CIRCLE AND THE BOLT TO BOLT
(SEE NOTE 5) DISTANCE WILL DEPEND ON TYPE AND SIZE
OF POLE TO BE USED.
3. CONCRETE TO BE 30MPa-20mm AGGREGATE 80mm

SLUMP - 6% AIR ENTRAINMENT.
4. DECORATIVE SHROUD DIAMETER NOT TO EXCEED

UPPER INSIDE CHAMFER EDGE OF CONC BASE.
5. FOR GROUND ROD & GROUND WIRE DETAILS

REFER TO LID005G
915 DATE: 2014-01-31

REV. REV:
CONCRETE FOOTING DETAIL DATE:
2014-01-31 NO: 0
GROUND ROD
DECORATIVE POLE
(SEE NOTE 5)
DWG:
N.T.S LID002A
50mm I.D. PVC DUCTS STUBBED UP 50mm
FOOTING TOP FROM TOP OF CONC. AND CENTRE OF DUCTING CONFIGURATION
DIAMETER FOUNDATION. OPTIONS
SEE NOTE 5
TYPE "A" BASE
(TYPICAL)
BOLT DIAMETER DUCT DETAIL
25mm x 45CHAMFER
SEE NOTE 2
SHROUD
50mm BETWEEN SHROUD
N.T.S N.T.S N.T.S
AND OUTER CHAMFERED
FOOTING EDGE
TYPE "D" BASE TYPE "E" BASETYPE "F" BASE
NOTE 2 DUCT DETAIL DUCT DETAIL DUCT DETAIL
25mm x 45CHAMFER
COIL 2m OF
CONDUCTOR
85
75
N.T.S
N.T.S N.T.S

FINISHED OTHERWISE SPECIFIED ON STREETLIGHT DESIGN
250
GRADE

ANCHOR BOLTS C/W:
810
19mm RIGID - 2 NUTS

CONDUIT - 2 FLATWASHERS
- 1 LOCKWASHER EACH

1830
APPROVED BACKFILL AROUND FOOTING TO BE

COMPACTED IN 150mm LAYERS.
NOTES:

GROUND WIRE
(SEE NOTE 5) 2. THE BOLT CIRCLE AND THE BOLT TO BOLT
DISTANCE WILL DEPEND ON TYPE AND SIZE
OF POLE TO BE USED.
3. CONCRETE TO BE 30MPa-20mm AGGREGATE

80mm SLUMP - 6% AIR ENTRAINMENT.
4. DIAMETER OF LOWER OUTER CHAMFERED

CONCRETE BASE EDGE TO BE 100mm GREATER
THAN DECORATIVE SHROUD DIAMETER
150
COMPACTED GRAN ’A’ 5. FOR GROUND ROD & GROUND WIRE DETAILS
REFER TO LID005G
915
DATE: 2014-01-31
CONCRETE FOOTING REV:
REV.
GROUND ROD 2014-01-31 0
(SEE NOTE 5)
DETAIL - DECORATIVE DATE: NO:
N.T.S POLE WITH SHROUD DWG:

LID002B
343mm DIA.
BOLT CIRCLE
DUCTING CONFIGURATION
OPTIONS
TYP.
TYP.
TYPE "A" BASE
420
242
(TYPICAL)
DUCT DETAIL
N.T.S N.T.S N.T.S
TOP VIEW TYPE "D" BASE TYPE "E" BASETYPE "F" BASE
420 DUCT DETAIL DUCT DETAIL DUCT DETAIL
C
L 210
COIL 2m OF
CONDUCTOR 25mm x 45CHAMFER
N.T.S
N.T.S N.T.S
150
110

GRADE OTHERWISE SPECIFIED ON STREETLIGHT DESIGN
300
760
19mm RIGID
CONDUIT

ANCHOR BOLTS C/W:
- 2 NUTS
GROUND WIRE
- 2 FLATWASHERS
(SEE NOTE 5)
- 1 LOCKWASHER EACH
NOTES:
1800

APPROVED BACKFILL AROUND FOOTING OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
TO BE COMPACTED IN 150mm LAYERS.
2. FOUNDATION TO BE POURED IN A SINGLE POUR.
3. CONTRACTOR IS REQUIRED TO GET PRE-APPROVAL

FROM CITY OF OTTAWA BEFORE THE ALTERNATE
SONA-TUBE FOUNDATION CAN BE INSTALLED.
SONOTUBE 4. CONCRETE TO BE 30MPa-20mm AGGREGATE 80mm

SLUMP AND 6% AIR ENTRAINMENT.

COMPACTED GRAN ’A’ REFER TO LID005G
GROUND ROD
(SEE NOTE 5)
DATE: 2014-01-31
REV. REV:
CONCRETE FOOTING 2014-01-31 0
150
DATE: NO:
DETAIL - ROUND
N.T.S DWG:
LID002C
760
343mm DIA. 343mm DIA. BOLT
BOLT CIRCLE CIRCLE
COIL 2m OF 4-25mm DIA.

C
L C
L
CONDUCTOR GALVANIZED
ANCHOR BOLTS
25mm x 45
C/W-2 NUTS
CHAMPER COIL 2m OF 2 FLAT WASHERS
CONDUCTOR 1 LOCK WASHER EACH
175
135
GRADE 25mm x 45
19 DIA.
CHAMPER
RIGID CONDUIT
135
GRADE
75mm MIN. SPLICE

760
GROUND WIRE
75
4-25mm DIA. x 750mm
(SEE NOTE 3) 300mm MIN.
GALVANIZED ANCHOR BOLTS
C/W-2 NUTS 760mm MAX.
1680
2 FLAT WASHERS
LEVEL OF ROCK
1 LOCK WASHER EACH
MIN. 500mm BELOW GRADE
560
GROUND WIRE
460
19mm DIA.
(SEE NOTE 3)
RIGID CONDUIT
DUCT ENTRY EACH SIDE
2-75 (TYPICAL) PVC
DUCT ENTRY EACH SIDE
DB2 DUCT 90 610mm RADIUS
2-75mm (TYPICAL) PVC
DB2 DUCT 90 610mm RADIUS
4-25mm DIA. REINFORCING

RODS GROUTED INTO
ROCK
APPROVED BACKFILL AROUND
FOOTING TO BE COMPACTED IN
150mm LAYERS GROUND ROD
(SEE NOTE 3)
112500
COMPACTED GRAN ’A’

FOOTINGS IN ROCK
FOR 4.5m, 8.2m, 9.8m & 11.3m POLES
915
GROUND ROD
(SEE NOTE 3)
OPTIONS
TYPE "A" BASE
TYPE "B" BASETYPE "C" BASETYPE "D" BASE TYPE "E" BASETYPE "F" BASE
(TYPICAL)
DUCT DETAIL DUCT DETAIL DUCT DETAIL DUCT DETAIL DUCT DETAIL
FOOTINGS IN SOIL DUCT DETAIL
FOR 4.5m, 8.2m, 9.8m & 11.3m POLES
N.T.S N.T.S
N.T.S N.T.S N.T.S N.T.S
NOTES:
1. ALL DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETERS UNLESS OTHERWISE OTHERWISE SPECIFIED ON STREETLIGHT DESIGN
N.T.S
SPECIFIED.

DATE: 2014-01-31
SLUMP 6% AIR ENTRAINMENT.
REV. REV:
CONCRETE FOOTING DATE:
2014-01-31 NO: 0
REFER TO LID005G DETAIL - PYRAMID
DWG:
LID002D
25 (TYP)
A BACK SIDE
147 50 50 25
19 25
32
OPENING
306 509 X 236 245
600
25 (TYP)
50
DOOR SIDE
560
50
145 611
145
50 x 42 x 240 R
DISCONNECT CABINET
TOP VIEW RIGID CONDUIT (TYP)
SEE DETAIL LID005D
50 x 42 RIGID
CONDUIT COUPLER
150
100
FINISHED GRADE
508
MIN COVER
25 x 42 x 145 R RIGID
CONDUIT FOR GROUND WIRE
50 x 42 x 240 R
RIGID CONDUIT FROM
POWER SUPPLY
NOTES:
1200
GROUND WIRE CONNECTED TO

2. TOP TO BE LEVEL FINISHED CONCRETE
GROUND RODS TO ESA STANDARDS
(SEE NOTE 7) 3. FOUNDATIONS REQUIRE PLASTIC LINER OR FIBRE TUBE IN CLAY SOILS.
4. FOUNDATION TO BE SITUATED SO THAT FULL LENGTH CABINET DOORS

CAN BE OPENED FROM THE FRONT AND BACK OF THE FOUNDATION.
5. CONCRETE TO BE 30MPa - 20mm AGGREGATE 80mm SLUMP, 6% AIR

ENTRAINMENT
6. SEAL DUCTS INSIDE CABINENT WITH ESA APPROVED MATERIAL

900
7. FOR GROUND ROD & GROUND WIRE DETAILS REFER TO LID005G
SECTION A-A
N.T.S
DATE: 2014-01-31
REV. REV:
DISCONNECT PAD DATE:
2014-01-31 NO: 0
FOUNDATION
DWG:
LID002F
343mm DIA.
BOLT CIRCLE
COIL 2m OF
C
L
CONDUCTOR
25mm x 45°
CHAMPER
175
135
GRADE
760
4-25mm DIA. x 750mm

GALVANIZED ANCHOR BOLTS
C/W-2 NUTS
2438
2 FLAT WASHERS
1 LOCK WASHER EACH
N.T.S
19mm DIA.
RIGID CONDUIT
DUCT ENTRY ONE SIDE

2-50mm (TYPICAL) PVC
DB2 DUCT 90° 610mm RADIUS
APPROVED BACKFILL AROUND
OPTIONS
FOOTING TO BE COMPACTED IN
150mm LAYERS
COMPACTED GRAN 'A'

MINIMUM 150 mm
GROUND WIRE
(SEE NOTE 3) 1143
GROUND ROD
(SEE NOTE 3)
FOOTINGS IN SOIL
FOR 4.5m, 8.2m, 9.8m & 11.3m POLES
NOTES:
1. ALL DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETERS UNLESS OTHERWISE N.T.S
SPECIFIED.

DATE: 2016-02-16
SLUMP 6% AIR ENTRAINMENT.
REV. REV:
DEEP CONCRETE DITCH DATE:
2016-02-16 NO: 0
REFER TO LID005G FOOTING DETAIL - PYRAMID
DWG:
LID002G
9.1m, 10.7m & 12.5m HANDLING:
1. THE MANUFACTURER MAY PROVIDE TWO PICK-UP POINTS MARKED WITH RED TAPE AND ONE HOISTING POINT MARKED
WITH BLACK TAPE FOR ERECTION ON EACH POLE. IF THESE PICK-UP POINTS ARE NOT MARKED, POLES SHALL BE
HANDLED USING A TWO-POINT PICK-UP WITH A SEPARATION OF AT LEAST 3m TO ERECT THE POLE ON SITE, THE
BRACKET MOUNTING HOISTING POINT SHALL BE ABOVE THE POINT OF BALANCE SO THAT THE BUTT IS DRAGGED INTO ITS FINAL POSITION.
HOLE
2. FOR TRANSPORTATION OVER LONG DISTANCES, ALL POLES MUST BE SUPPORTED AT LEAST EVERY 3m THROUGHOUT
THEIR LENGTH, AND WITHIN 1m OF EACH END.
3. WHEN STOCKPILING FOR ANY LENGTH OF TIME, POLES SHALL BE SUPPORTED AT LEAST EVERY 3m WITH WOOD
BLOCKS SO THAT THEY ARE NOT BENT UNDER THEIR OWN WEIGHT.
6.1m INSTALLATION:
1. HOLES SHALL BE AUGURED OR HAND DUG TO DIAMETER 300mm LARGER THAN THE DIAMETER OF THE
POLE BUTT. (AUGER DIAMETER TO MATCH HOLE DIAMETER) AND TO THE DEPTH SHOWN.
2. THE POLE SHALL BE SET AND HOISTED PERPENDICULAR IN THE CENTER OF THE HOLE AS DETERMINED BY THE SPIRIT
LEVEL, PLUMB LINE OR SURVEY INSTRUMENT. THE POLE SHALL BE ORIENTED SO THAT THE BRACKET MOUNTING
HOLE IS AT A RIGHT ANGLE TO THE ROAD BEING SERVED BY THE LUMINAIRE. ON A CURVED ROAD THE BRACKET
MOUNTING HOLE SHALL BE AT A RIGHT ANGLE TO THE TANGENT OF THE CURVE OR AS SHOWN ON THE DRAWING.
3. THE CONCRETE POLE SHALL BE BACKFILLED WITH WET COMPACTED STONE DUST TO >95% PROCTOR UP TO A DEPTH
OF 150mm FROM FINAL GRADE (COMPACTED IN 150mm LAYERS), BUT NOT COVERING THE WIRING APERTURE. THE
CONDUCTOR AT THE WIRING APERTURE SHALL BE PROTECTED WITH CLEAN SAND AND OR ANOTHER APPROVED
METHOD.
NOTE: A CONCRETE SLUG MAY BE REQUIRED FOR INSTALLATION IN INCOMPETENT SOIL CONDITIONS AT THE
DISCRETION OF THE CITY OF OTTAWA 0R ITS AGENT.
4. THE POLE SHALL BE INSTALLED SO THAT THE DIRECTION OF THE HANDHOLE IS DOWN STREAM (PERSON FACING
TRAFFIC WHILE WORKING IN HANDHOLE) UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED BY CITY OF OTTAWA OR ITS AGENT.
5. WHEN A ROCK IS ENCOUNTERED, SET POLE IN A MANNER SPECIFIED BY THE CITY OF OTTAWA OR ITS AGENTS.
6. WHERE THE BEARING PRESSURE OF THE POLE IS TOO GREAT FOR THE MATERIALS AT THE BOTTOM OF THE HOLE,
INSTALL A 250mm PAD OF QUICK SETTING CONCRETE.
HANDHOLE
150
150
7. POLES LOCATED UNDER OVERHEAD ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION LINES OR WITHIN SAFETY LIMITS OF APPROACH MUST BE
ERECTED BY THE ELECTRICAL SUPPLY AUTHORITY IN RURAL AREA.
8. CIRCUIT GROUNDING DETAILS REFER TO LID005G

1800 FOR 12.5m
WIRING APERTURE 9. A FROST COIL OF CONDUCTOR SHALL BE INSTALLED AS SHOWN IN DETAIL A.

1500
WITH SAND FOR

POLE
1700
CONDUCTOR
10. THE INSTALLER MUST BE APPROVED BY THE ELECTRICAL SUPPLY AUTHORITY WHEN THE POLE IS WITHIN 3500mm
PROTECTION.
OF HIGH VOLTAGE CONDUCTORS.
NOTES:
COMPACTED
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
STONE DUST
(SEE INSTALLATION
COMPACTED NOTE 3).
STONE DUST
(SEE INSTALLATION
NOTE 3). GROUND ROD & GROUND WIRE
(SEE INSTALLATION NOTE 8)
POLE
FROST COIL
300 MAX.
76mm PVC DUCT
N.T.S
WIRING APERTURE
RAG OR MINERAL DATE: 2014-01-31
INSULATION IN DUCT.
REV. REV:
CONCRETE POLE DATE:
2014-01-31 NO: 0
FROST COIL HANDLING & INSTALLATION
DETAIL A
DWG:
LID003A
See note # 4
See note # 5
See note # 1
See note # 6
See note # 3
See note # 2
GRADE
3.0 m minimum
NOTES:
1. MINIMUN 6MM (1/4") GUY WIRE
2. MINIMUM 205MM (8") SCREW ANCHOR

OR 254MM (10") EXPANSION ANCHOR, AS REQUIRED
3. 3-BOLT CLAMP
4. 10MM (3/8") EYE NUT TO BE INSTALLED ON THE BACK OF THE BRACKET

BOLT ON POLE
5. GUY WIRE TO BE ATTACHED TO THE EYE NUT BY USE OF A GUY SERVE
6. DOWN GUY ATTACHMENT MUST BE AT SAME HEIGHT AS THE SECONDARY

OVERHEAD
7. INSTALL STANDARD YELLOW PLASTIC GUY GUARD
N.T.S
DATE: 2014-01-31
REV. REV:
2014-01-31 0
POLE GUY DATE: NO:
DWG:
LlD003B
355.5
NOTES:
102
254
2. CONCRETE TO BE 35 MPa.
304
3. COVER AND FRAME TO BE SUPPLIED BY THE CITY OF OTTAWA.
4. ALL OPENINGS (EXECPT BOTTOM) TO BE SEALED AND PARGED
5. PVC TYPE DBII BELL END TERMINATORS AND PIPE SEAL TO BE

USED ON DUCT ENDS
507 102
TOP VIEW
711
450.5 508
355.5 330
260.5 178
588
718
889
125 TYP
102
. ... .... . . .. .. . . ..
.. ... ... . .
.. . .
150
19mm CRUSHED STONE CLEAR .. .. .

.. . ...... .
.
.. . .
.. ... . . .. .. . . .
.
.. . . ... .. .. . . . . ..
FRONT VIEW SIDE VIEW
N.T.S
DATE: 2014-01-31
REV. REV:
CONCRETE CONDUIT DATE:
2014-01-31 NO: 0
HANDHOLE (STANDARD)
DWG:
LlD004A
510
427
41.5
41 A
35
TYP.
8.5
34
SECTI
592
575
507
632
715
A-A ON B B
104
19
54
24
A
PLAN
389
19
372
8.5
304
35
NOTES:
54
41
2. SEE DRAWING LID004C FOR CONDUIT HANDHOLE COVER.

34 104
24
41.5
SECTION B-B
N.T.S
DATE: 2014-01-31
REV. REV:
CONDUIT HANDHOLE DATE:
2014-01-31 NO: 0
FRAME
DWG:
LlD004B
SLOPE OF
1 IN 3
A
36
NOTES:
ACCESS 1. ALL DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETERS UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
FOR COVER
REMOVAL
ECLAIRAGE DE RUE
STREETLIGHTING
48
19mm
LETTERS
5
RAISED
3mm
584
584
SECTION A-A
25
B B
22
32
A
381
PLAN
SLOPE OF
1 IN 3
381
70
19 SUPER DIAMOND
22
RAISED PATTERN
36
22
35
3
48
ACCESS FOR COVER SECTION B-B

REMOVAL N.T.S
DETAIL
DATE: 2014-01-31
REV. REV:
CONDUIT HANDHOLE DATE:
2014-01-31 NO: 0
COVER
DWG:
LlD004C
242 242
399 150mm 0
3
0
102
2
A A
343
343
1
4
4
1
4
2
4
8
8
147 190 147 102 150mm 0
484
PLAN VIEW FRONT VIEW
890
686
537
NOTES:
667
838
940
3. WIRE MESH REINFORCING.

102
4. ADJUSTMENT RINGS AVAILABLE IN 52, 102 and 152mm THICKNESSES.
5. ALL DIAMETER OPENING MEASUREMENTS TO BE 102mm UNLESS

102
150
102
N.T.S
DATE: 2014-01-31
150
19mm CRUSHED STONE CLEAN REV:

REV.
2014-01-31 NO: 0
MAINTENANCE HOLE
SECTION A-A DWG:
LID004D
45
SURFACE TO BE MACHINED
43
21 21
19
21
5
44
23
28 2
7
28
140
9
3 25R
3 11
78
17
48
3
51R
3
8
41
4
121R
22
42
89 667 89
17
3
846
SECTION A-A
72
19
TOP VIEW
NOTES:
2. SEE DRAWING LID004F FOR MAINTENANCE HOLE COVER.
3. FRAME TO BE SUPPLIED BY THE CITY OF OTTAWA.
N.T.S
DATE: 2014-01-31
REV. REV:
2014-01-31 NO: 0
MAINTENANCE FRAME
DWG:
LID004E
SUPER DIAMOND
RAISED PATTERN
19mm RAISED LETTERS
OTTAWA
19
25
R 70
3
1
16
3
1
13 9
1 9
19
1
A 50R A 98
6
50R
60
(MANHOLE FRAME)
B
SECTION B-B
E
U
R
T
S
R E SURFACE TO BE MACHINED
E D
ET E ON BOTTOM SIDE.
L AG
IGH IR
TING ECLA
TOP VIEW
13
43
63
2
40R 0R
4
2
27
27 23
6
6
TYP.
TYP. 559
624
NOTES:
SECTION A-A 1. ALL DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETERS UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
N.T.S
DATE: 2014-01-31
REV. REV:
2014-01-31 NO: 0
MAINTENANCE COVER
DWG:
LID004F
355.5
NOTES:
102
254
3. COVER AND FRAME TO BE SUPPLIED BY THE CITY OF OTTAWA.
304
4. ALL OPENINGS (EXECPT BOTTOM) TO BE SEALED AND PARGED
5. PVC TYPE DBII BELL END TERMINATORS AND PIPE SEAL TO BE

USED ON DUCT ENDS
507 102
TOP VIEW
711
450.5 508
355.5 330
260.5 178
435
565
736
125 TYP
102
. ... .
... . . .
.. . . .. .
.. ... . .
..
.. . ..
. . .. .
150
16mm CRUSHED STONE CLEAR

.. . ... .
.... . ... . . .. . . . .
.
...
. . .
. . . ... .. .. ... .. . . . ..
N.T.S
DATE: 2014-01-31
REV. REV:
2014-01-31 NO: 0
HANDHOLE (SHALLOW)
DWG:
LlD004G
4 70A SERVICE
ENTRANCE
DISCONNECT NOTES:
STREET SIDE.
1 PROVIDE ’PULL BOX’, 20O x 200 x 100
NO CONNECTIONS ARE PERMITTED
WITH-IN THE ’PULL BOX’
13 PVC TO BE INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH
CONDUIT. NOTE: USE THE FOLLOWING CONDUCTOR SIZES
482 ELECTRICAL SUPPLYAUTHORITY REQUIREMENTS.
FROM TRANSFORMER TO 70AMP SERVICE
38 PVC ENTRANCE DISCONNECT OR A 100AMP PANEL
2 PROVIDE AUGERED OR HAND DUG HOLE FOR WOOD
CONDUIT. BOARD AS FOLLOWS:
POST 200m LARGER THAN DIAMETER OF POST.
3 #4 AWG RWU 90 FOR 70AMP DISCONNECT.
3 THE WOOD POST SHALL BE BACKFILLED WITH
STONE DUST COMPACTED TO 95% PROCTOR IN
150 LAYERS TO 150 BELOW FINISH GRADE.
CUTLER HAMMER PROVIDE TOP SOIL FOR REMAINING 150 AND
SERVICE DISCONNECT COMPACT TO PREVENT SETTLEMENT.
OPTION 3
4 IF CUTLER HAMMER SERVICE DISCONNECT IS USED
THE PULL BOX IS NOT REQUIRED AS INDICATED
PLAN VIEW A-A
IN NOTE 1 (FOR SINGLE 120V CIRCUIT ONLY).
NEUTRAL BUS CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE AN 200 x 200 PRESSURE
TREATED POST FOR THIS INSTALLATION.
1 PVC PULL BOX A A 5 BONDING INSIDE PADMOUNTED TRANSFORMER

70A SERVICE
GROUND GRID SHALL BE AS PER
ENTRANCE PRIMARY TO STREET
4 SECONDARY ELECTRICAL SUPPLY AUTHORITY REQUIREMENTS.
DISCONNECT LIGHT PLANT
40AMP-2P
STREET SIDE.
6 EXPANSION JOINTS AS PER ESA REQUIREMENTS
120/240V
13 PVC CONDUIT
MINI-PAD GROUND BUS
FOR SERVICE GROUND. 7 CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE MECAHNICAL PROTECTION
BELL
TRANSFORMER
WITH A 63mm STEEL PLATE OR 75mm CONCRETE
EXPANSION 6 ENCASEMENT IF COVER OVER STREETLIGHT DUCT
762
38 JOINTS
IS LESS THAN 450mm.
MINI-PAD 150 x 150

5
TRANSFORMER PRESSURE
TREATED POST.
GROUND ROD
GROUNDING DETAIL TYPICAL GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
200 FINISH GRADE

1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS UNLESS
2.0 BREAKERS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.

GROUNDING
760
GRID.
1. PROVIDE MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS 2. ALL WORK TO BE DONE IN ACCORDANCE WITH
TO CSA C22.2 NO.5.1-M91. THE CANADIAN ELECTRICAL CODE, AMENDMENTS

38
AND APPLICABLE LOCAL REGULATIONS C/W
2. PROVIDE AUTOMATIC MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT INSPECTION CERTIFICATE.

1220
BREAKERS (RATED 10 KA INTERRUPTING CAPACITY)

IN PANELBOARDS AS INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS 3. SUBMIT ALL PLANS REQUIRED BY THE INSPECTION
AND HEREIN SPECIFIED. BREAKER SIZES AND TRIPS AUTHORITY FOR APPROVAL FURNISH INSPECTION
3
AS SCHEDULED, OR INDICATED ON THE ONE-LINE CERTIFICATES, PRIOR TO FINAL PAYMENT, TO SHOW
DIAGRAM. INSTALLED WORK CONFORMS WITH SPECIFICATION

2
SAND 75 ABOVE AND REGULATIONS. PAY ALL FEES AND PERMIT COSTS.
AND BELOW DUCT. 3. STANDARD OF ACCEPTANCE SQUARE D.
4. ALL CUT SURFACES OF PRESSURE TRATED WOOD
DIRECT BURIED 75 STREET MUST BE RE-TREATED.
LIGHTING DUCT.
SEE NOTE 7 SERVICE ENTRANCE DISCONNECT
5. FOR LOCATION OF SERVICE DISCONNECT RELATIVE
TO HYDRO MINIPAD, SEE HYDRO OTTAWA DRAWING
75 TO 38 PVC REDUCER. 1. 70 AMP BUS FOR ALL PHASES AND NEUTRAL.
UTS0001 AND UTS0012.
SEAL CONCRETE PENATRATION
IN TRANSFORMER BASE WITH UNDISTURBED 2. CSA WEATHERPROOF TYPE 3 ENCLOSURE.
EXPANDABLE FOAM. SOIL.
3. PROVISION FOR PADLOCK IN OFF SWITCH POSITION
BY ONE LOCK.
TYPICAL INSTALLATION USING

SQUARE D SERVICE DISCONNECT
N.T.S
(SINGLE 120V CIRCUIT OR DUAL 120V CIRCUIT)
DATE: 2014-01-31
REV. REV:
SERVICE ENTRANCE 2014-01-31 NO: 0
DATE:
DISCONNECT
DWG:
LID005A
4 70A SERVICE
ENTRANCE
DISCONNECT NOTES:
STREET SIDE.
1 PROVIDE 'PULL BOX', 20O x 200 x 100
NO CONNECTIONS ARE PERMITTED
WITH-IN THE 'PULL BOX'
13 PVC TO BE INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH
CONDUIT. NOTE: USE THE FOLLOWING CONDUCTOR SIZES
482 ELECTRICAL SUPPLYAUTHORITY REQUIREMENTS.
FROM TRANSFORMER TO 70AMP SERVICE
38 PVC ENTRANCE DISCONNECT OR A 100AMP PANEL
2 PROVIDE AUGERED OR HAND DUG HOLE FOR WOOD
CONDUIT. BOARD AS FOLLOWS:
POST 200m LARGER THAN DIAMETER OF POST.
3 THE WOOD POST SHALL BE BACKFILLED WITH
STONE DUST COMPACTED TO 95% PROCTOR IN
150 LAYERS TO 150 BELOW FINISH GRADE.
CUTLER HAMMER PROVIDE TOP SOIL FOR REMAINING 150 AND
SERVICE DISCONNECT COMPACT TO PREVENT SETTLEMENT.
OPTION 3
4 IF CUTLER HAMMER SERVICE DISCONNECT IS USED
THE PULL BOX IS NOT REQUIRED AS INDICATED
PLAN VIEW A-A
IN NOTE 1 (FOR SINGLE 120V CIRCUIT ONLY).
NEUTRAL BUS CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE AN 200 x 200 PRESSURE
TREATED POST FOR THIS INSTALLATION.
1 PVC PULL BOX A A 5 BONDING INSIDE PADMOUNTED TRANSFORMER

70A SERVICE
GROUND GRID SHALL BE AS PER
ENTRANCE PRIMARY TO STREET
4 SECONDARY ELECTRICAL SUPPLY AUTHORITY REQUIREMENTS.
DISCONNECT LIGHT PLANT
40AMP-2P
STREET SIDE.
6 EXPANSION JOINTS AS PER ESA REQUIREMENTS
120/240V
13 PVC CONDUIT
MINI-PAD GROUND BUS
FOR SERVICE GROUND. 7 CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE MECAHNICAL PROTECTION
BELL
TRANSFORMER
WITH A 63mm STEEL PLATE OR 75mm CONCRETE
EXPANSION 6 ENCASEMENT IF COVER OVER STREETLIGHT DUCT
762
38 JOINTS
IS LESS THAN 450mm.
MINI-PAD 150 x 150

5
TRANSFORMER PRESSURE
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
TREATED POST.
GROUND ROD
GROUNDING DETAIL TYPICAL 1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS UNLESS
200 FINISH GRADE
2.0 BREAKERS 2. ALL WORK TO BE DONE IN ACCORDANCE WITH

GROUNDING
THE CANADIAN ELECTRICAL CODE, AMENDMENTS
760
GRID.
1. PROVIDE MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS AND APPLICABLE LOCAL REGULATIONS C/W
TO CSA C22.2 NO.5.1-M91. INSPECTION CERTIFICATE.
38
2. PROVIDE AUTOMATIC MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT 3. SUBMIT ALL PLANS REQUIRED BY THE INSPECTION
1220
BREAKERS (RATED 10 KA INTERRUPTING CAPACITY) AUTHORITY FOR APPROVAL FURNISH INSPECTION

IN PANELBOARDS AS INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS CERTIFICATES, PRIOR TO FINAL PAYMENT, TO SHOW
AND HEREIN SPECIFIED. BREAKER SIZES AND TRIPS INSTALLED WORK CONFORMS WITH SPECIFICATION
3
AS SCHEDULED, OR INDICATED ON THE ONE-LINE AND REGULATIONS. PAY ALL FEES AND PERMIT COSTS.
DIAGRAM.
2
SAND 75 ABOVE 4. ALL CUT SURFACES OF PRESSURE TRATED WOOD
AND BELOW DUCT. 3. STANDARD OF ACCEPTANCE SQUARE D. MUST BE RE-TREATED.
DIRECT BURIED 75 STREET 5. FOR LOCATION OF SERVICE DISCONNECT RELATIVE

LIGHTING DUCT. TO HYDRO MINIPAD, SEE HYDRO OTTAWA DRAWING
SEE NOTE 7 SERVICE ENTRANCE DISCONNECT
UTS0001 AND UTS0012.
75 TO 38 PVC REDUCER. 1. 70 AMP BUS FOR ALL PHASES AND NEUTRAL.

6. GALVINIZED STEEL CABLE GARD REQUIRED IF
SEAL CONCRETE PENATRATION
LOCATION OF SERVICE DISCONNECT WITHIN 1.0m
IN TRANSFORMER BASE WITH UNDISTURBED 2. CSA WEATHERPROOF TYPE 3 ENCLOSURE.
SNOW PLOWING OPERATIONS.
EXPANDABLE FOAM. SOIL.
3. PROVISION FOR PADLOCK IN OFF SWITCH POSITION
BY ONE LOCK.
TYPICAL INSTALLATION USING

SQUARE D SERVICE DISCONNECT
N.T.S
(SINGLE 120V CIRCUIT OR DUAL 120V CIRCUIT)
DATE: 2014-01-31
NOTE: FOR TYPICAL INSTALLATION REQUIRING
REV. REV:
HYDRO OTTAWA CHECK METER AT SERVICE DISCONNECT SERVICE ENTRANCE 2016-02-16 NO: 1
DATE:
PLEASE REFER TO HYDRO OTTAWA DETAIL MCS0074
DISCONNECT
DWG:
LID005A
5/8" MACHINE
BOLT
POWER
SPACE
POWER
SECONDARY SECONDARY
SPACE
BUS BUS
WOOD POLE
WEATHERHEAD TO SUIT WEATHERHEAD TO SUIT
1000
1000
SEPARATION SEPARATION
SPACE SPACE 3/8" x 4"
LAG BOLTS
600
600
COMMUNICATION COMMUNICATION
PANEL OUTLINE
SPACE SPACE
50mm PVC SCEPTER PIPE
32mm PVC SCEPTER PIPE
50mm FEMALE ADAPTOR
32mm FEMALE ADAPTOR

50mm THREADED NIPPLE
CLEARANCE
SPACE CLEARANCE
SPACE
50mm HUB 32mm THREADED NIPPLE
3/8" x 4"
LAG BOLT
100A 1PH, 3W, 8DP SPACES 32mm HUB
TYPE 3R, WEATHERPROOF
PANEL C/W 100A MAIN
DISCONNECT BREAKER.
70A 1PH, 3W, 1DP SPACE 5/8" MACHINE

TYPE 3R, WEATHERPROOF BOLT
PANEL MOUNTING BRACKET PANEL C/W 40A SP BREAKER.
5300
5300
SEE DETAIL 3
50mm LOCK NUT PANEL OUTLINE
32mm LOCK NUT
50mm - 5° OFFSET
CONNECTOR 32mm MALE ADOPTER
1500
CONDUIT AND GROUNDING 32mm PVC SCEPTER PIPE 3/8" x 4"

REQUIRED. LAG BOLT
1500
SECURED AT EVERY 1200mm.
REFER TO DETAIL LID005C

EXPANSION JOINTS
SEE NOTE 5
EXPANSION JOINTS
SEE NOTE 5
GROUND ROD
SEE LID005G
GROUND ROD
SEE LID005G
GRADE LEVEL GRADE LEVEL
DETAIL 3
DETAIL 1 DETAIL 2 PANEL MOUNTING BRACKET
100A POLE MOUNTED DISCONNECT 70A POLE MOUNTED DISCONNECT (FOR BRACKET DETAIL/ASSEMBLY REFER TO ECS0018)
NOTES:
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
HYDRO OTTAWA CHECK METER AT POLE MOUNT DISCONNECT
2. DISCONNECT SHOULD BE MOUNTED AWAY FROM TRAFFIC FLOW
BUT IN A FUNCTIONAL, LESS OBTRUSIVE POSITION ON POLE. PLEASE REFER TO HYDRO OTTAWA DETAIL MCS0074
3. GROUNDING REQUIRED FOR BOTH POLE DISCONNECT SWITCHES.
N.T.S
4. PANEL 70A MAXIMUM SIZE IS 250mm H x 150mm W x 120mm D.
PANEL 100A MAXIMUM SIZE IS 500mm H x 380mm W x 120mm D. DATE: 2014-01-31
5. INSTALL EXPANSION JOINTS IN ALL DUCTS AS REQUIRED PER ESA REV:
REV.
POLE MOUNT DATE:
2016-02-16 NO: 1
6. GALVINIZED STEEL CABLE GARD REQUIRED IF LOCATION OF POLE
MOUNTED DISCONNECT IS WITHIN 1.0m OF SNOW PLOWING OPERATIONS. DISCONNECT
DWG:
LID005B
WOOD POLE

HYDRO OTTAWA CHECK METER AT POLE MOUNT DISCONNECT
PLEASE REFER TO HYDRO OTTAWA DETAIL MCS0074
PANEL OUTLINE
50mm RISER CONDUIT
NOTES:
2. EXPANSION JOINTS AS PER ESA REQUIREMENTS IF CONCRETE

COLLAR NOT PLACED
3. GALVINIZED STEEL CABLE GARD REQUIRED IF LOCATION OF POLE

38 mm CONDUIT DISCONNECT IS WITHIN 1.0m SNOW PLOWING OPERATIONS AND
UP TO A MAXIMUM OF 4 CONCRETE COLLAR IS NOT PLACED
1500 mm
13 mm GROUNDING
CONDUIT
CONCRETE COLLAR
OPTIONAL
SEE NOTE 1 760 mm
FINISHED GRADE
75mm TO 38mm PVC REDUCER

75 mm
N.T.S
DATE: 2014-01-31
100A STREET LIGHT REV. REV:
2016-02-16 1
DISCONNECT WOOD DATE: NO:
POLE MOUNTED DWG:

LID005C
LOCATION OF REVENUE METER
IF REQUIRED (SEE LID005F) LOCATION OF CHECK METER
NOTES:
IF REQUIRED (SEE LID005G)
X
X *STANDARD OF ACCEPTANCE BEL
306 OTTAWA TRAFFIC SIGNAL FRS6024121AL-MAFF
153
WELDED ALUMINIUM 1. ALL DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETERS UNLESS
VENT PADLOCKING
51 509 51
73 306
157
2. CONSTRUCTION CSA/UL TYPE 12 BOX AND
153 DOOR: ALUMINIUM 3mm
90
VENT
73
3. CONTINUOUSLY WELDED AND GROUND SMOOTH
73
375
METER SEAMS
BACK PLATE
ALUMINUM 3mm
90
UNPAINTED 4. ANSI/ASA 61 GREY POLYESTER-EPOXY TEXTURED
POWDERCOATING INSIDE AND OUT
PANEL
METER OPTIONAL
205 375
REVENUE METER 5. GROUND REQUIRED TO BE CONTINUOUS THROUGH
(LID005F) OPTIONAL GROUND LUG TO PANEL
710
1252 1278 CHECK METER
1525
(LID005G)
6. CABINET TO BE FASTENED TO CONCRETE BASE
205
WITH FOUR (4) BOLTS
110
7. SEAL ALL DUCTS WITH ESA APPROVED MATERIAL

1278 1252
1525
BACK PLATE 110
ALUMINUM 3mm 8. TO BE USED IN CONNECTION WITH BASE DETAIL
UNPAINTED
LID002F AND DISCONNECT PANEL DETAIL LID005E,
LID005F OR LID005G
GROUND LUG
742
GROUND LUG
187
X GROUND LUG
187
LEFT VIEW
HINGES (X4)
X
STAINLESS STEEL(RIVETED)
611 RIGHT VIEW SECTION "X-X'
73
QUARTER TURN TOP OF ENCLOSURE

LATCHES (X3)
ZAMAR MATERIAL 61
BACK SIDE
25
19 25
TOP OF ENCLOSURE 55
33
32
OPENING
86
509 X 236 245 187
306
1278 1252
1525
50
DOOR
33
DOOR SIDE
560
16
70
DOOR
611 16
EXTERIOR SIDE
16
32
32 8
16
BOTTOM VIEW PADLOCKING DETAIL
187
174
FRONT VIEW N.T.S
DATE: 2014-01-31
REV. REV:
STREET LIGHTING DATE:
2016-02-16 NO: 1
DISCONNECT CABINET
DWG:
LID005D
DISCONNECT DETAIL
NOTES:
Ø
15 HOLE
* STANDARD OF ACCEPTANCE FOR DISCONNECT

SQUARE D 100 A LOAD CENTER SQDCQ0112M100C100
Ø
32 HOLE
S S
MAIN
N N 1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS
40A 40A
40A 40A UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED
40A 40A
40A 40A
2. SEAL ALL DUCTS AND OPENINGS INSIDE CABINET
40A 40A
40A 40A AND PANEL WITH ESA APPROVED MATERIAL
379 3. USE 3x #2 AWG RWU 90 COPPER FOR FEED

QO112M100C
4. PANEL MUST COME WITH 12X 40AMP
BREAKERS INSTALLED
5.# 2 AWG BARE COPPER GROUND REQUIRED TO BE CONTINUOUS

THROUGH GROUND LUG TO PANEL
6. CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION TO BE
COMPLETED IN PANEL DIRECTORY
6x Ø 32 HOLES INSTALLED INTO 7. PRIOR TO FINAL CONNECTION OF

ADDITIONAL PLATE FASTENED STREET LIGHT DISCONNECT PANEL.
TO BOX IN ACCORDANCE TO ESA ESA INSPECTION CERTIFICATE REQUIRED
362 95
8. BREAKERS
A. PROVIDE MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT

INTERNAL FRONT VIEW
BREAKERS TO CSA C22.2 NO 5.1-M91
B. PROVIDE AUTOMATIC MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS(RATED 10 KA
INTERRUPTING CAPACITY) IN PANELBOARDS AS INDICATED
PANEL CABLE CONNECTOR ON THE DRAWINGS AND HEREIN SPECIFIED.
BREAKER SIZES AND TRIPS AS SCHEDULED OR
Ø
32 FOR GROUND WIRE

ACCESS FITING INDICATED ON THE ONE-LINE DIAGRAM.
TYPE LL C. STANDARD OF ACCEPTANCE SQUARE D
DISCONNECT MAXIMUM MAINS MAXIMUM NUMBER

MAIN WIRE SIZE
CATALOG SYSTEM AMPERE SPACES OF SINGLE POLE
AWG CU
RIGID PVC CONDUIT NUMBER VOLTAGE RATING CIRCUITS
AS PER ESA
QO112M100C 12
120/240VAC
100 * 12 #4 TO #1
1PH 3W
NOTE:
* PANEL TO BE C/W 100A MAIN BREAKER FOR OTTAWA HYDRO SERVICE

Ø
6x 32
TERMINAL ADAPTORS
Ø
32 RIGID OR FLEX PVC CONDUIT

REQUIRED DOWN TO BASEFOUNDATION
N.T.S
FRONT VIEW
NOTE:
DATE: 2014-01-31
TO BE USED IN CONJUNCTION REV. REV:
WITH BASE DETAIL LID002F
STREET LIGHTING DATE:
2014-01-31 NO: 0
AND CABINET (SLDC12) DISCONNECT PANEL
DETAIL LID005D
DWG:
LID005E
DISCONNECT DETAIL
Ø
15 HOLE
S S
MAIN
N N
40A 40A
Ø
40A 40A
32 HOLE
40A 40A
M 40A
40A
40A
40A
40A
40A
INTERNAL FRONT VIEW
379 QO112M100C
MAXIMUM MAIN MAX NUMBER MAIN WIRE SIZE

DISCONNECT
CATALOG SYSTEM AMPERE SPACES OF SINGLE POLE AWG CU
NUMBER VOLTAGE RATING CIRCUITS
QO112M100C 120/240VAC 100 12 12 #4 TO #1

1PH 3W
NOTE:
CSA APPROVED
* PANEL TO BE C/W 100A MAIN BREAKER
UNDERGROUND KING SIZE
METAL SOCKET BASE
362 95
6 x 32 Ø HOLES INSTALLED INTO

ADDITIONAL PLATE FASTENED
TO BOX IN ACCORDANCE TO ESA
NOTES:
* STANDARD OF ACCEPTANCE FOR DISCONNECT 7. PRIOR TO FINAL CONNECTION OF

SQUARE D 100 A LOAD CENTER SQDCQ0112M100C100 STREET LIGHT DISCONNECT PANEL.
ESA INSPECTION CERTIFICATE REQUIRED
PANEL CABLE CONNECTOR
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS
FOR GROUND WIRE
UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED 8. BREAKERS
WEATHERPROOF 2. SEAL ALL DUCTS AND OPENINGS INSIDE CABINET - A. PROVIDE MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT
TYPE 3R METER (min dimensions) AND PANEL WITH ESA APPROVED MATERIAL BREAKERS TO CSA C22.2 NO 5.1-M91
- B. PROVIDE AUTOMATIC MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
432mmH x 305mmW x 121mmD
3. USE 3x #2 AWG AND # 8 AWG GROUND RWU 90 (RATED 10 KA INTERRUPTING CAPACITY) IN PANELBOARDS
(MOUNTED OUTSIDE DISCONNECT
COPPER FOR FEED AS INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS AND HEREIN SPECIFIED.
PANEL ENCLOSURE)
4. PANEL MUST COME WITH 12X 40AMP INDICATED ON THE ONE-LINE DIAGRAM.
BREAKERS INSTALLED - C. STANDARD OF ACCEPTANCE SQUARE D
M 5. # 2 AWG BARE COPPER GROUND REQUIRED TO

BE CONTINUOUS THROUGH GROUND LUG TO PANEL
9. METER BASE REQUIREMENTS:
- A. HIGH STRENGTH NON-TRACKING BLOCKS

6. CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION TO BE - B. COMPRESSION LUGS ON LINE SIDE, 1/2: STUDS
COMPLETED IN PANEL DIRECTORY - C. METAL SCREW TYPE LOCK SEALING RING
- D. SUITABLE STANDARD 4-JAW SOCKET BASE ACCEPTABLE TO
ESA, HYDRO OTTAWA AND HYDRO ONE
32 Ø ACCESS FITING
10. TO BE USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH BASE DETAIL LID002F
AND CABINET (SLDC12) DETAIL LID005D
32 Ø ACCESS FITING FRONT VIEW

TYPE "LL"
6 x 32Ø
RIGID PVC CONDUIT TERMINAL ADAPTORS
AS PER ESA
32 Ø RIGID OR FLEX PVC CONDUIT
PANEL ENCLOSURE N.T.S
DATE: 2014-01-31
STREET LIGHTING REV. REV:
2016-02-16 1
DISCONNECT PANEL WITH DATE: NO:
REVENUE METER BASE DETAIL DWG:

LID005F
DISCONNECT DETAIL
Ø
15 HOLE
S S
MAIN
N N
40A 40A
Ø
40A 40A
32 HOLE
40A
40A
40A
40A
40A
40A
M
40A 40A
INTERNAL FRONT VIEW
379 QO112M100C
MAXIMUM MAIN MAX NUMBER MAIN WIRE SIZE

DISCONNECT
CATALOG SYSTEM AMPERE SPACES OF SINGLE POLE AWG CU
NUMBER VOLTAGE RATING CIRCUITS
QO112M100C 120/240VAC 100 12 12 #4 TO #1

1PH 3W
NOTE:
CSA APPROVED
* PANEL TO BE C/W 100A MAIN BREAKER
UNDERGROUND KING SIZE
METAL SOCKET BASE
362 95
6 x 32 Ø HOLES INSTALLED INTO

ADDITIONAL PLATE FASTENED
TO BOX IN ACCORDANCE TO ESA
NOTES:
* STANDARD OF ACCEPTANCE FOR DISCONNECT 7. PRIOR TO FINAL CONNECTION OF

PANEL CABLE CONNECTOR SQUARE D 100 A LOAD CENTER SQDCQ0112M100C100 STREET LIGHT DISCONNECT PANEL.
FOR GROUND WIRE ESA INSPECTION CERTIFICATE REQUIRED
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS
UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED 8. BREAKERS
2. SEAL ALL DUCTS AND OPENINGS INSIDE CABINET - A. PROVIDE MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT
AND PANEL WITH ESA APPROVED MATERIAL BREAKERS TO CSA C22.2 NO 5.1-M91
- B. PROVIDE AUTOMATIC MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
32 Ø ACCESS FITING 3. USE 3x #2 AWG AND # 8 AWG GROUND RWU 90 (RATED 10 KA INTERRUPTING CAPACITY) IN PANELBOARDS
TYPE "LL" COPPER FOR FEED AS INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS AND HEREIN SPECIFIED.
4. PANEL MUST COME WITH 12X 40AMP INDICATED ON THE ONE-LINE DIAGRAM.
BREAKERS INSTALLED - C. STANDARD OF ACCEPTANCE SQUARE D
32 Ø ACCESS FITING 5. # 2 AWG BARE COPPER GROUND REQUIRED TO 9. METER BASE REQUIREMENTS:
BE CONTINUOUS THROUGH GROUND LUG TO PANEL
- A. HIGH STRENGTH NON-TRACKING BLOCKS
M 6. CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION TO BE
COMPLETED IN PANEL DIRECTORY
- B. COMPRESSION LUGS ON LINE SIDE, 1/2: STUDS
- C. METAL SCREW TYPE LOCK SEALING RING
- D. SUITABLE STANDARD 4-JAW SOCKET BASE ACCEPTABLE TO
ESA, HYDRO OTTAWA AND HYDRO ONE
10. TO BE USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH BASE DETAIL LID002F

6 x 32Ø AND CABINET (SLDC12) DETAIL LID005D
TERMINAL ADAPTORS
RIGID PVC CONDUIT WEATHERPROOF

AS PER ESA TYPE 3R METER (min dimensions)
432mmH x 305mmW x 121mmD
32 Ø RIGID OR FLEX PVC CONDUIT
(MOUNTED OUTSIDE DISCONNECT
PANEL ENCLOSURE)
PANEL ENCLOSURE
PANEL ENCLOSURE
N.T.S
FRONT VIEW
DATE: 2016-02-16
2016-02-16 0
DISCONNECT PANEL WITH DATE: NO:
CHECK METER BASE DETAIL DWG:

LID005F
GROUND ROD INSTALLATION IN SOIL
300 100mm DUCT (SEE NOTE 2&3) TYPICAL NOTES:

NATIVE BACKFILL
100 100mm DUCT 1. ALL DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETERS UNLESS OTHERWISE
FINISHED GRADE 100mm DUCT
SPECIFIED.
100 100
FINISHED GRADE
600
2. 100mm DUCT REQUIRED FOR ESA OF GROUND ROD
MIN
660
& GROUND WIRE CONNECTION.
600 (MIN)
660
3. 100mm DUCT TO BE REMOVED PRIOR TO FINAL
LANDSCAPING.
4. WHEN ROCK IS ENCOUNTERED, AT THE DISCRETION

OF THE CITY OF OTTAWA STREET LIGHTING INSPECTOR
GROUND CLAMP
#2 AWG BARE COPPER THE FOLLOWING MAY BE DONE:
TYPICAL GROUND WIRE TO POWER
(SEE NOTE 5) SUPPLY AS DIRECTED (REFERENCED FROM ESA RULES 10-700 & 75-406)
3000
-IF THE 3m ROD ENCOUNTERS ROCK AT A DEPTH

OF 1.2m OR MORE, THEN THE ROD SHALL BE DRIVEN
3000
3000 TO ROCK BOTTOM AND THE REMAINING ROD SECTION
GROUND ROD
min SHALL BE BENT AND BURIED AT LEAST 600mm BELOW
(SEE NOTE 6) FINISHED GRADE LEVEL IN A HORIZONTAL TRENCH.
-IF THE 3m ROD ENCOUNTERS ROCK AT A DEPTH
OF LESS THAN 1.2m , THEN THE ROD SHALL BE BURIED
AT LEAST 600mm BELOW FINISHED GRADE LEVEL IN A
HORIZONTAL TRENCH.
3000mm GROUND ROD
(TYPICAL) 5. GROUND ROD CLAMP TO BE ACORN STYLE, BRONZE,

ROD DIA 3/4 IN (19mm), ACCOMMODATE CONDUCTOR
GROUND ROD AT STREET GROUND ROD AT SIZE 8 SOLID TO 2 STRANDED AWG, STANDARDS UL,
DISCONNECT PANEL SUITABLE FOR DIRECT BURIAL APPLICATIONS
LIGHT POLE
6. GROUNDING TO BE PROVIDED AT EVERY FIFTH AND

LAST POLE IN THE CIRCUIT. GROUND WIRE SIZE TO BE #8
AWG C/W GREEN JACKET.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS SHALL BE TAKEN WHEN IN THE
GROUND ROD INSTALLATION IN ROCK VICINITY OF OVERHEAD PRIMARY CONDUCTORS USE
(SEE NOTE 4) #2 AWG C/W GREEN JACKET.
300 100mm DUCT
NATIVE BACKFILL
100 100mm DUCT
FINISHED GRADE 100mm DUCT
100 NATIVE BACKFILL 100

FINISHED GRADE
600
MIN
LESS THAN 1200 600 (MIN)
150
150
ROCK ROCK #2 AWG BARE COPPER GROUND

WIRE TO POWER SUPPLY
AS DIRECTED BY CONTRACT
ADMINISTRATOR
3000
GROUTED WITH METALIC

3000
GROUTED WITH METALIC

GROUTING COMPOUND
GROUTING COMPOUND
3000
min
GROUND ROD
(SEE NOTE 6)
GROUND ROD AT STREET GROUND ROD AT

LIGHT POLE DISCONNECT PANEL
N.T.S
DATE: 2016-02-16
2016-02-16 0
GROUNDING DATE: NO:
DETAIL DWG:
LID005H
250mm x 16mm DIA. BOLT
FINISH HOT DIP GALVANIZED PHOTO CONTROLLER
50mm
SQUARE
WASHER LUMINAIRE
NUT
BRACKET
BRACKET POLE PLATE
2-#14AWG WIRE
IN-LINE FUSE HOLDER

114mm x 13mm DIA. LAG BOLT
MECHANICAL TYPE.
COMPRESSION TYPE
NOT ACCEPTABLE.
BLACK
(LIVE)
L
A
E
R
N
I
T
L
U
NOTE 3
E
N
IN
L
WHITE NOTES:
(NEUTRAL)
BARE
(GROUND) 2. SPLIT BOLT WIRE CONNECTOR. CONNECT TO LIVE
SECONDARY IF AVAILABLE, OTHERWISE TO
NOTE 2 STREET LIGHT CONTROL WIRE AND NEUTRAL.
3. ATTACHMENT HEIGHT ROAD CENTERLINE GRADE TO

#8AWG STRANDED POLE THRU-BOLT (UNLESS SPECIFIED IN DETAILED PLANS).
RWU - 7.3m FOR 70W & 100W & 150W HPS
- 8.8m FOR 200W & 250W HPS
- 11.0m FOR 250W & 400W HPS.
4. FINAL CONNECTIONS TO THE OVERHEAD SECONDARY SHALL

BE BY THE ELECTRICAL SUPPLY AUTHORITY.
5. ALL WORK SHALL BE INSPECTED BY THE CITY OF OTTAWA

STREET LIGHT INSPECTOR AND E.S.A.
N.T.S
ROAD CENTERLINE
GRADE DATE: 2014-01-31
LUMINAIRE INSTALLATION REV. REV:
2014-01-31 0
CONNECTION ON DATE: NO:
WOOD POLE DWG:

LID006B
AREA MARY
CAL PRI
ELECTRI
TRANSFORMER
STREET LIGHT SUPPLY, 120 VOLTS IN

2-#14AWG COPPER CROSSLINK
INSULATED WITH P.V.C. JACKET
SEE DRAWING LID006B FOR 120VAC
SECONDARY OVERHEAD CONNECTION.
N
L2
SEE NOTE 3
MUM)
1500
NI
(MI
LUMINAIRE
381
SEE NOTE 3
NOTES:
1. ALL DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETERS UNLESS OTHERWISE
4420
SPECIFIED.
2. IF THE SECONDARY BUS IS ABOVE THE TRANSFORMER,

HOUSE SIDE INSTALL THE LUMINAIRE A MINIMUM OF 1500mm BELOW
THE BOTTOM OF THE TRANSFORMER.
STREET SIDE 3. THIS DIMENSIION MAY BE REDUCED (OR INCREASE)

BY 300mm TO PROVIDE ADDITIONAL CLEARANCE FOR
COMMUNICATION CONDUCTORS, IF REQUIRED.
4. ALL WORK SHALL BE INSPECTED BY THE CITY OF

OTTAWA STREET LIGHT INSPECTOR AND E.S.A.
N.T.S
DATE: 2014-01-31
GRADE REV. REV:
SECONDARY OVERHEAD DATE:
2014-01-31 NO: 0
CONNECTION
DWG:
LID006C
EDGE OF C POLE FOUNDATION
TRAVELLED
ROADWAY
NOTE 3
1.8m LOCAL GRADING NOTE 2

6 % SLOPE
NOTES:
1.5m SHOULDER
1. BURIAL DEPTH SHALL BE MEASURED
NOTE 5 FROM THE HIGHEST GRADE ELEVATION
AT POLE FOOTING. BURIAL DEPTHS SHALL
BE AS PER CITY OF OTTAWA SPECIFICATIONS
BURIAL DEPTH
LID002C AND LID002D.
NOTE 1
2. THE TOP OF THE STREETLIGHT POLE
FOOTING SHALL NOT EXCEED 300mm BELOW
THE EDGE OF TRAVELLED ROADWAY GRADE.
3. FOR OFFSET REFER TO THE CITY OF OTTAWA

STREET LIGHT GUIDELINES.
4. THIS DETAIL SHALL APPLY TO ALL NEW

POLE INSTALLATIONS PLUS EXISTING
INSTALLATIONS WHERE THE SURROUNDING
MATERIALS ARE BEING ALTERED IN ANY WAY.
TRAVELLED
5. A CULVERT SHALL BE INSTALLED AT THE
ROADWAY CITY OF OTTAWA’S DISCRETION. SEE DETAIL LID007B
NOTE 3
NOTE 2
1.8m LOCAL GRADING
6 % SLOPE
1.5m SHOULDER
BURIAL DEPTH
NOTE 1
NOTE 5
TYPICAL SLOPE
POLE FOUNDATION IN FILL
LIMIT OF LOCAL R
=1
.8
GRADING (6% MAX.) m
N.T.S
TYPICAL PLAN DATE: 2014-01-31

REV. REV:
POLE FOUNDATION DATE:
2014-01-31 NO: 0
GRADING
DWG:
LID007A
EDGE OF C
TRAVELLED
ROADWAY
1.5m SHOULDER
TYPICAL SLOPE
CULVERT
SEE NOTE 2

TRAVELLED
ROADWAY
LOCALIZED GRADING
AT STREETLIGHT
1.5m SHOULDER
TYPICAL SLOPE
NOTES:
1. CULVERT LENGTH MINIMUM 5m.
2. CULVERT DIAMETER, DETAIL PLAN AND

CULVERT
X-SECTION TO BE SUPPLIED BY OTHERS SEE NOTE 2 N.T.S
3. THIS DETAIL SHALL APPLY TO ALL NEW

POLE INSTALLATIONS PLUS EXISTING
DATE: 2014-01-31
INSTALLATIONS WHERE THE DITCH
PROFILE IS ALTERED. REV. REV:
2014-01-31 0
CULVERT DETAIL DATE: NO:
4. FOR POLE FOUNDATION GRADING SEE DETAIL LID007A
DWG:
LID007B
CITY OF OTTAWA TRAFFIC
- TO PROVIDE AND INSTALL ALL WIRING FROM EB99 TO HYDRO SUPPLY POLE.
REFER TO ELECTRICAL SUPPLY AUTHORITY WOOD POLE DETAIL.
- TO PROVIDE ALL FINAL CONNECTIONS TO THE EB99
ELECTRICAL SUPPLY AUTHORITY
- TO PROVIDE FINAL CONNECTION
EB99
TO OVERHEAD SECONDARY. REFER
UP
TO ELECTRICAL SUPPLY AUTHORITY
SD
WOOD POLE DETAIL.
WP JU
JU
PH
EHH EHH
PH PH
TO ADDITIONAL TO ADDITIONAL
TRANSFORMER
STREET LIGHTS STREET LIGHTS
ELECTRICAL SUPPLY AUTHORITY

- TO INSTALL DUCT AND WEATHERHEAD AND MAKE
FINAL CONNECTIONS TO THE OVERHEAD SECONDARY
(MATERIALS SUPPLIED BY OTHERS)
3m EHH JU JU EHH
CITY OF OTTAWA TRAFFIC OR APPROVED CONTRACTOR

GRADE
- TO PROVIDE DUCT (3) METERS ABOVE
GRADE AND LEAVE ENOUGH CONDUCTOR
COILED FOR FINAL CONNECTION TO
OVERHEAD SECONDARY (BY OTHERS)
CITY OF OTTAWA TRAFFIC
- TO SUPPLY DUCT AND WEATHERHEAD TO ELECTRICAL SUPPLY
- TO PROVIDE AND INSTALL ALL WIRING FROM EB99 TO STREET
AUTHORITY FOR FINAL CONNECTION TO OVERHEAD SECONDARY
LIGHT HAND HOLE BEFORE THE POWER SUPPLY (JOINT USE POLES).
REFER TO GENERAL NOTE #1.
- TO PROVIDE ALL FINAL CONNECTIONS TO THE EB99
WEATHERHEAD INSTALLATION DETAIL - ELECTRICAL SUPPLY AUTHORITY WOOD POLE DETAIL
EB99
SD
EHH
JU JU
EHH EHH
GENERAL NOTES:
1. HAND HOLE BEFORE THE POWER SUPPLY (PADMOUNT TRANSFORMER) IS REQUIRED.

THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ENOUGH CONDUCTOR COILED UP IN HAND HOLE
FOR THE CONNECTION TO POWER SUPPLY BY ELECTRICAL SUPPLY AUTHORITY.
2. SL DUCT (2 x 75mm, CONC ENCASED) TO BE RUN WITH TRAFFIC DUCT BANK,

AROUND INTERSECTION.
EHH JU EHH
JU
N.T.S
DATE: 2014-01-31
REV. REV:
SINGLE SUPPLY DATE:
2014-01-31 NO: 0
WITH TRAFFIC
DWG:
LID007C
80
86
116 116
749
589
300
286
NXT-S ASSEMBLY NXT-M ASSEMBLY
N.T.S
NOTES:
1. ALL DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETERS UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED. DATE: 2016-02-16
2. REFER TO ENGINEERING SPECIFICATION LLS0010 FOR ADDITIONAL
LRL NXT LED REV. REV:
2016-02-16 0
INFORMATION.
COBRA HEAD DATE: NO:
3. ALL LED FIXTURES TO BE EQUIPED WITH A WIRELESS CONTROL STYLE LUMINAIRE DWG:
AND MONITORING NODE AS PER DETAIL DRAWING LAD004A LLD001A
CREE LEDWAY HO LED COBRA HEAD STYLE LUMINAIRE
NOTES: N.T.S

DATE: 2016-02-16
2. REFER TO ENGINEERING SPECIFICATION LLS0010 FOR ADDITIONAL CREE LEDWAY HO REV. REV:
INFORMATION
2016-02-16 0
LED COBRA HEAD DATE: NO:
3. ALL FIXTURES MUST INCLUDE WIRELESS CONTROL AND MONITORING
NODE. STYLE LUMINAIRE DWG:
LLD001B
CREE XSP LED COBRA HEAD STYLE LUMINAIRES
XSP1 ASSEMBLY XSP2 ASSEMBLY XSP2L ASSEMBLY
NOTES: N.T.S

DATE: 2016-02-16
2. REFER TO ENGINEERING SPECIFICATION LLS0010 FOR ADDITIONAL
REV. REV:
INFORMATION CREE XSP LED COBRA HEAD DATE:
2016-02-16 NO: 0
3. ALL LED FIXTURES MUST INCLUDE A WIRELESS CONTROL AND STYLE LUMINAIRE
MONITORING NODE.
DWG:
LLD001C
432
CUPOLA (if required)
CANOPY
648
LENS
PANEL
(if required)
FIXTURE
HOUSING
POST TOP LUMINAIRE
NOTES:
2. LUMINAIRE & POLE COLOUR AND CATALOGUE NUMBER AS PER

RIGHT OF WAY LIGHTING POLICY
3. ALL FIXTURES MUST BE EQUIPED WITH CONTROL NODE AS PER

DETAILED DRAWING LAD004A AND COMPLY WITH ENGINEERING
N.T.S
DATE: 2016-02-16
LED SQUARE LANTERN REV. REV:
2016-02-16 0
LUMINAIRE POST TOP DATE: NO:
SPECIAL AREA DWG:

LLD002A
+/- 489
CUPOLA
(if required)
BRACKET
HOOD
108
181
+/- 657
368
LENS
PANEL
(if required)
FIXTURE
HOUSING
SIDE MOUNT LUMINAIRE NOTES:



N.T.S
DATE: 2016-02-16
LED SQUARE LANTERN REV. REV:
2016-02-16 0
LUMINAIRE- SIDE MOUNT DATE: NO:
SPECIAL AREA DWG:

LLD002B
NOTES:


N.T.S
DATE: 2016-02-16
LED ROUND STYLE REV. REV:
2016-02-16 0
SHOWBOX LUMINAIRE DATE: NO:
SPECIAL AREA DWG:

LLD003A
GULLWING G13 GULLWING G18
572 800
343 457
121
167
292
216
USE WITH LOW LED WATTAGES USED WITH HIGH LED WATTAGES
NOTES:
1. ALL DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETERS UNLESS N.T.S
DATE: 2016-02-16
2. REFER TO ENGINEERING SPECIFICATION LLS0010 &
LAS0010 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. LED WING STYLE REV. REV:
2016-02-16 0
3. ALL FIXTURES TO COME COMPLETE WITH LUMINAIRE DATE: NO:
CONTROL NODE AS PER DRAWING LAD004A

SPECIAL AREA DWG:
LLD004A
NOTES:

N.T.S

DATE: 2016-02-16
SPECIFICATIONS LAS0010 AND LLS0010 LED CONE REV. REV:
2016-02-16 0
STYLE LUMINAIRE DATE: NO:
SPECIAL AREA DWG:

LLD005A
NOTES:

3. ALL FIXTURES MUST BE EQUIPED WITH CONTROL NODE (where possible)

AS PER DETAILED DRAWING LAD004A AND COMPLY WITH ENGINEERING
N.T.S
DATE: 2016-02-16
REV. REV:
LED WALL PACK DATE:
2016-02-16 NO: 0
LIGHTING LUMINAIRE
DWG:
LLD006A
76
O.D. STEEL
TENON
64
MATERIAL LIST
TIP DIA.
1/4"-20UNC x3/4"L ALLEN KEY
A BUTTON PAN HEAD STAINLESS
STEEL BOLT
GROUNDING LEAD: USE #6AWG.

B MIN. STRANDED CU. WIRE. THREE
TURNS WELDED ON STEEL BAR.
ZINC (Za12) CAST HANDHOLE

C
FRAME AND COVER
POLE STEEL BAR

IDENTIFICATION WELDED TO
B
PLATE RINGS
CONCRETE
FILL
305
B
LENGTH
A A
RE-BARS
SECTION A-A
HANDHOLE LEAD TO BE
70mm x 230mm BONDED TO
HANDHOLE
FRAME
WIRING APERTURE B A
1524
(BOTH SIDES)
89mm x 267mm
LEAD TO EXTEND
300mm. OUTSIDE
OF THE HANDHOLE
C
NOTES:
2. ALL PRECAST MEMBERS SHALL BE PRODUCED IN ACCORDANCE

914
WITH C1.10 OF A23.4-00. ALL PRESTRESSING OF MEMBERS SHALL

SECTION B-B BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH C1.26 OF A23.4-00.
LENGTH 3. EXTERIOR OF POLE TO BE C0ATED WITH A SALT INHIBITING LAYER

BUTT DIA. TIP DIA.
FULL LENGTH OF POLE.
6.1 m 219mm 127mm

4. CONCRETE MIX TO INCLUDE RUST INHIBITOR.
9.1 m 263.5mm 127mm
BUTT DIA.
N.T.S
DATE: 2014-01-31
REV. REV:
CONCRETE POLE POST DATE:
2014-01-31 NO: 0
TOP - CLASS B
DWG:
LPD001A
MORTAR PLUG
165mm – DIA.
MATERIAL LIST
102
A 1/4"-20UNC x3/4"L ALLEN KEY
914
BUTTON PAN HEAD STAINLESS

STEEL BOLT
17.5mm DIA.
68
HOLE
B GROUNDING LEAD: USE #6AWG.
(TYP.)
MIN. STRANDED CU. WIRE. THREE
229
203
32mm x 76mm
76
609
OPENING
FOR CABLE
C ZINC (Za12) CAST HANDHOLE
68
FRAME AND COVER
1524
203mm x 21mm
HOLES
1219
(TYP.)
25
B
4343
25mm RADIUS
533
POLE IDENTIFICATION
STEEL BAR
12.5m
PLATE
WELDED TO
RINGS
B
RE-BARS
762
A A
SECTION A-A
HANDHOLE
89mm x 267mm
LEAD TO BE
BONDED TO
HANDHOLE
FRAME
1524
WIRING APERTURE B A
(BOTH SIDES)
89mm x 267mm
LEAD TO EXTEND
300mm OUTSIDE NOTES:
OF THE HANDHOLE
C

WITH C1.10 OF A23.4-00. ALL PRESTRESSING OF MEMBERS SHALL
BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH C1.26 OF A23.4-00.
1067
3. EXTERIOR OF POLE TO BE COATED WITH A SALT INHIBITING LAYER

SECTION B-B FULL LENGTH OF POLE.
432
N.T.S
DATE: 2014-01-31
REV. REV:
CONCRETE BRACKET MOUNT DATE:
2014-01-31 NO: 0
LARGE BUTT CLASS D
DWG:
LPD001C
10668/B/152-362
9.0 DIA PRESTRESS
152
MATERIAL LIST
SECTION A-A
A "-20UNC x3/4"L ALLEN KEY
BUTTON PAN HEAD STAINLESS
MORTAR CAP STEEL BOLT
CLOSED TOP
B GROUNDING LEAD: USE #6AWG.
A A MIN. STRANDED CU. WIRE. THREE
(4) 19 DIA. TURNS WELDED ON STEEL BAR.
HOLES
64 C ZINC (Za12) CAST HANDHOLE
102 (2) 17.5 DIA. FRAME AND COVER
140 HOLES
216
32 x 76 WIRING
APERTURE.
330
IDENTIFICATION 445
PLATE
521
25.4 RADIUS
(ALL AROUND)
610
965
457
32 x 76 WIRING
89 x 267 ZA12
APERTURE.
HANDHOLE FRAME
& COVER C/W
S.S. SCREWS. POLE TOP DETAIL
NOTES:
2591

89 x 267 TWIN WITH C1.10 OF A23.4-00. ALL PRESTRESSING OF MEMBERS SHALL
APERTURES. BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH C1.26 OF A23.4-00.
3. EXTERIOR OF POLE TO BE COATED WITH A SALT INHIBITING

LAYER, FULL LENGTH OF POLE.
1067
N.T.S
DATE: 2014-01-31
CONCRETE POLE SEWER REV. REV:
2014-01-31 0
SCADA ANTENNA DATE: NO:
362
STREET LIGHT DWG:
TYPICAL POLE LPD001E
9144/B/-127-264
/ PRESTRESS
9mm0
B
FOUR LIN ALUMINUM
CAP (BLACK)
MATERIAL LIST
A 1/4"-20UNC x3/4"L ALLEN KEY
203
17.5mm0
/ HOLE STEEL BAR BUTTON PAN HEAD STAINLESS
CONCRETE
WELDED TO STEEL BOLT
318 38.1mm x 76.2mm FILL
RINGS B GROUNDING LEAD: USE #6AWG.
WIRING APERTURE
432 MIN. STRANDED CU. WIRE. THREE
/ FERROL
15.9mm0
INSERT
FRAME AND COVER
B
RE-BARS
838 9.5mm0
/ STAR INSERT
SECTION A-A
LENGTH BUTT DIA. TIP DIA.
6.1 m 219mm 127mm

LEAD TO BE 9.1 m 263.5mm 127mm
BONDED TO
HANDHOLE
FRAME
B A
LEAD TO EXTEND
300mm. OUTSIDE
OF THE HANDHOLE
9.1m
IDENTIFICATION PLATE SECTION B-B

305
A A NOTES:
63.5mm x 203.2mm 1. ALL DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETERS UNLESS OTHERWISE
RECESSED H.H. BOX SPECIFIED.
AND COVERPLATE (BLACK),

2. ALL PRECAST MEMBERS SHALL BE PRODUCED IN
C/W GROUND WIRE AND
ACCORDANCE WITH C1.10 OF A23.4-00. ALL
TAMPERPROOF SCREWS. PRESTRESSING OF MEMBERS SHALL BE IN
1524
ACCORDANCE WITH C1.26 OF A23.4-00.
3. EXTERIOR OF POLE TO BE C0ATED WITH A SALT

GRADE INHIBITING LAYER, FULL LENGTH OF POLE.
76.2mm x 304.8mm N.T.S

1524
WIRING APERTURE
LOCATED ON BOTH DATE: 2014-01-31
SIDES.
1067
REV. REV:
CONCRETE POLE DATE:
2014-01-31 NO: 0
OCTAGONAL TAPERED
DWG:
LPD001F
FOUR FIN ALUMINUM CAP
B
TIP DIAMETER
SEE NOTE 5.
MATERIAL LIST
/ HOLE
17.5mm0 A 1/4"-20UNC x3/4"L ALLEN KEY
STEEL BAR
38.1mm x 76.2mm WELDED TO BUTTON PAN HEAD STAINLESS
CONCRETE STEEL BOLT
WIRING APERTURE RINGS
FILL
/ FERROL
15.9mm0 B GROUNDING LEAD: USE #6AWG.
INSERT MIN. STRANDED CU. WIRE. THREE

FRAME AND COVER
B
/ STAR
9.5mm0
INSERT RE-BARS
SECTION A-A
TOTAL LENGTH
LENGTH ABOVE GRD
LEAD TO BE
9.1 m (30’) 7.6 m (25’)
BONDED TO
9.8 m (32’) 8.2 m (27’)
HANDHOLE
FRAME
B A
7.6m
LEAD TO EXTEND
300mm. OUTSIDE
OF THE HANDHOLE
NOTES:
A A
2-1/2" x 8" ZINC HANDHOLE

SECTION B-B 1. ALL DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETERS UNLESS OTHERWISE
SPECIFIED.
BOX AND COVERPLATE

2. ALL PRECAST MEMBERS SHALL BE PRODUCED IN
(PLAIN) C/W GROUNDWIRE
ACCORDANCE WITH C1.10 OF A23.4-00. ALL
AND TAMPERPROOF SCREWS. PRESTRESSING OF MEMBERS SHALL BE IN
ACCORDANCE WITH C1.26 OF A23.4-00.
914
NAMEPLATE
3. EXTERIOR OF POLE TO BE C0ATED WITH A SALT
INHIBITING LAYER, FULL LENGTH OF POLE.
610
5. TIP DIAMETER TO MEET CSA STANDARDS

N.T.S
457
DATE: 2014-01-31
2-1/2" x 5"
1524
WIRING APERTURES CONCRETE POLE REV. REV:

2014-01-31 0
(BOTH SIDES) OCTAGONAL TAPERED DATE: NO:
(LARGE BUTT) DWG:

LPD001G
ALUMINUM SPUN POLE CAP
THREADED C
L POLE SECURED WITH (6mm x 25mm)
1/4"- 20UNC
ALUMINUM MOUNTING HEX HEAD STAINLESS STEEL
C/W PLASTIC
PLATE 5mm THICK SCREWS
SLEEVE.
B
102
38
216
331
18mm DIA. HOLES (BOTH SIDES)
R 10
25
58
R
32mm DIA. HOLE (BOTH SIDES)
C
L POLE C/W RUBBER GROMMET
R
5
48
1
38 54
R
18mm DIA. HOLE (BOTH SIDES)
6
8
6063-T6 ALUMINUM ALLOY;
TAPERED WALL THICKNESS
6.4mm
2 - GROUND LUG
R 84mm CONNECTORS
B NAMEPLATE
GROUNDING DETAIL
5
DECAL (IF REQ’D.)
HANDHOLE COVER FRAME SECTION A-A
LENGTH
2 - HOLES 8mm DIA. 356+T6 ALUMINUM 4 - SLOTTED HOLES
ALLOY CAST BASE (64mm x 32mm)
AND BOLT COVERS
104
96
1/4"-20UNC STAINLESS
203
184
STEEL SECURITY
BUTTON HEAD CAP
1474
SCREWS
A A
R
6
R7
1067
R91 102
SECTION B-B
FLUSH TYPE DOOR COVER
343mm DIA.
BOLT CIRCLE
LENGTH BUTT DIA. TIP DIA.

STREET LIGHT POLE BASE
4.6m 203mm 127mm
8.2m 203mm 127mm
POLE ELEVATION DETAIL
9.8m 203mm 127mm
11.3m 203mm 127mm
NOTES:
1. ALL DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETERS UNLESS OTHERWISE
SPECIFIED.
2. BRACKET MOUNTING HOLES TO BE INSTALLED

180 DEGREES FROM EACH OTHER.
3. TWO GROUND LUGS PROVIDED TO BE EQUIVALENT N.T.S

TO "ILSCO" SOLDERLESS LUG CAT. TA-250 AND
WELDED TO THE MOUNTING PLATE
DATE: 2014-01-31
4. 4043 WELDINGS, T6 HEAT TREATMENT AFTER
WELDING ANG BRUSH FINISH. REV. REV:
2014-01-31 0
ALUMINUM POLE DATE: NO:
5. HANDHOLE TO BE INTERNALLY WELDED.
DWG:
6. REFER TO DRAWING LPD003A FOR VIBRATION DAMPER LPD002A
WASHER (4 REQ’D) COUPLER ASSEMBLAGE
(4 REQ’D) POLE 1" - 8NC x 7 1 /4L" STUD
NUTS (4 REQ’D)
20
9
31 31
73
SLEEVE
9
LOWER WASHER
LEVELLING NUT
SHROUD
R 35
68
SPACER
191
LOCK NUT
38
195
COUPLER
191
127
TAP 1" - 8 UNC + 1 /64
45
38
CALIBRATED
GROOVE RADIUS
REACTION PLATE TAP 1" - 8 UNC + 1 /32"

CORED FOR CLEARANCE SHROUD
19
EXISTING BASE
FRONT ELEVATION
77.4
67
CONFORMS TO OPSD 2428.010
330
COUPLER ASSEMBLAGE
ONE INCH ANCHOR BOLTS
3
243
330
0
2
E
L
O
H
NOTES:
N.T.S
30mm DIA. - 4 HOLES 343mm DIA.
BOLT CIRCLE DATE: 2014-01-31
R 44
REACTION PLATE REV. REV:

FRANGIBLE BASE DATE:
2014-01-31 NO: 0
(ALUMINUM POLE)
DWG:
LPD003A
0.42 OF SHAFT LENGTH
TOP OF POLE
ALUMINUM
SPACER
MEASURED FROM
FROM
42.4
(3/8")-16
STAINLESS STEEL
452
HARDWARE
142
NOTES:
STOCKBRIDGE TYPE
DAMPER ASSEMBLY 1. ALL DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETERS UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
CAST IRON WEIGHTS
POLE SHAFT
N.T.S
DATE: 2014-01-31
REV. REV:
2014-01-31 0
VIBRATION DAMPER DATE: NO:
DWG:
LPD003B
PLAY AREA STANDARD DETAIL DRAWINGS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PA1 Play Area Concrete Edge w/Engineered Wood Fiber (with Drainage
Pipe)
PA2 Sand Play Area / Spade Edge (with Drainage Pipe)
PA3 Sand Play Area w/ Asphalt Rolled Edge (with Drainage Pipe)
PA4 Engineered Wood Fiber Play Area / Spade Edge (with Drainage
Pipe)
PA5 Engineered Wood Fiber Play Area with Asphalt Rolled Edge (with
Drainage Pipe)
PA6 Play Area – Concrete Access Ramp with Concrete Curb
PA7 Grain Size Distribution Detail for Playground Sand
PA8 Asphalt Ramp with Asphalt Pathway
PA9 Drywall Detail
Standard Detail Drawing\Play Area Table – March 02, 2015

.
.
LIMIT OF PLAY EQUIPMENT SAFETY ZONE
50mm HL3 FINE ASPHALT
ROLLED ASPHALT EDGE, MIN THICKNESS

125mm, CONTINUOUS AROUND SAND
PLAY AREAS. ROUND TOP EDGE
SAND (CLEANED) AS PER PL-07

300mm MIN DEPTH AT EDGE TO
450mm DEPTH AT DRAIN
1:1 MAX
300 MIN
450
150
150mm GRANULAR
'A' BASE
COMPACTED SUBGRADE,
SLOPE TO SUBGRADE DRAIN
300
APPROVED 100 DIA PERFORATED

PVC OR HDPE DRAINAGE PIPE WITH
FILTER SOCK IN SAND AREA
NOTE:


SAND PLAY AREA WITH ASPHALT ROLLED EDGE REV: JAN 2017
(WITH DRAINAGE PIPE)
DWG No:
PA3
.
LIMIT OF PLAY EQUIPMENT SAFETY ZONE
50mm HL3 FINE ASPHALT
ROLLED ASPHALT EDGE, MIN

THICKNESS 125mm, CONTINUOUS
AROUND SAND PLAY AREAS.
ROUND TOP EDGE
ENGINEERED WOOD FIBRE 300mm MIN

DEPTH AT EDGE AND UNDER PLAY
EQUIPMENT TO 450mm COMPACTED
DEPTH AT DRAIN
1:1 MAX
450 MIN.
150
150
GRANULAR 'A'
MIN DEPTH 150mm
COMPACTED SUBGRADE
SLOPE TO SUBGRADE DRAIN 300
CONTINUOUS
100mm DIA. PERFORATED GEOTEXTILE
DRAINAGE PIPE
WITH FILTER SOCK
19mm CLEAR
NOTE: CRUSHED STONE

3. APPROVED 100 DIA PERFORATED PVC OR HDPE DRAINAGE PIPE WITH FILTER SOCK
4. CLEAR STONE SHALL MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF OPSS 1004
6. ENGINEERED WOOD FIBRE TO COMPLY WITH ASTMF 1292, ASTMF 2075, ASTMF 1951

ENGINEERED WOOD FIBRE PLAY AREA
WITH ASPHALT ROLLED EDGE REV: JAN 2017
(WITH DRAINAGE PIPE) DWG No: PA5

.
.
TOP OF RAMP / TOP OF ROLLED ASPHALT EDGE
ASPHALT
BEYOND - PAINT 50mm WIDE WHITE STRIPE AT TOP
RAMP
OF RAMP ON ASPHALT
ADJACENT
PATH EDGE OF FULL DEPTH SAFETY SURFACING AT RAMP
TRANSITION FROM RAMP TO ROLLED ASPHALT EDGE
RAMP MAX 5% MIN. 125 THICKNESS, TAMP AND ROUND EDGES
200mm DEPTH COMPACTED

3 GRANULAR BASE 'A'
1
300mm MIN. COMPACTED DEPTH
EWF SAFETY SURFACING
(REFER PLAN)
NON-WOVEN GEOTEXTILE TYP
150mm DEPTH CLEAR GRANULAR
100mm DIA. PERFORATED PVC

COMPACTED SUBGRADE PIPE WITH FILTER SOCK
NOTE:

2. 1500mm WIDTH ASPHALT RAMP
4. APPROVED 100 DIA PERFORATED PVC OR HDPE DRAINAGE PIPE WITH FILTER SOCK
5. CLEAR STONE SHALL MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF OPSS 1004
7. ENGINEERED WOOD FIBRE TO COMPLY WITH ASTMF 1292, ASTMF 2075, ASTMF 1951
ASPHALT RAMP w/ ASPHALT PATHWAY REV: FEB 2015
DWG No:
PA8
3000 SQUARE
150
SOD
TOPSOIL
500 MIN
COVER
WRAP
TRENCH
WITH
APPROVED
NON-WOVEN
GEOTEXTILE 100mm DIA NON-
PERFORATED PVC
PIPE CONNECTED
3 TO TRENCH
4" CLEAR
2000
DRAIN ON BOTH
STONE
ENDS
SLOPE AT 0.5%
COMPACTED
SUB-GRADE
NOTES:

2. DIG DRY WELLS TO DEPTH OF 2.0m OR UNTIL BEDROCK OR WATER TABLE REACHED
3.
TITLE: DATE: SEP 2014
DRYWELL DETAIL REV: FEB 2015
DWG No:
PA9
PARK ELECTRICAL STANDARD DETAIL DRAWINGS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PE1 Distribution Enclosure

PE2 Opening / Receptacle Mounting Detail
PE3 Distribution Enclosure Section
PE3.1 Existing Distribution Enclosure Section
PE4 Push Button Mounting Detail
PE4.1 Push button shroud detail (bunker)
PE5 Electrical Fit-Up and Schematic for Bunker
PE6 Typical Direct Buried Pole Detail – Outdoor Rink
PE7 Typical Direct Buried Pole Detail – Pathway
Standard Detail Drawing\Park Electrical Table – March 1, 2017

VENT TO BE PLACED ON EACH SIDE OF THE STRUCTURE. VENTS
TO BE 6" x 6" GALVANIZED STEEL C/W MESH RODENT GUARD. PROVIDE OPENING AND
FINAL DESIGN TO BE APPROVED BY SHOP DRAWINGS HINGED COVER C/W
PADLOCKING PROVISION
FOR FUTURE
PUSHBUTTON. REFER TO
MOUNTING DETAIL
SLOPED ROOF C/W
TITLE:
DRIP EDGE
CONTINUOUS PIANO HINGE STEEL METAL FOR

WELDED TO DOOR & ELECTRICAL KIOSK
ENCLOSURE SHALL NOT BE LESS
THAN 14 GAUGE STEEL
1500 mm
CONTINUOUSLY
WELDED PROTECTIVE
FLANGE.
REFER TO MOUNTING
DETAIL PE4
132
0m
DOUBLE PADLOCK m
ASSEMBLY, PROVIDE 20mm mm
SQUARE STAINLESS ST.BAR- 400 PROVIDE HINGED COVER
DRILLED BOTH ENDS TO C/W PADLOCKING
ACCEPT CITY OF OTTAWA & PROVISION, ONE (1)
HYDRO OTTAWA PADLOCKS 75mm DIA. OPENING
FOR EXTENSION CORDS
AND TWO (2) FUTURE
DISTRIBUTION ENCLOSURE
(N.I.C.) WEATHERPROOF
GROUND FAULT
RECEPTACLES. PREPARE
EDGES OF OPENING TO
NOTE: PROTECT AGAINST
ABRASION. REFER TO
1. ALL MEASUREMENTS ARE IN MILLIMETRES UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED MOUNTING DETAIL
2. FINISH TO BE 1 COAT PRIME PLUS 2 COATS STANDARD HYDRO GREEN
CLYPTAL #G-6332 UNLESS DIRECTED OTHERWISE
REV:
DATE:
DWG No:
PE1
FEB 2017
FEB 2013
.
200A 120
240V
1PH MAIN DISCONNECT ASWITCH
HINGED ACCESS COVER
AND PROTECTIVE FLANGE
ELECTRICAL ENCLOSURE
PANEL
PUSH BUTTON
200A
200A KING SIZE METER WEATHERPROOF GROUND FAULT
120
TITLE:
240V
RECEPTACLE
TIME CLOCK
24 CIR TC (TORK E103B SERIES)
M
HINGED ACCESS COVER, TWO (2)

WEATHERPROOF GROUND FAULT
RECEPTACLES, CONNECT TO PANEL
WITH SEPARATE BREAKERS
2P. LIGHTING CONTACTOR C/W

HAND/OFF/AUTO
MIN
GRADE
450mm
MIN
915mm
ENCLOSURE SECTION
THREE (3) 25mm RIGID
MIN
EXISTING DISTRIBUTION
1500mm
PVC CONDUITS STUBBED

900mm BEYOND BASE
SPARE CONDUITS ON
OPPOSITE SIDES OF BASE
REV:
DATE:
DWG No:
PE3.1
FEB 2017
FEB 2013
200A 120
240V
1PH MAIN DISCONNECT ASWITCH
(TYPE A) HINGED ACCESS COVER
AND PROTECTIVE FLANGE
ELECTRICAL ENCLOSURE REFER TO MOUNTING DETAIL
(TYPE B) PROTECTIVE SHROUD
REFER TO MOUNTING DETAIL
REMOVABLE INNER PANEL PANEL

(16 GAUGE) C/W COLLAR STUD FUTURE PUSH BUTTON
200A
200A KING SIZE METER SOCKET WEATHERPROOF GROUND FAULT
120 RECEPTACLE
BASE WITH ISOLATED NEUTRAL 240V
TITLE:
BUS AND MECHANICAL LUGS FUTURE TIME CLOCK
PER HYDRO REQUIREMENTS 24 CIR TC (TORK E103B SERIES)
M
PROVICE A 50MM OR SIZED AS
PER HYDRO REQUIREMENT PVC HINGED ACCESS COVER, 75mm
UNDERGROUND FEEDER FROM DIAMETER HOLE AND SPACE FOR
HYDRO SERVICE POINT. TWO (2) FUTURE WEATHERPROOF
PAY FOR HYDRO SERVICE GROUND FAULT RECEPTACLES
CONNECTION FEES. REFER TO MOUNTING DETAIL
CONCRETE BASE TO BE 100mm WIDER

FUTURE 2P. LIGHTING CONTRACTOR
AND DEEPER THAN ENCLOSURE AND HAVE
C/W HAND/OFF/AUTO
30MPa WITH A 6% AIR ENTRAINMENT
MIN
GRADE
450mm
MIN
915mm
PROVIDE THREE (3) 25mm RIGID
MIN
1500mm
PVC CONDUITS FOR FUTURE USE

STUBBED 900mm BEYOND BASE
CONCRETE BASE
DISTRIBUTION ENCLOSURE SECTION

SPARE CONDUITS ON UNDISTURBED SOIL PROVIDE THREE (3) 25mm
OPPOSITE SIDES OF BASE MIN 400KPa STRENGTH RIDGED PVC CONDUITS FOR
FUTURE USE STUBBED 900mm
REV:
DATE:
BEYOND BASE
DWG No:
PE3
FEB 2017
FEB 2013
.
150 ENCLOSURE 75 SHROUD
SHROUD.
MINIMUM 12 GAUGE
(OR SAME THICKNESS
AS ENCLOSURE) STEEL
CONTINUOUSLY
WELDED ON THREE (3)
SIDES. SAME FINISH
AS ENCLOSURE
100
TITLE:
HINGE TO
CONNECT DOOR
TO SHROUD BODY
150
150
FUTURE HOLE
FOR PUSHBUTTON
(BUNKER)
OPEN AT BOTTOM.
PREPARE EDGES OF
PUSH BUTTON SHROUD DETAIL

OPENING TO PROTECT
AGAINST ABRASION
NOTES:
REV:
DATE:
DWG No:
2. BOLT METAL SHROUD COMPLETELY THROUGH CONCRETE BUNKER WALL
PE4.1
FEB 2017
FEB 2017
.
TENON AT TOP OF POLE SLIP FITTER BY FIXTURE
MANUFACTURER
2 x LED LUMINAIRES C/W

MOUNTING ARMS &
HARDWARE. SEE SPEC
6120
DIRECT BURIED ROUND

TAPERED CONCRETE POLE
INLINE FUSES & HANDHOLE

C/W HEAVY DUTY STEEL
COVER
TOPSOIL AND SEED

760 MIN
RIGID PVC. CSA DB2

1500
CONDUIT. NOTE: 25mm IS

MAX. SIZE TO FIT UP INTO
POLE APERTURE
STONEDUST BACKFILL,
COMPACTED TO 98%
PROCTOR DENSITY
NOTES:

2. ALTERNATE FIXTURES MAY BE SUBMITTED FOR REVIEW
3. NEW 120V OR 240V, 2 x LED LIGHT STANDARD (TYP. OF 6)
4. CONCRETE POLE (UTILITIES STRUCTURES HA-250-A-1PG-30 (STEEL TENON) OR EQUIVALENT)
20 FEET ABOVE FINISH GRADE
5. LIGHT FIXTURE OPTIONS:
- GLEON-AE-10LED-E1 OR EQUIVALENT

TYPICAL DIRECT BURIED POLE REV: FEB 2017
DETAIL - OUTDOOR RINK DWG No:
PE6
TENON AT TOP OF POLE SLIP FITTER BY FIXTURE
MANUFACTURER
1 x LED LUMINAIRES C/W

MOUNTING ARMS & HARDWARE.
SEE SPEC
5358
DIRECT BURIED ROUND

TAPERED CONCRETE POLE
INLINE FUSES & HANDHOLE

C/W HEAVY DUTY STEEL COVER
TOPSOIL AND SEED

760 MIN
RIGID PVC. CSA DB2

CONDUIT. NOTE: 25mm IS
1500
MAX. SIZE TO FIT UP INTO

POLE APERTURE
STONEDUST BACKFILL,
COMPACTED TO 98%
PROCTOR DENSITY
NOTES:

2. NEW 120V OR 240V, 1 x LED LIGHT STANDARD. (TYPE 'A' 35W COOPER TLM-B01-LED-E01-SL3) AND CONCRETE POLE
(UTILITIES STRUCTURES HA-225-A-1PG-30 (STEEL TENON) OR EQUIVALENT) 17 1 2 FEET ABOVE FINISH GRADE
3. ALTERNATE FIXTURES MAY BE SUBMITTED FOR REVIEW
4. PHOTOMETRICS: THE QUALITY AND QUANTITY OF LIGHT WILL MEET THE ILLUMINATION ENGINEERING SOCIETY (IES)
STANDARDS FOR PARK PATHWAYS. SPECIFICALLY, THE LIGHT SOURCE WILL BE OF SUFFICIENT DESIGN TO ENSURE MIN
5-LUX COVERAGE ALONG THE ENTIRE LENGTH OF THE PATHWAY AND A UNIFORMITY LEVEL RATIO OF 5:1. ALL PARK AND
PATHWAYS ADJACENT TO RESIDENTIAL PROPERTIES ARE TO USE LIGHT FIXTURES THAT EMPLOY CURVILINEAR CUT-OFF

TYPICAL DIRECT BURIED POLE REV: FEB 2017
DETAIL - PATHWAY DWG No: PE7
STREET PARK FURNITURE STANDARD DETAIL DRAWINGS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SF1 City of Ottawa Standard Bench Detail

SF2 Accessible Concrete Pad for Benches
SF3 Concrete Pad for Benches
SF4 City of Ottawa Standard Waste Receptacle
SF5 Waste Receptacle Concrete Base
SF6 City of Ottawa Standard Bike Rack
SF7 Concrete Pad for City of Ottawa Standard Bike Rack
SF8 Standard Gazebo
SF9 Post and Ring Bike Rack
Standard Detail Drawing\Street Park Furniture Table – March 1, 2016

SIGNAGE STANDARD DETAIL DRAWINGS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SI1 F3 - Local Parks – Single Post Sign – Assembly

SI2 F4 - Local Parks – Single Post Sing – Parts Detail
SI3 F5 - Local Parks – Two-Post Small General Assembly
SI4 F6 - Local Parks – Two-Post Large General Assembly
SI5 F7 - Local Parks – Two-Post Section Detail
SI6 F8 - Regional Post and Panel Sign General Assembly
SI7 F9 - Regional Post and Panel Sign Section
SI8 F10 - Regional Concrete Base Sign Assembly
SI9 F11 - Precast Concrete Base
SI10 F12 - Regional Concrete Base Sign – Sign Box
SI11 G2 - Local Parks – Single Post Graphics
SI12 G3 - Local Parks – Two-Post – Small - Graphics
SI13 G4 - Local Parks – Two-Post Large – Graphics
SI14 G5 - Regional – Two-Post Large – Graphics
SI15 G6 - Regional – Concrete Base – Graphics
SI16 S2 - Local Parks – single Post Sign – Installation
SI17 S3 - Local Parks – Post and Panel Sign – Installation
SI18 S4 - Regional – Post and Panel Sign Installation
SI19 TS – 01 - Two-Post Sign – Small
SI20 TS – 02 - Two-Post Sign – Large
SI21 TS – 03 - One-Post Angled Interpretive Sign
SI22 TS – 04 - Two-Post angle Interpretive Sign
SI23 TS – 05 - One-Post Directional – Regulatory Sign
SI24 TS – 06 - Typical Panel Attachment Detail – Trail Signage
SI25 TS – 07 - Typical Footing Bracket – Trail Signage
SI26 TS – 08 - One-Post Interpretive – Panel Bracket
SI27 TS – 09 - Two-Post Interpretive – Panel Bracket
SI28 TS – 10 - Typical Footing Detail – Trail Signage
SI29 TS – 11 - Graphic Spec. – Two-Post Sign – Narrow – Trail Signage
SI30 TS – 12 - Graphic Spec. – Two-Post Sign – Wide – Trail Siagnage
SI31 TS – 13 - Graphic Spec. – Angled Interpretation – Single Post
SI32 TS – 14 - Graphic Spec. – Angled Interpretation – Two Post
SI33 TS – 15 - Graphic Spec. – One Post Regulatory, Directional &
Interpretive Signs
SI36 Bulletin Board Assembly
SI37 Bulletin Board General Assembly
SI38 Bulletin Board Installation
SI39 Park Regulatory Sign
Standard Detail Drawing\Signage Table – March 1, 2016

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
18" DIA CONCRETE
FILLED SONO TUBE 8 x 8 EASTERN
WHITE CEDAR
POSTS
1'-6 5'-0 1'-6
4'-0
18" DIA CONCRETE
3'-0
A FILLED SONO TUBE A
25MPa CONCRETE WITH
7% AIR ENTRAINMENT
PLAN VIEW
8'-0
TITLE:
THREE 2" x 6" x 7'-6" PRESSURE TREATED S.P.F BOARDS INSTALLED BEHIND
ALUMINUM PANEL AND ATTACHED TO POST TO PROVIDE STABILITY.
NOTES:
1. GRAPHICS and TEXT
8'-0
8'-0
8 x 8 EASTERN · PANEL SIZE: 4' HIGH x 8' WIDE
WHITE CEDAR POSTS · WHITE BACKGROUND (BOTH SIDES AND EDGES) WITH CITY OF OTTAWA
CORPORATE COLOURS: PMS 280 (blue) AND PMS 3278 (green)
16'-0
PROVIDE POSITIVE ·· BLUE HEADER WITH WHITE "OTTAWA.CA" TEXT (FRUTIGER
DRAINAGE AT TOP CONDENSED) AND GREEN/BLUE CITY LOGO
OF CONCRETE ·· RULES TEXT: FRUTIGER CONDENSED, BLACK
·· TEXT LAYOUT: ENGLISH ON LEFT SIDE (4' x 4"); FRENCH ON RIGHT
SIDE (4' x 4')
MIN 1" 2. DESIGN LAYOUT AND PRINT QUALITY
· SIGN DESIGN, LAYOUT AND LOCATION TO BE APPROVED AND SIGNED
OFF BY CITY OF OTTAWA PRIOR TO INSTALLATION
· TEXT AND GRAPHICS TO BE DIGITALLY PRODUCED WITH UV PAINT
3. MATERIALS
· ONE (1) 4' x 8' x 1 8" THICK ALUMINUM PANEL WITH DIGITAL 3M VEHICLE
PARK REGULATORY SIGN

GRADE GRAPHIC ANTI-VANDAL FILM OR APPROVED EQUIVALENT.
· TWO (2) 8" x 8" x 16" EASTERN WHITE CEDAR POSTS
4. INSTALLATION
5'-0
· PANEL TO BE ATTACHED TO EACH POST WITH MINIMUM TWO (2) ZINC
6'-0
PLATED 1 2" x 9" CARRIAGE BOLTS, NUTS AND WASHERS

· POSTS TO BE LOCATED 18" FROM OUTSIDE EDGE OF PANEL AND 12"
FROM TOP OF PANEL
· POSTS TO BE INSTALLED IN CONCRETE FILLED 18" DIA SONO TUBES, TO
A MINIMUM DEPTH OF 6'
REV:
· BOTTOM OF SIGN PANEL TO BE A MINIMUM 8' ABOVE FINISHED GRADE
DATE:
DWG No:
· ENSURE SIGN IS LEVEL HORIZONTALLY AND VERTICALLY
A-A
SI39
JAN 2017
JAN 2016
SPORTSFIELD AND RINK STANDARD DETAIL DRAWINGS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SR1 Outdoor Rink Storage (Bunker)

SR2 Soccer Field Layout Mini Field
SR3 Soccer Field Layout Full-Size
SR4 Full-Size and Mini-Field Soccer Goal
SR5 Football Field Layout
SR6 Standard Ultimate Frisbee Field Layout
SR7 Soccer Field Layout Intermediate Size
SR8 Intermediate Soccer Goal
SR9 Senior Softball (16 Yrs and Over) Field Layout
SR10 Senior Softball (16 Yrs and Over) Infield and Backstop Layout
SR11 Junior Softball (Under 16 Yrs) Field Layout
SR12 Junior Softball (Under 16 Yrs) Infield and Backstop Layout
SR13 Senior Baseball (Hardball) (16 Yrs and Over) Field Layout
SR14 Senior Baseball (Hardball) (16 Yrs and Over) Infield and Backstop
Layout
SR15 Junior Baseball (Hardball) (Under 16 Yrs) Field Layout
SR16 Junior Baseball (Hardball) (Under 16 Yrs) Infield and Backstop
Layout
SR17 Softball Backstop: Section ‘A’ and Front Elevation
SR18 Softball Backstop: Plan View and Footing Detail
SR19 Baseball Backstop: Plan View and Details
SR20 Baseball Backstop: Section ‘A’
SR21 Baseball Dugout Plan
SR22 Baseball Dugout Plan Front and Side Elevation
SR23 Foul Line Post Detail
SR24 Baseball Outfield and Line Fence
SR25 T-Ball Field Layout
SR26 T-Ball Backstop
SR27 Basketball Court (Full Size)
SR28 Basketball Key
SR29 Tennis Court Layout
SR30 Tennis Court Fencing and Gate
SR31 Tennis Court Surface Section
SR32 Volleyball Court Layout
SR33 Shuffleboard Layout
SR34 Puddle Surface Layout
SR35 Community Ice Surfaces Layout ‘Double Puddle’
SR36 Community Rink Layout
SR37 Sports Field Spectators Bleachers
SR38 Volleyball Court Section
Standard Detail Drawing\Sportsfield and Rink Table – March 02, 2015

2000 STONEDUST EXTENT OF BURIED
APRON AT DOORS RIGID INSULATION AND
12.00
LIMIT OF DISTURBANCE 304.80mm
3048
7.00 9.00
1900 970 8.00
1000
177.80mm 228.60mm
203.20mm
914 x 2032 x 44mm 150mm DIA. HOLE
THICK INSULATED FOR CONDUIT
HOLLOW METAL DOOR
SEE NOTE 1
8.00
150mm DIA. HOLE 203.20mm
APPROX.
1
FOR FLOOR DRAIN
10" / 254mm
3048
TITLE:
A A
RADIUS
1828
STUD WALL FILLED WITH 7.00
177.80mm
RIGID INSULATION
PLYWOOD BOTH SIDES
150mm DIA. HOLE
FOR CONDUIT HOSE HANGER DETAIL
914 x 2032 x 44mm 1000 EXTENT OF BURIED

RIGID INSULATION AND
1000
THICK INSULATED
HOLLOW METAL DOOR LIMIT OF DISTURBANCE
EXTENT OF BURIED
RIGID INSULATION AND
LIMIT OF DISTURBANCE
PLAN VIEW
NOTES:
1/3 HEATED HOSE
1. ALL MEASUREMENTS ARE IN MILLIMETRES UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED COMPARTMENT
2. GLUE RIGID INSULATION TO CONCRETE WALLS AND CEILING; COVER 2/3 UNHEATED
WITH PLYWOOD AND FASTEN THROUGH TO EXTERIOR WALL DOOR STORAGE
SEE NOTE 1
3. FIT PVC DRAIN CAP OVER PIPE END, FLUSH WITH FLOOR LOCATION
4. ELECTRICAL PANEL, HEATER, ETC. BY OTHERS (N.I.C.) LIMIT OF
5. HOSE HANGER TO BE MADE OF STAINLESS STEEL WELDED 2000 APRON HOSE HANGER DISTURBANCE
CONSTRUCTION. BRACKET TO BE 1/8" THICK STEEL AND RACK TO BE AT DOORS (SEE NOTE 4) 1000 APRON (3 SIDES)
1/4" THICK STEEL. SIZE OF BRACKET AND RACK TO MATCH 100 EXPOSED
DIMENSIONS IN THE DETAIL ON THIS SHEET. CONTRACTOR TO SEE NOTE 2 (3 SIDES)
1500
PROVIDE SHOP DRAWINGS BEFORE FABRICATING / INSTALLING.

DOOR
BELOW
6. SEE PE5 FOR ELECTRICAL FIT-UP AND SCHEMATIC THRESHOLD

25
3% 200 FLOOR
EXISTING GRADE EXISTING GRADE
100
OUTDOOR RINK STORAGE (BUNKER)

300mm GRANULAR 'A' 250
50
900
1500
GRANULAR 'A' TOPPED COMPACTED SUBGRADE

WITH STONEDUST CAP; 50mm RIGID
100mm PERFORATED DRAIN PIPE
REV:
MEET AND MATCH INSULATION
DATE:
EXISTING GRADE PIPE FILLED WITH 19mm GRAVEL
DWG No:
3 x 38mm CONDUITS
GEOTEXTILE
300
1 600
SECTION A - A
SR1
FEB 2013
JAN 2017
10000 37500 5000
4877
FIELD ORIENTATION
5
4 84
R PENALTY KICK
MARK
5
84
R4
55000
HALF-WAY LINE
MINIMUM SETBACK TO
PROPERTY LINES, PLANTING
AND OTHER FACILITIES
21324
PLAYOUT LINES
PENALTY AREA
GOAL AREA
GOAL POSTS
5815 9695
OPTIONAL SOCCER GOAL

SCREEN. 2438mm HIGH
ON EACH SIDE WITH
4876mm HIGH PANELS
CENTERED BEHIND
PENALTY AREA AND GOAL.
REFER TO DETAIL SR39
NOTES:

2. PLAYOUT AREA SHOULD HAVE A MAXIMUM GRADE OF 2.5%
3. SETBACK AREA SHOULD HAVE A MAXIMUM GRADE OF 4.0%
SOCCER FIELD LAYOUT - MINI FIELD REV: JAN 2017
DWG No:
SR2
10000 60000 5000
7315
FIELD ORIENTATION
5
83
R7
PENALTY
KICK MARK
5
83
R7
100000
HALF-WAY LINE MINIMUM

SETBACK TO
PROPERTY LINES,
PLANTING AND
OTHER FACILITIES
34485
PLAYOUT LINES
PENALTY AREA
GOAL AREA
9403 15678
GOAL POSTS OPTIONAL SOCCER GOAL

SCREEN. 2438mm HIGH ON
EACH SIDE WITH 4876mm
HIGH PANELS CENTERED
BEHIND PENALTY AREA
AND GOAL.
NOTES: REFER TO DETAIL SR39

SOCCER FIELD LAYOUT - FULL SIZE REV: JAN 2017
DWG No:
SR3
.
.
.
10000 42000 - 55000 5000
5490
FIELD ORIENTATION
5
83
R7
60000 - 75000
HALF-WAY LINE MINIMUM SETBACK

TO PROPERTY LINES,
PLANTING AND
OTHER FACILITIES
PLAYOUT LINES
PENALTY AREA
GOAL AREA
GOAL POSTS OPTIONAL SOCCER GOAL

SCREEN. 2438mm HIGH ON
EACH SIDE WITH 4876mm
HIGH PANELS CENTERED
BEHIND PENALTY AREA
AND GOAL.
NOTES: REFER TO DETAIL SR39


SOCCER FIELD LAYOUT REV: JAN 2017
INTERMEDIATE SIZE DWG No:
SR7
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
C.L.
2000
VARIES
1220
BACKBOARD AND POST
4572
PAINTED LINES 50mm WIDE
WHITE BASKETBALL COURT
LINES AS INDICATED
14000
3 POINT FOUL LINE
3660 DIA
32000
28000
EDGE OF ASPHALT /
LOCATION OF FENCE
(IF DESIRED)
3660 DIA (OUTSIDE)
R1
80 ASPHALT BASKETBALL COURT
0
FINISHED GRADE ON COURT
TO HAVE A 1% CROSS SLOPE.
BACKFILL ALL COURT EDGES
WITH TOPSOIL TO A MAX 5%
SLOPE AND SOD
R60
00
BASKETBALL BACKBOARD AND

HOOP TO BE BBIG-02 SYSTEM
WITH BUGG GOAL AS SUPPLIED
2000
1800 1800 BY SPORT SYSTEMS CANADA INC.

OR APPROVED EQUIVALENT
2000 15000 2000
1500 6000 6000 1500
9500
19000
NOTES:

2. LINE PAINTING TO BE FLINTKOTE FLINTGUARD 620-20 WHITE TRAFFIC COATING. COURT MARKING ARE
TO INSIDE OF PAINTLINES, UNLESS INDICATED OTHERWISE, PAINTED LINES TO BE 50mm WIDE
3. OVERALL CROSS SLOPE TO BE A MINIMUM 1.5%
4. HL3 FINE ASPHALT WITH MIN. 300MM GRANULAR 'A' COMPACTED BASE AND FILTER CLOTH, IF REQUIRED
5. RIM HEIGHT 3048 (10') AND RIM TYPE TO BE A HEAVY DUTY DOUBLE RING RIM
6. FOOTING DEPTH FOR NET POST 1500 MINIMUM
BASKETBALL COURT (FULL SIZE) REV: FEB 2017
DWG No:
SR27
700 1800 1800 700
300
1200
BASKETBALL BACKBOARD
AND HOOP TO BE BBIG-02
SYSTEM WITH BUGG GOAL
AS SUPPLIED BY SPORT
SYSTEMS CANADA INC.
(1-877-600-4667) OR
APPROVED EQUIVALENT
4572
ASPHALT PAD
8900
50mm WIDE
PAINTED WHITE LINES
R1
80
0
R1800.0000
R=325mm TYP
5000
NOTES:

2. LINE PAINTING TO BE FLINTKOTE FLINTGUARD 620-20 WHITE TRAFFIC COATING. COURT MARKING ARE TO
INSIDE OF PAINTLINES, UNLESS INDICATED OTHERWISE, PAINTED LINES TO BE 50mm WIDE
3. OVERALL CROSS SLOPE TO BE A MINIMUM 1.5%
4. HL3 FINE ASPHALT WITH MIN. 300MM GRANULAR 'A' COMPACTED BASE AND FILTER CLOTH, IF REQUIRED
5. RIM HEIGHT 3048 (10') AND RIM TYPE TO BE A HEAVY DUTY DOUBLE RING RIM
6. FOOTING DEPTH FOR NET POST 1500 MINIMUM
BASKETBALL KEY REV: FEB 2017
DWG No:
SR28
31194
2744 10973 3760 10973 2744
6610
1372 4115 4115 1372

5486
6401
914
36994
23774
ASPHALT
NOTES:

2. COURT LINES TO BE PAINTED WHITE (2") 50mm WIDE
3. NET POST AND INSTALLATION AS APPROVED BY CITY OF OTTAWA
4. CENTER OF NET TO BE ANCHOURED TO COURT SURFACE FACILITY
5. FOR SURFACE SECTION AND NET POSTS, REFER TO SR31 ORIENTATION
6. COURT SURFACE TO BE BLUE. APRON SURFACE TO BE GREEN. FINAL COLOUR
TO BE APPROVED BY CITY OF OTTAWA BEFORE INSTALLATION
TENNIS COURT LAYOUT REV: FEB 2017
DWG No:
SR29
.
300 150
TENNIS COURT FENCE 3050 HIGH, 90 O.D.

TERMINAL OR 60 O.D. LINE POST
CHAIN LINK FABRIC
BOTTOM RAIL
TENNIS COURT SURFACE -SLOPE 1.0%
50-HL3 FINE SURFACE COURSE

300-GRANULAR 'A'
COMPACTED TO100% S.P.D.
COURT COLOUR SURFACING SYSTEM
ADJACENT SURFACE 38
BELOW COURT SURFACE
MIN 2%
25
50
MIN
300
1500
1500
CONCRETE
FOOTING
SUBGRADE COMPACTED
TO 98% S.P.D.
100 GEOTEXTILE
MIN
FENCE POST CONCRETE FOOTING TOP
356 MIN. 80 BELOW FINISHED COURT
SURFACE
NOTE:

3. APPROVED NON-WOVEN CLASS 1 GEOTEXTILE AS PER MS-22.15 WHEN WARRANTED
BY SOIL CONDITION, SUBJECT TO APPROVAL BY THE CONTRACT ADMINISTRATOR
5. COURT SURFACE TO BE U.S. OPEN BLUE. APRON SURFACE TO BE U.S. OPEN GREEN.
FINAL COLOUR TO BE APPROVED BY CITY OF OTTAWA BEFORE INSTALLATION
TENNIS COURT SURFACE SECTION REV: JAN 2017
DWG No:
SR31
.
.
.
.
.
100MM DIA.
100MM DIA. PERFORATED
GALVANIZED STEEL
DRAINAGE PIPE WITH FILTER SPADE CUT EDGE
PIPE FOR NET POLE/
SOCK IN SAND AREA EDGES TO BE CUT
STANDARD
SAND (CLEANED) AS PER STRAIGHT AND CLEAN
CONCRETE FOOTING APPROVED CITY GRAIN SIZE FOR ADJACENT
W. ROUNDED TOP DISTRIBUTION SPECIFICATION. SURFACE, REFER TO
400MM MIN. DEPTH AT EDGE TO LAYOUT
450MM DEPTH AT DRAIN
TITLE:
MIN 475
MIN 400
75
MIN
150
1000
150
1500
FILTER FABRIC
150MM GRANULAR
'A' BASE
300x300 CONCRETE BASE
VOLLEYBALL COURT SECTION

10mm x 300mm GALVANIZED
CONCRETE ANCHOR w. NUT
COMPACTED SUBGRADE,
NOTE:
1. ALL MEASUREMENTS ARE IN MILLIMETRES UNLESS STATED OTHERWISE.
2. NET POLE/ STANDARD TO MEASURE 3m ABOVE GRADE.
REV:
DATE:
DWG No:
SR38
JAN 2015
90 O.D. TERMINAL POSTS
INSTALLED AT ALL ENDS
43 O.D. TOP RAIL RANDOM LENGTHS

178 LINE COUPLINGS
CHAIN LINK FABRIC BLACK VINYL COATED
3050 MAX.
3050 MAX
60 O.D. LINE POSTS
4876
43 O.D. MID RAIL
STRETCHER BAR BANDS

250 O.C. 6 x 19 MINIMUM
43 O.D. INTERMEDIATE RAILS
2438
STRETCHER BAR
5X19 MINIMUM
43 O.D. BOTTOM RAIL
1500
POURED DOMED
CONCRETE FOOTINGS
MAXIMUM 25 MINIMUM 80 BELOW
CLEARANCE FINISHED GRADE
NOTES:
2. CHAIN LINK FENCE FABRIC TO BE BLACK VINYL COATED, 50 WOVEN MESH, 6 GAUGE O.D. OF 9 GAUGE
BOTTOM RAIL WITH KNUCKLED FASTENERS
3. FINISH TO BE BLACK GLOSS ENAMEL BY POWDER COAT APPLICATION. PRIOR TO POWDER COATING,
ALL SURFACES TO BE CHEMICALLY CLEANED AND TREATED. POWDER COATING MUST BE A POLYESTER
2000 SERIES APPLIED IN A THICKNESS OF 4-5 MILS BY ELECTROSTATIC COAT AND OVEN CURED TO A
SMOOTH AND EVEN SURFACE
4. ALL FENCE POSTS & RAILS TO BE SCHEDULE '40' PIPE
5. NO PLASTIC FITTINGS ARE TO BE USED
SOCCER GOAL SCREEN REV: JAN 2017
DWG No:
SR39

2017standard Tender Documents For Unit Price Contracts Vol2

Cargado por

Información del documento

Título original

Derechos de autor

Formatos disponibles

Compartir este documento

Compartir o incrustar documentos

Opciones para compartir

¿Le pareció útil este documento?

¿Este contenido es inapropiado?

Copyright:

Formatos disponibles

2017standard Tender Documents For Unit Price Contracts Vol2

Cargado por

Copyright:

Formatos disponibles

Infrastructure Services Department

Standard Tender Documents

Volume No. 2 of 3: Material Specifications

Fourteenth Edition, March 1, 2017

All inquiries regarding suggestions, request or comments should be directed to:

Jo-anne Moore, P. Eng.

For purchasing/revision inquiries please email standardssection@ottawa.ca

Introduction\Notice – March 1, 2017

Mat Specifications\Introduction \Introduction – March 31, 2003

Standard Detail Drawings

\Mat Specification\Introduction\Introduction – March 31, 2003 i

STANDARD DETAIL DRAWINGS

\Mat Specification\Introduction\Table of Contents - Vol. 2 – March 31, 2014

MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS - TABLE OF CONTENTS

MW-10.1 Product Application Procedure

13 Cement and Concrete

MW-13.1 Valve Boxes and Chambers

MW-18.1 Watermain Pipe

MW-19.2 Tracing Wire

MS-13.1 Maintenance Holes and Catch Basins

MS-14.1 Miscellaneous Metals

18 Pipes and Associated Drainage Items

MS-18.1 Sewer Pipe

\Mat. Specifications\Introduction\Table of Content for Mat. Spec – March 1, 2017

MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS - TABLE OF CONTENTS

MS-22.1 Adjustment Units/Rings

MT-24.1 Underground Traffic Control Plant

LAS0001 Photoelectric Controllers

\Mat. Specifications\Introduction\Table of Content for Mat. Spec – March 1, 2017

\Mat Specifications\Watermain Mat Specifications\Title – Watermain.doc – March 1, 2002

WATERMAIN TABLE OF CONTENTS

MW-10.1 Product Application Procedure

13 CEMENT AND CONCRETE

MW-13.1 Valve Boxes and Chambers

MW-18.1 Watermain Pipe

MW-19.2 Tracing Wire

\Mat Specifications\Watermain Mat Specifications – Table of Content.docx –

Date: March 2017

10.1.1.1 This specification includes general material requirements,

10.1.2.1 Materials/products incorporated into the proposed project

10.1.2.2 Substitution or alterations from the approved lists shall

10.1.2.3 Upon request of the Contract Administrator, the Contractor

10.1.3 PRODUCT CERTIFICATION

10.1.3.1 If a product is required to be certified to a Canadian

10.1.3.2 If a product is required to be certified to a foreign standards,

10.1.3.3 Where certification of a product is required, certification

10.1.3.4 Accredited testing agencies offering free failure investigation

Mat Specification\Sewer Mat Specifications\MW-10.1.doc – March 1, 2017

Date: March 2017

10.1.3.5 Manufacturers with ISO 9000 certification are preferred.

10.1.3.6 All chemicals and materials used in the alteration or

10.1.3.7 For a product approval to remain in place the firm certifying

10.1.4 PRODUCT APPLICATION PROCESS

10.1.4.1 Product representatives who wish to have their products

10.1.4.2 All products shall conform to the material specifications

10.1.4.3 Submission by the Applicant

A submission must be sent to the address below, with a

Mat Specification\Sewer Mat Specifications\MW-10.1.doc – March 1, 2017

Date: March 2017

10.1.4.4 The submission shall include:

 Product name and reference number;

10.1.4.5 Documentation Review by Staff

 Each submission will be assigned an approval file